Avid INEWS V3.3 Setup And Configuration Guide I News 3.3 Manual SCG

User Manual: avid iNews - 3.3 - Setup and Configuration Manual Free User Guide for Avid iNews Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 680 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Avid iNEWS Setup and Configuration Guide

Avid® iNEWS®

Setup and Configuration Guide

Legal Notices

Product specifications are subject to change without notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Avid Technology,

Inc.

The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement. You can obtain a copy of that license by

visiting Avid's Web site at www.avid.com. The terms of that license are also available in the product in the same directory as

the software. The software may not be reverse assembled and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the

license agreement. It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the license

agreement.

Avid products or portions thereof are protected by one or more of the following United States Patents: 4,970,663; 5,267,351;

5,309,528; 5,355,450; 5,396,594; 5,440,348; 5,467,288; 5,513,375; 5,528,310; 5,557,423; 5,577,190; 5,584,006; 5,640,601;

5,644,364; 5,654,737; 5,715,018; 5,719,570; 5,724,605; 5,726,717; 5,729,673; 5,745,637; 5,752,029; 5,754,851; 5,799,150;

5,812,216; 5,828,678; 5,842,014; 5,852,435; 5,999,406; 6,038,573; 6,061,758; 6,141,007; 6,211,869; 6,532,043; 6,546,190;

6,596,031; 6,636,869; 6,747,705; 6,763,523; 6,766,357; 6,813,622; 6,847,373; 7,081,900; RE40,107; 7,403,561; 7,433,519;

D352,278; D372,478; D373,778; D392,267; D392,268; D392,269; D395,291; D396,853; D398,912.

Other patents are pending.

This document is protected under copyright law. An authorized licensee of Avid iNEWS Command may reproduce this

publication for the licensee’s own use in learning how to use the software. This document may not be reproduced or

distributed, in whole or in part, for commercial purposes, such as selling copies of this document or providing support or

educational services to others. This document is supplied as a guide for Avid iNEWS Command. Reasonable care has been

taken in preparing the information it contains. However, this document may contain omissions, technical inaccuracies, or

typographical errors. Avid Technology, Inc. does not accept responsibility of any kind for customers’ losses due to the use of

this document. Product specifications are subject to change without notice.

The following disclaimer is required by Apple Computer, Inc.:

APPLE COMPUTER, INC. MAKES NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING

THIS PRODUCT, INCLUDING WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO ITS MERCHANTABILITY OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY SOME STATES. THE

ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY PROVIDES YOU WITH SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS.

THERE MAY BE OTHER RIGHTS THAT YOU MAY HAVE WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.

The following disclaimer is required by Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics, Inc. for the use of their TIFF library:

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software [i.e., the TIFF library] and its documentation for any purpose

is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of

the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any

advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon

Graphics.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS” AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR

OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,

DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

The following disclaimer is required by the Independent JPEG Group:

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

This Software may contain components licensed under the following conditions:

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph

are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such

distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the

University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written

permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby

granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission

notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby

granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission

notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that

the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in

supporting documentation, and that the name of Daniel Dardailler not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to

distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. Daniel Dardailler makes no representations about the

suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this

entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all

copies of the supporting documentation for such software.

THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR,

NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR AT&T MAKES ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE

MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

The following disclaimer is required by Nexidia Inc.:

Manufactured under license from the Georgia Tech Research Corporation, U.S.A. Patent Pending.

The following disclaimer is required by Paradigm Matrix:

Portions of this software licensed from Paradigm Matrix.

The following disclaimer is required by Ray Sauers Associates, Inc.:

“Install-It” is licensed from Ray Sauers Associates, Inc. End-User is prohibited from taking any action to derive a source code

equivalent of “Install-It,” including by reverse assembly or reverse compilation, Ray Sauers Associates, Inc. shall in no event be

liable for any damages resulting from reseller’s failure to perform reseller’s obligation; or any damages arising from use or

operation of reseller’s products or the software; or any other damages, including but not limited to, incidental, direct, indirect,

special or consequential Damages including lost profits, or damages resulting from loss of use or inability to use reseller’s

products or the software for any reason including copyright or patent infringement, or lost data, even if Ray Sauers Associates

has been advised, knew or should have known of the possibility of such damages.

The following disclaimer is required by Videomedia, Inc.:

“Videomedia, Inc. makes no warranties whatsoever, either express or implied, regarding this product, including warranties with

respect to its merchantability or its fitness for any particular purpose.”

“This software contains V-LAN ver. 3.0 Command Protocols which communicate with V-LAN ver. 3.0 products developed by

Videomedia, Inc. and V-LAN ver. 3.0 compatible products developed by third parties under license from Videomedia, Inc. Use

of this software will allow “frame accurate” editing control of applicable videotape recorder decks, videodisc recorders/players

and the like.”

The following disclaimer is required by Altura Software, Inc. for the use of its Mac2Win software and Sample

Source Code:

The following disclaimer is required by Ultimatte Corporation:

Certain real-time compositing capabilities are provided under a license of such technology from Ultimatte Corporation and are

subject to copyright protection.

The following disclaimer is required by 3Prong.com Inc.:

Certain waveform and vector monitoring capabilities are provided under a license from 3Prong.com Inc.

The following disclaimer is required by Interplay Entertainment Corp.:

The “Interplay” name is used with the permission of Interplay Entertainment Corp., which bears no responsibility for Avid

products.

This product includes portions of the Alloy Look & Feel software from Incors GmbH.

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).

This product may include the JCifs library, for which the following notice applies:

Party Software directory on the installation CD.

Avid Interplay contains components licensed from LavanTech. These components may only be used as part of and in

connection with Avid Interplay.

Attn. Government User(s). Restricted Rights Legend

U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. This Software and its documentation are “commercial computer software” or

“commercial computer software documentation.” In the event that such Software or documentation is acquired by or on behalf

of a unit or agency of the U.S. Government, all rights with respect to this Software and documentation are subject to the terms

of the License Agreement, pursuant to FAR §12.212(a) and/or DFARS §227.7202-1(a), as applicable.

Trademarks

003, 192 Digital I/O, 192XD I/O, 888 I/O, Adrenaline, AirPlay, AirSPACE, AirSPACE HD, AirSpeed, ALEX, Alienbrain, AniMatte,

AudioMarket, AudioPages, AudioSuite, AudioVision, AutoSync, Avid, Avid Advanced Response, Avid DNA, Avid DNxcel,

Avid DNxHD, AVIDdrive, Avid DS Assist Station, Avid EditStar, Avid Learning Excellerator, Avid Liquid,

Avid Liquid Chrome Xe, Avid MEDIArray, Avid Mojo, AvidNet, AvidNetwork, Avid NewStar, Avid Remote Response,

AVIDstripe, Avid Unity, Avid Unity ISIS, Avid VideoRAID, Avid Xpress, AVoption, AVX, Beauty Without The Bandwidth,

Blacktooth, Boom, C|24, CamCutter, CaptureManager, ChromaCurve, ChromaWheel, Command|24, Conectiv, CountDown,

DAE, Dazzle, Dazzle Digital Video Creator, Deko, DekoCast, D-Fi, D-fx, DigiDelivery, Digidesign, Digidesign Audio Engine,

Digidesign Intelligent Noise Reduction, DigiDrive, DigiLink, DigiMeter, DigiSerial, Digital Nonlinear Accelerator, DigiTranslator,

DINR, DNxchange, do more, DVD Complete, D-Verb, Eleven, Equinox, EveryPhase, ExpertRender, Fastbreak, Fast Track,

FieldPak, Film Composer, FilmScribe, Flexevent, FluidMotion, FXDeko, G7, G-Rack, HD Core, HD Process, HDPack,

Hollywood DV-Bridge, Hybrid, HyperControl, HyperSPACE, HyperSPACE HDCAM, IllusionFX, Image Independence, iNEWS,

iNEWS Assign, iNEWS ControlAir, Instantwrite, Instinct, Intelli-sat Broadcasting Recording Manager, Intelli-Sat, InterFX,

Interplay, inTONE, Intraframe, iS9, iS18, iS23, iS36, ISIS, IsoSync, KeyRig, KeyStudio, LaunchPad, LeaderPlus, Lightning,

ListSync, Lo-Fi, Magic Mask, Make Anything Hollywood, make manage move | media, Marquee, M-Audio, M-Audio Micro,

Maxim, Mbox, MCXpress, Media Browse, Media Composer, MediaDock, MediaDock Shuttle, Media Fusion, Media Illusion,

MediaLog, Media Reader, Media Recorder, MEDIArray, MediaShare, MediaStream, Media Suite, Meridien, MetaFuze,

MetaSync, MicroTrack, Midiman, MissionControl, Mix Rack, MixLab, Moviebox, Moviestar, NaturalMatch, Nearchive,

NetReview, NewsCutter, Nitris, NRV-10 interFX, Octane, OMF, OMF Interchange, OMM, OnDVD, Open Media Framework,

Open Media Management, Palladium, Pinnacle, Pinnacle DistanTV, Pinnacle Geniebox, Pinnacle HomeMusic,

Pinnacle MediaSuite, Pinnacle Mobile Media, Pinnacle PCTV, Pinnacle PCTV HD Ultimate Stick, Pinnacle PCTV Nano Stick,

Pinnacle PCTV To Go, Pinnacle Scorefitter, Pinnacle Studio, Pinnacle Studio MovieBoard, Pinnacle Systems, Pinnacle

VideoSpin, ProEncode, ProServices, ProSessions, Pro Tools, QuietDrive, Recti-Fi, Reel Tape Delay, Reel Tape Flanger,

Reel Tape Saturation, RetroLoop, rS9, rS18, Salesview, Sci-Fi, Scorch, Scorefitter, ScriptSync,

SecureProductionEnvironment, Session, Show Center, Sibelius, SIDON, Soft SampleCell, Soft-Clip Limiter,

Sound Designer II, SPACE, SPACEShift, SpectraGraph, SpectraMatte, Starplay, SteadyGlide, Streamfactory, Streamgenie,

StreamRAID, Strike, Structure, Studiophile, SubCap, Sundance Digital, Sundance, Symphony, SYNC HD, SynchroScience,

SynchroScope, Syntax, Targa, TDM FlexCable, Thunder, Titan, Titansync, TL Aggro, TL AutoPan, TL Drum Rehab,

TL Everyphase, TL Fauxlder, TL In Tune, TL MasterMeter, TL Metro, TL Space, TL Utilities, Torq, Torq Xponent, Transfuser,

Trigger Finger, Trillium Lane Labs, TruTouch, UnityRAID, Vari-Fi, Velvet, Venom, VideoRAID, Video Slave Driver, VideoSPACE,

VideoSpin, Vortx, Xdeck, X-Form, Xmon, Xponent, X-Session, and X-Session Pro are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Avid Technology, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

Footage

Arri — Courtesy of Arri/Fauer — John Fauer, Inc.

Bell South “Anticipation” — Courtesy of Two Headed Monster — Tucker/Wayne Atlanta/GMS.

Canyonlands — Courtesy of the National Park Service/Department of the Interior.

Eco Challenge Morocco — Courtesy of Discovery Communications, Inc.

It’s Shuttletime — Courtesy of BCP & Canadian Airlines.

Nestlé Coffee Crisp — Courtesy of MacLaren McCann Canada.

Saturn “Calvin Egg” — Courtesy of Cossette Communications.

“Tigers: Tracking a Legend” — Courtesy of www.wildlifeworlds.com, Carol Amore, Executive Producer.

"The Big Swell" — Courtesy of Swell Pictures, Inc.

Windhorse — Courtesy of Paul Wagner Productions.

Arizona Images — KNTV Production — Courtesy of Granite Broadcasting, Inc.,

Editor/Producer Bryan Foote.

Canyonlands — Courtesy of the National Park Service/Department of the Interior.

Ice Island — Courtesy of Kurtis Productions, Ltd.

Tornados + Belle Isle footage — Courtesy of KWTV News 9.

WCAU Fire Story — Courtesy of NBC-10, Philadelphia, PA.

Women in Sports – Paragliding — Courtesy of Legendary Entertainment, Inc.

News material provided by WFTV Television Inc.

GOT FOOTAGE?

Editors — Filmmakers — Special Effects Artists — Game Developers — Animators — Educators — Broadcasters — Content

creators of every genre — Just finished an incredible project and want to share it with the world?

Send us your reels and we may use your footage in our show reel or demo!*

For a copy of our release and Avid’s mailing address, go to www.avid.com/footage.

*Note: Avid cannot guarantee the use of materials submitted.

Avid iNEWS v3.3 Setup and Configuration Guide • 0130-30597-01 • Created 11/23/10 • This document is

distributed by Avid in online (electronic) form only, and is not available for purchase in printed form.

Contents

Using This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Symbols and Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

If You Need Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

...With the Syntax of Console Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Avid Training Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Overview of iNEWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

System Administrator Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Chapter 2 The iNEWS Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Overview of Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Starting the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Console Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Logging in as a System Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Entering Superuser Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Changing System Administration Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Exiting the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Troubleshooting a Frozen Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Types of Console Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Using Server Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Using Console Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Assigning Commands to Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Displaying Function Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Selecting One or More Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Zooming in on One Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Using Console History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Logged Console History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Using the Remote Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Executing Remote Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Logging out a Remote Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

The Console Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Viewing the Console Configuration File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Editing the Console Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Chapter 3 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Shutting Down the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Starting a System in Single-Server Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Chapter 4 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Viewing User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Modifying User Traits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

User Traits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Changing a User’s Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Changing User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Setting up Simplified Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Simplified User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Creating New Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Creating a New User Area in News Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Adding a New User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Enabing a New User to Receive Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Searching for User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Removing User Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

The User Manager Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

The Database Manager Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Logging Out All Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Chapter 5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Overview of the iNEWS Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Restrictions to Directory or Queue Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Creating a New Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Creating a New Queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Outgoing Mail Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Dead Letter Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Search Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Viewing Search Queue Information from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Creating a New Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Using Script Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Renaming a Directory or Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Deleting a Directory or Queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Recovering a Killed Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Viewing Database Traits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Viewing Information about Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Viewing Who Moved, Duplicated, or Killed a Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Database Traits Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Changing Database Traits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Turning Off the Ordered Trait of a Sorted Queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Database Purge Intervals and Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Identifying Locked Queues and Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Types of Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Removing Locks from a Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Unbusy Stories and Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Chapter 6 Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Overview of Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Viewing Group Information from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Viewing Group Information from a Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Creating a New Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Step 1 - Choosing a Group Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Step 2 - Create New Group at Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Step 3 - Creating Group’s Membership Story and Specifying Members . . . . . 155

Group Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Group Checker Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Renaming a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Step 1 - Change Group Name in Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Step 2 - Change Group Name in SYSTEM.GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Deleting a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Creating or Modifying Multiple Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Adding Users as Members of a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Adding Groups as Members of Other Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Avoiding Recursion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Adding Workstations as Members of a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Combined Permissions and Timeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Group Access and Usage Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Group Traits for the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Read Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Write Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Notification Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Editorial Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Restricted Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Restricting Both Reading and Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Transferring Group Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Hiding Queues and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Creating a Mail Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Mail Aliases for Other Machines or the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Chapter 7 Keyboards and Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Types of Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Creating a Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Creating Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Using the State Keys in Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Repeating Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Notes of Caution for Creating Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Keyboard Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Testing the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Assigning a Default Keyboard to a User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Chapter 8 Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Form Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Creating Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Customizing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Turning on Label Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

SYSTEM.COLORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

SYSTEM.LISTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Assigning a Form as a Queue or Story Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Form Field Types and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Standard iNEWS Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Chapter 9 Character Generator Title Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Overview of CG Title Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Title Entry Setup and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

CG Template Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Edit Title Entry Template Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Creating a New Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Using Font PreSets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Title Entry Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Access to CG Template Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Access to CG Title Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Chapter 10 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Making a Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Viewing System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Licensing iNEWS Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Editing the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Testing the Site Configuration File After Alteration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Incorporating Configuration Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Hosts File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

System Profile Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Changing the System Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Listing Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

System Profile Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Viewing Information about Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

List C Message Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Adding Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Intersystem Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Sending Intersystem Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Receiving Intersystem Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Chapter 11 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Local Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Local Printing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Creating and Using Print Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Local Print Style Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Banner Format Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Example Style Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Chapter 12 Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Adding a Wire – Avid Data Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Phase 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Phase 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Adding a Wire Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Phase 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Phase 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Wire Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Wire Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

The Wire Distribution Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Avoiding Hidden Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Purge Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Setting Up Wire Keyword Searches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Additional Information about Search Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Keyword Search Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Keyword Checker Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Chapter 13 Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Adding a Server Program to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Job Lists: Queues, Stories, and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Types of Tasks for Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Adding a Scan Line in a Job List Story. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Defining a Priority Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Defining an Every Entry Queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

A Server’s Command Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Processing Deleted Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Ordered Queues and the Order Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Mailbox Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Types of Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Assigning a Mailbox to a Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Timed-Interval Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Example of Timed Interval Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Action Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Adding an Action Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Field Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Possible Uses of Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Using Field Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Validation Job List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Rundown Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Polling Commands for Action Servers/Tx Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Configuring Rundown Mirroring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Overlapping Job Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Polling Issues Related to Tx Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Distribution Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Distribution Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Wildcards and the Destination Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Move and Dup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Action Servers or Tx Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Instructions in the Wire Distribution Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Matching and Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Matching and Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Adding a Distribution Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Parallel Wire Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Adding a Parallel Wire Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Keyword Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Adding a Keyword Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

System Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Seek Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Adding a Seek Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Fast Text Search Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Installing FTS Components on the Windows-based Server . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Setting up FTS Components on the iNEWS Servers (Linux) . . . . . . . . . . 374

Batch Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Reindexing (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Mail Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Monitor Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Checklist: Monitor Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Creating a Monitor Server for Each Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Creating Composite and Event List Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Set up Queue and Story Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Assigning Forms to Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Creating an Entry in the SYSTEM.MAP Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Updating the iNEWS System Dictionaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Creating Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Using the Monitor Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Sending Story Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Setting Automatic Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Update Trait - Queue Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Changing Queue Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Adding Rx/Tx Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Chapter 14 iNEWS Community. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Configuring iNEWS for Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Syntax of the ctraits Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Viewing Remote Systems or Community Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Local and Remote SYSTEM.MOS-MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Removing a System from Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Connection Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Chapter 15 Web Publishing and Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Web Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Setting up Txnet to Send HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

The HTML Export Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Sample HTML Export Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Publishing iNEWS Stories to the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

The Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Logging in via Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Web Acess Story Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Web Access Directory and Queue Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Web Access Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Chapter 16 iNEWS Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Overview of Projects and Facets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Setting up the iNEWS Database for Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Creating Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Creating Facets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Associating Stories with Projects or Facets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Appendix A Command References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Programs Invoked by iNEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Commands Used by Avid Personnel Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Linux Commands Used in iNEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Console Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Console Server Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

configure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

connect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

ctraits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

dbclean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

dbclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

dbdev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

dbdump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

dbfree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

dblines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

dboriginal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

dbpurge

(Superuser conditional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

dbrestore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

dbserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

dbsort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

dbtraits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

dbvisit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

diskclear

(Superuser only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

diskcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

doc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

force

(Superuser only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

grpcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

gtraits

(Superuser only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

hogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

idiff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

list B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

list C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

list c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

list d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

list g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

list p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

list q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

list s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

list sq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

list u

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

makemontab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

makeshift (Super user only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

maketab

(Superuser only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

msgclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

otod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

reconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

rename

(Superuser only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

reorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

searchtape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

sitedump

(Superuser only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

siterestore

(Superuser only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

su . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

unbusy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

utraits

(Super user only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

wholockedit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

Job List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

bpoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

bscan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

dup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

every . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

ignore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

ignore-del . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

mailto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

poll. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

publish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

quiet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

replace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

send-del. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

sendform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

validate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Dialog Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

echo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

escape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

expect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

heol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

mapin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

mapout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Appendix B System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

/etc/hosts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

/site/config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

/site/system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

console.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

SYSTEM.CLIENT.WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.301-ACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

SYSTEM.MAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

SYSTEM.RESOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS-AP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS-AP2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Appendix C Standard Dictionaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

Using Dictionaries to Define Messages and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

Customizing Dictionaries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

Changing Default Dictionary Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

Restoring Dictionary Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Utility Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

DBServer Program Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

Disconnect Program Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

Category and Keyword Check Program Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

Keyboard Check Program Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Keyboard Check Program Messages for Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Grpcheck Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

Wire Program Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Mail Server Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Validation (Action) Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Seek Server Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Last Login Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Print Server Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

dbtraits Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Save Error (Workstation) Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Queues Dictionary (/site/dict/queues) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Words Dictionary (/site/dict/words). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

Keyboard Macros Dictionary (/site/dict/keymacros) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

Case-shifting Dictionary (/site/dict/shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

MCS Dictionary (/site/dict/mcs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Device Types Used by Monitor Servers and Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Special Strings Recognized by the Monitor Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Error Messages for the Monitor Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Status Reported in Device Status Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Job List Command Dictionary (/site/dict/joblist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

D Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/dmessages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

S Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/smessages). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Appendix D Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Environment Variables (Registry Values). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

CCColor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

DestinationOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

MailLookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

MsgMailAlert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

PIColor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

RGB Hexadecimal Color Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

ShowTimingBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

SyncToServer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

VT Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

DisableCommandLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Environmental Variables for Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Appendix E Managing Traits at the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

Viewing User Traits from the Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624

Modifying User Traits from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

Changing a User’s Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Listing Users Who Do Not Have Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

User Traits Console Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

Managing Database Traits from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Getting Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Getting Detailed Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

Changing Database Traits from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

Changing a Parent Directory Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

Database Traits Console Command Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

Sortfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Changing a Queue’s Sort Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Starting the Queue Sort Function from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

Purge Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

Mailbox Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

The dis Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

FTSindex Attribute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

Interplay Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

Managing Group Traits at the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

Read Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Write Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Editorial Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Notify Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Restricting Access Using Read and Write Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Removing Directory or Queue Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

Appendix F The Line Editor, ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Starting ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

Specifying Lines to Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

Searching the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Searching Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662

Quitting ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

Using This Guide

Congratulations on your purchase of your Avid iNEWS system. It is a vital part of the Avid

news system solution that integrates with other Avid systems and third-party equipment to

provide an ideal nonlinear workflow and optimize the news production process.

This guide is part of a two-book set designed to keep pace with current advances in the Avid

system’s news production capabilities. The set—made up of this book and the Avid iNEWS

Administration Guide—is a comprehensive resource of all administrative information you

will need to take advantage of the many options available to you.

This guide will lead you through even the most complex procedures with task-oriented

instructions. The information provided here builds on basic news production procedures

described in the help system and other user-based guides, while adding a complete

explanation of all of the tools and techniques required to manage the newsroom computer

system, including useful tips, shortcuts, and custom options.

nThe documentation describes the software features and hardware related to the iNEWS

newsroom computer system, which is extremely customizable. Your system might not contain

certain features and/or hardware that are covered in the documentation.

Symbols and Conventions

Avid documentation uses the following symbols and conventions:

Symbol or Convention Meaning or Action

nA note provides important related information, reminders,

recommendations, and strong suggestions.

cA caution means that a specific action you take could cause harm to

your computer or cause you to lose data.

wA warning describes an action that could cause you physical harm.

Follow the guidelines in this document or on the unit itself when

handling electrical equipment.

If You Need Help

If you are having trouble using your Avid product:

1. Retry the action, carefully following the instructions given for that task in this guide. It

is especially important to check each step of your workflow.

2. Check the latest information that might have become available after the documentation

was published:

- If the latest information for your Avid product is provided as printed release notes,

they ship with your application and are also available online.

- If the latest information for your Avid product is provided as a ReadMe file, it is

supplied on your Avid installation CD or DVD as a PDF document

(README_product.pdf) and is also available online.

You should always check online for the most up-to-date release notes or ReadMe

because the online version is updated whenever new information becomes

available. To view these online versions, select ReadMe from the Help menu, or visit

the Knowledge Base at www.avid.com/readme.

3. Check the documentation that came with your Avid application or your hardware for

maintenance or hardware-related issues.

> This symbol indicates menu commands (and subcommands) in the

order you select them. For example, File > Import means to open the

File menu and then select the Import command.

This symbol indicates a single-step procedure. Multiple arrows in a list

indicate that you perform one of the actions listed.

(Windows), (Windows

only), (Macintosh), or

(Macintosh only)

This text indicates that the information applies only to the specified

operating system, either Windows or Macintosh OS X.

Bold font Bold font is primarily used in task instructions to identify user interface

items and keyboard sequences.

Italic font Italic font is used to emphasize certain words and to indicate variables.

Courier Bold font

Courier Bold font identifies text that you type.

Ctrl+key or mouse action Press and hold the first key while you press the last key or perform the

mouse action. For example, Command+Option+C or Ctrl+drag.

Symbol or Convention Meaning or Action

If You Need Help

4. Visit the online Knowledge Base at www.avid.com/onlinesupport. Online services are

available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. Search this online Knowledge Base to find

answers, to view error messages, to access troubleshooting tips, to download updates,

and to read or join online message-board discussions.

...With the Syntax of Console Commands

If you are at the console and are unsure about the function of a console command, use the

help command.

To view instructions about using a command:

tUse the following command:

help

For instance, type:

help dbvisit

for an explanation of the dbvisit command.

The following data appears:

dbvisit -<d or v or i> -[r or m name] -[s] [block# ...]

‘r’ for read only

‘s’ for “slow” to eliminate cache usage

‘m’ for machine name to disconnect

‘i’ to just validate isam files

nLengthy console displays might be edited to emphasize only the most important information

in this guide. An ellipsis (...) represents portions of the console display not shown in the text.

Also, because of the margin limitations of this guide, console command lines might appear

wrapped to multiple lines. This does not necessarily indicate the need to press an Enter key.

Unless otherwise indicated, console commands should be typed on a single line, allowing

the computer to wrap the text whenever the command line stretches beyond the screen

margin.

Avid Training Services

Avid makes lifelong learning, career advancement, and personal development easy and

convenient. Avid understands that the knowledge you need to differentiate yourself is always

changing, and Avid continually updates course content and offers new training delivery

methods that accommodate your pressured and competitive work environment.

To learn about Avid's new online learning environment, Avid Learning Excellerator™

(ALEX), visit http://learn.avid.com.

For information on courses/schedules, training centers, certifications, courseware, and

books, please visit www.avid.com/training or call Avid Sales at 800-949-AVID

(800-949-2843).

1Introduction

The iNEWS newsroom computer system is an integrated digital news production system,

which provides journalists, producers, directors, writers, and technical personnel with an

array of tools to make their jobs easier.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Overview of iNEWS

•System Administrator Tasks

-Basic Tasks

-User Tasks

-Database Tasks

-Security Tasks

-Customizing the System

-Storage Maintenance Tasks

-Device Tasks

-Reviewing Default Settings

-Troubleshooting

Overview of iNEWS

An iNEWS newsroom computer system provides:

• News gathering from text sources

• News production, including:

- Story creation and script editing

- Association of machine control items to script

- Show planning and creation

- Show archiving

- Contact organization and scheduling

• News to air, including:

- On-air playback control

- File exporting

- Internet publishing

Some primary components of iNEWS include:

• Linux-based computers running the iNEWS Server software. In this guide, these host

computers are referred to as the iNEWS Servers, or individually as server A, server B,

and so forth.

• A Windows-based computer running the iNEWS console multiplexor program. This

computer is known as the console.

• Windows- or Vista-based computers running the iNEWS client software. These

computers are known as iNEWS Workstations.

• Windows-based computers running the iNEWS Data Receiver software, which is used

to ingest wires and other text-based research material

• Other peripherals, such as printers and teleprompters.

Additionally, the iNEWS system is capable of interfacing with a wide variety of production

devices. Avid iNEWS Command provides a central point of control for numerous video

servers and graphics devices, or MOS protocol may be used to send playlists to

MOS-compatible playout controllers.

System Administrator Tasks

The following sections describe common system administrator responsibilities and tasks.

Basic Tasks

Before you can customize or maintain the iNEWS newsroom computer system, you must

learn several basic tasks, which include:

• Start up or shut down iNEWS Server software, which includes logging out users and

taking the system offline.

• Back up a site file before making file modifications.

• Send system administrator commands from the console to one or more of your system’s

computers.

• Become a console superuser, capable of performing actions that are only accessible to

users with superuser permissions.

User Tasks

A user is anyone who can log in to the database and use iNEWS NRCS. Your

responsibilities regarding users are:

• Monitor user information, such as users’ access privileges and which users are currently

logged in.

• Customize the traits of users’ accounts to enable users to more effectively use the

system.

• Provide a new employee access to the information stored in the iNEWS NRCS database

by creating a new user account.

• Remove user accounts of former employees to prevent improper access to the iNEWS

NRCS database.

Database Tasks

The iNEWS system database contains the information your oganization needs to function. A

system administrator’s tasks associated with the database include:

• Design forms (that is, story templates) to display important information about stories in

a queue.

• Monitor changes to files and queues in the database.

• Unlock or delete any item in the database, and recover items that were accidentally

deleted or corrupted.

1 Introduction

• Create new folders or queues in the iNEWS system database to meet your organization’s

expanding needs—including setting up rundowns.

• Remove a directory or queue from the database, if it is no longer used.

• Change the name or traits of an existing directory or queue.

• Assign the mailbox trait to queues for configuring automatic story distribution into and

out of queues.

Security Tasks

There are many ways to ensure the security of your iNEWS system. Your responsibilities

regarding system security include:

• Monitor and change passwords or force users to change them by setting up system

checks and modifications.

• Monitor user login activity to guard against unauthorized use of the iNEWS system.

• Assign security to a directory or queue, limiting access to a specific group of users.

• Restrict database access by placing users into security groups based on job roles and

need for information.

Customizing the System

Your responsibilities regarding customization include:

• Customize command names, message text, and other items by changing their entries in

your system’s dictionary files.

• Create templates for the CG Title Entry tool.

• Design and assign custom keyboards for users with a unique set of keyboard macros.

Storage Maintenance Tasks

You will want to monitor the database regularly to ensure adequate storage. Storage

maintenance tasks include:

• Monitor how much free space is available in the database and, if necessary, increase the

amount to prevent the system from running out of space.

• Perform preventive database maintenance by periodically running certain utility

programs that can find and fix minor problems before they become serious.

• Backup the entire database or portions of it onto tape, so if necessary, the information

can be restored to the database later.

• Make a backup copy of files any time you make important changes.

System Administrator Tasks

Device Tasks

A device is any kind of hardware or software that performs a specific function when it is set

up on the iNEWS system. Your responsibilities regarding devices include:

• List the parameters of any device running on your system or list all devices of one type.

• Add any type of device to your system, if you have the capacity and license permission.

• Edit site-specific files, to change the setup information for a device in your system’s

configuration file.

• Reconfigure the system so it recognizes any changes you make to your system’s

devices.

• Set up printer styles so users can print stories or queues in predetermined formats. For

example, a director rundown only showing specific rundown fields.

• Set up servers, which are utility programs automatically performing various actions on

the database.

• Change wire distribution and sorting of data coming into your database from a wire

service to queues based on their category codes or content.

• (Optional) Write dialogs—lists of instructions—for each connect service to automate

the connection process. A connect service is a device that connects a user to a remote

computer system.

Reviewing Default Settings

Your responsibilities regarding system profiles, default settings, and command syntax

include:

• Changing a system profile setting to change your system’s operation.

• Reviewing default settings of all system profile parameters.

• Reviewing command syntax for edit, console, and job list commands.

Troubleshooting

Your troubleshooting responsibilities include:

• Transfer system activities from a halted computer to other system computers. If a

computer connected to the system has been halted, bring the system back to operation

using the remaining computers

• Reconnect a computer that has been halted. Following routine maintenance, reintegrate

a computer into your system’s operation.

1 Introduction

2The iNEWS Console

The iNEWS console multiplexor serves as a “command center” that enables system

administrators to monitor and maintain the iNEWS newsroom computer system.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Overview of Hardware

•Starting the Console

•Logging in as a System Operator

•Entering Superuser Mode

•Changing System Administration Passwords

•Exiting the Console

•Troubleshooting a Frozen Console

•Types of Console Commands

•Selecting One or More Servers

•Zooming in on One Server

•Using Console History

•Using the Remote Console

•The Console Configuration File

Overview of Hardware

The iNEWS console multiplexor serves as a “command center” that enables system

administrators to monitor and maintain the iNEWS newsroom computer system. The

iNEWS console multiplexor—commonly known as the console—is a DOS- or

Windows-based computer running custom-created Avid software. The console PC

connects—via a serial link—to two or more iNEWS Servers and communicates with each

server simultaneously.

The following diagram shows a sample layout for a dual-server newsroom computer system.

With an external analog modem line, the console also provides a secure remote console

feature, which enables a system administrator or Avid Customer Support personnel, if

necessary, to do routine maintenance and diagnostic work while away from the computer

Starting the Console

room. On newer Windows-based consoles, other remote access software can let

administrators access the console securely from inside the network without needing to be at

the console. However, Avid Customer Support requires a modem for remote access.

Console Keyboard

While the console multiplexor uses a standard computer keyboard, the Enter key on the

numeric keypad is the console’s Command key, the Escape key is—by default—used as the

Escape character for remote command execution, and the system administrator can

preprogram the keyboard’s function keys to execute console commands. The following

diagram identifies the locations of important keys on the typical console keyboard.

nThe Enter key on the numeric keypad will be called the Command key throughout this guide

to prevent confusion with the Enter key on the keyboard.

Starting the Console

If your console has been turned completely off, it should start the console program

automatically when it boots up. If not, it can be started manually.

To start the console program:

1. Do one of the following:

tFrom the operating system prompt, type:

console

tDouble-click

console.exe

2. Press Enter.

The console display will appear with multiple regions, each region associated with a server

and showing the following prompt:

2 The iNEWS Console

Console Display

Although the console can control multiple servers, your console has one screen, which is

often divided into regions to separate the output from each server. The user can alter the

display to show multiple regions or a single region.

The following graphic shows a console display for a dual-server system; the console screen

is divided into two regions.

Your console screen has as many regions as there are host servers in your system.In the

example, the top region displays the output from server A, and the bottom region displays

the output from server B. The wavy lines (^^^) to the left of the identifier for server B

indicate that it is currently selected or active. Each region will have its own server and

command prompts, after which you can enter various commands. See “Types of Console

Commands” on page 41 for more information.

To identify which region belongs to which server, the console displays the name of the

server that a region represents in that region’s lower right corner.

nEach server’s name is based on the system ID (typically a station’s call letters) and the

server’s name (usually a single letter, such as A, B, or C). Examples in this guide use NRCS

as the fictional station and system ID.

Should data shown in a region extend beyond the size of the screen, the user can temporarily

pause the display output. See “Using Console History” on page 46 for more information.

Logging in as a System Operator

System administrators must log in to iNEWS at the console differently than other users who

of the system when not using it.

To log in as the system operator:

1. Select the server(s) displaying the login prompt. See “Selecting One or More Servers”

on page 45 for more information.

2. Type:

3. Press Enter.

4. If your system has a password for this account—and most do—then type in the

password when prompted. To keep the password confidential, the console does not

display what you type.

nThe system operator password is set during installation of the iNEWS Server software on the

iNEWS Servers. For information about changing the system operator password, see

“Changing System Administration Passwords” on page 38.

5. Press Enter.

The console’s server prompt will look similar to this:

NRCS-A$

Entering Superuser Mode

An administrator can take special system privileges as a console superuser when he or she

needs to use more powerful—and therefore potentially more dangerous—commands. Once

the administrator is done with these more powerful commands, he or she can give up the

privileges without logging out. Giving up the privileges (by exiting superuser mode) helps

prevent mistakes and provides better security.

The console’s server prompt is the visual indicator for whether you are logged in as a system

operator or have enter superuser mode. The server prompt for a system operator login ends

with a dollar sign ($). The server prompt while in superuser mode ends in a pound sign (#).

The system operator prompt looks like this:

NRCS-A$

2 The iNEWS Console

The superuser prompt looks like this:

NRCS-A#

nIf a command example in this guide shows the superuser prompt—ending in a pound sign

(#)—you must be in superuser mode to use the command.

A password is required for taking superuser privileges. This password is the same as the root

user password, which is set during installation of the Linux operating system on the iNEWS

Servers. See “Changing System Administration Passwords” on page 38 for more

information.

To take superuser privileges:

1. If you are not already logged in, then log in as a system operator, by typing:

2. Enter superuser mode by typing:

3. Press Enter.

4. Type the superuser password at the password prompt. To keep the password

confidential, the console does not display what you type.

5. Press Enter.

After you entered the password correctly, the console shows that you have superuser

privileges by changing the dollar sign ($) at the end of the server prompt to a pound sign

(#). If you enter an incorrect password, the console displays an error message and

returns you to a system operator prompt.

cTo prevent users from typing unauthorized commands, never leave the console

unattended when logged in with superuser privileges. You should enter superuser

mode only when you need to type a superuser command, and give up the privileges

immediately after typing the command.

To give up superuser privileges and return to the system operator prompt:

tPress Ctrl+D.

The console shows that you are a system operator by changing the pound sign (#) at the

end of the console’s server prompt to a dollar sign ($).

Changing System Administration Passwords

When logging in to the console as either a system operator or superuser, a password is

needed. These system administration passwords are typically set by Avid Customer Support

technicians during the installation of either the iNEWS Server software or the Linux

operating system (OS). However, they can be changed later by system administrators at the

console.

Changing System Administration Passwords

nChanging the superuser password also changes the Linux root user password, which is set

during the Linux OS installation, must be more than six characters, initially.

Keep a confidential record of password changes. Knowing the passwords is critical. If you

forget your passwords, the operating system might need to be reinstalled from scratch by

Avid Customer Support technicians.

For more information on changing the password for the remote console, see “Editing the

Console Configuration File” on page 55.

To change the system operator password:

1. Log in as a system operator, using the current password.

2. At the server prompt, type the password command, as shown:

NRCS-A$

passwd

3. Press Enter.

4. Type the current password, and press Enter.

5. When prompted, type a new password, and press Enter.

nIf the system operator password is fewer than six characters or is based on a word in the

dictionary, the system will issue a “BAD PASSWORD...” message, but it will accept such

passwords. The system will not accept a blank password.

6. When prompted to confirm, retype the new password, and press Enter.

To change the console superuser password:

1. Enter superuser mode, using the current password.

2. At the superuser prompt, type the password command, as shown:

NRCS-A#

passwd

3. Press Enter.

4. Type the current password, and press Enter.

5. When prompted, type a new password, and press Enter.

6. When prompted to confirm, retype the new password, and press Enter.

nIf the password does not match, the system displays an error message. Start over by retyping

the new password. Also, if the superuser password is fewer than six characters or is based

on a word in the dictionary, the system will issue a “BAD PASSWORD...” message, but it

will accept such passwords. The system will not accept a blank password.

7. Press Ctrl+D to leave superuser mode.

The pound sign (#) at the end of the console’s server prompt will change to a dollar sign

($).

2 The iNEWS Console

Exiting the Console

You should leave the console on at all times while the iNEWS system is running. However,

the following situations might require you to exit the console:

• You need to edit the console’s configuration file. See “The Console Configuration File”

on page 52 for more information.

• The console is frozen, and you are unable to unfreeze it using the methods described in

“Troubleshooting a Frozen Console” on page 40.

To exit the console:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Press Ctrl+E.

3. When

COMMAND^EXIT

appears, press Enter.

The console application closes.

nIf running on a DOS system, after the console application closes, the prompt for your

operating system will appear.

Troubleshooting a Frozen Console

If the servers on your system are not responding to commands and are not displaying

messages, potential causes to look for include:

• Ensure that you or someone else has not stopped scrolling. If you suspect this problem,

restart scrolling.

• Ensure that the server ports have not stopped sending and receiving. If you suspect this

problem, restart the sending and receiving from server ports.

• Verify whether static electricity froze one or more of the servers’ I/O ports. If you

suspect this problem, reset the servers’ I/O ports.

• Check for an application program that will not stop running. If you suspect this problem,

stop the program and log in again to the console.

Here are several possible procedures you can do to identify and resolve the problem.

To check and restart scrolling:

1. If that is the case, XOFF is displayed under the region where scrolling has stopped.

2. Press Ctrl+Q to start scrolling.

Types of Console Commands

To restart sending and receiving from server ports:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Type:

3. Press Enter.

nIn the previous two procedures, the XON command is shown being issued in two ways: first,

by pressing Ctrl+Q and second, by pressing the Command key and typing

. Either way will

accomplish the exact same thing.

To reset the servers’ I/O ports:

1. Select the affected server(s).

2. Press the Command key.

3. Type:

(for reset).

4. Press Enter.

To stop a runaway program:

1. Select the affected server(s).

2. Hold down the Control key and press the backslash key (Ctrl+\).

This stops the program on the selected server(s).

If this does not stop the program so that the console displays a system prompt, suspend the

program by pressing Ctrl+Z—or whatever the suspend (susp) character is. The default is

Ctrl+Z.

You can use the jobs command to list suspended programs and kill suspended programs by

using the kill command along with a percent sign (%) and the job number, such as:

kill %1

If the console still does not respond, exit the console program and restart it as described in

“Exiting the Console” on page 40 and “Starting the Console” on page 35.

Types of Console Commands

You can type two kinds of commands at the console:

•Server commands are sent to the iNEWS Servers.

•Console control commands are sent to the iNEWS console software that communicates

with the servers.

2 The iNEWS Console

A detailed list of commands is provided as an appendix to this guide. See “Console Control

Commands” on page 478 and “Console Server Commands” on page 482 for more

information. Also, see “If You Need Help” on page 24 for more information on syntax of

console commands.

System administrators can preprogram the function keys on the keyboard to execute

commands, too. For more information about assigning commands to function keys, see

“Assigning Commands to Function Keys” on page 44.

Using Server Commands

The iNEWS system will not recognize server commands entered in upper case. Type server

commands at the console in lower case after the prompt for the server to which you want the

command sent. For instance, if you want to send a command to server A, type the command

after the server prompt associated with server A.

nThe console displays each server’s prompt based on the system ID and the server’s name,

separated by a hyphen. Examples in this guide use NRCS as the system ID and single

letters—such as A, B, or C—as the server name.

For instance, the server prompt might appear like this:

NRCS-A$

The appearance of the server prompt varies, depending on how the system administrator is

logged in to the console. See “Logging in as a System Operator” on page 37 and “Entering

Superuser Mode” on page 37 for more information.

An example of a server command is the

list sessions

command—or

list s

command—which when sent to an iNEWS Server will return information about who is

logged in.

To simultaneously send a server command to multiple servers:

tType the server command followed by a pound sign (#).

The # character acts as a place holder for each server name. It is replaced with each

server’s computer name, such as A or B, before the console sends the server command

to all servers in the system. This allows system administrators to send commands to

multiple servers without having to select each server and send commands individually.

For instance, when you type

connect #

the command

connect a

is sent to server A,

connect b

to server B, and so forth.

To stop a server command:

tPress Delete.

Types of Console Commands

If that does not work, press Ctrl+C—the stty interrupt character. Doing so will interrupt the

command’s execution. As a last resort, pressing the Control and Backslash keys (Ctrl+\—the

stty quit character) will stop the command’s execution. Avid recommends you should

attempt to “interrupt” before trying to “quit” the execution.

If the server sends a message while you are typing a command, the console stops displaying

your keystrokes to display the message. However, it continues to record what you type. After

it has displayed the message, then the console will display the data you typed in its entirety.

If you are interrupted by a console display or have mistyped a command, you can cancel the

entire command line and start over by pressing Ctrl+U.

nThe character used to issue the command that cancels an entire command line—known as

the “kill” character—may be customized, using the stty command. For instance, to set it to

the “at” character, you would type:

stty kill @

To reset it to the default Ctrl+U, type:

stty kill ^U

The same customization capability applies to the “intr” or “interrupt” character, which is

used to interrupt a running program. For instance, type:

stty intr ^?

to set it to the

Delete key, To reset it to the default Ctrl+C, type:

stty intr ^C

To clarify, the

and

—shown above— mean to hold the Shift key down and press the 6

key, to get the ^ character, and then the U or C letter key respectively. The same applies to

the

. You can view these settings by entering the server command:

stty -a

Using Console Control Commands

The Enter key on the numeric keypad is the console’s Command key. When you press it, the

console displays the command prompt—also called the command line—from which you can

type in commands.

The command prompt appears as shown:

COMMAND^

To enter console control commands:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Type the console control command.

Some of the most common console control commands are those used to activate a region

of the console display—by selecting an iNEWS Server(s)—and those commands used

to view a record of messages displayed on the console, known as the console history.

2 The iNEWS Console

These commands are explained in “Selecting One or More Servers” on page 45 and

“Using Console History” on page 46. For a complete list of console control commands,

see “Console Control Commands” on page 478.

3. Press Enter.

nIf you make a mistake when typing a command, use the Backspace key to move the cursor

back and then type over the error.

Assigning Commands to Function Keys

The system administrator can preprogram the keyboard function keys to execute commands.

For instance, you can program F1 to select server A, F2 to select server B, and F7 to move

up 200 lines in the console history buffer.

To assign a command to a function key:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Type the name of the function key you want to use, followed by the equal sign (=) and

the command the key is supposed to execute.

The following example assigns the command of choosing server A to the F1 key:

f1=c a

3. Press Enter.

To assign a command sequence to a function key—that is, include the Command and

Enter keys in the definition—use the open brace ({) to represent Command, and the

close brace (}) to represent Enter.

For example, to program the complete command sequence (press Command key, type

computer command to select all servers, and press Enter) to function key F10, you

would type:

f10={c *}

To change a command assigned to a function key:

tAssign a new command to the key.

To delete a function key’s command assignment:

tAssign a null value to the key.

Displaying Function Key Assignments

To avoid inadvertently overwriting a function key’s command assignment, you can check

whether a command has been assigned to a specific function key.

Selecting One or More Servers

To find out the command (if any) assigned to a key:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Type the name of the key, such as F9.

3. Press Enter.

Press Command again to clear the command assignment from the console screen.

Selecting One or More Servers

On the console, you can select one server or multiple servers at the same time. For instance,

some commands must be executed on all servers simultaneously, so on a two-server system,

you must select both server A and B before typing in the command.

To select only server A:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Do one of the following:

tType:

computer a

tType:

c a

3. Press Enter.

To select both the A and B servers:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Do one of the following:

tType:

computer ab

tType:

c ab

3. Press Enter.

To select all servers:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Type:

c *

3. Press Enter.

Selecting all servers enables you to send a command to all of them simultaneously.

When you select all servers, each server region’s bottom line changes to a wavy line of

caret symbols (^^^). Only one cursor appears, usually in the top region; however, the

console commands you type appear simultaneously in each region of the console screen.

2 The iNEWS Console

Zooming in on One Server

In addition to the computer command, you can also use the zoom command to select a

server. Unlike the computer command, which operates in multiple region mode, zoom

selects one server at a time and devotes the entire console screen to that server (or region).

To zoom in on one server, such as server B:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Do one of the following:

tType:

zoom b

tType:

z b

3. Press Enter.

The following graphic shows the console screen after “zooming in” on server B’s

region.

To restore the screen to its former multiple region state, use the

computer

command to

select any server. It does not matter which one you select; the console screen will revert to a

multiple region display, and the region for the selected server will have the cursor.

Using Console History

When output from a server command consists of more lines than can fit in a region, lines

will be scrolled off the screen. The console maintains a history buffer containing

data—known as console history—that has appeared on the screen.

nThe system can also be configured to log console history for viewing at a later time.

Using Console History

You can go scroll through the console history to review prior activity on any of the iNEWS

Servers.

The top of the buffer contains the oldest information; the bottom of the buffer contains the

most current. To view this data in screen-sized chunks, you must pause the screen display.

To pause the screen display:

tPress Ctrl+S. The console screen temporarily stops scrolling.

nPressing Ctrl+S does not have any effect if you are using a remote console. A remote console

is connected by a modem dial-in from an external location. See “Using the Remote

Console” on page 50 for more information.

When the screen is full of text, XOFF appears at the bottom of the selected region, as

shown:

To manually resume scrolling:

tPress Ctrl+Q.

2 The iNEWS Console

Even if you do not press Ctrl+Q, the console automatically resumes scrolling after a

pause of 60 seconds.

To view recent history on a particular server:

1. Zoom in to the server whose history you want to review.

2. Press the Command key.

3. Do one of the following:

tType the

command, which moves the console screen up one line in the history.

tType the

down

command, which moves the console screen down one line in the

history.

tType the

top

command, which moves the console screen to the top of the history.

tType the

bottom

command, which moves the console screen to the bottom of the

history.

If you follow the up or down commands with a number, the console screen will move up

or down that number of lines in the history. For instance,

up 10

, moves up—or back in

the console history—10 lines. If you follow the up or down commands with a word, the

console screen will search from the current position backward or forward for that word,

and if found, moves to the line containing that word. The commands are not case

sensitive.

nThe pound character (#) is a wild card that can be included in the word to be searched for

with the up and down commands. It is also used to search for numbers. For instance,

up 10#

is a numerical search, and is not the same as

up 10

, which will move up 10 lines in the

console history.

4. Press Enter.

The

command may also be used to view lines of console history. When the

command is followed by a number, the screen will display that number of lines of

history, starting from the current position. When the

command is followed by the

word,

all

, the screen will display all lines from the current position scrolling to the

bottom of the history, or newest line of information.

nThe

command does not send console history text to a printer. The command for

printing lines of history to a printer is

list

, followed by either a number or the word, all.

See “Console Control Commands” on page 478 for more information.

Using Console History

Logged Console History

You can configure iNEWS to log console history to disk for later review. The logs are

written to the hard drive on your console PC, traditionally in the

C:\Console

directory or on

a Windows-based computer at:

C:\Program Files\Avid\Console

The logs are named as shown in the following table:

The log.a1 file is the most recent console history; you can also view it as shown in prior

examples using the up command.

As the log.a1 file fills up, old files are renamed and a new log.a1 file is created as follows:

• log.a1 is renamed log.a2

• log.a2 is renamed log.a3

• log.a3 is renamed log.a4

• A new log.a1 is created

The log files are ASCII text files that can be read with any word processing program. You

must exit the console program if you want to edit the logs in any way.

nYou can use the view console control command to view the log files without editing or exiting

to DOS, but view only lets you start at the top of the file and scroll down. You cannot move

back or search for words. See “Console Control Commands” on page 478 for more

information.

Both the presence or absence of disk logging and the size of the log files can be configured

in the

console.cfg

file. See “The Console Configuration File” on page 52 for more

information.

File for server A File for server B Contains the following information

log.a1 log.b1 Most recent console history

log.a2 log.b2 Old console history

log.a3 log.b3 Older console history

log.a4 log.b4 Oldest console history

2 The iNEWS Console

Using the Remote Console

The console should have a modem attached to it. This enables someone in another location

to call up the console and log in, thereby turning the remote computer into a remote console.

The primary use for a remote console is to enable Avid Customer Support technicians or

system administrators to perform diagnostics and maintenance work on the iNEWS system

from a remote location.

This section explains the requirements for dialing in over a modem line, what you can expect

to see on the remote screen, and how to execute commands remotely. It also provides

procedures for logging out from a remote console and logging out a remote user from the

main console.

To dial in to the console, you must have a computer that transmits and receives ASCII

characters. You must also have set the following modem options:

• Eight data bits

•No Parity

• One stop bit

• 9600 baud rate

To connect as a remote console:

1. Dial in to the console.

To prevent unauthorized people from dialing in to the console, remote access is

protected with a password. When you dial in, you see a

PASSWORD

prompt on the screen.

If you do not see the prompt immediately, pressing Enter should display it.

2. Enter the password when prompted.

After you type the correct modem password, the console connects you to the first server

listed in the console configuration file, usually server A.

nThe modem password is set in the console’s configuration file. See “Editing the Console

Configuration File” on page 55 for more information.

At the console,

MDM

is displayed at the bottom of the region representing the server that

was selected from the remote console. Commands typed at the remote console are sent

to that server and displayed on its console region. Likewise, output from that server are

displayed both on the console and the remote console.

Using the Remote Console

Executing Remote Commands

After logging in, you can type commands and review history almost as if you were seated at

the console itself. All commands except zoom are available from the remote console. Just as

at the console, these commands can be abbreviated using the first letter in each command.

There are also some differences when using a remote console:

• The remote console displays screen input and output for only one server at a time, even

if you have more than one selected.

When you select two or more servers, the order in which you list the servers in the

computer command determines which server’s display you see. For instance, if you type

c ab to select servers A and B, you see output only from server A on the remote console,

even though what you type is sent to both A and B.

• Use the Escape character instead of the Command key to display the console command

prompt.

nThe Escape character, by default, is set to the Escape (Esc) key; however, the character may

be customized, using the

escape

command in the following format:

escape <char>

For instance, to set the Escape character to the keystroke combination of the Control and Y

keys (Ctrl+Y), type:

escape Ctrl+Y

The Ctrl in the above command means to hold down the Control key while pressing the Y

letter key. It is important to remember that the

escape

command can only be used from a

remote console and there must be a space after the command.

To reset the Escape character to its default, type the

escape

command, space, then press the

Escape key. For instance, type:

escape Esc

Logging out a Remote Console

After connecting to the console from a remote location, you should remember to log out.

If you are at the main console and discover that you or someone else has been using the

remote console but did not log out when done, you can log out the remote user from the

main console.

To log out after you finish using the remote console:

1. Press the Escape character.

2. Type:

. The lowercased L in this step stands for logout.

3. Press Enter.

4. When the remote console redisplays the

PASSWORD

prompt, hang up your modem.

2 The iNEWS Console

To log out a remote console user from the main console:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Type:

. The lowercased M in this step stands for modem.

3. Press Enter.

nAlways follow this procedure before disconnecting the modem on the main console.

The Console Configuration File

The console uses information from its own configuration file—a text file called

console.cfg—to set a number of parameters, such as:

• Whether or not disk logging is enabled

• Information about each of the servers connected to the console

• Information about the remote console

This section contains a sample configuration file, defines the console configuration

keywords and their parameters, and provides procedures for viewing and editing the file.

Sample Console Configuration File

Here is a sample console configuration file:

computer

hostess 3f8

irq 4

label NRCS-A

name A

speed 9600

;

computer

hostess 2f8

irq 3

label NRCS-B

name B

speed 9600

;

computer

hostess 3e8

irq 4

label NRCS-C

name C

speed 9600

;

The Console Configuration File

modem

hostess 2e8

irq 3

password mux

speed 9600

timeout 0:05

The configuration file consists of a list of keywords, such as name and label. Most keywords

are followed by parameters, such as a and NEWS. The keyword modem identifies the start

of the modem (remote console) section. The keyword computer identifies a server section.

Each server and the modem must have its own section in the console configuration file.

Console Configuration Keywords

Here are the configuration keywords and their parameters if they have any.

Keyword & Parameters Description

computer Indicates the beginning of a server section. Must appear at the top

of each server section on the configuration file.

hostess <port-address> Indicates which port address (in hex) the console uses to

communicate with a particular device (that is, a server or the

modem). This information, which is dictated by the hardware, was

placed in the configuration file when your system was installed

and should not be changed.

irq <interrupt-request-number> To get the attention of the console, each device (that is, the servers

and the modem) connected to the console must have an interrupt

request number defined. Typically, these are shared: COM 1 and 3

use the same number, and COM 2 and 4 use the same number. The

irq keyword tells the console which interrupt request to expect

from each device.

This information, which is dictated by the hardware, was placed in

the configuration file when your system was installed and should

not be changed.

label <region-name> Defines a label that the console uses to identify each server’s

region of the console screen. The label can be up to 15

alphanumeric characters long, and is typically the system ID.

2 The iNEWS Console

log <drive:filename> [server(s)]

[max size]

Enables disk logging. No matter what filename (for example, log)

you designate here, the system always uses extensions like A1,

A2, and B1, as indicated in “Logged Console History” on page

49. If you do not follow the filename with a list of the servers for

which you want history to be recorded, the console records history

for all servers. If you omit a log size it defaults to 16,384 bytes.

This example creates a log file on the C drive in the same location

as the console application (console.exe) for all servers, and its

maximum size is 40,000 bytes:

log c:log * 40000

modem Indicates the beginning of a modem section of the configuration

file.

name <computer-name> Names the server described in that section of the configuration

file. Each server must have A, B, C, or D as its name.

password <password> The modem password that must be typed when someone logs in at

a remote console. The password can have up to eight

alphanumeric characters and is case sensitive.

portaddress <port> Selects the DOS address (in hex) the console should use to

communicate with a particular device, such as a modem. This

information which is dictated by the hardware, is placed in the

configuration file during installation and should not be changed.

Each device must have a port address defined in its section. The

portaddress keyword is used instead of hostess when your system

has four servers and a modem. In that case, the modem must use

com1 as its port. The port parameter should always be defined as

3f8.

speed <baud-rate> Sets the baud rate for communication between the console and the

server. The console ports always communicate at 9600 baud, eight

data bits, no parity, and one stop bit.

timeout <minutes:seconds> Allows you to set a time-out value for any modem connection.

The system automatically logs out a modem connection if there is

no activity for a specified amount of time. For instance, a value of

6:00 would automatically log out a modem connection after six

minutes of inactivity. This keyword, which should only be used in

the modem section, provides added protection should a user forget

to logout from a modem connection to the console.

With a value of 0:00—the default value—the feature is disabled,

which means the system will not log out a modem connection

regardless of inactivity length. The maximum value is 546

minutes and 7 seconds (546:07).

Keyword & Parameters Description

The Console Configuration File

Viewing the Console Configuration File

You can view the console’s configuration file from the console itself or, on a Windows-based

PC, open it in a text editing program, such as Wordpad, to view it.

To view the console.cfg at the console:

1. Zoom in on one server, such as server A.

2. Press the Command key.

3. Do one of the following:

tType:

view console.cfg

tType:

v console.cfg

4. Press Enter to display the first line in the console configuration file.

5. Continue to press Enter to scroll through the file.

Editing the Console Configuration File

Probably the only modification you will ever need to make to the console’s configuration file

is to change the modem password, used when logging in from a remote console.

To edit the console.cfg file:

1. Open the file using Microsoft’s program, Wordpad.

2. Save the file after you complete your modifications.

nIf the console configuration file is stored on a DOS PC, you need to use a DOS editing tool,

such as

edit

to change it, or copy the file to a Windows-based PC to edit it.

2 The iNEWS Console

3Getting Started

System Administrators are responsible for knowing how to start up and shut down the

iNEWS system. This requires logging in at the console multiplexor, which is done

differently than other iNEWS users and provides access to features that other logins do not.

Information on using the console, including logging in, is covered in Chapter 2. This chapter

provides specifics on starting up and shutting down the newsroom computer system.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Starting the System

•Shutting Down the System

•Starting a System in Single-Server Mode

Starting the System

The following procedure shows you how to reboot your servers and synchronize them. This

is primarily for dual- or triple-server systems. For steps on starting a system in single-server

mode, see “Starting a System in Single-Server Mode” on page 62.

nBecause the following procedure applies to an entire system that has been shut down, you

must perform all the steps on all servers, except where otherwise indicated.

To start your iNEWS system:

1. Power up or reboot servers to the login prompt.

The servers will display the following line ten times—one per second:

Press any key to continue.

If no key is pressed, the bootup will continue normally after ten seconds. If a key is

pressed, the system displays a message similar to the following:

The default is the SERIAL CONSOLE option, for booting to the iNEWS console. Use

the up or down arrow keys to select another option; however, the other options should

not be used for any reason, unless instructed to do so by Avid Customer Support

personnel. Press Enter to continue.

Starting the System

cIf the system was not shut down as described in “Shutting Down the System” on page

60, check the console history for messages indicating that all servers shut down at the

same time. Do not connect servers unless you are sure their databases are mirrored. If

you cannot find messages indicating simultaneous shutdown, or are otherwise unsure

whether the disks are mirrored, call Avid Customer Support for assistance before

proceeding. If the servers are not mirrored, it will be necessary to bring the system up

as a single-server system and go through the re-mirroring process. See “Starting a

System in Single-Server Mode” on page 62 for more information.

cIf the system was taken through a normal shut down according to instructions, the

databases would still be mirrored and you can continue the normal startup procedure.

2. Select all servers.

3. Log in as a system operator by typing:

4. When prompted, type the password.

5. Type:

connect #

The # character acts as a place holder for each server name, allowing you to send a

single command to multiple servers simultaneously. So, typing

connect #

will send

connect a

to server A,

connect b

to server B, and so forth.

When connected, each server displays status messages and the system prompt returns.

Messages similar to the following appears:

connect successful for NRCS-A, starting servers...

A is OFFLINE. ID is NRCS.

System is A. Master is A.

Disk status is OK. The database is OPEN.

Connecting servers provides each server with a unique name and causes each one to

read and interpret the system profile. The servers can work together as a system after

reading the system profile information.

6. (Optional) Check for edit and order locks if you are restarting the system after a power

failure. During a power failure, the system might not have had time to remove edit and

order locks from the database before shutting down.

When you restart the system, remove these locks.

nChecking for edit and order locks might take time depending on the size of the database. In

an emergency, bypass this step to get the system running. Go back later and remove locks to

provide system access. The system can detect invalid locks and will ignore them.

a. Select one server.

b. Type:

dbclean -x .

3 Getting Started

The

-x

option tells dbclean to skip queues or directories marked with a skip flag,

reducing the time it takes to run.

The period (

) after the

-x

causes dbclean to start at the root directory of the

database, so that it does not miss any part of the database not marked with a skip

flag.

7. Select all servers.

8. Type:

startup

Information similar to the following appears:

Checking free space...

Sep 10 15:42:51 NRCS msg: System is being configured

database size 10002352,free 9955000=100%,freelist 1991

Starting NRCS programs...

booting device 100

booting server 130

The startup command does the following:

- Causes the master computer (usually server A) to read the configuration file

- Brings each server online so users can log in

- Checks database free space (dbfree)

- Starts all devices and utility programs

The console displays device-ready messages (Hot-to-go as each device starts up,

indicating that the device is online and available.

nResources used for iNEWS Workstation, Data Receiver, and rxnet sessions do not print any

messages until a workstation establishes a connection.

Shutting Down the System

If you need to turn off your servers or reboot the system, first shut down the system. Shutting

down the system:

• Saves any open stories

• Removes any remaining edit and order locks

• Ensures that each server’s copy of the database is the same

Shutting Down the System

nBecause the system requires that you shut down all servers at the same time, most steps in

this procedure are performed on all servers simultaneously. Except where instructed to do

otherwise, ensure that you have selected all servers before performing each step. See

“Selecting One or More Servers” on page 45 for more information.

To shut down your iNEWS system:

1. Broadcast a message to notify users that the system is being shut down. For instance,

type:

broadcast -dl Please log out, system being shut down.

2. Select all servers.

3. Log out all users.

4. Type:

status

This will display the systems current configuration status; verify that the servers are still

connected to each other and running in the normal AB configuration for dual-server

systems or ABC configuration for triple-server systems. If they are, you may continue

with normal shutdown procedures.

nIf the servers do not all display the same configuration settings—such as “System is

AB”—then the databases on the servers are most likely not mirrored and must not be

brought back up using normal startup procedures. Contact Avid before proceeding.

5. Type:

shutdown

A message similar to the following appears:

WARNING! This will stop all devices on this computer, and close the

database.

To prevent loss of work in progress, 'logout all' first.

Do you really want to do this (y/n)?

6. To continue, type:

and press Enter.

The screen appears similar to the following:

Do you really want to do this (y/n)? y

/exc/shutdown: Stopping all devices

/exc/shutdown: Closing database

The shutdown process stops all workstations, wires, and other devices, and no further

changes can be made to the database.

7. Log in as a superuser, by typing:

3 Getting Started

8. When prompted, enter the password.

NRCS-A$ su

password:

NRCS-A#

9. When the superuser prompt appears, shut down the system by using a form of the init

command, as shown:

NRCS-A# halt

Broadcast message from root (ttySO) (Fri ...)

The system is going down for system halt NOW!

INIT: Stopping atd: [ OK ]

Stopping keytable: [ OK ]

...

Turning off swap:

Turning off quotas:

Unmounting file systems:

Halting system...

flushing ide devices: hda

System halted.

10. Turn off each server.

To start up the system again, follow the procedure in “Starting the System” on page 58.

Starting a System in Single-Server Mode

If the servers were not operating in their normal system configuration, such as AB in

dual-server systems, or if they were not shutdown using normal procedures according to

instructions in this manual, the databases on the servers may not be mirrored.

cIf the databases are not mirrored, you must not bring the system up using normal start

up procedures as instructed in “Starting the System” on page 58 or you will risk

database corruption.

If non-mirrored servers, the system administrator must bring the system up in single-server

mode and then go through the database re-mirroring process. This section provides the steps

for starting a system in single-server mode.

Starting a System in Single-Server Mode

nContact Avid Customer Support for assistance with triple-server systems. It might be

possible to start these systems in a dual-server mode, depending on the circumstances of the

shutdown.

To start the iNEWS system in single-server mode:

1. Power up or reboot the server on which you want the system to run.

2. Select that server.

3. Log in as a system operator by typing:

4. When prompted, type the password.

5. Do one of the following:

tTo connect server A as a single system, enter the following command:

connect a single=a

tTo connect server B as a single system, enter the following command:

connect b single=b

nThe syntax

net=a

net= b

is also acceptable. If you have a third server, such as server C,

use C in place of A or B. Also, notice in the following sample message that the “System is A”

not AB or ABC.

Messages similar to the following appear:

Sep 10 16:25:52 inews-a last message repeated 15 times

...

Sep 10 16:26:44 inews-a work:[2034]workserver Hot-to-go

connect successful for NRCS-A, starting servers...

A is OFFLINE. ID is NRCS

System is A. Master is A.

Disk status is OK. The database is OPEN.

NRCS-A$

6. (Optional) Check for edit and order locks if you are restarting the system after a power

failure. During a power failure, the system might not have had time to remove edit and

order locks from the database before shutting down.

When you restart the system, remove these locks.

nChecking for edit and order locks might take time depending on the size of the database. In

an emergency, bypass this step to get the system running. Go back later and remove locks to

provide system access. The system can detect invalid locks and will ignore them.

tType:

dbclean -x .

3 Getting Started

The

-x

option tells dbclean to skip queues or directories marked with a skip flag,

reducing the time it takes to run.

The period (

) after the

-x

causes dbclean to start at the root directory of the database,

so that it does not miss any part of the database not marked with a skip flag.

7. Type:

startup

Checking free space...

Sep 10 15:42:51 NRCS msg: System is being configured

database size 10002352,free 9955000=100%,freelist 1991

Starting NRCS programs...

booting device 100

booting server 130

The entire newsroom computer system will now be run off the single server. The

commands entered on a single-server system for shutting down are the same as those

used to shut down a dual-server or triple-server system. To return to a dual or

triple-server system, it will be necessary to complete the database re-mirroring process.

4Users

People in your newsroom must have user accounts to use the iNEWS newsroom computer

system. Each user account has various user traits associated with it that capture information

about the user’s interaction with the system—information such as passwords, keyboard

preferences, and permissions for story editing.

This chapter explains how the system administrator can access and change user account

information from any iNEWS Workstation. However, user traits can also be viewed and

modified at the console. The procedures for using the console are covered in “Managing

Traits at the Console” on page 623.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Viewing User Accounts

•Modifying User Traits

-Changing a User’s Password

-Changing User Preferences

-Setting up Simplified Users

•Creating New Users

-Creating a New User Area in News Database

-Adding a New User Account

-Enabing a New User to Receive Mail

•Searching for User Information

•Removing User Accounts

•The User Manager Account

•The Database Manager Account

•Logging Out All Users

Viewing User Accounts

You must be logged on as a superuser or user manager (umanager) to change user traits. For

an explanation of the umanager account and privileges, see “The User Manager Account” on

page 96.

To view traits associated with a particular user account:

1. Select Tools > Options > Users.

The Manage User Accounts dialog box appears.

2. Enter the user name in the User ID field.

nAn asterisk (*) in the User ID field will result in all user accounts listed when you click

Search or press Enter. To search for all users with names that start with a certain letter, type

that letter followed by an asterisk.

3. Do one of the following:

tClick Search.

tPress Enter.

Viewing User Accounts

The results of the search appear in the User List field located in the center of the dialog

box. The data provided in the field includes: User ID and Name, last time the user

logged in, whether the user account has superuser privileges, and so forth. The scroll bar

at the bottom of the field may be used to view the rest of the User Account data.

nThe Print User List button will send the User Account data for the results appearing in

the User List field to the printer. There is no option to selectively limit what data is

printed.

4. Do one of the following:

tDouble-click the user name in the User List field.

tClick the name once to select it, and then click the Modify/Display button.

nThe Modify button will appear with the word Display on it if you do not have authority to

modify user accounts. This applies to user managers (umanager) who cannot alter

superuser accounts. Also, the traits shown in the dialog box will appear gray to indicate that

the information is for viewing only.

The Modify User Account dialog box appears.

The dialog box shows user traits associated with the account you chose, such as the

user’s name, read rate, and mail queue name. All user traits shown in the various

sections of the Modify User Account dialog box are explained in detail in “User Traits”

on page 69.

4 Users

Modifying User Traits

You must be logged on as a superuser or user manager (umanager) to change user traits. The

superuser account is an iNEWS user account with superuser type access privileges. It is not

the same as the superuser mode used at the console. See “User Traits” on page 69 for more

information. For an explanation of the umanager account and privileges, see “The User

Manager Account” on page 96.

To modify a user’s traits from an iNEWS Workstation:

1. Access the Modify User Account dialog box as explained in “Viewing User Accounts”

on page 66.

The Modify User Account dialog box appears.

2. Select or deselect check boxes and fill in the fields in the Queues section of the dialog

box as needed. See “User Traits” on page 69 for more information.

nYou can click the Get from Template button to copy traits from another pre-defined user

account. The template must be selected prior to the start of account modification or the

button will be inaccessible (grayed out). See “Adding a New User Account” on page 88 for

more information.

3. Create or change the password, as explained in “Changing a User’s Password” on page

74.

Modifying User Traits

4. Click User Preferences and modify settings, as explained in “Changing User

Preferences” on page 75.

5. Click OK to save modifications. The Cancel button closes the dialog box without saving

changes.

User Traits

The Modify User Account dialog box divides each user’s traits into sections, such as Type,

Edit Mode, Queues, and so forth.

These sections are explained in the following summary of all user traits.

User ID and User Name

The User Name field contains the user’s real name. It should not be confused with the User

ID, which the system uses to identify account activity. For instance, a user might have an

account with a User ID

dmitchell

; his real User Name is Dan Mitchell, but he will type

dmitchell

, his User ID, to log on to iNEWS.

4 Users

Type

The Type section contains the check boxes that determine what type of user account is

assigned to the user, and consequently, what privileges.

If the check box is selected, the type is applied to that user account.

Edit Mode

The Edit Mode section’s radio buttons set up the condition of the PC keyboard’s Insert

key at log in. The users can still toggle between Insert and Overwrite mode as they work.

Type Description

Superuser A superuser account allows the user complete access to administration

features, such as user accounts, the database, the System directory, and

connect sessions to the console that controls the servers.

Blacklisted A blacklisted account cannot be used to log in to an iNEWS Workstation.

This type is used for special accounts, such as umanager and dbmanager. It is

not intended for standard user accounts. Another practical use for this trait is

to quickly disable an account of someone leaving or someone who works

intermittently.

Simplified A simplified account sets certain access limits, such as the maximum number

of iNEWS Workspaces allowed. See “Setting up Simplified Users” on page

83 for more information.

Local Only User accounts flagged as local only cannot be used for session identification

by incoming Community sessions. The generic username is used instead.

Condition Description

Insert The Insert editing mode, when selected, means if a user types text between

two characters, the text is inserted at the cursor position without overwriting

the character to the right of the cursor. This is the more typical selection.

Modifying User Traits

Queues

The iNEWS system provides a People directory in the database file structure that lets system

administrators to set up a personal directory and two queues for each user as data storage.

The Queues fields in the Modify User Account dialog box indicate the navigation paths (or

locations) of the user’s personal directory and queues.

nThe actual directory and queues are not created here. The People directory, which can be

customized for your environment through a system dictionary, is provided as part of the

default database. See “Creating a New User Area in News Database” on page 86 for more

information.

Overwrite The Overwrite editing mode, when selected, means each character a user

types replaces the next character to the right of the cursor as the cursor moves

through the text.

Condition Description

Queue Fields Description

Home The Home field contains the path to the directory (folder) where the

Destination and Mail queues are stored in the database file structure.

Destination The Destination field contains the path to the queue provided for the user as a

storage location, such as Notes.

Mail The Mail field contains the path to the user’s Mail queue, which is where all

internal iNEWS mail to that user is kept in the database.

For sites that do not use iNEWS mail, set this field to

SYSTEM.SHREDDER. Also, even if your site uses iNEWS mail, all

template or special accounts (umanager and dbmanager for example) should

be set to SYSTEM.SHREDDER. This does not prevent users from sending

mail, but it does prevent user accounts from receiving mail.

4 Users

Read Rate

The Read Rate is the user’s spoken reading rate in words per minute. The average English

reading rate is 180 words per minute. The iNEWS system takes the read rate from the user

ID named in the story’s presenter field to determine the audio (air) time of a story. This also

applies to the text timing clocks.

Session Features

There are three sections of the Modify User Account dialog box pertaining to features. The

Session Features section defines access to other parts of the system.

If the check box is selected, the feature is applied to that user account.

Configuration Features

The Configuration Features section pertains to the look of the iNEWS Workspace.

If the check box is selected, the feature is applied to that user account.

Feature Description

Media Browse The Media Browse check box determines access to the Media Browse

plug-ins within iNEWS.

Connect Services The Connect Services check box determines access to the Connect to Service

dialog box.

Manage Projects The Manage Projects check box determine whether a user can manage

projects and facets in the system.

Modifying User Traits

Queue Features

The Queue Features section pertains to access privileges in the Queue panel of the iNEWS

Workspace.

If the check box is selected, the feature is applied to that user account.

Feature Description

Toolbars The Toolbars check box determines whether the user can create custom

toolbars.

Color Highlights The Color Highlights check box determines whether the user can customize

the highlighting status colors in the queue.

Highlight Read The Highlight Read Stories check box specifies that unread stories in the

queue are highlighted on the user’s screen. The highlight is removed when

the cursor is positioned on the story. This feature only applies to stories in a

queue with the Watch Appends database trait.

Feature Description

Reorder Stories The Reorder Stories check box determines authority to alter the order of the

stories in any queue to which the user has write access.

Create/Kill... The Create/Kill Folders/Queues check box determines authority to create or

delete queues and folders (directories) in the database file structure, as seen

in the Directory panel of the iNEWS Workspace.

Kill All Stories The Kill All Stories check box determines authority to delete all stories in a

single action from any queue to which the user has write access. The data is

actually moved from the selected queue to the DEAD queue where it remains

(and can be accessed) until purged.

4 Users

Password

The Password section has two options with which you can set up or force a user to change an

assigned password. See “Changing a User’s Password” on page 74 for more information.

User Preferences...

The User Preferences button is used to view and/or modify a user’s preferences, such as

keyboard, printer, and confirmation settings. See “Changing User Preferences” on page 75

for more information.

Get from Template...

The Get from Template button is only used when copying the traits of one user’s account to

another. See “Adding a New User Account” on page 88 for more information.

Changing a User’s Password

The password must be a minimum of five alphanumeric characters (and a maximum of 12

characters) with no spaces. Use the system profile to set or change a required length for all

passwords for your site.

nSystem administrators cannot retrieve a user’s password, only change it.

Option Description

Password The Password button opens a dialog box that you can use to set up or change

the password protecting access to the user account.

Force Change The Force Change check box determines whether the user is forced to change

the assigned password at the next login.

Modifying User Traits

To change a user’s password:

1. Click the Password button in the Modify User Account dialog box.

The Change User’s Password dialog box appears.

2. Type the password in the New password field.

3. Confirm the new password by retyping it in the Confirm new password field.

4. Do one of the following:

tClick OK to store the password for saving after all modifications to the user’s

account are done. This will close the dialog box. The process of saving the

password is only completed after the OK button on the Modify User Account dialog

box is also clicked.

tClick Cancel to close the dialog box without saving changes.

Changing User Preferences

System administrators can use the Preferences dialog box to set up default preferences for

users. However, the Preferences dialog box is—by default—accessible to users, so they can

alter these settings at any time. Users, unless their access is limited by the system

administrator, can access the Preferences dialog box to modify their preferences by selecting

Tools > Options > Preferences at any iNEWS Workstation. To learn how the system

administrator can limit access to this dialog box and its features, see “Setting up Simplified

Users” on page 83.

4 Users

To change user preferences:

1. Click the User Preferences button in the Modify User Account dialog box.

The Preferences dialog box will appear, containing several tabs.

2. Modify the preference settings on each tab as needed. The settings are described in

detail in “User Preferences” on page 76.

3. Do one of the following:

tClick OK to store the preferences for saving after all modifications to the user’s

account are done. This will close the dialog box.

cThe process of saving the preferences is only completed after the OK button on the

Modify User Account dialog box is also clicked.

tClick Cancel to close the dialog box without saving preference changes.

User Preferences

The Preferences dialog box contains several tabs. These various tabs are explained in the

following summary of all user preferences.

Modifying User Traits

Session Tab

The Session tab has two sections, which system administrators can use to set up default user

preferences.

User Preference Description

Keyboard The keyboard drop-down list contains a list of keyboards (or sets of macros)

that can be assigned to the user account as a default for when the user logs in.

The Reload button lets the keyboard assignment take effect without having

the user log off and back on.

Printing The Printing drop-down list contains pre-defined Styles that can be assigned

to the user account as defaults for when the user prints data from an iNEWS

Workstation.

4 Users

Confirmations Tab

The Confirmations tab is divided into sections and contains check boxes that determine

whether iNEWS prompts the user to confirm a request before completing the command.

User Preference Description

Saving Story When Saving Story is checked, iNEWS Workstation will display a

confirmation message to save changes before closing an edited story. If you

do not select the Saving Story check box, the system automatically saves

changes before closing stories.

Exit When Exit is checked, iNEWS Workstation will display a confirmation

message when the user attempts to close the iNEWS NRCS program at the

workstation.

Story Operations When Story Operations is checked, iNEWS Workstation will display a

confirmation message before moving a story when you use the mouse to drag

it to its new position.

Queue Operations When Queue Operations is checked, iNEWS Workstation will display a

confirmation message before moving all stories in a queue when you use the

mouse to drag them to their new position.

Queue Reorder When Queue Reorder is checked, iNEWS Workstation will display a

confirmation message before moving a story to a new location in the same

queue.

Story When Story is checked, iNEWS Workstation will display a confirmation

message before deleting a story or stories.

Modifying User Traits

Backup Tab

The Backup tab defines the settings for the iNEWS Workstation to automatically back up

work in a current session to a specified location at specific time intervals.

Mail or Message When Mail or Message is checked, iNEWS Workstation will display a

confirmation message before deleting e-mail or instant messages.

Production Cue When Production Cue is checked, iNEWS Workstation will display a

confirmation message before deleting a production cue and its marker from a

story.

nA production cue marker (shown at left) appears in the Story Text

panel.

User Preference Description

Interval Interval specifies the number of minutes between story backups. The default

is 10 minutes. Set the interval to 0 (zero) minutes to turn off the automatic

backup feature.

Directory Directory specifies the path name—the location in which iNEWS

Workstation should store backup copies of stories. The location should be a

directory (folder) on the harddrive of the local PC/workstation. By default,

the location is the iNEWS program directory, which is only accessible to

computer administrators or power users. Regular Windows users should set

this to My Documents. You can type the path in manually, or click the

Browse button to select the directory from the Browse dialog box.

4 Users

Refresh Tab

The Refresh tab sets the seconds for refreshing the screen at the workstation.

nThis preference is unique because it only affects the workstation on which it is set.

Set the number to zero (0) for instant updating—that is, if you do not want to delay

refreshes. A zero delay does require more system and network resources.

Layout Tab

The Layout tab is divided into sections and contains buttons and check boxes that determine

the layout of panels and workspaces in the iNEWS Workstation main window.

Modifying User Traits

nUsers can manually override the Preview Lines setting by selecting the Story Preview option

in the View drop-down menu. In the Story Preview dialog box, the user can override the

default setting by typing in a number in the Lines to preview field. This overrides the setting

for the queue while displayed. Once the user exits the queue, the queue’s default setting is

reinstated. If the user wants to return to the default setting manually (as defined in the

queue’s properties), the user can click the Default button in the Story Preview dialog box.

The following figures show the difference between Queue panel displays with and without

Preview lines. The first figure shows the display using the default of seven preview lines, as

defined in the queue’s properties.

User Preference Description

Start in Session The Start in Session field specifies the default session that will appear on

screen when the user logs in to iNEWS Workstation.

Get Current The Get Current button will reset the preferences on the Layout tab to what

was set when the dialog box opened.

Depending on which Arrangement button is selected, the iNEWS

Workstation will display the panels of the iNEWS Workspace accordingly.

Zoom In the Arrangement section, when Zoom is checked, iNEWS Workstation

will display the iNEWS Workspace in zoom mode—that is, zoomed into one

of the three panels: Directory, Queue or Story.

Hide Form In the Arrangement section, when Hide Form is checked, iNEWS

Workstation will display the Story panel with its Story Form panel hidden.

The user can choose to show the Story Form panel by selecting the option to

show the form from the Story drop-down menu.

Horizontal In the Gridlines section, when Horizontal is checked, iNEWS Workstation

will display horizontal gridlines between rows in the Queue panel.

Vertical In the Gridlines section, when Vertical is checked, iNEWS Workstation will

display vertical gridlines between columns in the Queue panel.

Use Default In the Preview Lines section, when Use Default is checked, iNEWS

Workstation will display the default number of preview lines for each story in

the Queue panel as defined by the queue’s properties. When Use Default is

not checked, every queue will display only one line of information per story

in the Queue panel.

4 Users

The second figure shows the Queue panel display without preview lines. This is the view

when Use Default is unchecked, unless otherwise specified.

Modifying User Traits

Search ResultsTab

The Search Results tab allows you to set the default form used in the Queue panel of the

Search Results workspace.

The iNEWS Workstation will use the form selected from the Use form drop-down list when

displaying the results from searches in iNEWS. The forms you can choose from are those

created and stored in SYSTEM.FORMS. See “Creating Forms” on page 198 for more

information.

Setting up Simplified Users

A simplified user is one that has certain limitations pertaining to the iNEWS Workstation.

As the system administrator, you can define the limitations and then assign them to users.

Only one set of limitations can be defined, which is then applied to all user accounts with the

simplified user trait. In other words, either a user account has the simplifed user trait, with its

designated limitation settings, or it does not.

Some of the Simplified User Settings lock the user’s preferences to those defined by the

system administrator using the Preferences dialog box. See “User Preferences” on page 76

for more information.

To set up or modify the simplified user limitations:

1. Access the Modify User Account dialog box as explained in “Viewing User Accounts”

on page 66.

2. Click the Simplified UI button.

4 Users

The Simplified User Settings dialog box appears.

The dialog box divides the settings into two sections, which are explained in the next

sections of this chapter.

3. Select or deselect check boxes, as required.

4. Click the OK button to save the settings and close the Simplified User Settings dialog

box.

nUse the Reset button to discard changes and reset the check box settings to what they were

when the dialog box opened.

Simplified User Settings

The Simplified User Settings dialog box splits the settings into two sections. These sections

are explained in the following summary of all simplified user settings.

Workspaces Section

The Workspaces section of the dialog box provides settings that pertain to the arrangement

and quantity of workspaces within the iNEWS Workstation’s main window.

Modifying User Traits

Application Section

The Application section of the dialog box provides settings that pertain to accessing certain

iNEWS features at any workstation.

Setting Description

Limit Number to When Limit Number to is checked, iNEWS Workstation will prevent the user

from opening more workspaces than the number specified. This limit does

not apply to the workspaces opened using the Urgent Wire and Mail buttons.

However, this does lock the Urgent Wire workspace so the user is unable to

navigate to other queues or directories in that workspace.

Lock Arrange When Lock Arrange is checked, iNEWS Workstation will prevent the user

from altering the arrangement of panels in the Workspace. This disables the

Arrangement buttons on the standard Layout toolbar. The setting is locked

into the default arrangement as defined in the user’s User Account

Preferences.

Lock Layout When Lock Layout is checked, iNEWS Workstation will prevent the user

from altering the layout of workspaces in the iNEWS Workstation main

window. This disables the Layout buttons on the standard Layout toolbar.

The setting is locked into the default layout as defined in the user’s User

Account Preferences.

Lock Zoom When Lock Zoom is checked, iNEWS Workstation will prevent the user from

altering the zoom of panels in the iNEWS Workspace. The setting is locked

into the default as defined in the user’s User Account Preferences.

Setting Description

Lock Toolbars When Lock Toolbars is checked, iNEWS Workstation will prevent the user

from altering the display of toolbars.

Lock Sessions When Lock Sessions is checked, iNEWS Workstation will prevent the user

from creating or altering sessions. The user will be locked to sessions created

prior to the Lock Sessions being applied to the user account.

4 Users

Creating New Users

To set up new users in iNEWS, you must complete three separate procedures:

• Create areas in the iNEWS database file structure where the user can store notes and

receive mail. See “Creating a New User Area in News Database” on page 86 for more

information.

• Add a new user account so that your system recognizes the user. This includes setting up

the user traits associated with the account. See “Adding a New User Account” on page

88 for more information.

• Enable the new user to receive mail by adding him or her to the appropriate group. See

“Enabing a New User to Receive Mail” on page 91 for more information.

nTo ensure a user has appropriate database privileges, the user should also be assigned to the

correct group or groups. For more information, see “Adding Users as Members of a Group”

on page 162.

Creating a New User Area in News Database

While a user account will work without this area, it is traditional for each user to have his or

her own area in the database to keep notes and to receive e-mail. Usually, these areas are

separate queues called Notes and Mail. These queues are kept in a sub-folder—with the

user’s account name—in the People directory.

The common practice is to separate the first level of People sub-folders by using the first

initial of the user’s last name—otherwise, since the system is limited to 250 folders in the

People directory, your site might eventually reach the limit.

Disable Title Entry When Disable Title Entry is checked, iNEWS Workstation will prevent user

access to the Title Entry dialog box, used to enter production cues in stories,

and the Edit Title Entry Template dialog box, used to create CG templates for

the Title Entry feature.

Disable User Prefs... When Disable User Prefs Dlg is checked, iNEWS Workstation will prevent

user access to the Preferences dialog box. The user will be unable to alter

user preferences, such as default printer settings. The user will be locked to

settings already in place at the time Disable User Prefs Dlg is applied to the

user account. See “Changing User Preferences” on page 75 and “User

Preferences” on page 76 for more information.

Setting Description

Creating New Users

For instance, the following procedures, the Home directory for our sample user,

DANIELMI, would be: PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI. The Notes and Mail queues would be:

PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI.NOTES and PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI.MAIL, respectively.

nYou must be logged on to iNEWS NRCS with a user account that has authority to create new

directories and/or queues to complete these procedures.

To create a new directory:

1. Using the database file structure in the Directory panel of the iNEWS Workspace, select

the directory under which you want the new folder to be created, as shown in the

following example.

For instance, for user DANIELMI, you would select PEOPLE, then the folder with the

alphabetic name corresponding to the first letter of the user’s name, such as D. This

ensures the new folder will be created in the D directory (folder).

2. Do one of the following:

tSelect Tools > New Folder.

tRight-click on the folder in the Directory panel, and select New Folder from the

context menu.

A new folder is created under the selected folder. The New-Folder appears at the end of

the list of existing folders.The title, New-Folder, is highlighted, so you can rename it.

3. Type the name of the new folder.

4. Press Enter to save the new folder name. You can now open the new folder (directory)

by double-clicking on it.

You can now create new queues for the user, such as Notes and Mail queues.

4 Users

To create a new queue:

1. Navigate to and select the folder created to hold the queue you want to create, such as

PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI.

2. Do one of the following:

tSelect Tools > New Queue.

tRight-click on the folder in the Directory panel and select New Queue from the

context menu.

A new queue appears under the folder you selected. The New-Queue appears at the end

of the list of existing queues. The title, New-Queue, is highlighted, so you can rename it.

3. Type the name of the new queue, such as MAIL or NOTES.

4. Press Enter to save the new queue name. You can now open the new queue by

double-clicking on it.

Adding a New User Account

When adding a new user account, you have the option of creating the account from scratch

or copying the traits of another user account already in the system. This section covers both

options.

Before you can copy user traits from one user account to another, you must first select the

account you want to copy—that is, select an account to use as a template.

Creating New Users

To define an account as a template for copying to other accounts:

1. Select Tools > Options > Users.

The Manage User Accounts dialog box appears.

nIf you do not have superuser privileges, which permits access to the Manage User Accounts

dialog box, the system will prompt you for the umanager password. If the umanager account

does not exist in the system, then access is only allowed to system administrators—that is,

those with superuser privileges. See “The User Manager Account” on page 96 for more

information. Also, see “User Traits” on page 69 for more information on the superuser trait

and its privileges.

2. Search for the user account you want to use as a template for copying user traits. See

“Searching for User Information” on page 91 for more information.

3. Select the User ID when it appears in the search results list.

4. Click Copy. The User ID should appear to the right of the button. When no template is

selected for copying, the words, “No template set,” appears to the right of the Copy

button.

Once a Template User is established, selecting the New User... button will start with the

same configuration as the template user, and selecting Get from Template when

modifying an existing user will set the configuration to that of the template user.

4 Users

To add a new user account (either from scratch or by copying the user traits):

1. Select Tools > Options > Users.

The Manage User Accounts dialog box appears.

2. Click New User.

The Add New User dialog box appears.

3. In the User ID field, enter the login name of the user account.

4. (Optional) In the User Name field, enter the user’s real name.

5. (Optional) Modify the various traits you want to apply to the new user account.

nA user’s traits can be modified at the time of creation or afterwards from the iNEWS

Workstation or from the console. For more details about the various user traits, see “User

Traits” on page 69 or “User Traits Console Command Summary” on page 632.

6. Click Add to add the new user account.

Searching for User Information

Enabing a New User to Receive Mail

This section gives you the basic steps you need to follow to enable a new user to receive

mail. If you need more information, refer to the information on groups in “Adding Users as

Members of a Group” on page 162.

To enable a new user to receive mail:

tAdd the user to a group in SYSTEM.GROUPS. When the group story is saved, the mail

delivery files are updated automatically.

A group story is one that you created in the system for groups in your organization such

as newscasters, staff, or reporters. By adding the user to a group, the user inherits the

group’s security traits.

Searching for User Information

A search capability in iNEWS lets you search for information about a particular user by

specifying a user name and including certain criteria to refine the search. You can specify

any alphanumeric characters in the search. You can use the asterisk (*), which acts as a

wildcard, only as a suffix—not as a prefix or in the middle of a word. Used alone, the

wildcard is equivalent to “all.” Used with additional information, the wildcard serves as a

parameter to the search.

For instance, if you are searching for all user accounts beginning with Dave, type Dave* (no

space).

4 Users

To search for information about users:

1. Select Tools > Options > Users.

The Manage User Accounts dialog box appears.

2. Enter the name of the user in the User ID field.

3. Click Search or press Enter.

If you search with a wildcard character and the system finds multiple matches, a results

box appears listing all “hits”. You can specify one by double-clicking on it; this opens

the specified user’s information in another dialog box.

The results of the search appear in the User List field in the center of the dialog box.

To quickly locate a name in the User List, type the name you want; the list will be

positioned to a point matching what you type. User names are not case-sensitive, so you

can use lowercase. To prevent you from having to type the whole name, the system

automatically tries to match the letters you supply with a name in the list. Continue

typing until the system locates the name you want.

4. Click Advanced to refine your search for a user.

The Advanced Search Settings dialog box appears with the All Users setting selected by

default.

Searching for User Information

5. Select from the settings to specify additional search criteria. The criteria options are

explained in detail below.

Settings Description

All Users Search through all user accounts on the server.

Superusers Confine the search to user accounts with the superuser attribute.

Non-Superusers Confine the search to user accounts without the superuser attribute.

Blacklisted Users Confine the search to user accounts with the blacklisted attribute.

Non-Blacklisted

Users

Confine the search to user accounts without the blacklisted attribute.

Members of Group Confine the search to user accounts belonging to the security group you

select from the drop-down list.

Users Without

Passwords

Confine the search to user accounts that do not have passwords.

Simplified Users Confine the search to user accounts that have the simplified user trait.

Non-Simplified Users Confine the search to user accounts that do not have the simplified user

trait.

Local Only Users Confine the search to local system user accounts only.

4 Users

6. Click OK to confirm your advanced search setting or click Cancel to cancel it.

7. Click Search to initiate the search.

A progress bar appears if a lengthy search is underway. The results of the search appear

in the User List field in the center of the Manage User Accounts dialog box.

Above the field, iNEWS NRCS will display a brief statement indicating what matched

the search criteria, such as:

All users matching ‘*‘:

Use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the User List field to view the information

headings, such as User Name, Last Login, Read Rate, and so forth.

Non-Local Only

Users

Confine the search to non-local system user accounts only.

Date Range Confine the search to dates you specify in the From and To fields and the

kind of date range:

When the user last logged in

When the user account was created

When the password changed

Specify the date by either clicking the arrow buttons or typing the dates

in ddmmmyyyy format. Indicate the day with two digits, the month with

three letters, and the year with four digits.

Settings Description

Removing User Accounts

You must have access to the Manage User Accounts dialog box to remove user accounts. In

other words, you must be logged on as a system administrator—that is, with an account that

has superuser privileges—or successfully enter the user manager (umanager) password to

remove user accounts.

nBefore removing user accounts from the system, remove the users’ names from the

stories in

SYSTEM.GROUPS

. This reduces the potential for mail bounce back errors.

To remove user accounts:

1. Select Tools > Options > Users.

The Manage User Accounts dialog box appears.

nIf you are logged on as a system administrator, the Manage User Accounts dialog box will

appear automatically, following step 1. Otherwise, iNEWS will prompt you for the umanager

password (if that account exists in the system) before allowing access to the dialog box.

2. Enter the name of the user in the User ID field.

3. Click Search or press Enter.

The results of the search appear in the User List field in the center of the Manage User

Accounts dialog box.

4. Select the name of the user you want to remove by clicking the name in the User List

field.

4 Users

5. Click Remove.

6. Click OK to remove the user or Cancel to stop the removal.

nAfter removing the user, you will also need to remove the user’s Home directory and the

Notes and Mail queues by deleting them from the system’s database file structure. You can

also use the msgclean command at the console to remove any of the user’s unread messages.

The User Manager Account

A user manager has some special system privileges, but not as many as a system

administrator/superuser. For instance, user managers can add, remove, or change any user

account, except those with the superuser attribute.

There can be only one user manager account in iNEWS; however, several users may acquire

user manager privileges by successfully entering the user manager password when

prompted. Unlike a superuser account, the user manager account is not used to log in to the

system. Users with user manager privileges log in to their own accounts, as usual. When

they need to do user manager tasks, they must access the Manage User Accounts dialog box,

by typing in the user manager password.

To create a user manager account:

1. Create a user account as explained in “Adding a New User Account” on page 88.

2. Give the account a User ID:

umanager

3. Assign a password to the account.

4. Make the user manager account blacklisted so that no one can use it to log in to the

system.

5. Assign the account superuser status to prevent a user manager (or anyone who does not

have superuser status) from changing the account’s password.

6. Tell the user manager(s) the ID and password for the user manager account.

cFor further security, a write-access group should be assigned to SYSTEM.GROUPS

and only those with user manager privileges should be included in the group. If no

write-access group is assigned to SYSTEM.GROUPS, then all users who know the

umanager password can access the Manage User Accounts dialog box by selecting

Tools > Options > Users. After a write-access group is set up, any user managers with

nonsuperuser accounts must be included in the write-access group for

SYSTEM.GROUPS or they will not be allowed access to the Manage User Accounts

dialog box. See “Groups Tab” on page 128, “Adding Users as Members of a Group” on

page 162, and “Group Access and Usage Restrictions” on page 169 for more

information.

The Database Manager Account

A database manager has some special system privileges, but not as many as a system

administrator/superuser. For instance, database managers can add, remove, or change any

database trait on a directory or queue in the iNEWS database from a workstation. Database

managers also have access to the CG Template Editor, used to create and modify template

for the Title Entry feature.

There can be only one database manager account in iNEWS; however, several users may

acquire database manager privileges by successfully entering the database manager

password when prompted. Unlike a superuser account, the database manager account is not

used to log in to the system. Users with database manager privileges log in to their own

accounts, as usual. When they need to do database manager tasks, they must access the

Directory/Queue Properties dialog box. To modify anything in the dialog box, they must

provide the database manager password.

To create a database manager account:

1. Create a user account as explained in “Adding a New User Account” on page 88.

2. Give the account a User ID:

dbmanager

3. Assign a password to the account.

4. Make the database manager account blacklisted so that no one can use it to log in to the

system.

5. Assign the account superuser status to prevent a user manager (or anyone who does not

have superuser status) from changing the account’s password.

6. Tell the database manager(s) the ID and password for the database manager account.

Logging Out All Users

Sometimes maintenance of the iNEWS system requires you to first log out all users before

completing a certain task, such as shutting down the system. This section explains the best

way to log out all users from the console.

To log out all users:

1. Select all servers.

2. To prevent users from logging in, take the system offline by typing:

offline

Use

offline silent

if you want to suppress output of messages from new user login

attempts.

4 Users

3. Use the broadcast command to send a message warning all users that are logged in that

they must log out and why. If the system will be shut down, include the time it will be

shut down. Here are a few examples:

NRCS-A$ broadcast -l WARNING\! System shut down at 12PM

NRCS-A$ broadcast -l LOG OUT\! System shut down at 5 minutes.

NRCS-A$ broadcast -dl LOG OUT\! System shut down in 10 seconds.

nThe backslash (\) before the exclamation point (!) is required because the exclamation point

is a reserved character in Linux.

The -l (the letter L, not the number 1) after broadcast is to limit the message to local

workstations only and not to users connected through Community. You may also add -d after

broadcast and before the message if you want your message to appear at the workstation as

a popup message. The two can be combined as shown (-dl) to broadcast local popup

messages.

4. At the specified shutdown time, check the system for any users still logged in by

selecting one server and typing:

list s

A message similar to the following appears:

G505 miller A

G500 allen B

G507 stevens A

R801 stevens A

A connect session will show up as an ‘R’ device. The system administrator must notify

them of the shutdown by some other means, such as by telephone.

cYou must ensure that all users are logged out if shutting down the system. If a user is in

a connect session when the system is shut down, the user’s workstation stops, the

session is disconnected, and any unsaved work is lost. Ensure any connect session users

have logged out before you continue the shutdown procedure.

5. To stop a connect session, select the appropriate server and then use the following

format of the stop command:

stop <device number>

For instance, to stop the connect session (

R801 stevens A

) that was shown in the

previous example, type:

stop 801

6. Select all servers.

7. Log out all users by typing:

logout all

nIf a user is editing a story, the system saves the file and then logs out the user. The logout

command will not log out users who are in connect sessions.

5The Database: Directories, Queues,

and Stories

All relevant iNEWS information—except the system software and the Linux files—is stored

in the iNEWS database. This database contains stories, queues, and directories or more

specifically: scripts, rundowns, e-mail, messages, users, groups and their memberships, and

any other kind of information entered into the system. Some database maintenance, such as

altering the database file structure and traits, can be done from the console or from any

iNEWS Workstation. This chapter focuses on maintenance tasks at the workstation when

possible. However, when a task can be done at both the workstation and console, the console

information is provided as an appendix in this guide. See procedures for using the console in

“Managing Traits at the Console” on page 623.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Overview of the iNEWS Database

•Restrictions to Directory or Queue Creation

•Creating a New Directory

•Creating a New Queue

•Creating a New Story

•Renaming a Directory or Queue

•Deleting a Directory or Queue

•Recovering a Killed Story

•Viewing Database Traits

•Changing Database Traits

•Database Purge Intervals and Limits

•Identifying Locked Queues and Stories

•Removing Locks from a Workstation

•Unbusy Stories and Queues

Overview of the iNEWS Database

The iNEWS database is where all the data, such as scripts, rundowns, user accounts, and so

forth, are stored. The database is structured in a way to promote ease of maintenance. For

instance, it contains a file structure made up of directories, that contain other folders or

queues, which in turn contain stories. It is similarly to a filing cabinet.

In iNEWS, the database file structure—directories and queues—can be seen (depending on

your access privileges) in the Directory panel of the iNEWS Workspace. Directories, also

known as folders, are indicated by manila folders, such as the People directory in the

previous graphic. Queues are indicated by three overlapping pieces of paper, such as the

Dead queue.

nIf your site uses the Projects feature of iNEWS, tabs will appear in the Directory panel

letting you select whether you want to view the iNEWS database file structure via the

Directory tab or a list of defined projects via the Project tab. For more information on the

Projects feature, see “iNEWS Projects” on page 465.

The scripts, notes, e-mail, news stories, and other kinds of information are all called stories;

each story is contained in a particular queue, and each queue in a single directory. A

directory can also be contained within another directory in which case it would be called a

subdirectory or sub-folder of that directory.

Directories and queues have database traits that determine how the system manages the

stories they contain, and also what actions users can perform with those stories.

Restrictions to Directory or Queue Creation

101

For instance, by modifying the database traits of a particular queue, you can:

• Set its stories to read-only

• Restrict who can read them

• Enable the system to routinely purge stories in the queue older than a certain number of

days

Database traits are used in conjunction with the user traits discussed in “Users” on page 65.

For instance, stories in a queue that has a read group specified can be read only by users who

are members of that user group.

Restrictions to Directory or Queue Creation

Before you can modify the database traits of queues or directories, the queues and

directories must exist in the database. If they do not, you can create them from the iNEWS

Workstation. However, there are certain restrictions you should be aware of when creating

new directories and queues.

• The total path name of a directory, including the separator characters (.), cannot exceed

60 characters.

• The total path name of a queue, including the separator characters (.), cannot exceed 62

characters.

• Each branch of a path name—that is the name between periods—cannot exceed 20

characters.

• The number of directory levels available is limited to 31.

• You cannot use a space or period in directory or queue names.

• The system has a limit of 250 queues per directory.

nThe 250 limit also applies to first-level sub-folders in a directory. If you need more than 250

in a directory, such as employee folders, create alphabetic sub-folders on the first level, then

place the personal folders in the matching sub-folder. For instance, in a given directory, you

could have 26 sub-folders, each with one of the 26 letters of the English alphabet as a name.

This enables you to have 250 personal folders in each of the 26 alphabetic sub-folders;

that’s enough personal folders for up to 6,500 employees. See “Creating a New User Area in

News Database” on page 86 for more information.

cWhile punctuation marks can be used in path names, Avid strongly recommends their

use be limited to dashes and underscores only to avoid confusion for FTP clients, like

teleprompters, accessing the database. It’s best to limit path names to 0-9, A-Z, hyphen

(-), and underscore (_) characters only because using anything else will have

consequences for console commands and could affect system functioning.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

102

Ordinarily, directories and queues are listed in alphabetical order within their parent

directory. However, you can add items to a directory in a different order. For instance, if you

had directories for each month in the Futures directory, you would want them to appear in

order by month (January, February, and so on). To do this, turn on the sequential database

trait for the parent directory before you create the new items. See “Database Traits

Summary” on page 122 for more information.

Creating a New Directory

If you are creating a new first-level directory, be sure to select the server rather than a

directory or folder as explained in this procedure.

To create a new directory (folder):

1. Log in as a system administrator unless you have write-access to the parent queue or

directory. This ensures that you have full access to the database.

2. Using the database file structure in the Directory panel of the iNEWS Workspace, select

the directory under which you want the new folder to be created, as shown in the

following example.

For instance, you could select the Shows folder if you want to add a new directory for a

10 PM show. After the new sub-folder (10P) is created, you can create queues or

additional sub-folders in it.

3. Do one of the following:

tSelect Tools > New Folder.

tRight-click on the directory—or server, if you are creating a new first-level

folder—in the Directory panel, and choose New Folder from the context menu.

A new folder is created under the selected folder. The New-Folder appears at the end of

the list of existing folders.The title, New-Folder, is highlighted, so you can rename it.

Creating a New Directory

103

4. Type the name of the new folder, such as

10P

5. Press Enter to save the new folder name. The newly created folder will inherit the

database traits of its parent directory initially. You can open the new folder by

double-clicking on it.

nOnce created, directories cannot be renamed from the iNEWS Workstation. If you incorrectly

name a newly created directory, delete it and recreate it with the appropriate name. See

“Renaming a Directory or Queue” on page 113 or “Deleting a Directory or Queue” on

page 115 for more information.

After you create a directory, you can configure its properties by right-clicking on the queue

and selecting Properties. A quick way to apply properties is to use a template. For more

information on copying properties from templates, see “Directory/Queue Properties Dialog

Box” on page 122.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

104

Creating a New Queue

Similar to creating a new directory, you can create a new queue from an iNEWS

Workstation.

To create a new queue:

1. Navigate to and select the directory (folder) created to hold the queue you want to

create.

For instance, select the Shows folder, then the 10P folder, if you want to create new

queues, such as the Rundown and Master queues for the 10PM show.

The new queue will be created in the folder you select.

2. Do one of the following:

tSelect Tools > New Queue.

tRight-click on the folder in the Directory panel and choose New Queue from the

context menu.

A new queue appears under the folder you selected. The New-Queue appears at the end

of the list of existing queues.The title, New-Queue, is highlighted, so you can rename it.

Creating a New Queue

105

3. Type the name of the new queue, such as

RUNDOWN

MASTER

4. Press Enter to save the new queue name. The newly created queue will inherit the

database traits of its parent directory initially. You can open the new queue by

double-clicking on it.

nOnce created, queues cannot be renamed from the iNEWS Workstation. If you incorrectly

name a newly created queue, delete it and recreate it with the appropriate name. See

“Renaming a Directory or Queue” on page 113 or “Deleting a Directory or Queue” on

page 115 for more information.

After you create a queue, you can configure its properties by right-clicking on the queue and

selecting Properties. A quick way to apply properties is to use a template. For more

information on copying properties from templates, see “Directory/Queue Properties Dialog

Box” on page 122.

Outgoing Mail Queue

When someone sends e-mail, the first thing your system does is move the mail to the

outgoing mail queue, usually called SYSTEM.MAIL.OUT.

nThe outgoing mail queue’s name is defined in

/site/dict/queues

. When your system was

installed, the outgoing mail queue was defined in this dictionary as SYSTEM.MAIL.OUT. To

change this name, modify the dictionary entry in

/site/dict/queues

. The token used to

define the outgoing mail queue is Q_MAILOUT. See “System Configuration” on page 243

for more information on editing system files.

Mail always uses the form that is assigned to the outgoing mail queue. See “Mail Form” on

page 230 for more information.

After mail arrives in that queue, a utility program known as the mail server processes and

sends it to its intended destination. If the outgoing mail queue, SYSTEM.MAIL.OUT, does

not exist in the System directory, the mail server cannot distribute e-mail. To create this

queue, follow the instructions provided in “Creating a New Queue” on page 104, making

these adjustments:

• The queue’s name should be “Out.”

• The queue should be located in the Mail folder, which is in the System directory. If the

Mail folder (directory) does not exist, create it. See “Creating a New Directory” on page

102 for more information.

Moreover, the Out queue’s read group must be set properly for the mail server to process

mail correctly. See “Read Group” on page 171 for more information. Although not required,

you can restrict read permission for the queue SYSTEM.MAIL.OUT to a group that has no

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

106

users. Doing so does not interfere with anyone’s ability to send e-mail, but it prevents

anyone (except superusers) from reading mail in SYSTEM.MAIL.OUT waiting to be

processed. See “Restricting Both Reading and Writing” on page 174 for more information.

Also, for your system to notify the mail server when new mail arrives in

SYSTEM.MAIL.OUT, that queue must have the same mailbox number assigned to it as the

mail server. If the queue does not have a mailbox or has an incorrect one, your system has no

way to notify the mail server when there is mail to process. See “Maintain Tab” on page 130

for more information.

nThe mailbox number is not solely related to e-mail. This database trait lets you link a queue

to a server (utility program) so that the system notifies the server program when stories are

added to or edited in the queue. See “Maintain Tab” on page 130 and “Servers” on page

315 for more information.

Dead Letter Queue

Your system must also have a dead letter queue, usually called SYSTEM.MAIL.ERROR.

This queue is a final destination for any e-mail that your system is unable to deliver to the

addressee or return to the sender.

nThe dead letter queue’s name is defined in

/site/dict/queues

as SYSTEM.MAIL.ERROR.

To change the name of the queue, modify its dictionary entry in

/site/dict/queues

If SYSTEM.MAIL.ERROR does not exist, any mail that the mail server cannot deliver or

return to the sender is put in the Dead queue. To create SYSTEM.MAIL.ERROR, follow the

instructions provided in “Creating a New Queue” on page 104, making these adjustments:

• The queue’s name should be “Error.”

• The queue should be in the Mail folder, located in the System directory. If the Mail

folder (directory) does not exist, create it. See “Creating a New Directory” on page 102

for more information.

Returned mail may contain sensitive information. Therefore, restrict read permission for

SYSTEM.MAIL.ERROR to a group that has no members. Then, only superusers can read

mail in the queue. See “Read Group” on page 171 for more information. Examine the queue

occasionally to see whether any mail exists.

Creating a New Queue

107

Search Queues

A search queue is a special queue that stores a pre-defined query of indexed queues, along

with its own queue form and read group. When users with proper read access open a search

queue, a fast text search (FTS) is activated, and the results are delivered to the workspace in

the Queue panel instead of the Search Results pane. The results can then be copied, moved,

deleted, and edited from the workspace. How fast the results are returned depends on the

speed of your FTS system, the size of your index, and the number of areas that is being

searched, but the usual timeframe is between one and 15 seconds.

To create a search queue:

1. At an iNEWS Workstation, in the Directory panel, right-click on a folder in which you

want the search queue created.

2. Select New Search Queue.

The New Search Queue dialog box appears.

3. Type the name of the new search queue and click OK. The naming restrictions for

search queues are the same for those of directories and other queues.

The Search Queue Setup dialog box opens with the name of the search queue appearing

in square brackets in the title bar. For instance, CRIME is the search queue name in the

following sample image.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

108

4. Select the indexed queue or queues you want to search from your site or a Community

site, if available. To choose multiple queues, press and hold the Control key while

clicking on your selections.

5. Use the Search For area of the Search Criteria tab to set the filters for your search.

Otherwise, you can type in your query using the Raw Query Editor.

If using the Raw Query Editor, you should be familiar with syntax and operators used in

Find All searches, since they are the same for defining raw queries. For instance, the

following characters are used for the operators: And, Or, And Not, and Has Not.

Operator Character

And Ampersand (&)

Or Pipe symbol ( | )

AndNot Caret symbol ( ^ )

Has Not Exclamation mark (!)

Creating a New Queue

109

Parentheses are used to specify evaluation order. For instance, you want to search for

stories that mention either Hillary or Bill Clinton, but you only want stories that do not

also mention their daughter, Chelsea.

You could enter:

(Hillary & Clinton) | (Bill & Clinton) &!(Chelsea)

The combination &! accomplishes the same thing as the caret symbol (^) would in a

query. Another example is a query that searches for stories about domestic policies or

domestic agenda, but not domestic abuse. In this example the query might be written

this way:

(domestic & agenda) | (domestic & policy) ^ (domestic & abuse)

An asterisk (*) may be used as a wildcard for partial spellings, such as

airp*

to find

stories with words such as airport, airplane, and airplay.

6. Use the Date Search area to define a time frame for the query; you can search by the

date a story aired or was created, or by last date a story was modified.

7. (Optional) Maximum hits can also be altered in the Search Queue Setup dialog box. The

default is 10. When a user opens a search queue, the search’s result count is displayed in

the status bar.

8. Click Save to save your new search queue. It will appear in the Directory panel.

Search queues are distinguished from other types of queues by the icon. For search

queues, a magnifying glass icon appears, as shown at left.

9. After the search queue is created, by default it will use the queue form and read group

already associated with the parent directory in which the search queue was created. You

can view these properties or modify them by doing the following:

a. Right-click on the new search queue in the Directory panel.

b. Select Properties.

An abbreviated version of the Queue Properties dialog box opens, showing only the

Forms and Groups tabs.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

110

Only the queue form property on the Forms tab may be altered for a search queue.

Though the other properties are displayed, they are read-only and not used by the

system.

On the Groups tab, only the read group property may be altered. A setting of

!<none>

means no read group is defined; therefore, there is no restriction, and

every user can see the search queue.

Creating a New Story

111

c. Click OK. If any settings were modified, they will be saved. To close without

saving, click Cancel.

nFor more information about groups or forms, see “Groups” on page 151 or “Forms” on

page 197. See also “Database Traits Summary” on page 122.

Viewing Search Queue Information from the Console

A system administrator can view some information about search queues from the console,

by using variations of the list command.

To view information about a search queue:

tUse the following format:

list sq -v <search queue name>

For instance:

NRCS-A$ list sq-v news.football

NEWS.FOOTBALL query id:10522758

{MaxFound=100[SPIDEY]WIRES.ALL}((football))

For more information, see “list sq” on page 509.

Creating a New Story

In addition to opening existing stories, you can create new stories in a queue.

To create a story:

1. Open the queue in which you want to create a story.

2. Position your cursor in the queue below where you want the new story created.

3. Do one of the following:

tSelect File > New Story.

tPress Ctrl+N.

tPress the Insert key.

A new queue entry appears in the Queue panel as a blank row, and a blank story appears

in the Story panel.

4. In the Slug column of the Queue panel, enter the new story’s title.

5. Enter any other important information in the remaining columns for the new story.

6. In the Story panel, enter the story’s text.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

112

Using Script Templates

Script templates are templates created by an administrator for users to quickly insert

predefined text into stories. The database structure for script templates is the same as the

structure used for forms and lists:

SYSTEM.SCRIPT-TEMPLATES.<first letter>.<name>

For example, if a standard weather story has a set of production cues and presenter text that

are always the same, you can create a story that will be a script template in

SYSTEM.SCRIPT-TEMPLATES.W.WEATHER. In this story, place the standard text,

presenter text, and production cues found in standard weather stories. After the template

story is saved, the template is available to users via the Story menu or through an option in

the Story Text sub-panel’s context menu.

To use a script template:

1. Right-click in the Story Text sub-panel.

2. Select Insert Script Template. The Template dialog box appears with a list of all

available templates.

3. Enter the name or select the template from the list.

4. Click OK.

After the template is chosen, the template is inserted in the story’s body at the cursor

position.

nScript templates can be used to replace the use of complex macros to insert reusable

material in stories.

Renaming a Directory or Queue

113

Renaming a Directory or Queue

You cannot change the name of a directory or queue from an iNEWS Workstation. However,

you can rename one from the console. All traits are preserved when a folder or queue is

renamed.

cDo not rename queues on an active database. Do not run directory or queue

modification console commands (such as dbvisit or dbtraits) at the same time as the

rename command.

To rename a directory or queue in the database:

1. At the console, enter superuser mode.

2. Select all computers.

3. Take the system offline by typing the command:

offline

4. Broadcast a message instructing users to log out.

5. Log out all users on the system before renaming a queue or directory. This ensures that

no stories are open for editing.

cIf users are not logged out, changes to stories may not be saved after the queue or

directory is renamed. It is often most efficient to make several name changes at once.

See “Logging Out All Users” on page 97 for more information.

6. Type:

stop all

. This command stops running all utility programs—known as

servers—wire programs, and devices.

7. Select one computer.

8. Type the rename command to rename the folder or queue. Use the following format:

rename [-v|-r] <from> <to>

For instance, to rename your People folder to STAFF, select one computer and type:

NRCS-B# rename people staff

A message similar to the following appears:

Do you really want to rename PEOPLE

and all its sub-directories to STAFF ?

56 records will be modified [y/n]:

To display a console message for each renamed folder and queue, include the -v (for

verbose) option with the rename command, such as:

NRCS-B# rename -v people staff

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

114

cIf an attempt to rename a folder or queue was interrupted by a system crash, complete

it by re-entering the same command with the -r option. Use this option only to resume

an interrupted renaming—at any other time, its use will corrupt the database.

9. To continue with the renaming, type:

. A message similar to the following appears:

56 records will be modified [y/n]: y

Adding new directories...

Updating directory names...

56 directories renamed

1 directories added

The system verifies that the queue or folder you specified exists, and it creates new

folders necessary to complete your command (such as STAFF in this example). If you

choose a pathname over 63 characters, the following appears:

TO: name too long

nBefore modifying files, the system checks for name length overflow. If any of the

directory/queue names exceed their maximum length, no changes are made.

10. A verification request appears:

Do you want to update the user file (MAIL, HOME, DEST)? [y/n]:

The user file is where the names of users’ mail queues, home folders, and automatic

destinations are stored. If you answer y, any item affected by renaming is changed

automatically. If you answer no, you must change them yourself. Typically, answer yes.

Do you want to update the user file (MAIL, HOME, DEST)? [y/n]: y

23 user records modified

11. Manually update any other references on the iNEWS system to the renamed folders.

nUpdate the references while the system is unavailable to users. Failure to update any

references affected by renaming a folder or queue can cause problems with system

operation.

These references can include:

- Command bar icons set up by users

- Your system’s service table

-Dialogs

- Keyboard description stories

- Server or Rx/Tx link job lists

- Wire distribution or keyword stories

Deleting a Directory or Queue

115

- Your system’s queue dictionary (/site/dict/queues)

12. Select all servers.

13. Restart all devices by typing:

restart all

. You will see Hot-to-go messages as each

device starts.

14. Bring the system back online by typing:

online

. This allows users to log in.

15. Press Ctrl+D to leave superuser mode.

Deleting a Directory or Queue

If a queue or story is locked, unlock it first before deleting it from the database.

Ideally, each directory or queue should be empty of other directories, queues, and stories,

before it is deleted, but it is not required.

cIf a directory contains sub-folders or queues when you attempt to delete it, iNEWS will

prompt you for confirmation. If you affirm the deletion, the directory and all its

contents will be deleted from the system. Caution should be taken so that sub-folders

and sub-queues are not inadvertently deleted.

To delete a directory or queue from the database:

1. Log in as a system administrator unless you have write access to the queue or directory.

2. Select the directory or queue you want to delete.

3. Do one of the following:

tSelect Tools > Delete Folder (or Delete Queue).

tRight-click on the directory or queue, then select Delete Folder (or Delete Queue)

from the context menu.

Recovering a Killed Story

You can recover a story that has been killed—moved to and currently resiing in the Dead

queue—from any iNEWS Workstation.

To retrieve a story from the Dead queue:

1. Log in as a system administrator—that is, with a superuser account. This ensures you

access to the Dead queue. On some systems, access to the Dead queue is restricted, and

stories within it are set to retain their original read and write permissions.

2. Navigate to the Dead queue in the Directory panel and open it by double-clicking on it.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

116

3. Locate the story you want to recover in the Dead queue by scanning the list of stories

displayed in the Queue panel for the story title (slug) or using the Find or Find All

command. The Dead queue cannot be indexed, so you cannot use the Fast Text Search

feature.

4. Select the story or stories you want to retrieve by doing one of the following:

tClick on the selector button located to the left of the story’s row in the Queue panel.

The entire row is highlighted when selected.

tMove the cursor to the row and press Shift-Spacebar.

tClick on each row’s selector button while holding down the Control (Ctrl) key to

select multiple stories. The Shift key can be held down if you want to select all story

rows between two mouse clicks.

5. Copy the selected story (or stories) to the new location by doing one of the following:

tClick on and drag the highlighted selection to another queue in the Directory panel

and release. The selected stories will be copied to the new queue location.

tUse the Copy and Paste buttons or the Edit menu options to copy and paste the

highlighted selection into a new queue location.

tUse the Duplicate command to copy the highlighted selection to another

location—particularly if the Dead queue is read-only.

tDrag the story or stories from the Dead queue into another queue in another

workspace. This lets you position the story or stories where you want them.

Viewing Database Traits

You can get information about your iNEWS database from both the iNEWS Workstation and

the console. Which one you use depends on what information you want to view.

This section provides procedures for viewing database traits for directories or queues from

either the workstation or the console. For more information about getting information on

stories, see “Viewing Information about Stories” on page 118.

Information Wanted Source to Use

Information about a directory or queue iNEWS Workstation

Information about several directories or queues

simultaneously

iNEWS Console

Information about stories in the database iNEWS Console

Viewing Database Traits

117

To view database information about directories or queues from the console:

tUse the following format of the list command:

list d <folder/queue name>

nThis command has a verbose option,

list d-v

, which gives you more detailed information.

To view database information on a specific directory or queue from an iNEWS

Workstation:

1. Log in to iNEWS at a workstation.

2. Open an iNEWS Workspace.

3. Navigate to the directory or queue you want in the Directory panel.

4. Right-click on the name of the directory or queue.

5. Select Properties in the context menu.

The Directory/Queue Properties dialog box shows you the properties (traits) for the

directory or queue you selected; however, its look can vary. For instance, the Locks tab

does not appear when viewing properties of directories. If you are not logged in as a

system administrator, and no database manager account was created in iNEWS, the

dialog will appear like this:

The options in the dialog box appear gray, indicating they are for viewing only and

cannot be altered. Any user can view the traits of directories and queues in the iNEWS

database from a workstation.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

118

If a database manager account exists, then a Database manager login button will appear

in the bottom left corner of the dialog box. See “Changing Database Traits” on page 136

for more information.

nFor more information about the various database traits available from the iNEWS

Workstation, see “Database Traits Summary” on page 122.

Viewing Information about Stories

The list q command lists story information at at the console for any of your system’s queues.

The basic format of the command is as follows:

list q <queue name> [<record limit>]

nThe list q command has a verbose option that gives you more detailed information. For

instance, a verbose list, such as

list q-v

, includes read and write group information for

each story in the queue. Read and write groups are explained in “Groups” on page 151.

Also, see “Managing Traits at the Console” on page 623.

The <record limit> specifies the number of stories from the queue you want to list. Queues

might contain thousands of stories so a command without a specified <record limit> might

scroll large amounts of output. For instance, to limit the list to the first three stories in

PEOPLE.CAROLYN.NOTES, type:

list q people.carolyn.notes 2

A message similar to the following appears:

PEOPLE.CAROLYN.NOTES.SEARCH id=449889

rec quick index LHDM-WObfpRmF f.id time modified-time

2 pm-chronology --DM-W------- 457243 165 Jul 10 16:16:39 2010

3 pm-thumbnails --DM-W------- 487595 163 Jul 10 16:21:17 2010

By default, the stories are listed in chronological order with the oldest story first.

The one-letter flags (

LHDM-WObfpRmF

) after the quick indexes provide current status

information. The flags are:

Flag Status Information Flag Status Information

L Locked b Story’s body (text) is edit locked.

H Held f Story’s fields are edit locked.

D Duplicated p Story’s production cues are edit locked

Viewing Database Traits

119

You cannot change any of these flags from the console, except the edit-locked status, which

you can remove from a story with the unbusy console command. For instructions, see

“Unbusy Stories and Queues” on page 147.

To list information for a particular story:

tUse the following format of the list command:

list qindex=<index value> q <queue name>

The index value is the value of the selected sort field of the story you want to list. This

value is typically the text found in the title field, but you can set different fields as the

index field.

For instance, to get story information for a story called Nomad in the queue

PEOPLE.SMITH.NOTES, type:

list qindex=nomad q people.smith.notes

A screen similar to the following appears:

PEOPLE.SMITH.NOTES id=449889

rec quick index LHDM-WObfpRmF f.id time modified-time

3901 bc-exp--nomad --DM--------- 420690 165 Jul 6 20:23:11 2010

In this example of the story in PEOPLE.SMITH.NOTES, the D and M flags appear,

indicating the story is duplicated and has the modified flag set.

The quick index value can be uppercase or lowercase and must be a single word with no

spaces unless you precede the space with a backslash (\) or put the index value inside

quotation marks (“ ”), such as either of these examples:

list qindex=terror\ suspect q show.10pm.rundown

list qindex=“terror suspect” q show.10pm.rundown

Viewing Who Moved, Duplicated, or Killed a Story

Additional options for the list command can also tell you the last person to move, duplicate,

or kill a story (sending it to the Dead queue).

M Modified R Read only

- ----------- m Mail

W Wire F Floating

O Ordered

Flag Status Information Flag Status Information

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

120

To list the last person to move, duplicate, or kill a particular story:

tUse the following format of the list command:

list qindex=<search word> q-mb <queue name> [<record limit>]

Since the Index field is typically the field containing the story’s title (slug), it can be

used as the search word.

The search word is a word from the Index (sort) field of the story. It is not case-sensitive.

It must be a single word with no spaces unless you precede the space with a backslash

(\) or put the search words inside quotation marks (“ ”). The record limit is the numerical

limit of stories provided in response to your list command—for instance, the most

recent stories killed in the Dead queue.

To list information for each story in a queue without using a word in the Index field:

tUse the following format of the list command:

list q-mb <queue name> [<record limit>]

The b in the command is optional and stands for backwards.

- list q-m — lists stories beginning with the oldest story in the queue

- list q-mb — reverses the order and lists stories from the most recent material in the

queue, such as the most recently killed stories in Dead.

You can also run the command without the m to see the date and time stories were

moved, duplicated or killed.

For instance, type:

list q-b dead 5

A screen similar to the following appears:

DEAD id=123231

rec quick index LHDM-WObfpRmF f.id time modified-time

0 ---M--O----- 314490 0 Sep 6 09:51:58 2010

-1 kyw-directors --DM--O----- 313587 15 Sep 5 11:47:33 2010

-2 a ---M-------- 161746 11 Sep 6 09:15:06 2010

-3 sep 2010 ---M-------- 314093 0 Sep 5 17:34:19 2010

-4 008 --DM--O----- 313555 600 Sep 5 16:49:24 2010

Here is an example of how to obtain the five most recently killed stories in dead:

list q-mb dead 5

Viewing Database Traits

121

A screen similar to the following appears:

DEAD id=123231

rec quick index LHDM-WObfpRmF f.id time user name

0 ---M--O----- 314490 0 palmer

-1 kyw-directors --DM--O----- 313587 15 williams

-2 a ---M-------- 161746 11 adbpurge

-3 sep 2000 ---M-------- 314093 0

-4 008 --DM--O----- 313555 600 ragusa

As shown in the example, some stories might be sent to the Dead queue by system

processes, such as the automatic dbpurge (adbpurge). Lines without names are old

versions of stories that were not written in the database by a user; for instance, they

might have been put in the database through txnet.

Here is an example of how to get information for a story called “Camera” in the

ASSIGNMENTS.MONDAY queue:

list qindex=camera q-m assignments.monday

A screen similar to the following appears:

ASSIGNMENTS.MONDAY id=14569

rec quick index LHDM-WObfpRmF f.id time user name

0 camera --DM-------- 16217 274 williams

Williams was the last person to move, duplicate, or kill this story; list q-m does not

make any distinction between these actions. Killed stories can reside only in the Dead

queue, while duplicated stories will have the D flag on their listing, as shown in the

previous example.

nIf a utility program, such as a server or link, moves, duplicates, or kills a story, its device

number is listed in the list q-m or list q-mb display.

When using the list command, long list results will scroll out of sight on the console

screen. Since you might need to search through a long list of stories, such as 5000 in the

Dead queue, you can redirect the output of the list command to a file in the database. For

instance, the following example redirects output to a user’s Notes queue.

NRCS-A# list q-mb dead 5000 | doc -ptu people.p.palmer.notes

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

122

Database Traits Summary

Assigning traits can be done from the iNEWS Workstation as well as the console. For

information on viewing and altering database traits from the console, see Appendix G.

On the iNEWS Workstation, the database traits are grouped together on various tabs in the

Directory/Queue Properties dialog box. This section provides a detailed description of the

dialog box, tabs, and database traits. In some cases, traits offer a selection of options, such as

what read group is assigned to a queue. These traits are usually shown as drop-down lists in

the dialog box. In other cases, traits are either assigned to a queue or not—that is, the trait is

“turned on” or “turned off.” These traits are usually shown as check boxes in the dialog box.

Directory/Queue Properties Dialog Box

The appearance of the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box changes slightly, depending

on whether you choose to view properties for a queue or a directory. First, the dialog box’s

title bar will appear different, indicating that choice—either Directory Properties or Queue

Properties.

Other differences include check boxes and tabs. For instance, the Apply changes... check

box—shown in graphic on the left—only appears in the bottom left corner of the Directory

Properties dialog box. Also, the Ordered check box—shown in graphic on the right—only

appears in the right column of the Forms tab in the Queue Properties dialog box.

Both, however, have a Copy From Template button, which can be used to apply directory or

queue property settings from a template to the chosen folder or queue, respectively. This can

be very helpful when adding a new newscast to the database file structure.

Viewing Database Traits

123

nAvid recommends the use of templates to help speed up the process of future configuration

modifications as well as to help avoid the potential for user error.

When you click the Copy From Template button, the following dialog box opens with a

drop-down list of available templates from which to choose.

The templates in the list are created as queues in SYSTEM.PROPERTIES.

The number of tabs in the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box varies, depending on

whether you choose to view properties for a queue or a directory. The tabs are:

•Forms

•Groups

•Maintain

• User Interface

• Interplay Server

• Locks (This tab only appears in the Queue Properties dialog box.)

Each tab is explained in the following sections.

Forms Tab

The Forms tab is unique because it is the only tab that allows access to certain items even

when a user is connected to a local database, as opposed to the online database on the

system’s servers.

nIf you are connected to a local database on your workstation, you can still change the queue

and story form selection using the drop-down lists. However, all other traits in the

Directory/Queue Properties dialog box will appear gray, indicating access to them is

read-only.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

124

Trait Options Description

Queue The Queue drop-down list lets you select a form to display information in the

Queue panel. The form defines what fields appear, which should be a sub-set

of the fields used in the story form. A field included in the queue form that

does not actually exist in the story form cannot be written to in the Queue

panel. When !<none> is selected, no form is applied. This drop-down list is

the equivalent of the qform database trait (dbtrait) at the console.

Story The Story drop-down list lets you select a form to display information in the

Story Form panel. When !<none> is selected, no form is applied. This

drop-down list is the equivalent of the sform dbtrait at the console.

Index Field The Index Field drop-down list lets you select a form field that will be used to

sort the queue alphabetically. The cursor is placed on this form field by

default when a user displays stories in a queue. This drop-down list is the

equivalent of the sortfield dbtrait at the console. For more information, see

“Index Field/Story Form Compatibility Error Messages” on page 126.

nThe optional fields in the Index Field drop-down list depend on the form selected in the Story

drop-down list on the Forms tab. For instance, if you select a story form that only contains two

fields, such as Title and Writer, then those two fields will be the only options listed in the Index

Field drop-down list.

Update existing... The Update existing stories to use story form check box, when selected,

changes the story form assignment for previously existing stories within a

queue. This check box is the equivalent of the cform dbtrait at the console.

Strip embedded... The Strip embedded form info for existing stories check box, when selected,

removes embedded form traits from stories. For instance, queues with the

Forms Allowed trait stamp the look of the story form into the story.

Assigning a different story form to one of these queues and selecting Update

existing... check box will not affect the look of stories with the embedded

forms. You would need to strip the embedded “look” from the story so it

would then use the form assigned to the queue it is in. This check box is the

equivalent of the stripform dbtrait at the console.

nThe Update existing... and Strip embedded... check boxes are not database traits, but rather,

they are used to apply current settings and/or changes in the dialog box at present. This means

they will always appear unchecked when the dialog box opens, and they will not appear at all

if the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box is opened in read-only mode.

Viewing Database Traits

125

Forms Allowed The Forms Allowed check box must be assigned to all queues in the Forms

directory. The forms will not work without this database trait applied.

Additionally, this trait can be assigned to any queue in the database, but is

usually only assigned to other queues that receive stories from other systems

via rxnet/txnet and then build forms for those stories, as needed. This check

box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +f|-f at the console.

Indexed The Indexed check box, when selected, applies the Index trait. This trait is

assigned to queues and directories you want to be indexed by the Fast Text

Search (FTS) server. This allows for quicker searching of the queue or

directory.

This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +index|-index at the console.

See “Batch Indexing” on page 377 for more information.

Sorted The Sorted check box, when selected, applies the sort trait, which determines

whether or not the stories in a queue will be sorted. Queues with the sort trait

are sorted by the form field you choose in the Index Field drop-down list. For

instance, you may want to sort a rundown queue by the Page Number field,

so when a user changes the numbering in the fields of that column, the rows

automatically adjust to the numerical order. See “Turning Off the Ordered

Trait of a Sorted Queue” on page 138 for more information. This check box

is the equivalent of the dbtrait +so|-so at the console.

Ordered The Ordered check box only appears on the Queue Properties dialog box, not

the Directory Properties dialog box. The Ordered check box is a unique

check box, because it might appear as read-only, depending on the

circumstance. It is provided to show you whether a queue is currently

ordered. This is particularly helpful in identifying queues that have the sort

trait, but are no longer being sorted because a user manually adjusted the

order of stories in the queue. If a sorted queue was manually ordered, the

check box appears white and contains a checkmark, which you can remove if

you want to reinstate the sorting feature. Unchecking the check box is the

equivalent of the dbtrait, -o, at the console. See “Turning Off the Ordered

Trait of a Sorted Queue” on page 138 for more information. However, if a

queue is not ordered at present, then the box will appear gray and empty. You

cannot select this box to order a queue.

Trait Options Description

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

126

Index Field/Story Form Compatibility Error Messages

A story form is a form that defines the fields displayed in the Story Form panel of the

iNEWS Workspace. The fields typically consist of important information about the stories

kept in the queue, such as the title, writer’s name, and the dates the story was created or

modified. The field chosen as the Index Field in the Queue Properties dialog box serves two

purposes:

• It is the field used to sort stories in sorted queues.

• When the Index Field is selected during a Find or Find All search of a non-indexed

queue, the system is able to return search results faster.

The Index Field is not associated with Fast Text Searches (FTS).

Therefore, it is crucial that the field selected as the Index Field actually exists as part of the

story form. For this reason, the system will check for compatibility between the settings of

the Story drop-down list and the Index Field drop-down list. Depending on the list

selections, various messages may appear.

When the index field is already defined based on the current story form setting, and a user

selects a different form from the Story drop-down list, the system will check to see if the

field chosen as the index field exists in the new story form. If it does not, a warning is issued.

For instance, the Index Field drop-down list is set to a field, such as Audio-Time, and the

Story drop-down list is set to the Rundown story form. At the current settings, there is no

warning because the Audio-Time field exists in the Rundown story form.

However, if the user changes the story form from Rundown to another form that does not

have the Audio-Time field, the following message appears.

The Audio-Time field is no longer in the Index Field drop-down list. The user must select

another field from the list as the warning message instructed. When the user clicks on the

Index Field drop-down list, the system refreshes the list of options to display only those

fields that exist in the currently selected story form.

Viewing Database Traits

127

nNormally, pressing the Escape (Esc) key after the Index Field drop-down list is open (and

therefore, refreshed), will close the list, retaining the original field selection. However, if the

original field choice does not exist in the newly chosen story form—such as the Audio-Time

field in the previously mentioned example—the list closes without any selection made, in

which case, the setting appears blank.

If you select no story form—or set it to !<none>— then the system is forced to blank out the

index field and issue the following warning message.

This means the Index Field drop-down list will be inaccessible and appear grayed out. When

the index field setting is blank, the system will use the default field, which is the Title field

(also called the Slug field).

When an index field is blank—or in other words, no field is selected—the following

message appears.

If the index field drop-down list was already set to the Title field when the Directory/Queue

Properties dialog box opened, and the user manually blanks out the setting, the following

message appears.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

128

The above message indicates that by blanking out the index field setting, the default field,

which is Title, is automatically applied. Since the default is the same field as the original

field setting, no change occurs.

Groups Tab

This section provides information about database traits available as options on the Groups

tab of the Queue Properties dialog box.

See “Groups” on page 151 for more information about groups.

Trait Options Description

General The General check box, when selected, specifies that stories moved to the

queue will retain their original security restrictions, namely, their read and

write groups. For instance, in some cases, sites restrict access to the Dead

queue, but to further guarantee security of stories, the General trait is applied

to the Dead queue. This prevents users who do have access to the Dead queue

from opening stories they could not have opened in their original queues.

This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +g|-g at the console.

Viewing Database Traits

129

Read Group The Read Group drop-down list lets you restrict read access to a queue or

directory to a group of users. Users who are not in the read group cannot see

the directory or queue. When !<none> is selected, no group is applied;

therefore, all users will have read access to the queue or directory. The groups

are not created here.

This drop-down list is the equivalent of the dbtrait readgroup or rg at the

console.

Write Group The Write Group drop-down list lets you restrict write access to a queue or

directory. Users who are not in the write group cannot add or modify data in

the directory or queue. When !<none> is selected, no group is applied;

therefore, all users will have write access to the queue or directory. The

groups are not created here.

This drop-down list is the equivalent of the dbtrait writegroup or wg at the

console.

Notify Group The Notify Group drop-down list lets you specify what group of users is

notified whenever stories are added to or modified in a queue. When !<none>

is selected, no group is applied; therefore, no users will be notified of

additions or modifications to the queue or directory. The groups are not

created here.

This drop-down list is the equivalent of the dbtrait notify or ng at the console.

Editorial Group The Editorial Group drop-down list lets you restrict editorial access to a

queue or directory. Users who are not in the editorial group cannot add

breaks, float stories, or reorder queues, nor can they delete, remove or move

data from a queue or directory. When !<none> is selected, no group is

applied; therefore, only a user who has Write privileges to the queue can add

breaks or float, reorder, delete, or move stories from the queue.

This drop-down list is the equivalent of the dbtrait editorialgroup or eg at the

console.

Trait Options Description

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

130

Maintain Tab

This section provides information about database traits available as options on the Maintain

tab of the Queue Properties dialog box.

Trait Options Description

Save Old Versions The Save Old Versions drop-down list determines how many old story

versions are retained in each queue. The Save Old Versions drop-down list is

the equivalent of the dbtrait save-|n|o|a at the console. Options include:

• Save None – Retains no old versions of a story when a new version is

saved in the queue.

• Save Previous – Retains the previous version of a story when a new

version is saved in the queue.

• Save Original – Retains the original version of a story when a new

version is saved in the queue.

• Save All – Retains all versions of a story when a new version is saved in

the queue.

nThe Save Old Versions trait is queue-specific. For instance, a story is moved from a queue that

saves all versions to a queue saving none. In this case, all versions are moved to that queue,

but the next time the story is edited and saved, the old versions are sent to the Dead queue. The

command dbdump honors the Save Old Versions when set to Save None and will only dump the

latest version of a story in the queue with that trait.

Viewing Database Traits

131

Skip Backup The Skip Backup check box determines whether or not a directory or queue

is left out of database backups. This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait

+x|-x at the console, and is also known as a skip flag.

Update The Update check box indicates whether or not the stories in a queue will be

replaced as new versions are moved or copied to it. This check box is the

equivalent of the dbtrait +u|-u at the console.

nThe Update trait does not affect stories restored from tape backups. If you restore a story to a

queue that already contains a version of that story, you will have two versions of the same

story, even if the queue is assigned the update trait.

Mailbox section The Mailbox section does not apply to the e-mail feature of iNEWS. These

mailboxes are “signal carriers” by which utility programs, called servers, are

notified to perform a pre-defined task. See “Mailbox Tasks” on page 325 for

more information.

This section’s trait is the equivalent of the mail dbtrait at the console.

There are two types of mailboxes:

• System – The System radio button and drop-down list are used to assign

mailboxes reserved for system functions, such as the keyboard and form

checkers. Each queue or directory that needs a reserved system mailbox

is assigned the correct one when the system is installed by Avid Customer

Support personnel. Options include: All, Keyboard, Keyword,

Distribution, and Group. See “Reserved Mailboxes” on page 327 for

more information.

• Standard – The Standard radio button and spin box are used to assign

mailboxes to queues. These are mailboxes used by utility programs you

can configure, such as action servers. The mailbox number assigned to

the queue must match the mailbox number of the server monitoring it, as

defined in the

/site/config

file. Valid mailbox numbers are one

through 5000.

Purge The Purge section allows you to set the reoccurrence schedule for purging a

queue. The purge interval determines how old stories in a queue can get

before they are purged. Every hour, your system removes any stories that are

older than their queue’s purge interval and places the stories in the Dead

queue. For more information, see “Database Purge Intervals and Limits” on

page 139.

The Purge section’s Days and Hours spin boxes are the equivalent of the

purgeinterval dbtrait at the console.

Trait Options Description

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

132

User Interface Tab

This section provides information about database traits available as options on the User

Interface tab of the Queue Properties dialog box.

Trait Options Description

Preview Lines The Preview Lines spin box allows you to set a number of lines per story that

will appear as a preview in the Queue panel. Usually, a queue will only show

one line of information per story, similar to what appears in the fields of the

Story Form panel. By applying the preview trait, users can also see a preview

of each story’s text in the Queue panel, without having to open the entire

story. A setting of zero will show the one line of information that is the

standard; A setting of one will show that line plus one line of text, and so

forth. This trait can be overridden by a user’s preferences. See “Layout Tab”

on page 80 for more information.

The maximum number of preview lines allowed is 22. This spin box is the

equivalent of the dbtrait, dis, at the console.

Inverted The Inverted check box, when selected, will force the most recent stories in a

queue to be displayed at the top. Otherwise, the most recent stories will

appear at the bottom.

This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +i|-i at the console.

Viewing Database Traits

133

Sequential The Sequential check box, when selected, will force a directory to list its

contents—of sub-directories and queues—in the order in which they were

created. Otherwise, the contents are listed in alphabetical order.

This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +s|-s at the console.

Refresh The Refresh check box, when selected, assigns the Refresh trait to a queue,

so the system will begin automatically refreshing your screen when changes

are made in the queue. This means when you are looking at a queue in the

Queue panel, you will immediately see changes made to that queue by other

users.

This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +refresh|-refresh at the

console.

nUse the Refresh trait only on important queues, like rundown queues that are often modified by

multiple users simultaneously. To automatically refresh a queue, your system must spend a lot

of time monitoring workstations where users are viewing that queue. Assigning the refresh

trait to too many queues that are often accessed at the same time greatly increases the amount

of work your system has to do and may severely degrade its overall performance.

Watch Appends The Watch Appends check box, when selected, lets a queue monitor

incoming data for new stories sent by the wire service, appends them to the

wire queue, and immediately displays them to users who have that wire

queue open. While this trait can be applied to any queue, it is crucial that it be

assigned to queues that receive wire service data, such as the WIRES.ALL

queue.

This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +w|-w at the console.

Batch Allowed The Batch Allowed check box, when selected, indicates whether or not the

kill, move, or duplicate operations can be performed against an entire queue.

Unchecking this box for a particular queue does not affect the ability of

people to kill, move, or duplicate individual stories in the queue, as long as

they have appropriate permissions.

This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +q|-q at the console. See

“Managing Traits at the Console” on page 623 for more information on

Batch Allowed, also known as Queue Operations Allowed.

Printable The Printable check box indicates whether you can use the print command to

print all stories in the queue with a single command. This trait is usually

applied to rundown queues, such as SHOWS.5PM.RUNDOWN. This trait

does not limit or prevent the ability to print a single story (or script) in a

queue.

This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +p|-p at the console.

Trait Options Description

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

134

Interplay Server Tab

This section provides information about database traits available as options on the Locks tab

of the Queue Properties dialog box.

The Interplay Server tab lets you select the server that will integrate with iNEWS. When

configured in SYSTEM.INTERPLAY, a list of up to ten options will appear as a list.

Confirm Edit The Confirm Edit check box, when selected, will instruct iNEWS to prompt

for confirmation before letting a user edit a story. This trait is typically

assigned to queues in which users are likely to read but not change stories. It

should not be assigned to queues with stories that are edited often. Doing so

will needlessly slow down your users.

This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +r|-r at the console.

Text Timing The Text Timing check box, when selected, activates the timing clocks that

appear at the bottom of the Story panel for all stories in the queue. The clocks

are:

• TTC – Time from start of story to cursor

• BLK – Time of blocked (or highlighted) text

• EST – Estimated read time of entire story

This check box is the equivalent of the dbtrait +t|-t at the console.

Trait Options Description

Viewing Database Traits

135

Locks Tab

This section provides information about database traits available as options on the Locks tab

of the Queue Properties dialog box.

The Locks tab is unique for two reasons: first, it only appears in the Properties dialog box for

a queue not a directory, and secondly, it is a read-only tab. It is provided for informational

purposes only. It cannot be used to alter the Lock/Unlock settings of a queue.

Trait Options Description

User Lock The Locked check box in the User Lock section indicates that a user has

either acquired an easy lock or a key lock on the queue. The User Lock field

indicates the name of that user. If the queue is easy locked, access to the

locked queue is limited to a system administrator (with a superuser account)

or the user who locked the queue. If the queue is key locked, access to the

locked queue is limited to a system administrator (with a superuser account)

or any user who knows the key (password). The check box and field depict

the current condition of the queue, so both are blank when the queue is not

locked. However, you can find out the name of the last user to have locked

the queue by going to the console. For more information, see “Identifying

Locked Queues and Stories” on page 141.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

136

Changing Database Traits

You must be logged on at an iNEWS Workstation as a system administrator—that is using

an account with the superuser trait—or provide the database manager (dbmanager) password

to change database traits of directories and queues. For more information on dbmanager, see

“The Database Manager Account” on page 97.

As the system administrator, you can alter database traits of a single directory (folder) or

apply your changes to any subdirectories or queues in that parent directory as well.

When you change a directory’s traits from a workstation, the changes only affect the

directory you selected, unless you specify otherwise. This is directly opposite to what

happens when changing database traits at the console.

This section provides the procedure for changing traits from a workstation. For more

information on how to change traits from the console, see “Managing Traits at the Console”

on page 623.

nAvid recommends you ensure that no users are working in a directory or queue prior to

altering the database traits of that directory or queue.

To change database traits from a workstation:

1. Navigate to the directory or queue you want to change in the Directory panel.

2. Right-click on it.

3. Select Properties from the context menu. One of two things will happen, which will

determine what you are to do next.

tIf you are logged on as a system administrator, the Directory/Queue Properties

dialog box will appear. Go to step 5.

Order Lock The Locked check box in the Order Lock section indicates the queue is order

locked at present, which limits who can rearrange the order of stories in the

queue. The Order Lock fields indicates the user name and device which

implemented the order lock, and when it happened. The check box and fields

depict the current condition of the queue, so both are blank when the queue is

not order locked. However, you can find out the name of the last user to have

order locked the queue by going to the console. For more information, see

“Identifying Locked Queues and Stories” on page 141.

Trait Options Description

Changing Database Traits

137

tIf you are not logged on as a system administrator, the Directory/Queue Properties

dialog box will appear in read-only mode—that is, all the fields in the dialog box

will be gray, which indicates they are for viewing only. Go to step 4.

4. Click on the dbmanager login button (located in the bottom left corner of the dialog box)

to gain access to change traits from the dialog box.

The system will prompt you for the database manager password. Fill it in, click OK.

The Database Manager Password dialog box closes, and the Database manager login

button disappears, and the dialog bowith a check box.

Go on to step 5.

5. Do one of the following:

tIf altering traits of a queue, go to step 6.

tIf altering traits of a directory, and if you want the changes you make next to apply

to all queues and subdirectories in the parent directory, click on the check box

labeled Apply changes to all subdirectories and queues.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

138

tIf altering traits of a directory, but you only want to change the traits of the directory

chosen when the Directory Properties dialog box opened, do not select the Apply

changes ... check box.

nSelecting the Apply changes... check box does not apply the new settings at that point. It just

indicates whether you intend to apply them to all subdirectories and queues. Also, when you

apply your changes to all subdirectories and queues, those changes are not immediately

apparent at all workstations. Users should log off and back on to see the changes.

6. Make changes to the various traits as needed. These traits are explained in detail in

“Database Traits Summary” on page 122.

nSelecting and/or unselecting check boxes in the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box does

not apply changes immediately. Only clicking the OK button does that.

7. Click OK to save and apply changes.

Turning Off the Ordered Trait of a Sorted Queue

If someone manually rearranges stories in a sorted queue, the Ordered trait is applied to that

queue and the sorting function is disabled even though the Sorted trait is still applied to the

queue. You can remove the Ordered trait, which will restart the queue’s sort function from

either the console or any iNEWS Workstation.

This section provides the procedure for doing it from a workstation. For more information

on how to do this from the console, see “Turning Off the Ordered Trait of a Sorted Queue”

on page 138. When a sorted queue is ordered, the Queue Properties dialog box will appear

similar to this:

Database Purge Intervals and Limits

139

nOrdering a queue is done by manually moving stories around within the Queue panel. You

cannot use the Ordered check box to apply the Ordered trait to a queue. In other words,

when the box is not checked, it will appear gray, indicating that it is read-only.

To remove the Ordered trait and allow the queue to resume its original sorting

function:

1. In the Queue Properties dialog box, deselect the Ordered check box.

2. Click OK to save the change.

nWhen removing the checkmark from the Ordered check box and clicking OK—the equivalent

dbtraits -o

—the current contents of the queue will be sorted immediately. Any stories

added to the queue or stories edited in the queue will be sorted.

Database Purge Intervals and Limits

Purging is the first step in the process of freeing up space. Only when stories are removed

from the Dead queue by the dbserver program is any database space freed.

Any queue to which the system automatically sends stories should be purged regularly. For

instance, queues in the Wires directory should be purged often , or else the database fills up

with old wire stories. If you set up a keyword story to send stories to a queue, ensure that

queue is purged regularly. Otherwise, you risk running low on space.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

140

Queues that do not automatically receive material usually do not need to be purged regularly.

For instance, most queues in the People directory are not normally purged automatically,

since they usually only receive stories when users add them to their personal queues.

However, it is common to have Mail queues inside the People directory purged.

If the system detects it is running low on space, it purges beyond each queue’s purge

interval, if necessary, to build up the free list. Your system profile contains a parameter

called the purge limit, which prevents the system from purging more than a certain number

of hours beyond each queue’s purge interval.

In an emergency, your system purges as many hours beyond the purge interval as the purge

limit allows. Queues that contain important information should have a purge interval at least

five hours greater than the purge limit. This ensures that stories up to five hours old are never

purged, even in a “low on space” emergency.

Considerations for Choosing Purge Intervals

Different parts of your database contain different kinds of stories, and the purge interval you

set for each queue depends upon the kinds of stories in the queue. Some material, for

instance, may need to be held only 24 hours while other material may need to be held three

days—or not purged at all.

By choosing each directory or queue’s purge interval based on the kinds of stories found

there, you enable your system to remove old material that is no longer needed and make

room for new material.

You can have purge intervals as long as 2729 days and 23 hours or as short as one hour.

Additionally, you can set the purge interval to zero hours to turn purging off for a particular

directory or queue. You can adjust the purge interval to suit the rate at which stories are

added to the queue. In general, the faster stories are added to a queue, the shorter you should

make the queue’s purge interval. Old stories you restore from tape are treated as if they were

just created.

nOld stories restored from tape are treated as newly created stories unless

dbrestore -M

was used when the stories were restored from tape. The -M option preserves the modification

time of the story recorded when the story was dumped to tape.

If you notice an increase in the rate at which stories enter a particular directory or queue,

you might need to reduce its purge interval. For instance, if you add another wire service to

your system, the number of stories entering wires each hour increases, and you probably

need to reduce the purge interval of wires to allow the system to keep up with this increase.

Identifying Locked Queues and Stories

141

When choosing a purge interval, pay attention to queues likely to contain copies of stories

held in other queues. Copies of stories are really pointers back to the original story. The

actual story cannot be removed until all the copies have been purged. Otherwise, the copies

would not have a story to which they could point.

Ensure queues likely to hold copies of a story have roughly the same purge intervals as the

queue holding the original. In most systems, for instance, all wire stories are sent to

WIRES.ALL and copies of each story are distributed to other queues in the Wires directory.

This means that the system cannot purge a wire story until all the story’s copies are also

ready to be purged. To ensure the story and its copies are ready to be purged at about the

same time, the queues in the Wires directory are usually given similar purge intervals.

nIf someone edits a copy of a story and then saves the changes, the system replaces the

pointer with an actual story. Consequently, you do not need worry about copies that have

been edited, since they no longer point back to the original story.

Identifying Locked Queues and Stories

This section provides information on how to determine when a story or queue is locked and

by whom. It also has a reference section that provides details about the types of locks in

iNEWS.

As shown at left, a padlock appears over queue icons in the Directory panel so you can

identify currently locked queues from an iNEWS Workstation.

A similar padlock—shown at left—appears on the selector buttons in the Queue panel when

stories are locked.

While the padlocks do not tell you who initiated the lock, you can find that out for currently

locked queues at the iNEWS Workstation. If a queue or story is not locked at present, but

you want to know who last locked it, you must use the console. You can find out more from

the console about locked queues and stories, even if they are no longer locked. The

procedures for using the workstation or the console are covered in this section.

To find out who locked a currently locked queue from a workstation:

1. Right-click on the queue in the Directory panel.

2. Select Properties.

3. In the Queue Properties dialog box, select the Locks tab. The information is located on

that tab.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

142

To find out the last user to have locked a queue that is no longer locked:

tAt the console, use the list command in the following format:

list d-u [<queue name>]

For instance, to find out who last locked the PEOPLE.SNOW.MAIL queue, type:

list d-u people.snow.mail

The name of the person who last locked the queue appears in the lockuser column.

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT lockuser directory

Q-------I----A---- edmonds PEOPLE.SNOW.MAIL

In this case, edmonds appears to be the last person to have ever locked the

PEOPLE.SNOW.MAIL queue. If the queue has never been locked, the name of the

person who created the queue appears.

nThe L flag of the list command output shows whether the queue is locked at present. For

more information about the letter flags of the list command, see “Managing Traits at the

Console” on page 623.

To find out who last order locked a queue:

tAt the console, use the list command in the following format:

list d-o [<queue name>]

For instance, to find out who last order locked the CAST.MID.RUNDOWN queue, type:

list d-o cast.mid.rundown

The name of the person who last rearranged the order of the sorted queue appears in the

lockuser column. The numer of the device from which the order was initiated also

appears.

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT orderuser device directory

QSRP-----sU-Q----- williams 301 PEOPLE.SNOW.MAIL

In this case, williams was the last person to have order locked the queue. If the queue

has never been order locked, the orderuser name will be blank and the device number

will be zero (0). If no queue name is entered in the command, the order information for

all folders and queues is displayed.

nFor information on how to remove the order lock and resuming sorting in a sorted queue, see

“Turning Off the Ordered Trait of a Sorted Queue” on page 138.

To find out who last locked a story:

tAt the console, use the wholockedit command in the following format:

wholockedit [<queue name>]

Identifying Locked Queues and Stories

143

For instance, to find out who locked each story in the SHOW.10PM.RUNDOWN queue,

type:

wholockedit show.10pm.rundown

A screen similar to the following appears:

rec(18) locked by danielmi

modified by danielmi on 2010-02-09 11:53:20

page-number A14

v-shot

presenter K

title MAYORAL RACE

v-format TAG

v-graphics

v-audio

audio-time 0:15

runs-time 0:00

total-time 0:15

back-time

status OK

endorse-by

modify-date 2010-02-09 11:53:20

modify-by danielmi

v-edby

v-editbay

v-tapenumber

v-writer

video-id

item-channel

event-status

air-date

In the previous example, the story, MAYORAL RACE, is the only one in the queue that

is locked. The last user to lock and the last user to modify the story are provided; they

aren’t always the same. If no stories are locked in the queue, the system will display the

message:

no stories locked

To see the status of every story in the queue, add

all

to the end of the command, after

the queue name.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

144

Types of Locks

There are four types of locks that can apply to either stories or queues:

•Edit lock

•User lock

•Order lock

• Production lock

Not all of the locks apply to both stories and queues. All four types are explained in the

following sections. For information on how to unlock stories or queues, see “Removing

Locks from a Workstation” on page 146 and “Unbusy Stories and Queues” on page 147.

Edit Lock

An edit lock is applied to a story to prevent multiple users from editing the story at the same

time. The edit lock is applied in two ways:

• Manually – when a user types Ctrl+E. This locks both the story form and body when

neither are already locked by the system.

• Automatically – by the system, which occurs in a segmented way when a user begins

typing in either the story body or the story form.

For instance, when a user types in the Story Text panel, the system locks the story’s body.

But another user can still type in the Story Form panel, which results in an automatic lock of

the story’s form for that other user.

When a user attempts to manually lock a story by typing Ctrl+E, the system checks for

segmented edit locks. If one exists for either segment—the body or form—iNEWS notifies

the user.

Additionally, edit lock indicators are provided on the Status bar.

Indicator Description

The user, danielmi, locked the story form.

The user, danielmi, locked the story’s body.

The user, danielmi, locked the entire story, body and form.

The user, jeff, locked the story body, but the user, danielmi, has the Edit lock

for the story form.

Identifying Locked Queues and Stories

145

The edit lock is removed automatically when a user navigates to another location in the

database. However, a user can manually remove the Edit lock while remaining in the story.

For more information on how to do that, see “Removing Locks from a Workstation” on page

146.

If a story is mistakenly left edit locked, it is considered to be in a busy state. You must

unbusy the story before anyone can edit it. For more information, see “Unbusy Stories and

Queues” on page 147.

User Lock

A user lock is a lock that is manually (or purposefully) applied to a story or a queue by a user

to limit who can see the contents of the queue or story. Additionally, there are two types of

user locks:

• A Key lock is when a user locks the queue and applies a password, known as a key, to

the queue. At that point, only system administrators and users who know the key can

access the queue or story.

• An Easy lock is when a user locks the queue or story and applies their User ID as the

key to the queue. At that point, only system administrators and users who log in using

that User ID can access the queue or story.When the user forgets the key or is

unavailable to log in and unlock the queue or story, you must remove the lock before

anyone can access the queue or story. For more information, see “Removing Locks from

a Workstation” on page 146.

Order Lock

An order lock is automatically applied to a queue by the system. The system places an order

lock on each queue being ordered—that is, while someone is moving a story in the queue.

After the story is moved, the system automatically removes the order lock. So, the lock only

applies to the queue during the actual moving process. If you try to move a different story in

a queue already being ordered, the system displays a busy message and temporarily denies

order access to the queue.

If a queue is mistakenly left order locked, it is considered to be in a busy state. You must

unbusy the queue from the console before anyone can order it. For more information, see

“Unbusy Stories and Queues” on page 147.

Production Lock

A production lock is similar to an order lock in that it prevents multiple users from changing

the order of a queue simultaneously. The difference is that a production lock is manually

applied to a queue by a user. Also, a queue will retain a production lock until the user

unlocks it or navigates to another queue. For more information, see “Removing Locks from

a Workstation” on page 146.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

146

If a queue is mistakenly left with a production lock, it is considered to be in a busy state. You

must unbusy the queue from the console before anyone can order it. For more information,

see “Unbusy Stories and Queues” on page 147.

Removing Locks from a Workstation

In some cases, you can unlock stories or queues from an iNEWS Workstation. This section

provides procedures for removing the following types of locks:

• A story’s edit lock

• A story’s user lock without a key

• A queue’s user lock without a key

• A queue’s production lock

Before you unlock a story or queue, find out who locked the story. You want to make certain

that you do not unlock a story or queue that is being used at the time. For more information,

see “Identifying Locked Queues and Stories” on page 141.

To remove a story’s edit lock from an iNEWS Workstation:

tNavigate to another story.

tType Ctrl+E, which removes the lock but allows you to stay in the story.

tSelect Story > Edit unlock.

tClick the Edit Lock button on the Main toolbar—shown at left. The edit lock is removed

when the button no longer appears pushed in.

nOf the four possible steps to take, the last three will prompt you to save any changes.

To unlock a story without knowing its key:

1. At a workstation, log in as a system administrator—that is, with a superuser account.

You must be a system administrator to remove a lock for which you do not know the

key.

2. Double-click on the story to open it in the Story panel. The system will prompt for the

key.

3. Press Enter. The story will open without the key, because you logged in with a superuser

account.

4. Position your cursor in the Story panel.

5. Select Tools > Unlock Story. A User Unlock Story dialog box will appear.

6. Click the Unlock button.

Unbusy Stories and Queues

147

7. Save the story.

To unlock a queue without knowing its key:

1. At a workstation, log in as a system administrator—that is, with a superuser account.

You must be a system administrator to remove a lock for which you do not know the

key.

2. Select the queue to unlock.

3. Select Tools > Unlock Queue. A User Unlock Queue dialog box will appear.

4. Click the Unlock button.

5. Click OK.

To remove a queue’s production lock from an iNEWS Workstation:

tSelect Tools > Production Lock. A checkmark appearing next to the Production Lock

menu option indicates whether the lock is in place.

tNavigate to another queue. Production Lock is disabled automatically.

Unbusy Stories and Queues

Whenever a story or queue cannot be unlocked from a workstation, you can remove the

locks by going to the console and using the unbusy command.

cAlways ensure a lock is invalid first. Determine whether the edit or order lock is not the

result of someone actually editing a story or ordering a queue. Do not unbusy a story or

queue unless you have determined that the lock is invalid. Unbusying a story or queue

that is in use can cause serious problems.

To unbusy a story or queue at the console:

1. Use the unbusy command with the following format:

unbusy <queue name>

The queue name is the name of the locked queue or the name of the queue containing

the locked story.

For instance, if a locked story was in SHOW.SCRIPTS or that queue was order-locked,

unbusy it by typing:

unbusy show.scripts

2. Press Enter.

3. One of the following will happen:

- The unbusy command checks the queue for an Order/Production lock. If it finds

one, the console displays the following prompt:

‘shoe.scripts’ Production locked by news from terminal 607 at

2004-02-28 17:51:46

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

148

User news no longer logged in at terminal 607 - Unlock? (n/y/q)

To unbusy the queue, type

; otherwise, type

- The unbusy command checks for an edit-locked story in the queue. If it finds one, it

checks the workstation where the story was last edited. If anyone is logged in at that

workstation, the console displays the story’s form and prompts you to check with

the person who is logged in at that workstation.

For instance, if the story, Shootout, was last edited at workstation 4589 and user,

Smith, is currently logged in at workstation 4589, the console displays the

following:

NRCS-A# unbusy show.10pm.rundown

page-number A02

presenter KSA

title SHOOTOUT

v-cam

v-shot

v-format W/VO

v-graphics

audio-time 0:30

runs-time 0:00

total-time 0:30

back-time

status OK

endorse-by

modify-date 2009-03-05 08:38:12

modify-by smith

v-edby

v-writer

video-id 091907TR10

item-channel A

event-status

v-tapenumber

v-timecode

air-date

Unbusy Stories and Queues

149

Did you check with smith who is at device 4589?

b locked on 2009-05-20 at 16:59:18 by session 4589

Unbusy? (n/y/q)

To unbusy the story, type

, which will remove the edit lock; otherwise, type

quit.

cIf a story is unbusied at the console while a user is editing it, when the user tries to save

the story, the story is saved to the Dead queue, and the user gets an error message that

states:

Story save failed: Error: Story saved to dead.

5 The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories

150

6Groups

This chapter explains how to create groups in iNEWS and use the system’s group-related

features to customize system usage. When possible, procedures are explained using the

workstation, but some can also be accomplished at the console, with extensive use of the

gtraits command. This command is similar to the utraits command and the dbtraits

command. All three commands are explained in “Managing Traits at the Console” on page

623.

This chapter also covers viewing and modifying information in the SYSTEM.GROUPS

queue at the iNEWS Workstation and the

/site/system

file at the console.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Overview of Groups

•Viewing Group Information from the Console

•Viewing Group Information from a Workstation

•Creating a New Group

•Renaming a Group

•Deleting a Group

•Creating or Modifying Multiple Groups

•Adding Users as Members of a Group

•Adding Groups as Members of Other Groups

•Adding Workstations as Members of a Group

•Combined Permissions and Timeouts

•Group Access and Usage Restrictions

•Group Traits for the Database

•Creating a Mail Alias

Overview of Groups

The iNEWS newsroom computer system lets you categorize users by placing accounts

belonging to people with similar needs into the same group. Organizing users in this way

enables you to more easily customize your system. It also enables you to apply security

restrictions at the group level.

For instance, you can:

• Restrict access to a particular queue so that only members of a certain group can use it

• Have the system notify a group of users when changes are made to a queue in which

they are interested

• Send mail to a group name and have the system take care of the task of sending the mail

to each individual in the group

You can create as many as 700 groups, and you can assign an unlimited number of users to

each group.

Viewing Group Information from the Console

At the console, various versions of the gtraits command are used for viewing and modifying

group information. You must take superuser privileges at the console before using any form

of this command, as indicated by the prompt,

NRCS-A#

. See “Entering Superuser Mode” on

page 37 for more information.

To get information for a list of all groups in the iNEWS database:

tType:

NRCS-A#

gtraits list-

To get a list of all members of a particular group, such as producers:

tType:

NRCS-A#

gtraits list producers

To get a list of all groups to which a particular user belongs:

tType the command followed by the user’s ID, such as:

NRCS-A# gtraits list jdoe

Sometimes, for security reasons, groups are assigned as group traits to directories and

queues in the database.

Viewing Group Information from a Workstation

153

This information can be viewed from the console by using the

list d-v

console command,

which lists each queue’s assigned read, write, and notification groups.

Use the following format to view a list of group information for a specific queue:

list d-g <queue name>

Use the following format to view a list of all queues in the database that have a particular

group assigned as their read, write, or notification group:

list rwng=<group name> d

nAll of the gtraits list variants can be produced using

list g

Viewing Group Information from a Workstation

You can also view group membership and group assignment information from an iNEWS

Workstation. However, since groups are created at the console, the information you receive

can potentially be out of sync with the information that is actually in the database.

Therefore, use this method as a quick way to get information that you recognize may require

verification at the console.

To view information about group memberships from a workstation:

1. Locate the SYSTEM.GROUPS queue in the Directory panel.

2. Double-click the Groups queue to open it.

The Queue panel contains a list of the names of the existing groups with the first group

name selected. The members of the group appear in the Story panel.

3. To view the contents of different groups, do one of the following:

tUse the mouse to click a different group listed in the Queue panel.

tUse the Up or Down arrow keys or the scroll bar on the right side of the Queue

panel to move to another group.

tUse the Page Up or Page Down keys to scroll several groups (up or down) in the list

at a time.

To view what group is assigned to a queue or directory for read and write access, or

for notification purposes:

1. Locate the queue or directory you want to know about in the Directory panel.

2. Right-click on the queue or directory.

3. Select Properties from the context menu.

4. In the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box, select the Groups tab.

6 Groups

154

Creating a New Group

Creating a new group is a three-step process. The first part of the procedure must be done at

the console. The last is done at the iNEWS Workstation.

To create a new group:

1. Choose a group name.

2. Create the new group at the console.

3. Create a group’s membership story in the database and specify members.

Each of these steps are covered in more detail in the next few sections.

Step 1 - Choosing a Group Name

Before you actually create a new group, you need to decide on the name of the group.

To choose a group name:

1. Follow these guidelines:

tGroup names cannot be more than 20 characters long and cannot contain spaces. A

group name longer than 20 characters will be truncated to 20 characters.

tYou cannot use a name already used as someone’s User ID.

tSome words are reserved by the system for special purposes, and cannot be used as

names for groups. These words—which include: alias, all, group, and

restricted—are defined in the Words dictionary by use of the W_ALIAS, W_ALL,

W_GROUP, and W_RESTRICTED tokens, respectively.

tChoose a name that indicates the purpose or general makeup of the group, for

instance, you may want to call the group that includes all your producers by the

name “producers.”

2. View the list of groups in the SYSTEM.GROUPS queue to ensure the name you select

is not already in use. If a group with your chosen name already exists, determine

whether its members are the same as those users you want to assign to your group. The

existing group might represent these users, so you can use it instead of creating a new

one.

Step 2 - Create New Group at Console

For this procedure, which uses fieldreporters as an example, you must first take superuser

privileges at the console before using any form of the gtraits command, as indicated by the

prompt,

NRCS-A#

in the following procedure. See “Entering Superuser Mode” on page 37

for more information.

Creating a New Group

155

To enter the new group name in the iNEWS database:

1. Enter superuser mode at the console.

2. Verify that the new group name is not already used by typing the following kind of

command at the console:

NRCS-A# gtraits list fieldreporters

fieldreporters is not a user or group name

In the example, the system response indicates that fieldreporters is not currently a group

name. You should receive a similar response before proceeding.

3. Use the following command to create the new group name in the system:

NRCS-A# gtraits add fieldreporters

Added group fieldreporters

4. Press Ctrl+D to leave superuser mode.

Step 3 - Creating Group’s Membership Story and Specifying Members

This procedure, which uses fieldreporters as an example, is done at an iNEWS Workstation.

Members of a group are listed in a story that bears the name of the group and is located in

SYSTEM.GROUPS. If the story doesn’t exist, you must create it as part of this process.

To create a group’s membership story and specify members of that new group:

1. Open the System folder from the Directory panel.

2. Open the Groups queue.

3. Do one of the following:

tSelect File > New Story.

tPress the Insert key.

In the Queue panel, a blank row appears in the group list, and a blank story appears in

the Story panel.

nWhen your iNEWS newsroom computer system was installed, membership lists for several

groups common to newsrooms were placed in the Groups queue. To make it easy to maintain,

each list was placed in a separate story. Continue this convention to organize groups. You

can put more than one group’s membership list (or all of them) in a single story, but it is not

recommended.

4. Type the name of the group, such as fieldreporters, in the Title (Slug) field of the Queue

panel or in the corresponding field of the Story Form panel.

5. Press Enter.

6 Groups

156

6. Click inside the Story Text panel and type the group name and membership list in this

format:

group fieldreporters

user-ID user-ID . . .

7. Select File > Save Story.

This procedure creates a story, stored in SYSTEM.GROUPS, that bears the group name

and contains the membership list for the group. The system will refer to the story

anytime its group is applied to security measures or other system features.

Group Checker

When you save your changes to a group, the system automatically runs the server program

known as the group checker, which looks for errors in the stories in SYSTEM.GROUPS.

Changes to the SYSTEM.GROUPS queue trigger the group checker because the

SYSTEM.GROUPS queue is assigned the Group system mailbox.

The group checker may also be run manually from the console by typing the command,

grpcheck, using the following format:

grpcheck [-v[v]] <name of queue>

For instance, to manually start the group checker to check group membership lists in the

database, type: grpcheck -v system.groups

The group checker may take a minute or two to process. When it finishes, the system sends

you one or more messages describing the results.

At an iNEWS Workstation, the system alerts you to the fact that you have received a

message by an audio tone and a flashing Message bar button in the menu bar. On the Main

toolbar, click the Message bar button—shown at left—to read the messages from the group

checker on the Messages toolbar—shown below. The name, grpcheck, appears in the From

field. The messages appear in the Message field.

If the group checker finds no errors in the story you have created to list the members of the

new group, you get a GROUPS story OK message.

Group Checker

157

If the group checker finds an error, it sends a message indicating the story and the line in that

story in which the error occurs. For a complete list of group checker messages, see “Group

Checker Error Messages” on page 157.

In some cases, multiple errors are discovered, resulting in several error messages.

To display the entire list of error messages sent to you:

tClick the History button on the Messages toolbar.

tSelect Communicate > Messages > Show History.

You can also copy or paste the contents of the group checker messages to another file.

If the errors are not serious, the last message is: GROUPS story accepted, with errors. This

message indicates that the group checker applied changes that were not in error.

If there are serious errors, the last message is: GROUPS story NOT OK. This message

indicates that the group checker could not use any changes because of errors.

The group checker examines whatever work you just completed along with everything else

in SYSTEM.GROUPS. This means that if some of the error messages you see are not related

to your changes, they are possibly the result of pre-existing errors in a different story in

SYSTEM.GROUPS.

Group Checker Error Messages

The following is an alphabetical listing of error messages you may see when you create or

edit group membership lists or alias definitions. The group checker usually takes a minute or

two to completely process the stories in SYSTEM.GROUPS and report any error messages.

Bad workstation device specification

• You did not enter a workstation’s device number or device name correctly. Usually, this

happens because you did not use a closing brace (}) in the declaration.

Cannot open default aliases file

• The group checker could not open an internal file that it uses to check alias entries. Call

Avid Customer Support.

Cannot open new aliases file

• The group checker could not create a new aliases file to reflect the changes you made.

Call Avid Customer Support.

Cannot save old aliases file

6 Groups

158

• An internal error occurred. Call Avid Customer Support.

Duplicate group or alias name

• You tried to create two groups or aliases with the same name.

Failed to open queue

• Due to an internal error, the group checker was unable to open SYSTEM.GROUPS. Call

Avid Customer Support.

Failed to open story

• Due to an internal error, the group checker was unable to open one of the stories in

SYSTEM.GROUPS. Call Avid Customer Support.

Group or alias word missing. Skipping text

• You did not begin a mail alias definition with the word ‘alias’, or a group membership

list with the word ‘group’. This is followed by the line number where the group checker

expected to find ‘alias’ or ‘group’. The W_GROUP and W_ALIAS dictionary tokens

define what words, such as ‘alias’ or ‘group’, are used by the group checker. The tokens

may be customized in the /site/dict/words file on the iNEWS Server.

nFor more information on mail aliases, see “Creating a Mail Alias” on page 176.

GROUPS story accepted, with errors

• Errors appear in the group story, but none are serious. The group checker will use the

entries that do not have errors. The entries that have errors are ignored.

GROUPS story NOT OK

• Serious errors appear in the group story, and the group checker cannot use it.

GROUPS story OK

• There are no problems with the group story.

Ignoring words following alias name

• Any words you include on the same line after the name of the alias you are defining are

ignored.

Ignoring words following group name

• Any words you include on the same line after the name of the group you are defining are

ignored.

Group Checker

159

Improper use of reserved word

• You cannot use a reserved word, such as ‘alias’ and ‘group’, as a group or alias name.

Internal groupchecker error

• Some undefined error occurred while the group checker was running. Call Avid

Customer Support.

Invalid name follows word “alias”

• The name of the alias is invalid. It might be too long. Check the alias and remove or

correct the user name.

Invalid name follows word “group”

• The name of the group is invalid. It might be too long or not exist on the server. Check

that the group has been created on the server and that it matches the name being used in

the client.

More than 50,000 alias names created

• The system created many pseudo-alias names to break up individual aliases into lists of

1000 characters or less. Call Avid Customer Support.

Missing alias name

• You did not follow the word alias with the name you want the alias to have.

Missing group name

• You did not follow the word group with the name of a group.

Name already used as alias name

• You created a group with the same name as an alias already defined in the story or

queue.

Name already used as group name

• You created an alias with the same name as a group already defined in the story or

queue.

No groups or aliases found

• All stories in SYSTEM.GROUPS are empty—they contain no aliases or groups.

Not a workstation device

• You included something in braces ({ }) that is not a workstation device name or number.

The message is followed by the name you tried to include as a workstation.

Not a user or workstation

6 Groups

160

• You defined something that is not a recognized user or workstation as a member of a

group.

Recursive group membership

• You defined a membership list that created a recursion error.

User name used as group or alias name

• You cannot give a group or an alias the same name as an existing user.

Renaming a Group

Renaming a group is a two-step process. The first step of the procedure must be done at the

console in superuser mode. The second step is done at the iNEWS Workstation.

To rename a group:

1. Change the group name in the system’s database.

2. Change the group name in SYSTEM.GROUPS.

Each of these steps are covered in more detail in the next couple of sections.

Step 1 - Change Group Name in Database

To change the group name in the system’s database:

tType the gtraits r command, which has this syntax:

gtraits r <old-group-name> <new-group-name>

For instance, to change the group name producers to 5pmproducers, type:

NRCS-A# gtraits r producers 5pmproducers

Renamed producers to 5pmproducers.

Step 2 - Change Group Name in SYSTEM.GROUPS

To change the name in the group’s membership story:

1. Locate the group’s membership story in SYSTEM.GROUPS.

2. Modify the name of the group, which appears in the title field of the queue and story

form, and on the first line of the story.

3. Change the group name if it appears as a member in any other membership stories.

Deleting a Group

161

nIf you do not do step 3, the next time you make a change in the queue, the group checker

warns you that the membership list uses an invalid group name. See “Group Checker” on

page 156 for more information.

Deleting a Group

Deleting a group involves steps that must be done at the console and the workstation. The

console portion of the procedure is a two-stage process. The gtraits command you type

marks the group for deletion, but the group is actually deleted the next time the system runs

the dbpurge process, which it does at 15 minutes past every hour.

nYou cannot use any gtraits commands on a group that is marked for deletion but still waiting

to be deleted.

To delete a group in the system:

1. Enter superuser mode at the console.

2. Delete the name in the system’s database at the console using the gtraits d command,

which has this syntax:

gtraits d <group-name>

For instance, to delete the 5pmproducers group, type:

NRCS-A# gtraits d 5pmproducers

Marked 5pmproducers for deletion.

3. Delete the group name and its membership list story in SYSTEM.GROUPS.

4. Delete the group name if it appears as a member in any other membership lists.

nIf you do not do step 3, the next time you make a change in the queue, the group checker

spots the deleted group’s membership list and warns you that it uses an invalid group name.

If you do not do step 4, the next time you make a change in that membership list story, the

group checker warns you that the membership list uses an invalid group name. See “Group

Checker” on page 156 for more information.

5. Press Ctrl+D to leave superuser mode.

Creating or Modifying Multiple Groups

The gtraits console command has an interactive mode in which you can execute

group-related commands without entering gtraits each time. Use this mode when there are a

number of gtraits commands you want to enter in succession.

6 Groups

162

To enter the gtraits interactive mode:

1. Enter superuser mode at the console.

2. Type:

NRCS-A# gtraits i

The command replaces the normal system prompt with an angle bracket (>) to indicate

that you are in interactive mode. At this prompt, you can enter any gtraits command,

such as changegroup or add, without typing the gtraits command for each operation.

For instance, to add the 5pmproducers group, type:

> add 5pmproducers

If you were not in interactive mode, the entire command line would be required, such as:

gtraits add 5pmproducers.

3. Type

quit

to leave interactive mode.

4. Press Ctrl+D to leave superuser mode.

Adding Users as Members of a Group

There are three possibilities for membership in a group:

• An individual user can be a member of a group.

• One group can be a member of another group (making all the users of the first group

members of the second).

• A workstation can be a member of a group.

This section provides the procedure for adding a user to a group. You must be at an iNEWS

Workstation to change group membership.

To add individual users to an existing group:

1. Open the System folder from the Directory panel.

2. Open the Groups queue.

3. Locate the story or stories in your SYSTEM.GROUPS queue containing the group

membership list you want to modify or add members to.

4. Open that story in the Story panel.

Adding Groups as Members of Other Groups

163

5. Type in the user ID(s) you want to add to the group. The user IDs need not be on the

same line as the group name. For instance, add user sjones to the fieldreporters group:

group fieldreporters

jdoe bsmith ftaylor

ghendrickson jgrey sjones

6. Select File > Save Story.

7. Verify the approval of the story from the messages sent to you from the system’s group

checker server program.

Adding Groups as Members of Other Groups

In addition to adding individual users to groups, you can add an entire group to another

group. The members of the first group become members of the second group. The order in

which you define groups in your SYSTEM.GROUPS queue is not important; however, care

should be taken to avoid recursion. This section provides the procedures for adding a group

to another group and avoiding recursion.

You must be at an iNEWS Workstation to change group membership.

To add a group to an existing group:

1. Open the System folder from the Directory panel.

2. Open the Groups queue.

3. Locate the story or stories in your SYSTEM.GROUPS queue containing the group

membership list you want to add or modify.

4. Open that story in the Story panel.

5. Type in the group name you want to add to the group.

6. Select File > Save Story.

7. Verify the approval of the story from the messages sent to you from the system’s group

checker server program.

Avoiding Recursion

When you make groups members of other groups, do not create a membership list that

contains a circular reference, also called recursion. The following is an explanation of

recursion in a membership list.

6 Groups

164

When the group checker examines a group’s membership list story, it builds an internal list

of the group’s members. If one member is the name of another group, the group checker

must determine the members of the second group and add them to the first group’s internal

membership list.

For instance, in the following diagram, Group B is a member of Group A. When the group

checker evaluates the membership list for Group A, it creates an internal membership list for

Group A that contains users Fujitano, Clancy, Meyer, Rosario, Chen, Reyes, and Smith. This

example is not recursive and causes no problems for the group checker.

Recursion occurs when the group checker cannot resolve memberships because one group in

the chain refers to another group higher up in the chain. For instance, a case of recursion

would occur if Group B is a member of Group A, but Group A is also a member of Group B.

Adding Groups as Members of Other Groups

165

The group checker cannot create internal membership lists for these groups. When it

evaluates Group A, it sees that Group B belongs to Group A and tries to add B group’s

members to A group’s internal list. However, one of the Group B members is Group A,

which the group checker has still not resolved. The group checker cannot proceed.

If you see a recursion error message, examine your membership lists for incidents like this

and remove the recursive reference. In the previous example, either remove Group B from

the membership list for Group A or Group A from the membership list for Group B.

To check for recursion at the console:

tType:

NRCS-A#

grpcheck -v system.groups

The group checker displays the title of the story in which it finds an error and a

description of the error. For instance, after typing the grpcheck -v command, the

following output shows a story with the title group_249 that has recursive entries in its

membership list:

grpcheck: 09:09:13 [CONSOLE] [group_249] Recursive group membership

a->b->a

grpcheck: 09:09:13 [CONSOLE] [group_249] GROUPS story NOT OK

6 Groups

166

Adding Workstations as Members of a Group

Suppose you have a workstation that is used by several staff members, all of whom are

producers. When they use this workstation, they need access to the queues that members of

the producers group normally have access to. When they are using other workstations, they

do not need the special producer privileges.

You can grant the producer workstation the security permissions granted to the producer

group by adding it as a member to the group called producers in SYSTEM.GROUPS.

You must be at an iNEWS Workstation to change group membership.

To add a workstation to an existing group:

1. Open the System folder from the Directory panel.

2. Open the Groups queue.

3. Locate the story or stories in your SYSTEM.GROUPS queue containing the group

membership list you want to modify or add members to.

4. Open that story in the Story panel.

5. Type in the workstation’s session number in braces to add it to the group.

6. Select File > Save Story.

7. Verify the approval of the story from the messages sent to you from the system’s group

checker server program.

When a user logs in at a workstation, the system ordinarily combines any system

permissions the user already has with permissions the workstation may have. For instance, a

user belonging to the writers group who logs in at a workstation assigned to the producers

group would have access to directories and queues accessible to both groups.

System permissions that apply to workstations are assigned using the security parameter that

is set in the /site/system file. The security parameter in this file is either OR or AND. OR

security uses the security level set for either the user or the workstation. AND security uses

the security level set for both the user and the workstation. For more on these security

parameters, see “Combined Permissions and Timeouts” on page 167. For more information

on how to edit the /site/system file, see “System Configuration” on page 243.

A workstation can only be used as a member of a group if that PC is assigned a dedicated

session in the iNEWS configuration file. For instance, an iNEWS Workstation, identified as

319, is assigned a certain group membership. Its configuration line appears with a specified

session number, but is not dedicated to any particular PC, as shown:

inws 319 - gnews - ;nondedicated

Combined Permissions and Timeouts

167

The session, 319, is nondedicated, meaning that any PC in the newsroom may be logged in

on session 319, and therefore view whatever area is restricted to the group 319 is assigned to.

To restrict a queue or directory to a specific workstation, such as 319, then in addition to

adding that workstation’s session number to the group’s membership, the line in the

configuration file must be dedicated to a specific PC’s IP address.

inws 319 192.168.20.136 gnews - ;nondedicated

cUsing session numbers in groups will provide proper security only if you have

dedicated resources locking down specific PCs to specific resources in the configuration

file. This requires that PCs have set IP addresses and would not work in a DHCP

environment, where a PC may not always receive the same IP address.

MAC addresses cannot be used directly. The IP or MAC is assigned to a session in

/site/config, such as:

inws 4595 00:19:B9:0E:7D:E1 gnews - ; IT-laptop-01

inws 4596 172.24.96.247 gnews - ; IT-desk-01

Then the session number would go into the group, such as:

group ipmac

{4595}

{4596}

See “Group Access and Usage Restrictions” on page 169 for more information.

Combined Permissions and Timeouts

Combining group and workstation permissions enables you to choose to apply additional

security to your system, or less security:

• For additional security, you can specify that users at a particular workstation have

membership in both human and workstation groups to perform certain actions.

• For less security, you can force the system to check only whether a user at a particular

workstation is a member of either the human or the workstation group.

More Restrictive

You can be more restrictive about the permissions granted to users if you include the security

parameter in your system profile—that is, the /site/system file—and assign it the value of

AND.

6 Groups

168

For instance, you can use this security level for read permissions on a queue that should be

read only by producers that are both members of the producers group and are sitting at the

producers workstation.

Less Restrictive

Omitting the security parameter from the system profile or assigning it a value of OR

indicates that a user on a workstation is considered to be in a certain group if either the user

or the workstation is a member of the target group.

Automatic Timeout

Either type of security described previously works well only if users log out from their

workstations when they leave their desks. Otherwise, anyone with access to the workstation

where a user logged in can take advantage of that user’s or workstation’s permissions.

You can prevent this by setting your workstations to automatically log out after a certain

period of inactivity. To do that, you need to edit one or more special timeout parameters in

the system profile at the console. See “System Configuration” on page 243 for more

information on how to edit the system profile.

There are two types of timeout parameters:

• Idle timeout

• Login timeout

Idle Timeout

The most useful kind of automatic timeout is the idle timeout, which logs out a workstation

if no activity has taken place on it in a specified length of time.

Modify the localtimeout value in /site/system to change this value for local workstations

(those that are most likely within the newsroom).

Modify the remotetimeout value in /site/system to set the idle timeout value for dial-up

workstations.

Timeout Value Settings

All four timeout parameters accept values in the mmm:ss (minutes and seconds) format. The

following table lists the parameters, the types of workstations they affect, and their

maximum and default values.

Group Access and Usage Restrictions

169

* Disables timeouts

Group Access and Usage Restrictions

The iNEWS newsroom computer system is designed to be used by a large group of people,

ranging from temporary writer interns to technical producers. To ensure the correct level of

security on a system that is accommodating such a wide range of capabilities and

responsibilities, restrict access to sensitive areas of the database to people with a need to

access the information.

The iNEWS newsroom computer system has security features that let you provide these kind

of access restrictions. For instance, you can assign groups to a queue as a read and/or write

group trait. By doing so, you can control which users can read and/or write stories in that

queue.

If you do not assign groups to a directory or queue as read and write group traits, the

directory or queue is available to all users who are not in the “restricted” group.

nSystem administrators can create a group called “restricted” that can be used to limit its

members accessibility to areas of the database.

Access and Usage Examples

Here are some other examples of how access is modified based on group trait assignments:

• If both read and write groups are assigned to a queue, and a user’s ID does not appear as

a member of either group, the that user will be unable to create a story in that queue. In

other words, the user will not have read and write permission to that queue.

• A user also needs both read and write permission to lock or unlock a queue.

• A user who has only write permission to a queue can copy or move a story into that

queue; however, without read permission, the user will be unable to see the queue and

its contents in the Directory panel.

Parameter Workstation Types Maximum Default

localtimeout Serial, network, PCs 540:00 00:00*

remotetimeout Dial-up (line devices and

connect sessions)

540:00 00:00*

6 Groups

170

• It is possible to change a directory’s read or write group, and thereby modify the

read-and-write permissions for all the stories in all the queues in that directory.

• Stories that you move or duplicate into a queue whose general trait is turned on retain

their original security. For instance, the Dead queue usually has this trait turned on so

stories moved there retain the read-and-write restrictions from their original queues.

Group Traits for the Database

There are five group traits that can be assigned to queues and directories in the database:

• General

• Read Group

•Write Group

• Notify Group

• Editorial Group

nYou must be a system administrator—that is, logged in with a superuser account—or know

the database manager password to modify any trait in the Directory/Queue Properties

dialog box. See “Directory/Queue Properties Dialog Box” on page 122 for more

information.

All of the group traits can be assigned at the console and the iNEWS Workstation. For

procedures at the console, see “Managing Traits at the Console” on page 623 for more

information. Procedures at the workstation, using the Groups tab in the Directory/Queue

Properties dialog box, are covered in this chapter.

Group Traits for the Database

171

The General trait, when applied to a queue, means that stories moved to the queue will retain

their original security restrictions, as set by the read and write group traits. This will prevent

any unintentional accessibility to stories moved from a highly secure queue to one widely

accessible to users.

The other four group traits (Read, Write, Notify, and Editorial) restrict who can read or write

stories in a queue; who can remove, break, and float stories in a queue; and indicate who is

notified when stories are changed in it. Each of these group traits is explained in the

following sections. See “Groups Tab” on page 128 for more information.

nThe General trait would normally be assigned to the Dead queue.

When a group assignment on a queue is changed from the graphical user interface (GUI), the

group security assigned to the stories in the queue is changed and the system automatically

re-applies the security change to each individual story. If there are many stories in the queue,

the client will remain unresponsive while the new security setting is adjusted for each story

and control will not be returned to the user until it is done.

nIf the queue has the General trait, changing the group security on the queue does NOT

change the security assignment on the pre-existing stories created under the old group

assignment.

Read Group

A directory or queue’s read group specifies who can read stories in the queue. Users who are

not in the read group for the directory or queue cannot see the directory or queue in the file

structure displayed in the Directory panel.

To assign a group as a read group to a queue or directory:

1. Locate the directory or queue you want to modify in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box by right-clicking on the folder or queue

in the Directory panel and selecting Properties from the context menu.

3. Select the Groups tab.

4. Select a group from the Read Group drop-down list. Only groups that are already

created in the system database will appear in the list. When !<none> is selected, no

group is applied; therefore, all users will have read access to the queue or directory.

5. Click OK to save settings.

To remove a group as a read group from a queue or directory:

1. Locate the directory or queue you want to modify in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box by right-clicking on the folder or queue

in the Directory panel and selecting Properties from the context menu.

6 Groups

172

3. Select the Groups tab.

4. Select !<none> from the Read Group drop-down list. When !<none> is selected, no

group is applied; therefore, all users will have read access to the queue or directory.

5. Click OK to save settings.

Write Group

A queue’s write group specifies who can add or modify stories in the queue.

To assign a group as a write group to a queue or directory:

1. Locate the directory or queue you want to modify in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box by right-clicking on the folder or queue

in the Directory panel and selecting Properties from the context menu.

3. Select the Groups tab.

4. Select a group from the Write Group drop-down list. Only groups that are already

created in the system database will appear in the list. When !<none> is selected, no

group is applied; therefore, all users will have write access to the queue or directory.

5. Click OK to save settings.

To remove a group as a write group from a queue or directory:

1. Locate the directory or queue you want to modify in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box by right-clicking on the folder or queue

in the Directory panel and selecting Properties from the context menu.

3. Select the Groups tab.

4. Select !<none> from the Write Group drop-down list. When !<none> is selected, no

group is applied; therefore, all users will have write access to the queue or directory.

5. Click OK to save settings.

Notification Group

A queue’s notification group specifies which users are notified whenever stories are added or

modified in the queue.

To assign a group as a notification group to a queue or directory:

1. Locate the directory or queue you want to modify in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box by right-clicking on the folder or queue

in the Directory panel and selecting Properties from the context menu.

3. Select the Groups tab.

Group Traits for the Database

173

4. Select a group from the Notify Group drop-down list. Only groups that are already

created in the system database will appear in the list.

5. Click OK to save settings.

To remove a group as a notification group from a queue or directory:

1. Locate the directory or queue you want to modify in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box by right-clicking on the folder or queue

in the Directory panel and selecting Properties from the context menu.

3. Select the Groups tab.

4. Select !<none> from the Notify Group drop-down list. When !<none> is selected, no

group is applied; therefore, no users will be notified whenever modifications are made to

the queue or directory.

5. Click OK to save settings.

Editorial Group

A queue’s editorial group specifies who can add breaks, float stories, or reorder queues, as

well as delete, remove or move data from a queue or directory. All editorial actions require

write access.

nWhen an editorial group is specified, users with Write privileges can still create, add, copy

and move stories to the queue, and they can edit stories in the queue.

To assign a group as a editorial group to a queue or directory:

1. Locate the directory or queue you want to modify in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box by right-clicking on the folder or queue

in the Directory panel and selecting Properties from the context menu.

3. Select the Groups tab.

4. Select a group from the Editorial Group drop-down list. Only groups that are already

created in the system database will appear in the list. When !<none> is selected, no

group is applied; therefore, only a user who has Write privileges to the queue can add

breaks or float, reorder, delete, or move stories from the queue.

5. Click OK to save settings.

To remove a group as a editorial group from a queue or directory:

1. Locate the directory or queue you want to modify in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box by right-clicking on the folder or queue

in the Directory panel and selecting Properties from the context menu.

3. Select the Groups tab.

6 Groups

174

4. Select !<none> from the Editorial Group drop-down list. When !<none> is selected, no

group is applied; therefore, only a user who has Write privileges to the queue can add

breaks or float, reorder, delete, or move stories from the queue.

5. Click OK to save settings.

Restricted Group

Members of the restricted group are prevented from accessing directories and queues that

have no group traits assigned. For instance, if you set a queue’s Read and Write group

settings—located on the Groups tab of the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box—to

!<none>, then that queue has no Read or Write group assigned; therefore, a member of the

restricted group will not be able to see or write to that queue. The restricted group is

commonly used at sites for temporary users. The system administrator can assign a

temporary user to the restricted group and then to a limited set of specific groups. That user

is then restricted to only those directories and queues that have those specific groups.

Restricting Both Reading and Writing

You may need to restrict a queue so that one group of users can read and write in that queue,

while another group can only read stories.

Suppose you want to restrict your Assignments directory. In most systems, a few

people—mostly those at the assignments desk—need write permission to this directory. A

larger number of users, such as writers and reporters, need to read, but not edit, stories in the

Assignments directory.

The people who should have read-and-write permission for the Assignments directory come

from different areas of the newsroom, so it is unlikely a group exists with just those users.

However, you could set it up like this:

• Create a group called assignments to represent users who need write permission for the

Assignments directory.

• Similarly, create a group called staff to represent users who need read permission.

• Assign the staff group to the directory’s read group trait and the assignments group to

the directory’s write group trait.

Transferring Group Assignments

You might need to locate every instance where a particular group is assigned to a directory

or queue and change that assignment so that another group is assigned to that directory or

queue.

Group Traits for the Database

175

To transfer group assignments:

tUse this form of the gtraits console command:

gtraits transfer <current-group-name> <new-group-name>

nGroups are marked for transfer, but no changes are made to any directories or queues until

dbpurge runs. Both groups that you include in the gtraits transfer command must already

exist.

Hiding Queues and Directories

In addition to restricting access to various queues, you can use group access and usage

restrictions to hide queues or directories by placing a strict read restriction on them.

A number of queues on your system probably have very tight write security to ensure that

only certain users can create and edit stories in those queues. If other users do not need to

read the stories in the queue, you may give the queue tight read security. This prevents the

queue from appearing on unauthorized users’ screens. Some examples of this are the Dead

queue, a Suggestions queue, an Employee Evaluations queue, and so forth.

nAll users that you want to have the capability to send stories to these queues need to have

write access to the queue, but not necessarily read access.

Another example is the System directory, which is usually restricted so that only superusers

can write stories there. You can hide this directory so that it does not appear in the main

directory for normal users by setting its read group to a group that has no users; this group is

typically called Nobody. Because superusers can read everything in the database, they can

still see the directory.

nMany sites put the system administrator’s name in the sysop group for e-mail purposes.

For this example, your system could use an empty group called sysop, which is then

assigned as the read group trait for the System directory.

To set the System directory’s read group to sysop:

1. Locate the System directory in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box by right-clicking on the folder in the

Directory panel and selecting Properties from the context menu.

3. Select the Groups tab.

4. Select a sysop group from the Read Group drop-down list. If it does not appear in the

list, it has not been created in the system database. See “Creating a New Group” on page

154 for more information.

5. Click OK to save settings.

6 Groups

176

Creating a Mail Alias

A mail alias is a name up to 20 characters long that represents a group of people who often

receive similar mail. Each mail alias acts like a distribution list. This way, instead of sending

mail to each user individually, you can send mail to the alias and the mail server distributes a

copy of the mail story to each user on the group’s membership list.

Like groups, mail aliases are defined in stories in the Groups queue in the System directory.

nYou can have an unlimited number of aliases, but only 700 groups. Groups should primarily

be used for security purposes; Aliases are not used for security purposes, only for mail

delivery.

To create a mail alias, do the following at an iNEWS Workstation:

1. Open the System directory in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Groups queue.

3. Select File > New Story.

A new blank Story panel appears. In the Queue panel, a blank entry in outline appears.

4. Type the name of the alias in the blank field of the Queue panel or in the corresponding

title field of the Story Form panel.

5. Click inside the Story panel and type the alias name and membership list in this format:

alias alias-name

user-ID user-ID group-name …

user-ID alias-name …

An alias’s membership list must begin with the word alias followed by the name of the

alias and one or more lines that list user IDs, groups, or aliases that you want to include.

6. Select File > Save Story.

nWhile using aliases for mail distribution, the removal of a user’s account may result in mail

bounce back errors if that user’s name remains listed in SYSTEM.GROUPS stories.

Remember to remove users names from stories in SYSTEM.GROUPS before removing the

user accounts from the system. This will reduce the potential for mail bound back errors.

Mail Aliases for Other Machines or the Internet

You can send mail to a user on another system connected to your system over the network.

When you put a network mail address in a mail story’s TO field, the mail server routes the

mail to the correct address, which depending on your setup can be another machine on your

iNEWS system or anywhere on the Internet.

Creating a Mail Alias

177

You can make it easier to use network mail addresses by assigning them mail aliases. Then,

when you want to mail to someone who is not on a system connected to yours, use the mail

alias.

nMail in iNEWS cannot be used to send to external e-mail addresses that include

underscores; the sending user receives a “Returned Mail” message.

To assign a mail alias to a network mail address, do the following at an iNEWS

Workstation:

1. Open the System directory in the Directory panel.

2. Open the Groups queue.

3. Select File > New Story.

A new blank Story panel appears. In the Queue panel, a blank entry in outline appears.

4. Type the name of the alias in the blank field of the Queue panel or in the corresponding

title field of the Story Form panel.

5. Click inside the Story panel and type the alias name and membership list in this format:

alias alias-name

network-address …

For instance, to assign the network address jan@kbba.com to a mail alias called Jan,

type:

alias Jan

jan@kbba.com

6. Select File > Save Story.

6 Groups

178

7Keyboards and Macros

Macros are time-saving routines you can assign to programmable key(s) on your computer

keyboard, which then can be invoked with one or two simple keystrokes, or with the click of

a button on a customized toolbar. A single macro can be the shortcut to an entire command

sequence. They are commonly used for scripting, printing, navigation, floating stories, and

so forth.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Types of Macros

•Creating a Keyboard

•Creating Macros

•Keyboard Checker

•Assigning a Default Keyboard to a User Account

Types of Macros

There are two types of macros.

• A macro assigned to a key or keystroke combination is known as a keyboard macro.

• A macro assigned to a customized toolbar button is known as a toolbar macro.

Each keyboard macro lets a user enter many characters and commands with the press of a

single key or keystroke combination on an actual keyboard. In most cases, the system

administrator will create multiple keyboard macros as a set of macros called a keyboard that

is stored in the system directory. Each keyboard typically contains keyboard macros grouped

according to a specific job or task, such as a producer or writer.

nOnce created, a keyboard can then be selected as part of the user’s preferences.

For instance, suppose a writer in the newsroom frequently writes scripts for a particular

reporter. The system administrator can assign the text in that reporter’s usual sign-off to a

macro key included in a set of macros called the Writer keyboard. Then the writer, with that

keyboard chosen as a user preference, could put the entire text of the reporter’s sign-off in

stories with a single keystroke. This same key may be associated with a different macro,

such as one that opens a rundown queue, if the user is a producer using a Producer

keyboard—a different set of macros.

The system administrator can assign macros to function keys, such as F1, F2, F3, and so on,

across the top of the keyboard and to numeric keys on the numeric keypad, located at the

right side of the keyboard.

cSome function keys are predefined to standard Windows-based operations, such as F5

to refresh the screen or F1 to open an application’s help system. While redefining these

predefined keys is allowed, it is not recommended. If you save a macro for a key that

has a predefined function, the system displays a warning message stating that a

reserved key has been redefined. See “Warning Messages” on page 192 for more

information.

Other keys known as state keys, such as Control (Ctrl) or Alt, can also be used in

conjunction with the function and numeric keypad keys as shortcuts to entire command

sequences. Shift is a state key commonly used with function keys, but not with the numeric

keypad.

Creating a Keyboard

181

Users can also create their own toolbar macros—using techniques similar to those used by

system administrators who write keyboard macros—and assign them to customized toolbar

buttons.

Creating a Keyboard

An iNEWS Workstation keyboard can contain more than 100 macros, representing possible

states of the 12 function keys plus the 10 numeric keypad keys. For example, possible

combinations for F7 are:

Keyboards, or sets of keyboard macros, are actually stories saved in a specific location in the

iNEWS system directory.

To create a keyboard containing a set of macros for iNEWS Workstations:

1. Log in to an iNEWS Workstation.

2. Navigate to SYSTEM.KEYBOARDS in the Directory panel.

3. Create a new queue to hold the story that will contain your keyboard macros.

Be sure to name the queue according to the following format:

<###>-<keyboard name>

The numerical values can be any three-digit number from 000 to 255. If the number is

less than 100, you must supply leading zeroes. The keyboard name is the name that will

appear as a keyboard available for selection as a user preference.

Some sample names for queues in SYSTEM.KEYBOARDS are: 001-Reporters,

002-Assignments, and 003-Producers.

F7 Ctrl+Shift+F7

Shift+F7 Alt+Shift+F7

Ctrl+F7 Alt+Ctrl+F7

Alt+F7 Alt+Ctrl+Shift+F7

7 Keyboards and Macros

182

cAlthough the numerical values of 251-255 are valid, you cannot have more than 250

queues in SYSTEM.KEYBOARDS, since this would exceed the limit on the number of

queues allowed in a single directory. Queues with the number 256 or greater will not

work.

4. Open the new queue.

5. Press the Insert key to create a new story in the queue.

If an existing keyboard story is similar to the new one you want to create, you can copy

it into the queue and modify it rather than creating a keyboard story from scratch.

The first story in the queue with a name containing the string

inws

, which is not

case-sensitive, is used as the keyboard macro definition story for iNEWS. For instance,

a default keyboard story name is:

000 inws DEFAULT

Other examples are:

inws 001 REPORTERS

inws 002 ASSIGNMENTS

. As the

examples show, the inws string can begin the story’s name or be somewhere in the

name.

cWithout the

inws

string in a story’s name, the keyboard will not work.

6. Create your keyboard macros.

The keyboard macros are listed as text in the story. Keyboard macros for iNEWS are

written using the key names which are in the file: /site/dict/keymacros. You can use

alphabetic and numeric keys, and most punctuation marks in a macro. However, some

punctuation marks are reserved for specific functions within a macro. See “Characters

and Keys Available for Macros” on page 185 for more information.

7. Save the story.

nThe “key” mailbox is used by the iNEWS keycheck program, which checks for errors

immediately after a keyboard story is saved. See “Keyboard Checker” on page 189 for more

information. The “key” mailbox must be set on keyboard queues. The mailbox trait can be

viewed and changed from the Directory Properties dialog box. See “Directory/Queue

Properties Dialog Box” on page 122 and “Maintain Tab” on page 130 for more

information.

Creating Macros

183

Creating Macros

There are numerous things to keep in mind when creating macros. These include the

function of the macro (printing, scripting, navigation, etc.), the keystrokes to produce the

macro, and the proper macro syntax for creating it.

Keyboard Macros

Keyboard macros begin with the "at" symbol (@) and are written in segments, which make

up a macro definition. Segments include a Key Indicator, a Separator symbol known as a

tilde (~), an Action, and an optional Comment. Segments must appear in the proper order for

the macro to work correctly.

For instance:

An example of a macro definition is:

@{f4}~{alt gd} wires.all{enter};Go to wires.all

This macro allows you to press F4 to navigate to the WIRES.ALL queue rather than

completing the longer process—typing Alt+G+D to open the Destination dialog box, then

typing

WIRES.ALL

, and pressing Enter—to do the same thing.

Each segment of the sample macro definition are explained in this table:

Macro Segment Function

@{f4} The key indicator begins the macro definition line with the at symbol

(@). Then, {f4} indicates the macro is invoked when a user presses and

releases the key(s) defined within the braces—in this case, the F4 key.

Braces ({ }) are used to group letters together as one key or combination

of keys.

~ The separator is the tilde character (~), and it divides the key indicator

you are defining from the action the macro is to perform.

{alt gd}wires.all{enter} The action includes a series of keystroke combinations. In the example,

{alt gd} presses the Alt key, then types

for the Go To, Destination

menu options, and releases the Alt key. That part of the action opens the

Destination dialog box. Then,

wires.all

is typed in the text field of the

dialog box, and {enter} presses the Enter key and releases it.

;Go to wires.all The optional comment begins with the semicolon (;) and provides a

description of what the macro does.

7 Keyboards and Macros

184

Only certain keys can be defined as indicators for macros. In most cases, you can assign

macros by combining a function key or numeric key on the keypad with one or more state

keys. See “Using the State Keys in Macros” on page 187 for more information.

nTo use the numeric keys on the keypad, Num Lock must be on.

Other keys can appear in macros but not as indicators—that is, they cannot have macros

assigned to them. See “Characters and Keys Available for Macros” on page 185 for more

information.

Toolbar Macros

Toolbar macros use only the Action section of the macro definition. The Action is entered in

the Customize Toolbar Button dialog box, in the Macro section. For instance:

{alt gd} wires.all{enter}

Here are some other examples of toolbar macros:

•

{alt sf}

— This is a macro that creates a “float” button for a producer, used to float a

story in the rundown.

•

{alt tu}<name of plugin>{enter}

— This is a macro that opens a plugin in

iNEWS.

•

{alt osu}

— This is a macro that can be used when copying wires into a story. It puts

the text in upper case.

•

{tab}{home}{tab}{tab}{tab}ASSIGNID{enter}{up}

— This is an example of a

macro that could be used to enter ASSIGNID into a certain field in a rundown. The

macro first exits the form you might be in, tabs over to position the cursor in the

field—this will vary depending on the rundown—and types ASSIGNID. The {up} at the

end is to take your cursor back to the field.

•

{alt fpp}{alt q}{alt y}rundown{enter}

— This macro prints a rundown.

•

{alt{right}}{alt{right}}{alt{left}}{alt vuf}editor{enter}

— This

macro, first, ensures the focus is in the Queue panel and then changes views.

cBe careful when creating macros, like Assign ID or those used for scripting, that the

focus is in the proper panel; otherwise, the macro could damage stories or rundowns.

To name a few more of the many possibilities, toolbar macros can be used to create buttons

that will duplicate a story to a queue, insert common production cues in a story, or write a

validation code in a field and send the story to a validation server.

Creating Macros

185

Characters and Keys Available for Macros

You can use alphabetic and numeric keys, and most punctuation marks in a macro. However,

some punctuation marks are reserved for specific functions within a macro. For instance,

because the open and close braces ({ }) and the tilde ( ~ ) are characters that have special

meanings, you cannot use them as plain text in a macro. You can use the at symbol (@) in

the Action of the macro—to the right of the Separator—but not as plain text on the left-side

of the Separator, where it indicates the start of a new macro definition.

nDo not use the semicolon character in a macro. If you include a semicolon ( ; ) in a

description line, everything following that character is considered a comment by the system

and is ignored. An example of semicolon use for comments is shown in “Using the State

Keys in Macros” on page 187.

If you create a macro longer than 80 characters, let the system wrap the cursor around to the

next line.

The following table offers a quick reference to what keys can be used in macros. The

function, keypad, and state keys can be used as indicators and, therefore, have macros

assigned to them. Edit, arrow and miscellaneous keys can appear in the action part of a

macro, but cannot have macros assigned to them.

Function

Keys Keypad Keys State Keys Edit Keys Arrow Keys Misc. Keys

f1 kp0 shift insert up tab

f2 kp1 ctrl home down backspace

f3 kp2 alt pageup left space

f4 kp3 pagedown right enter

f5 kp4 end

f6 kp5

f7 kp6

f8 kp7

f9 kp8

f10 kp9

f11

f12

7 Keyboards and Macros

186

For more information about how to use state keys, see “Using the State Keys in Macros” on

page 187.

Predefined Function Keys

Some function keys have predefined system functions, such as F1, which opens the iNEWS

help system. These keys are provided as accelerator keys for common user functions.

cRedefining these predefined keys is allowed, but is not recommended. If you save a

macro for a key that has a predefined function, the system displays a warning message

stating that a reserved key has been redefined. See “Warning Messages” on page 192

for more information.

The following table shows the standard predefined system function keys.

Function Key or

Key Combination Predefined System Function

F1 Opens the iNEWS help system

F2 Edit a field (or cell) in the Queue panel

F3 Find Next

Alt+F4 Exits the iNEWS program

Ctrl+F4 Closes a workspace

F5 Refreshes display in Queue or Story panel

Ctrl+F5 Discard changes

F6 Toggles between the Instruction panel (containing production cues) and the

Story Text panel

Shift+F6 Toggles between the Story Text and Story Form panels.

F7 Opens Wire Urgent Workspace (Wire Priority queue)

Shift+F7 Opens Wire Alert History window

F8 Toggles Message toolbar on and off

Shift+F8 Opens Message History dialog box

F9 Toggles Mail Workspace open and closed

Creating Macros

187

Using the State Keys in Macros

The Alt, Shift, and Ctrl keys are known as state keys, because their state affects what

happens when another key is pressed, whether they are pressed or not.

To include a state key in a macro:

1. Begin with an open brace ({) to indicate that a key is being pressed.

2. Follow the open brace with the name of the state key, such as Alt.

3. Since a state key does not do anything by itself, enter the name of the next key pressed

along with it. Enclose this key in another set of braces ({ }) if it is a function or numeric

keypad key, such as F7 or kp1.

4. End with a closing brace (}) to indicate the release of the state key. So you’d have

something similar to this:

{alt{f7}}

nThe iNEWS newsroom computer system will not recognize the Shift state key used in

combination with the numeric keypad keys. For instance,

{Shift{Ctrl{kp9}}}

is the same

{Ctrl{kp9}}

. If a user attempts to create a macro with this combination of keys, the

system’s keycheck program will issue an error message:

(M_NUMKEYNOSHIFT) “Shifted

numeric keypad 0-9 keys cannot be assigned.”

Here is an example of a macro that uses state keys for scripting. Its function is to insert a

TAKE VO production cue into a story when the user presses Shift+F1. The first line is a

comment. The second line, which wraps in this guide but might not do so on your

screen, is the macro.

;SH F1 TAKE VO

@{shift{f1}}~{alt{insert}}TAKE VO{f6}{ctrl{alt p}}TAKE VO{ctrl{alt

n}}{enter}

Using Plain Text in Macros

Besides using individual keys and key combinations in a macro definition, you can also have

the macro enter plain text. This could be text you include in stories often or text you enter in

fields of a dialog box in iNEWS. Example:

@{ctrl{f9}}~{space} Roll tape - Sound up full {space}{enter}

Whenever you include plain text in a macro, all spaces in the text are preserved. The case

(lowercase or uppercase) is preserved as well.

7 Keyboards and Macros

188

Repeating Macros

If there are actions performed at the workstation that require executing the same command

or series of commands over and over, you can create a repeating macro that performs this

action. Once invoked, a repeating macro executes at regular intervals until the user presses

Ctrl+Break or Escape.

To have a macro in an iNEWS keyboard perform a repeating function, place the command

{repeat} just before the actions you want the macro to repeat.

As an example, create a macro that makes it easier to browse wires and assign it to the F4

key. This macro takes the user to WIRES.ALL and then scrolls down one story at a time. It

pauses briefly on each story, so the user can read the title and decide whether to read the

story. The user stops scrolling by pressing Ctrl+Break or Escape.

To create this repeating macro:

1. Begin the macro by typing

@{f4}~

to indicate that it is for the F4 key.

2. After the Separator (~), type

{alt gd} wires.all {enter}

to open a window

displaying WIRES.ALL.

3. Add the repeating portion of the macro, which moves the user down one line at a time at

regular intervals. Begin by typing

{repeat}

to indicate that what follows is repeated.

Then type

{down}

to move the cursor down one line in the queue.

4. Use the {pause} command to make the macro pause a few seconds on each story.

Follow this command with the number of seconds you want the repeating macro to

pause. For instance, to make the macro pause two seconds before repeating, type

{pause 2}

. The range for the {pause} command is 1 to 60 seconds.

The macro should be one continuous line of text. Otherwise, allow the computer to wrap

the text if it extends beyond screen margins.

The completed macro looks like this:

@{f4}~{alt gd}wires.all{enter}{repeat}{down}{pause 2}

Keyboard Checker

189

Notes of Caution for Creating Macros

When creating macros—whether or not they are repeating macros— care should be taken.

First, certain commands should never be used in macros.

cDo not use the Duplicate or Kill commands in repeating macros. Doing so raises the

risk of accidentally killing the wrong stories or filling up the database and causing a

“low-on-space” condition.

Secondly, all macros should be created using steps only to a point where varying options are

not a possibility. For instance, a system administrator wants a macro designed to open a

story and type a specific production cue on a certain line, then save the story and open the

next one in the lineup. The system administrator must keep in mind that the process for

editing stories may vary for each user depending on user preferences or queue location. In

other words, in some cases, a user may start to save a story and be prompted by a dialog box

that requests confirmation. This confirmation box is a user preference that varies with each

user. A similar confirmation dialog box may appear if a user is opening a story in a read-only

queue. So, any macro must incorporate these possibilities or stop prior to them. Otherwise,

the macro may hang up on an unexpected dialog box.

nTo immediately stop a macro that is in progress for any reason—including one hung up on

an unexpected dialog box—press the Escape (Esc) key.

If a macro should wait for a dialog box, such as Local Printing, before continuing, the syntax

is:

{window Local Printing}

. The text following the word window must match exactly

the title of the dialog box. If it does not match, the user must press the Escape key to exit the

macro.

Keyboard Checker

Whenever you modify and save macros in a keyboard description story, the system checks

the keyboard and all its macros for problems that may prevent the macro from working

properly. If it finds a problem, it sends you a message describing the error.

nError messages are prefixed with

inws macro #%d

. The

represents the macro number.

Macros are numbered from one (1) at the beginning of the story. Some of the error messages

will include the macro key identifier.

The iNEWS system will also issue a warning if any predefined system function keys—that

is, those keys reserved for iNEWS system functions—are replaced with a macro. This

warning can be ignored if you want to override the pre-defined system function keys with a

macro. See “Predefined Function Keys” on page 186 for more information.

7 Keyboards and Macros

190

As long as you get a

Keyboard ok

message, the description story can be used, but go back

and fix any noted problems so the keyboard does what it is supposed to.

Error Messages

The following table contains a list of messages from the message dictionary that can appear

after you save a keyboard description story.

Error Message Explanation

Duplicate key description (M_KEYDUP) You defined the same function key twice in the

story; remove one of the definitions.

First key description does not begin with @

(M_KEYSTART)

You must use an @ symbol as the first noncomment

character in the description story.

Invalid key number (M_KEYRANGE) You tried to define a function key with a number

that is not supported.

Keyboard description contains too many

characters (M_KEYLONG)

This description story is too long. Shorten the

macros by using command abbreviations, or

deleting macros you do not use.

Keyboard NOT usable (M_KEYBAD) You must fix the errors in this description story

before you can use it.

Keyboard ok (M_KEYOK) You may use this keyboard, even if it has errors.

Missing key number separator (~)

(M_KEYSEP)

You must follow the key number of an extended

programmable key with a tilde (~).

Not enough key descriptions (M_KEYMIN) You must include lines for all the standard VT keys.

Include only the key’s number on a blank line, if

you don’t want to assign a function to a standard

key.

Warning: a key definition contains a repeating

function (M_KEYREP)

One of your key definitions has a repeating function.

If this is not what you want, edit the description.

Warning: badly placed @ exists in key

definition line (M_KEYFUNKY)

A line in the story contains an @ symbol that is not

the first character in the line or between two

commands. If this is not what you want, edit the

description.

Memory allocation error(M_BADMEMORY) An internal error; contact Avid.

Unable to stack keywords (M_BADSTACK) An internal error; contact Avid.

Mismatched {} (M_MISMATCH) The macro does not have paired brackets.

Keyboard Checker

191

No {} found for reserved word

(M_RESWORD)

A reserved word (key name) was found but was not

enclosed in brackets.

Could not locate }%d (M_NOLOCATE) Unbalanced { } pairs. Missing a }. The %d

represents the occurrence number of the expected }.

Circular reference to macro #%d:

(M_REFERENCE)

A circular reference was found in the macro. The

%d represents the macro number of the reference.

Multiple tildes (~) found (M_TWOTILDES) A macro definition cannot contain more than one

tilde (~).

Multiple macro keys: %s %s (M_TWOTAGS) An invalid key indicator specified—it contains more

than one key name. Each %s represents a key name.

Unexpected: %s (M_UNEXPECTED) An invalid key indicator specified—it contains plain

text. The %s represents the unexpected text.

Unknown macro key identifier: %s

(M_UNKNOWN)

An invalid key indicator specified—it contains a key

name that is not one of the recognized key names.

The %s represents the unknown key name.

No tilde (~) found (M_NOTILDE) There is no tilde (~) separating the key indicator

from the key action.

No macro key tag (M_NOTAG) There was no key name included in the key

indicator.

Shifted numeric keypad 0-9 keys cannot be

assigned macros (M_NUMKEYNOSHIFT)

You cannot assign a macro to a keystroke

combination of Shift and a numeric keypad key.

Empty macro (M_EMPTY) There was no key action data in the macro

definition.

Duplicate macro definition: %s

(M_TWODEFS)

There was a duplicate key indicator defined. The %s

represents the key indicator.

Invalid pause interval (M_BADPAUSE) The interval included in the pause command was not

a number between one and sixty.

Isolated keyboard state: (M_LONESTATE) A state key (Alt, Shift, or Ctrl) was specified but did

not modify the action of any other key, such as:

{shift} instead of {shift abc}

%s does not distribute (M_DISTRIBUTE) A non-state key (not Alt, Shift, or Ctrl) was found

while another key was still depressed, such as:

{insert{home}}. The %s represents the key still

depressed.

Error Message Explanation (Continued)

7 Keyboards and Macros

192

Warning Messages

The following table lists the messages that appear if the keys reserved for iNEWS system or

Windows-based functions are redefined.

Testing the Keyboard

After you create a keyboard story, you should always test the macros in it to make certain

that it works the way you intended.

Ignoring: %s (M_IGNORING) The state of a macro definition was expected but did

not begin with an at character (@). All of the text is

being ignored. The %s represents the text being

ignored.

Error Message Explanation (Continued)

Reserved Key Warning Message

F1 Warning: “Help” key redefined (M_STDHELP)

F3 Warning: “Find Next” key redefined (M_STDFINDNEXT)

Alt+F4 Warning: “Exit” key redefined (M_STDEXIT)

Ctrl+F4 Warning: “Window Close” key redefined (M_STDCLOSE)

Ctrl+F5 Warning: “Discard Changes” key redefined (M_STDDISCARD)

F5 Warning: “Refresh” key redefined (M_STDREFRESH)

F6 Warning: “Script Swap” key redefined (M_STDSCRIPT)

F7 Warning: “GoTo Priority Queue” key redefined

(M_STDPRIORITYQUEUE)

Shift+F7 Warning: “GoTo Alerts History” key redefined (M_STDALERTSHISTORY)

F8 Warning: “Communicate Message Bar” key redefined

(M_STDMESSAGEBAR)

Shift+F8 Warning: “Communicate Message Show History” key redefined

(M_STDMESSAGEHISTORY)

F9 Warning: “Communicate Open/Close Mail key redefined (M_STDMAIL)

Assigning a Default Keyboard to a User Account

193

To test the keyboard:

1. After you finish a macro, save the keyboard.

2. Verify that the keyboard checker lists no errors.

3. Log out of iNEWS and log back in; otherwise, the keyboard will not be available.

4. Select Tools > Options > Preferences to assign the keyboard and load it.

5. Test the macro(s) you created to make sure they perform as intended.

Assigning a Default Keyboard to a User Account

Users can select a keyboard—that is, a set of macros—to use at any time by using the

Preferences option in the Tools menu. The system administrator can assign the default

keyboard for a user, which appears when the user first logs on.

When you add a new user to the system, you may want to assign a keyboard as a default for

the user at that time, according to the role the user plays in your newsroom. For instance, a

new writer may get the “user” keyboard, a new producer would be assigned the “producer”

keyboard, and so forth.

You assign a set of macros as a user’s keyboard by assigning the keyboard story containing

those macros to that user. When the user presses a programmable key, the system looks at

the user’s assigned keyboard story and executes the macro assigned to that key.

7 Keyboards and Macros

194

To assign a keyboard as a user’s default from an iNEWS Workstation:

1. Select Tools > Options > Users. The Manage User Accounts dialog box appears.

2. Do one of the following:

tCreate a new user account by clicking New User.

tModify an existing user account by selecting a user and clicking Modify.

nIf you clicked New User rather than Modify in this step, the dialog box will be titled Add

New User instead of Modify User Account. See “Adding a New User Account” on page 88

for more information.

3. In the Modify User Account dialog box, click User Preferences.

Assigning a Default Keyboard to a User Account

195

nAccess to the Modify User Account or Add New User dialog boxes is restricted to certain

users, such as system administrators and user managers—that is, users who know the

umanager password. See “Modifying User Traits” on page 68 for more information.

4. In the Preferences dialog box, click the Session tab, if not already selected.

5. Use the Keyboard drop-down list to select a keyboard for the user.

6. Click OK to save the new keyboard assignment and close the Preferences dialog box.

7. Click OK to save the modified user account and close the Modify User Account dialog

box.

7 Keyboards and Macros

196

8. Do one of the following:

tSelect another user to assign a keyboard to, and click Modify.

tClick Close to close the Manage User Accounts dialog box.

9. The next time the user logs in, the computer will automatically assign the new keyboard.

If the user is already logged in, he or she needs to reload the keyboard or log out and

then log back in to use the new keyboard assignment.

nUsers can choose a different keyboard than what is assigned to their user accounts at any

time by doing the following: Select Tools > Options > Preferences. Then, choose the Session

tab, pick a keyboard from the drop-down list, and click the Reload button.

8Forms

You can use standard iNEWS forms that come with the system or customize your database

by creating forms and assigning them to queues, based on the kind of information you want

to appear in the stories in those queues.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Form Guidelines

•Creating Forms

•Customizing Forms

•Assigning a Form as a Queue or Story Form

•Form Field Types and Definitions

•Standard iNEWS Forms

Form Guidelines

You create forms that are stored as stories in queues located in the database file structure

under the main system folder, SYSTEM.FORMS. The format is

SYSTEM.FORMS.N.NAME, where N is the first letter of the form name.

For instance, a story form may be SYSTEM.FORMS.S.STORYFORM. A rundown form

may be SYSTEM.FORMS.R.RUNDOWN. You can have up to 250 forms starting with each

letter.

Follow these general guidelines in designing forms:

• The story form and queue form can be different, but all fields displayed in the queue

form must exist in the story form before you can enter or display data in that field.

• In iNEWS, if you go over a page width, the overflow will be printed on a second page.

Columns do not break across page boundaries.

Creating Forms

You can create a new form from any iNEWS Workstation. The following procedure takes

you through steps to create the basic form for a story, which can later be used to create any

other form in the system, such as a rundown form. After building the story form, you can

easily copy and modify it to match the rundown you currently use.

To create a new form:

1. Navigate to the SYSTEM.FORMS folder. The queue for the new form must be stored in

the SYSTEM.FORMS folder.

2. Select Tools > New Folder. A new highlighted directory labeled New-Folder appears.

nYou can skip steps 3 & 4 if the alphabet folders already exist in the SYSTEM.FORMS

directory.

3. Type the name of the folder, such as S.

4. Select the alphabet folder, such as S (the folder for forms with names that begin with the

letter S), in which you want to create the new form.

5. Do one of the following:

tSelect Tools > New Queue.

tRight-click on the folder and select New Queue from the context menu.

Creating Forms

199

A new highlighted file labeled New-Queue appears.

6. Type the new form queue’s name, such as STORYFORM.

7. The Forms Allowed attribute should be inherited from the parent queue,

SYSTEM.FORMS, but you can ensure the Forms Allowed database trait is applied to

the queue by doing the following:

a. Right-click on the queue in the Directory panel to open the Queue Properties dialog

box.

b. Select the Forms Allowed check box so that a check mark appears.

See “Changing Database Traits” on page 136 and “Forms Tab” on page 123 for

more information.

c. Click OK to save changes. Otherwise, you will be unable to create a form in that

queue.

8. Double-click the queue to display it in the Queue panel.

9. Do one of the following:

tSelect File > New Story.

tPosition your cursor in the Queue panel and press the Insert key.

nIf the story form fields do not appear, click on the Story drop-down menu and select the

option to Show Form Area.

8 Forms

200

A new story row appears in the Queue panel and opens in the Story panel. At the top of

the Story panel, there is the Story Form panel that displays the story form fields (using

the default form or the form previously assigned to the queue). The following graphic

shows the Queue panel (on top with a new row) and the Story Form panel (on bottom

with six standard form fields).

10. Modify each field to customize the new form. For instance, you would need to select

each field’s type, which defines the field’s function within the form. See “Customizing

Forms” on page 201 and “Form Field Types and Definitions” on page 208 for more

information.

Since a basic story form does not necessarily use the default fields, as shown in the

above graphic, field modification is needed. For instance, the form may include the

following fields:

- Page field uses the PAGE-NUMBER field type.

- Title (or Slug) field uses the TITLE field type.

- Presenter (or Anchor) field uses the PRESENTER field type.

- Writer (or Reporter) field uses either the CREATE-BY or WRITER field type.

nWhen a new story is created, and the field called Writer is a CREATE-BY field type, it is

filled in automatically but cannot be changed by users. However, if the WRITER field type is

selected for the field called Writer, then when a new story is created, the field is filled

automatically, but data in it can be changed manually by a user.

- Graphics (or Production Notes) field uses the VAR-N field type, where N is any

number. Common practice is to name these fields v-<description>, such as

v-graphic or v-notes.

- Read time field uses the AUDIO-TIME field type.

- Back time field uses the BACK-TIME field type.

Customizing Forms

201

nText and production cues may be placed into the body of the form and text may be put into

the form fields; if so, all data contained in the story form will appear in a new story

whenever one is created in a queue with that story form.

11. Save the story and exit the queue, accepting current fields and form properties as the

new form.

Customizing Forms

After you create the form queue in SYSTEM.FORMS, you can modify fields to customize

the new form.

To customize a form, open its story and do the following:

1. Put the cursor in the Story Form panel and right-click. A context menu will appear.

There are three menu options for customizing form fields: Insert Field, Delete Field, and

Field Properties. Access to these options vary, based on whether or not you right-click

on a field in the Story Form panel.

Another option in the context menu is Label Borders. See “Turning on Label Borders”

on page 206 for more information.

2. Choose an option based on one of the following: (The choice you make also determines

which dialog box appears.)

tSelect Delete Field if you want to remove an existing field from the form. (The field

you right-clicked on is the one you will delete if you choose this option.) The

Confirm Field Delete dialog box will appear. Go to step 3.

tSelect Field Properties to modify properties of an existing form field. The Form

Properties dialog box appears. Go to step 4.

tSelect Insert Field to add a new field to the form. The Insert Field dialog box

appears. Go to step 5.

3. Confirm your command to delete the field and, if necessary, return to step 2 to continue

modifying form fields.

8 Forms

202

4. Use the Apply to radio buttons to determine whether you want your property

modifications to be applied to the:

- Current field—the one you right-clicked on

- Current row—all fields in the row of the field you right-clicked on

- Entire form—all fields in the form

nThe rest of the Form Properties dialog box offers the same form options as those explained in

step 5.

5. Select various form options to determine appearance and function of field(s) in the form.

Customizing Forms

203

The options available are explained in the following table.

Option Explanation

Label Enter current field’s name you want to appear in the Story Form panel.

Type Select a field type from the drop-down list, which defines the field’s function.

This is different from the Type section on the right side of the dialog box,

which is explained further in the next step of this procedure.

See “Form Field Types and Definitions” on page 208 for a detailed

explanation of the various types you can choose from the drop-down list,

including variable fields that allow you to make up your own field names,

such as “shot” or “printed.”

Starts new row Select this check box to force the field to be the first one in the next row of

the form.

Label size Enter a numerical value to determine the label size.

This size is in approximate characters. Using a proportional font will, of

course, cause the number of characters to vary.

Generally, label size should be set to edit size plus one.

8 Forms

204

6. Specify the Type.

Edit size Enter a numerical value to determine the space text will fill in the field.

The numerical value entered for edit-size does not limit the amount of text

that can be typed in the field, but just the amount of text viewed in the field at

any one time.

nSystem administrators can set a limit for text in Story Form fields,

using a Registry value defined as VT Compatibility at each

workstation.

Attributes Select attributes for the form field.

• Read-Only check box determines whether the form field can be read (not

modified).

• Affects Ready check box determines whether the form field participates

in determining the Ready field value.

• Enter a group name in the Write Group text box. When a write group is

assigned to a form field, only members of that group and superusers can

edit that field.

Text alignment Select text position within the field.

Label placement Select label position.

• Top (default) puts label on top of the field

• Bottom puts label below the field

• Left or Right puts label to either side of the field.

Label alignment Select way in which label aligns (left, center, or right) with the field.

Text style Select appearance of text (bold, italic, or underline) in the field.

Label style Select appearance of the label (bold, italic, or underline).

nAny combination of these attributes may be selected.

Option Explanation

Editbox Select the Editbox radio button to make the field a standard text-entry field.

Any user-created field type can be assigned as an editbox field.

Customizing Forms

205

Checkbox Select the Checkbox radio button to make the field a checkbox. Any

user-created field type can be assigned as a checkbox. Checkboxes will

always have the Text alignment attribute set to Center. The values are "1" for

checked and blank for unchecked, allowing use with raw queries and

Affects-Ready. Set the value by selecting or deselecting the checkbox once

the field is inserted into the form. Checkboxes can be selected with the mouse

or with the spacebar.

Calendar Control Select the Calendar Control radio button to make the field a calendar field in

the form. Any user-created field type can be assigned as a calendar field. Data

entry can be via keyboard, spinner, or the calendar control that appears when

selecting the button in the field. The calendar field defaults to a time of

00:00:00, but times can be added to the dates if more specificity is required.

Dates are stored on the server as seconds since January 1, 1970.

Duration Control Select the Duration Control radio button to make a field a duration field. Any

user-created field type can be assigned as a duration field. Duration fields

allow keyboard- or spinner-based entry. They appear as HH:MM:SS.

Durations are stored on the server as seconds.

Combobox Select the Combobox radio button if you want to assign predefined values to

the field. When these fields are used in a form, the user is presented with a

drop-down list instead of a text field. You can define the values by using a

system list or group, or you can create an ad-hoc list of values.

• Select Allow Blank Selection if you want a user to be able to choose a

blank value to clear the field.

• Select Editable if you want a user to be able to type their own value into

the combobox as opposed to selecting from the predefined values you

provide in the drop-down list.

• Select the Add List/Group button to open a new dialog box so you can

select system lists or groups to be used to populate the combobox. Your

selection will appear as an entry in the Entries section. See

“SYSTEM.LISTS” on page 207 for more information about lists.

• Use the Entries section to create ad-hoc values that will appear in the

combobox. In this section of the dialog box, you can use the four buttons

to add new values, delete an existing value, or rearrange the order of your

pre-defined values.

• The color boxes show the current system colors. Select an entry and then

a color to assign that color to the chosen entry. Colors can be assigned to

individual values or to entire groups and lists. When a color is applied, a

comma followed by a number (1-10) will appear after the entry to

indicate which color index is assigned to the entry. See

“SYSTEM.COLORS” on page 207 for more information about colors.

Option Explanation

8 Forms

206

7. Do one of the following:

tClick OK in the Form Properties dialog box to record changes to an existing form

and close the dialog box.

tClick Insert Before or Insert After in the Insert Field dialog box, depending on

where you want the new field to appear in the form in relation to the field (or cursor

position) you right-clicked on in step 1. This will record the changes and close the

dialog box.

8. Save story in the form queue, by clicking the Save button or selecting File > Save.

After a form is created and customized, it can be assigned to other queues in the

database as either the queue form, which dictates appearance of the queue, or story

form, which dictates appearance of stories created in the queue.

Turning on Label Borders

Label borders provide various information about fields in a tool tip format.

To turn on label borders in the Story Form panel:

1. Right-click in the Story Form panel.

2. Select Label Borders in the context menu.

3. Position mouse pointer over a field label to view tool tip.

When selected, rectangular borders are placed around the labels for each field in the

form. When the mouse pointer is positioned over a field’s label, a tool tip appears that

displays that field’s type, and the character count for the field position and label size.

For instance, the field called Slug (shown above) is a TITLE field located 12 characters in

from the left with a label size of 18 characters. So, from the position of the Slug field, you

can determine the Pg Number field has a Label size of 12 characters. Also, the Contact field,

in the example, is located 30 characters in from the left—that is, its position in the row is

equal to the sum of the label sizes for the fields directly to its left. This is the case for sites

that follow the general recommendation by Avid that label sizes be equal to each field’s edit

size plus one. However, if the fields’ edit sizes are larger than their label sizes, a field’s

position in the row would be based on the larger of the two. You may confirm these figures

by positioning your mouse over the fields and viewing the tool tips that appear for each field.

Similar to those that appear for labels, field tool tips also provide character count for position

and edit size.

Customizing Forms

207

nPositioning labels to the left or right of fields rather than above or below will also result in

adjustments for calculating field positions on a row, since both the label and edit sizes would

have to be included instead of the larger of the two.

SYSTEM.COLORS

There is a queue that holds system colors, which can be chosen (in the Form Properties or

Insert Field dialog boxes) to customize form fields. By default, the colors reside in the queue

SYSTEM.COLORS as defined by the Q_COLORS token in /site/dict/queues.

The first story in SYSTEM.COLORS defines the system’s colors. The format for each color

definition in the story is:

Only indexes 1 through 10 are accepted, and the color values are numerical from 000 to 255.

For instance, the first three color definitions in a story might appear similar to:

1 255 000 000 ;red

2 000 255 000 ; green

3 255 255 000 ; yellow

SYSTEM.LISTS

As a system administrator, you can create system lists, which can be chosen (in the Form

Properties or Insert Field dialog boxes) to customize predefined drop-down lists in

comboboxes. By default, the lists reside as stories in queues located in the directory,

SYSTEM.LISTS, as defined by the Q_LISTS token in /site/dict/queues.

The SYSTEM.LISTS directory is organized in a structure similar to SYSTEM.FORMS,

where the list is the first story in a queue that bears the same name as the list, and the first

character of that name is the name of the sub-folder in which the list’s queue and story are

located. For instance, a list called format is the first story in the queue

SYSTEM.FORMS.F.FORMAT.

The format of a list story is:

8 Forms

208

Each text value is a predefined list entry that will appear as an item in a combobox’s

drop-down list. Double quotes should be used if special characters or spaces are used in the

text value. Assigning a background color is optional, and if left blank, no color is used. Here

is an example of a list:

Stop 1 ; the Stop value has a red background color

Go 2 ; the Go value has a green background color

“No Light” ; the No Light value has no background color

Assigning a Form as a Queue or Story Form

Queue and Story forms are database traits that allow you to assign different forms to

different folders and queues using the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box at the

workstation, or the dbtraits command at the console.

You assign these traits to define the appearance of information in the Queue panel and Story

Form panel.

To assign a form at an iNEWS Workstation:

1. Navigate to the directory (folder) or queue you want in the Directory panel.

2. Right-click to open the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box. Access to this dialog

box and its appearance varies, depending on certain circumstances. See

“Directory/Queue Properties Dialog Box” on page 122 for more information.

3. Do either or both of the following:

tUse the Queue drop-down list on the Forms tab to select the form you want to apply

to the directory as queue form database trait.

tUse the Story drop-down list on the Forms tab to select the form you want to apply

to the directory as story form database trait.

See “Forms Tab” on page 123 for more information.

4. Click OK to save changes and apply the new queue/story form settings.

nUsers should log off and sign back on to view the new queue/story form settings.

Form Field Types and Definitions

Form field types are explained in this section. Included is the suggested maximum or

minimum length for each field (where applicable) and whether a user can enter text in the

field.

Form Field Types and Definitions

209

You can reuse only the VAR-N and AFF-READY-N fields in a form, where N is a different

number for each occurrence, such as AFF-READY-1. You can use all other field types only

once.

The following table provides explanation of forms pertaining to broadcast and/or machine

control and which fields are typically used in a variety of forms/queues.

Field Type Description

AFF-READY-N

(N represents any

number.)

AFF-READY-N fields are created when a system is converted from Avid

Netstation to iNEWS. The AFF-READY-N fields are assigned the “Affects

Ready” attribute when created. This means the field affects the display in the

READY status field and allows a user to initialize a story and change its

status. There can be more than one AFF-READY-N field in a form. If any

AFF-READY-N field within a form contains a “?” then the READY field

displays a NOT READY message. If a question mark does not appear in any

of the AFF-READY-N fields in the form, then the Ready field displays a

READY message. This field should precede the READY status field in the

form. In iNEWS, the “Affects Ready” attribute can be assigned to any field in

a form and the result would be the same behavior as described here

pertaining to the AFF-READY-N field. For more information, see the

definition for the READY field in this document.

AIR-DATE When a story is aired using the show-timing function, the date and time it airs

is inserted in this field. This field is designed to show which story is currently

on-air and give users a sense of how much time remains until a later story

goes to air. As the producer syncs timing on stories, the queue display on

other iNEWS Workstations shows that story in a different color. (Peach is the

standard default color rule.) The format on iNEWS Workstation is controlled

by the workstation control panel for regional settings.

APPN-X to APPN-X

(N represents 1

through 5; X

represents any

number.)

These fields are used differently, depending on the queue in which they are

used. They appear in Machine Control Terminal (MCT) forms and some

Command or ControlAir forms. Also, many of the fields have different

meaning, depending on the device type. For instance, in an MCT form, the

event ID for a video/cart machine goes in the APP1-1 field, but in the APP2-1

field for a CG or SS, where the APP1-1 field is used for the style. These

fields were previously used in the mail and account forms in Avid Netstation,

but are no longer used for those forms in iNEWS. The APPN-X fields have

been renamed in iNEWS and occur only in template conversion from Avid

Netstation.

8 Forms

210

AUDIO-TIME This field will display the estimated time for reading a story, which can be

estimated by the computer system or entered into the field by a user. If time is

in the field, the system will use it to calculate the total time. If there is also a

TAPE-TIME field in the form, the system adds the TAPE-TIME to the

AUDIO-TIME to calculate the story’s total time.

Without any user input, the system will display an estimated time based on

the length of the story and presenter’s read rate, which is obtained from the

PRESENTER field in the form. If there is no PRESENTER field or it does

not contain a user ID or the ID in the field does not have a read rate

associated with it, then audio time is based on the system’s default read rate.

The length of the story is actually the word count of the story, since the read

rate is based on words per minute.

If a user has entered a time in the field and wants to restore the audio time

calculated by the system, the user should remove entered data from the field

with the space bar, delete, or backspace key. After the cursor leaves the form

field, the system will then display the computer-calculated audio time and

recalculate total time accordingly.

BACK-TIME The system displays the back-time in this field. The back-time field is usually

eight characters wide, such as 00:00:00. A user can enter data in this field to

indicate hard-hit times for back-timing to certain points within a program.

CA-CAPTURED This field displays total number of characters captured during a session

connection; it is one of eight special fields used in the SYSTEM.ACCOUNT

queue form for logging connection time activity. Although this field is not

required, omitting it will prevent iNEWS from displaying the corresponding

information in the form.

CA-DIRECTION This field displays the direction of incoming or outgoing connections. It is

one of eight special fields used in the SYSTEM.ACCOUNT queue form for

logging connection time activity. Although this field is not required, omitting

it will prevent iNEWS from displaying the corresponding information in the

form.

CA-ELAPSED This field displays elapsed time of a session connection. It is one of eight

fields used in the SYSTEM.ACCOUNT queue for logging connection time

activity. Although this field is not required, omitting it will prevent iNEWS

from displaying corresponding information in the form.

CA-IDENT This field displays the connection identifier. It is one of eight fields used in

the SYSTEM.ACCOUNT queue for logging connection time activity.

Although this field is not required, omitting it will prevent iNEWS from

displaying corresponding information in the form.

Field Type Description (Continued)

Form Field Types and Definitions

211

CA-ORIGIN This field displays the origin machine name. It is one of eight special fields

used in the SYSTEM.ACCOUNT queue form for logging connection time

activity. Although this field is not required, omitting it will prevent iNEWS

from displaying corresponding information in the form.

CA-RECEIVED This field displays the total number of characters received from a remote

system during a connection. It is one of eight special fields used in the

SYSTEM.ACCOUNT queue form for logging connection time activity.

Although this field is not required, omitting it will prevent The iNEWS

system from displaying corresponding information in the form.

CA-REMOTE This field displays the remotely connected machine name. It is one of eight

special fields used in the SYSTEM.ACCOUNT queue form for logging

connection time activity. Although this field is not required, omitting it will

prevent iNEWS from displaying corresponding information in the form.

CA-SENT This field displays the total number of characters sent to a remote system

during a connection. It is one of eight special fields used in the

SYSTEM.ACCOUNT queue form for logging connection time activity.

Although this field is not required, omitting it will prevent iNEWS from

displaying corresponding information in the form.

CG-ADDR This field holds the ID’s or recorded page addresses from the character

generator on which a super is written by the CG interface.

This field is primarily used in association with ControlAir systems. See

“iNEWS Control Air Fields and Forms” on page 218 for further information

on when and how this field is used.

CG-TEMPLATE This field contains template information for the character generator, namely

the address on the character generator of the template or tab field to be used

for the requested super. This field is primarily used in association with

iNEWS Command or ControlAir systems. See “iNEWS Control Air Fields

and Forms” on page 218 for further information on when and how this field is

used.

CG-TEXT This field contains text of the super from the machine control instruction

requested by a user in the script. It is written into specified template fields on

the character generator interfaced with iNEWS. This field is primarily used

in association with iNEWS Command or ControlAir systems. See “iNEWS

Control Air Fields and Forms” on page 218 for further information on when

and how this field is used.

Field Type Description (Continued)

8 Forms

212

CHANNEL The letter or numerical identifier of the on-air output or playback channel of

an interfaced production device is located in this field. Most production

devices have two or more channels. This field is primarily used in association

with iNEWS Command or ControlAir systems. See “iNEWS Control Air

Fields and Forms” on page 218 for further information on when and how this

field is used.

CREATE-BY When you open a new story, the system enters your user name in this field.

The name is permanent and cannot be erased or overwritten. In a Mail form,

this field is used to indicate who sent the e-mail.

CREATE-DATE When you create a new story, the system stores the date and time the story

was created in this read-only field. The format on iNEWS is controlled by the

workstation control panel for regional settings.

CUME-TIME The computer displays the cumulative (cume) time. This field represents the

time of all the stories—except the selected story—added together. It has a

suggested minimum length of five characters, and is typically eight

characters.

DEVICE-MGR This field displays the device name controlling a particular event. This field

is primarily used in association with ControlAir systems. See “iNEWS

Control Air Fields and Forms” on page 218 for further information on when

and how this field is used.

DURATION This field can be used to store manually entered, suggested duration. The

value is not used for time calculation in any other fields.

EFFECT This field holds the effect name requested in association with a machine

control or broadcast control event that will be applied to the character

generator or still store machine when it’s taken to air. For instance: a wipe or

a dissolve. This field is primarily used in association with ControlAir

systems. See “iNEWS Control Air Fields and Forms” on page 218 for further

information on when and how this field is used.

Field Type Description (Continued)

Form Field Types and Definitions

213

ENDORSE-BY This field enables a user with write-access to the queue to endorse stories in

that queue. When a story is first saved in a queue, the field is red and blank.

Whenever a user endorses the story, the system places that user’s name in the

ENDORSE-BY field corresponding to that story and the field changes to

green.

To manually endorse a story, click on the field in the queue. If another user

subsequently changes the story and saves it, the ENDORSE-BY field turns

yellow but the endorser’s name remains in the field. This indicates the story

was changed by one user after it had been approved by another. The endorser

can see who made the change by looking in the MODIFY-BY field if there is

one in the story form. The endorser can also withdraw approval by opening

the story form and deleting the user id from the ENDORSE-BY field.

If the ENDORSE-BY field is not shown in the Queue panel, a user can still

endorse the story by typing a character in the ENDORSE-BY field located in

the story form. A non-system administrator (non-superuser) cannot kill an

endorsed story if another user has the Production Lock set.

nThe story form must include a MODIFY-BY field to show the green

"endorsed" status in the ENDORSE-BY field.

EVENT-STATUS This field displays availability and play status of a ControlAir, Command, or

MOS event, as reported by the production device involved. For instance, a

video event could be reported as OFFLINE, CUED,PLAYING, or

STOPPED, among other things. In rundown and Event List forms only the

status of a video event can be displayed. In ControlAir Workstation forms,

this field can also contain the status of CG and still store events. See “iNEWS

Control Air Fields and Forms” on page 218 for further information on when

and how this field is used.

ITEM-CHANNEL This field is required to allow changing of the channel that primary events

will play on. It does not apply to events entered as production cues in the

story body. The ITEM-CHANNEL field is used to set or display the channel

for primary Command, MOS, or ControlAir video events.

A user can edit this field—thereby changing the play out channel for a

primary event—manually or through the Assign Channel dialog box at the

iNEWS Workstation. Any changes made at an iNEWS Workstation will be

relayed to the appropriate device.

nWhen using the Assign Channel dialog box for MOS plug-in events,

the channel information is displayed in the ITEM-CHANNEL field.

LITERAL This field is a non-editable field, typically used as a label or spacer to assist in

alignment of other fields within the Story Form.

Field Type Description (Continued)

8 Forms

214

MAIL-CC This field is used in the Mail story form to display names of users receiving a

copy of an e-mail message.

MAIL-TO This field is used in the Mail story form to display names of users to

whom an e-mail message is sent.

MODIFY-BY This field contains the name of whoever most recently modified a story. A

user cannot edit this field.

MODIFY-DATE Displays date and time story was last modified. Every time a story is edited

and saved, the system updates this field.

MODIFY-DEV If a device name for a workstation is included in the configuration file, it

appears in this field when a story is saved at that workstation. If the device

name is not included in the configuration file, this field displays the IP

address of the workstation that was used when the story was saved. The

maximum number of characters for a device name is eight, but the IP address

can contain up to 15 characters.

MOS-ACTIVE This write-protected field is required for the Story Form to accept MOS or

CAP (ControlAir Plug-in) events. The field’s content is created by the

software when MOS or CAP events are created. Content may be cleared if

the user selects Delete Machine Control from the right-click pop-up menu. If

the VIDEO-ID field is also present, it will be read only whenever there is a

value in MOS-ACTIVE.

MOS-DURATION This editable field is required to allow duration information from MOS or

CAP events to be included in calculations for CUME-TIME, BACK-TIME

or TOTAL-TIME fields.

A user can enter a value, which appears bold, directly into this field, which

will be used only in show-timing calculations. Such user-entered information

does not become part of MOS or CAP events that are passed on to the

appropriate MOS device or ControlAir in the case of CAP events. Deleting

user-entered information from the field will allow show-timing to revert back

to duration information supplied by MOS or CAP events.

The contents of MOS-DURATION field are only used if a RUNS-TIME field

is present in the story. The contents of the MOS-DURATION field is added

to the computed runs time of the story and this total is shown in the

RUNS-TIME field. If the user enters a time in the RUNS-TIME field, the

MOS-DURATION field contents are ignored.

MOS-SUBEVENT This field is reserved for future use.

MOS-TITLE This write-protected field is required to allow the display of descriptive text

associated with MOS or CAP events.

Field Type Description (Continued)

Form Field Types and Definitions

215

NSML-LITERAL This field is only seen in stories and forms transferred from an Avid

Netstation database to an iNEWS database and cannot be created by a user.

The field is a by-product of the database conversion process and represents a

protected field in the Netstation template. You can delete it and replace it

with a usable field.

PAGE-NUMBER This field is used primarily to arrange stories in a queue. If a queue is set to

sort stories by page number, users can change the order of stories in the

queue by entering in new page numbers. This is commonly done with

rundowns, because it allows the producer to quickly change the order of

stories by assigning them new page numbers. This field can also be displayed

on a myriad of external systems, such as Command, ControlAir, or some

third-party prompters. The system uses the first six characters of the field as a

page number when the story is printed. This field is used in printing only

when the story is printed using the “print script” option.

PRESENTER The system uses the name of the user from this field to look up the user

read-rate. The system then calculates audio time for the story based on the

user read-rate. If a form does not contain a PRESENTER field, the system

calculates the audio time, based on the default read-rate set in the system

profile. (This is usually 180 wpm in English.)

READY In some cases, the system places status information, such as NEW, HOLD,

LOCKED, or WIRE in this field. For instance, a wire story starts with the

WIRE status. When a user changes the story, it changes from WIRE to

READY. In the Mail form, the READY field is used to indicate whether an

e-mail message is NEW or was READ.

A user cannot enter data in this field, but it can be altered based on

information put in other fields with the “Affects Ready” attribute in the form.

In these cases, iNEWS checks the “Affects Ready” fields in the form and if

any one of the fields are empty or contain a question mark (?) as the first

non-blank character, then the READY field displays a “?” status. However,

iNEWS displays READY in the READY field if none of the fields with the

“Affect Ready” attribute contain a question mark, and all Affects Ready

fields are populated.

RESULT-INDEX This field is in forms used to define the display of iNEWS database search

results. It contains the sequence number that indicates the original order of

items within the search results.

RESULT-LOC This field is in forms used to define the display of iNEWS database search

results. It contains the location of data found during a search, such as the

name of a queue containing the story found matching the search criteria.

Field Type Description (Continued)

8 Forms

216

RUNS-TIME This field displays the sum of all “runs=” times in a story’s production cues

plus the contents of the MOS-DURATION field. If the RUNS-TIME field is

not present in the story form, then the runs time entries will not be calculated.

If it’s not present along with MOS-DURATION, then the time from the

MOS-DURATION field will not be added to the story’s total time.

Runs time entries and the RUNS-TIME form field are not updated when the

iNEWS Workstation is connected only to the local database. When connected

to both the local database and server, the runs times will be updated when the

local database story is edited. Also, when the story is copied from the local

database into a queue on the iNEWS Server, its runs times will then be

updated accordingly.

The field functions much like the AUDIO-TIME field in that it can accept

user entered times while still maintaining the “real” runs time. For example, a

user can manually enter a time of 45 seconds in the field and that time will be

reflected in the TOTAL-TIME field. The sum of runs time entries as

calculated in the RUNS-TIME field are also included along with time from

story text in the text timing clocks, located at the bottom of the Story panel.

However, if a user manually edit the RUNS-TIME field, that data will not be

included in the times calculated for the text timing clocks.

By default, the Runs Time feature uses the word RUNS (not case-sensitive)

to indicate a runs time entry, which is quite flexible. Some examples are:

RUNS=25

RUNS=1:30

RUNS = 25

RUNS 1:30

TAPE RUNS 115

You can change this default by redefining the token W_RUNS on the server

in /site/dict/words.

nA runs time entry of 115, as shown in the last example above, is the

equivalent of one minute and fifty-five seconds (1:55). The number

115, without a colon, is interpreted as the number of seconds. So, 115

is not the same as 1:15.

SEARCH-ID This field, which contains the request ID number, is used by the Find All and

Fast Text Search features of iNEWS.

Field Type Description (Continued)

Form Field Types and Definitions

217

STATUS This field is used in a rundown queue. It will display “OK” or “ERROR,”

depending on the machine control event. The iNEWS monitor server utility

program sets this field to indicate whether there are any errors in the

production cues in stories of the rundown. In the SYSTEM.ACCOUNT

queue form used for logging connection activity, the STATUS field is used to

display the type of connection.

STILL-ID In an Event List or Composite List queue, this field displays the

alphanumeric identifier for a still store graphic. This field is primarily used in

association with ControlAir systems. See “iNEWS Control Air Fields and

Forms” on page 218 for further information on when and how this field is

used.

STILL-PRESET This field contains the number or letter designation of a predefined still store

format. It is typically used in the form for the still store device event list, and

is recognized by the ControlAir Workstations. This field is primarily used in

association with machine control systems and ControlAir systems. See

“iNEWS Control Air Fields and Forms” on page 218 for further information

on when and how this field is used.

STYLE This field contains the MCS/ControlAir style name specified when a user

requests a CG or Still Store event in the production cue. It is typically an

alpha or alphanumeric sequence that is a maximum of eight characters long.

For instance, iNEWS translates a CG style into an address on the character

generator at which a template is stored. That template is then used to build

the requested super. For ControlAir, styles are defined in stories in the

SYSTEM.RESOURCE queue. They define the details, such as CG template,

number of fields, still preset or playback effect, that define an event. This

field is primarily used in association with ControlAir systems. See “iNEWS

Control Air Fields and Forms” on page 218 for further information on when

and how this field is used.

TAPE-TIME A user can enter the tape’s run time in this field. If there is an AUDIO-TIME

field, the system adds tape time to audio time to calculate the story’s total

time.

TITLE This field is used to give each story a name. Occasionally referred to as the

“Slug” field, it is the default quick “index field” for sorting stories in a queue.

The first 20 characters of any field defined as the sort field of a queue is

extracted and used as the “quick index” for the story. The TITLE field is

usually selected as the “index field.” That means it is the field searched when

a user conducts a Find or Find All search function and specifies a search of

the index field. In a Mail form, this field is used to display the Subject of the

E-mail message sent. In the SYSTEM.ACCOUNT queue form used for

logging connection activity, the TITLE field is used to display the Service

name.

Field Type Description (Continued)

8 Forms

218

nWrite-protected fields may be edited if the third-party vendor supplies an editor interface.

Otherwise, such fields can be modified only by deletion or by replacement. To delete, use the

Delete Machine Control option from the right-click pop-up menu. To replace, use the Import

From Plugin option or drag-and-drop a MOS or CAP event from any source.

iNEWS Control Air Fields and Forms

Certain field options within iNEWS are used in specialized forms, which deal with various

devices that interface with the iNEWS newsroom computer system. These forms work in

part with the iNEWS ControlAir system monitoring programs.

TOTAL-TIME The computer stores the total time for a story in this field, calculated based

on the sum of information from the RUNS-TIME, TAPE-TIME and

AUDIO-TIME fields. If the AUDIO-TIME field is not present,the computed

audio time is used. The RUNS-TIME and TAPE-TIME fields must be present

to be included in the total time. The story’s total time is used when

calculating back-time. If none of the three field types are present, the total

story time is a computed audio time.

VAR-N This variable field was carried over from the Avid Netstation template

conversion. It is typically used for generic editable text fields. Users can

make up their own new fields using descriptive names, such as “crew” for a

field that lists a reporter/photographer team assigned to cover a story. The

user can employ anything for a field name with the following restrictions:

• The name must be 12 characters or less

• The name must begin with a letter of the alphabet

• It can include any letters (a-z), numbers (0-9), a dash (-) or a period (.)

The name is not case sensitive. User-created field names are treated the same

as variable fields.

VIDEO-ID This field is used in the rundown queue to display the tape number or clip ID

for video. It is also found in forms for the composite and video event lists.

This field is primarily used in association with machine control and

Command or ControlAir systems.

WRITER When someone creates a new story, the system automatically enters his or her

user name in this field if it is present in the form. You can also enter text and

change the name.

nDistribution codes assigned to wire stories are placed in the WRITER

field if it is present on the form used for wire stories. The codes would

also be placed in a MODIFY-BY or CREATE-BY field if either are

present in the story as well.

Field Type Description (Continued)

Form Field Types and Definitions

219

In certain cases, some fields in these forms are filled out by the system rather than users. The

monitor utility program in iNEWS recognizes a set of descriptive field types in the

Rundown, Event list, and Composite list forms.

Here’s a brief description of these forms:

nSee “Monitor Servers” on page 381 for more information about the utility program.

Below is a chart of form fields filled in by the monitor server (utility) program:

Data Type Rundown Forms

RUNDOWN FORMS This is the form used by stories in the rundown queue. The monitor program

may extract text from some fields in this form and may put text in others. It

also copies text from the rundown form to Event/Composite lists. Only event

information for video devices is currently placed in the rundown story form.

EVENT LIST

FORMS

The monitor server program places information about an event destined for a

specific device in the form fields of the Event List story. It also copies

rundown field text—for instance, title and page number—into matching

fields in the Event List story form.

COMPOSITE LIST

FORMS

The monitor server program puts information about events destined for all

devices in the form fields of the Composite List story. It also copies rundown

field text—for instance, the title and page number—into matching fields in

the Composite List story form.

ControlAir FORMS The function of the iNEWS ControlAir Workstation form controls which

data will be displayed on the playback screen. Currently, the iNEWS

ControlAir Workstation only extracts the PAGE-NUMBER from this form.

Fields defined for use only by the iNEWS ControlAir Workstation are:

DURATION, CHANNEL, and DEVICE-MGR.

Data Type Rundown Forms Event List Forms

Composite List

Forms

Error Status STATUS

Video ID/Address VIDEO-ID VIDEO-ID VIDEO-ID

Video Status EVENT-STATUS EVENT-STATUS EVENT-STATUS

Video Duration TAPE-TIME

CG Address CG-ADDR CG-ADDR

CG Template CG-TEMPLATE CG-TEMPLATE

8 Forms

220

Standard iNEWS Forms

The iNEWS system contains a number of standard forms, each designed for use with one of

the system’s features. The forms your system provides are ready to use, but you can also

customize them. You can add or remove fields from a form or change a field’s title.

Account Queue Form

The system keeps a record of events, such as who logged into a connect session, the service

used, and length of the connect session. This information is made available when the system

creates a story in the SYSTEM.ACCOUNT queue and puts information in the story’s form.

A form designed for this must be assigned to SYSTEM.ACCOUNT, or your system cannot

display the information. The standard account queue form is usually stored in the queue

SYSTEM.FORMS.A.ACCOUNT.

The following table shows the fields used in the Account Queue form.

CG Text CG-TEXT CG-TEXT

Data Type Rundown Forms Event List Forms

Composite List

Forms

Field Label Field Type

Service name TITLE

User CREATE-BY

Date and time CREATE-DATE

Connection type STATUS

Origin machine name CA-ORIGIN

Incoming or outgoing connection CA-DIRECTION

Remote machine name CA-REMOTE

Elapsed time of session connection CA-ELAPSED

Connection identifier CA-IDENT

Total characters sent to remote system CA-SENT

Total characters received from remote system CA-RECEIVED

Total characters captured CA-CAPTURED

Standard iNEWS Forms

221

You are not required to include any of these fields in the account queue form. However,

omitting a field prevents the system from displaying information associated with that field in

the account queue.

Mail Form

The Mail feature has a form specially designed for mail stories. This form has fields for

elements such as the subject of your message, name of message recipient, and people you

want copied on the message. The mail form is stored in SYSTEM.FORMS.M.MAIL. The

system includes a mail form, but you can specify a form for the mail feature to use by

assigning the form to the SYSTEM.MAIL.OUT queue.

You can modify this form to suit your system needs. The following fields are used by the

Mail queue.

Only the To field is required. A form that does not have the other fields is still usable.

Find All Form

Your system uses the form assigned to SYSTEM.SEEK, or whichever queue is specified for

Q_SEEK in the system dictionary (/site/dict/queues) as the find all form. Since the system

expects to find certain information in each of the form’s fields, the form assigned to

SYSTEM.SEEK must be designed for use with the find all command.

The follow table shows field types used in the find all form.

Field Label Field Type

To MAIL-TO

Subject TITLE

Cc MAIL-CC

From CREATE-BY

Field Label Field Type

ID SEARCH-ID

Status READY

Search For VAR-1

Search Where APP1-1

Results Queue TITLE

8 Forms

222

nThe find all command must have certain information to perform a search. If you leave out a

required field, the iNEWS Workstation displays a Missing form field message whenever

someone tries to use the find all command.

Wire Story Form

To display information such as title, time moved, source, and average reading time in each

wire, the system contains a wire story form. It is assigned to the wire queues and stored in

SYSTEM.FORMS.W.WIRES. Any changes you make to this form do not take effect until

you restart the wire. The following table shows field types used in the wire story form.

nThe name of the form used for wire stories is defined by the Words dictionary token

W_WIRE_FORM.

Search Type APP2-1

Max Hits PAGE-NUMBER

Notify Hits APP3-1

Hits so Far PRESENTER

By CREATED-BY

Started At CREATE-DATE

Field Label Field Type

Title TITLE

From WRITER or CREATE-BY

Moved CREATE-DATE

Status READY

Time AUDIO-TIME

FlashWord PRESENTER

Number PAGE-NUMBER

9Character Generator Title Entry

The iNEWS newsroom computer system provides journalists, producers, directors, writers,

and technical personnel in a newsroom with an array of tools to make their jobs easier. One

such tool is the CG Title Entry feature, which enables newsroom personnel to simulate

character-generated graphics at the iNEWS Workstation. By offering a graphical view of CG

information, iNEWS helps production staff verify the accuracy and quality of the data prior

to air.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Overview of CG Title Entry

•Title Entry Setup and Configuration

•CG Template Editor

•Title Entry Security

Overview of CG Title Entry

When writing scripts, journalists are typically required to include information in the script

that will appear as a character-generated graphic when the story is aired. These graphics,

called supers or CGs, must be entered into the script in such a way that iNEWS can identify

the information as data for the character generator. This method of identification uses

production cues—also called machine instructions—which are separated from the story text.

nThe first production cue example appears graphically later in this section.

Here is an example of a production cue for a CG with one line of text for the graphic and one

line of information for production staff.

*CG live

USA Hockey Championships

nUnlike the lines shown here, in iNEWS, production cues that contain machine commands

appear as blue text in the Instruction sub-panel on the left side of a split Story panel. For

those without machine commands—those that do not begin with an asterisk—the font

appears black.

Here is another example of a production cue for a CG with two lines of text for the graphic

and two lines of information for iNEWS and production personnel:

*CG live

Ellen Miller

City Hall

Take cg at 10 seconds in...

In the example, the user cannot visually determine how information will appear on air when

the data is loaded in the character generator template. For instance, will the data fit into the

actual text fields on the CG template? The answer to this question cannot be determined

from the production cue text. However, the Title Entry feature allows for this possibility by

offering a graphic-style dialog box.

The dialog box displays sample templates, complete with backgrounds and text fields,

similar to actual CG templates that appear on air. These sample templates—which are

configured and modified by system administrators using the CG Template Editor—can be

filled in by the users, and information is applied to the production cue within the script.

Overview of CG Title Entry

225

When configured accordingly, the Title Entry dialog box can provide users with visual

verification of whether text they enter will fit in fields of actual character-generated

graphics. Producers can use the Title Entry dialog box to preview CG information in scripts

in order to check the appearance and accuracy prior to airing the production cue.

The following graphic shows how a single-lined production cue appears in the Title Entry

dialog box, using a template background that has a 16 x 9 screen ratio.

The black button at the bottom of the window—known as the Dimensions Toggle

button—lets users toggle markers on and off, indicating what part of the graphic would be

visible within the standard 4 x 3 screen ratio.

nThe Title Entry feature can only be accessed by users when the cursor is located in the Story

panel of the iNEWS Workspace. Access to Title Entry can also be limited to certain users.

See “Title Entry Security” on page 241 for more information.

9 Character Generator Title Entry

226

Title Entry Setup and Configuration

Before you can use the Title Entry feature, templates must be created by the system

administrator in iNEWS to simulate the actual graphics used by the character generator. The

person responsible for setting up the templates should have a good understanding of how

CGs are created on the character generator, because it is important that templates in Title

Entry correspond to those used by the character generator.

Understanding CG Templates

Most CGs are comprised of both background graphics and text fields. A background graphic

could be a small color bar that spans the bottom third portion of the television screen, a

full-screen graphic, a logo in the corner of the screen, and so forth. See “CG Template

Backgrounds” on page 227 for more information.

The text fields vary as well. A CG template can contain numerous text fields, with each one

having different predefined properties, such as screen location and font style. Typically,

users can write text in the fields, but some may contain predefined text that users cannot edit.

For instance, a CG can have a field with the predefined word, FILE, which would be aired

over file video of previous news coverage.

An example of a standard CG template is a two-line lower-third CG. In the following

example, the bar separating the two rectangular boxes makes up the background. The boxes

are the text fields, which can be filled in by a user.

nCG text fields are also known as tab fields, referring to the key used to navigate from one

field to another.

In a CG template, the character generator assigns each text field a number, indicating the

order in which fields can be filled in. For instance, a user types a name in field one, then

navigates to the second field in the sequence using the Tab key, and types the person’s job

title or location.

nKnowing the numeric field assignments of each template is crucial, because the sequence in

the Title Entry dialog box must match the tab field’s sequence on the corresponding

character generator’s template.

Title Entry Setup and Configuration

227

CG templates are stored on the character generator at locations assigned or represented by

identification numbers known as Template numbers. These numbers can be used by the CG

operator to recall templates, which are filled in and aired during a show. However, in

iNEWS, aliases are usually assigned to each template to provide users with an easier way of

recognizing the template.

For instance, a template containing one field—one line of text—used to air the location of a

story may be stored on the character generator as template 502, but users type in the alias

loc1

in the production cue.

The assignment of aliases to Template numbers is stored in the Resource queue located in

the System directory (SYSTEM.RESOURCE). These same aliases must be established first

and used in naming the templates for Title Entry.

cThe Title-Entry queue in the System directory (namely, SYSTEM.TITLE-ENTRY) is

used to limit access to the CG Template Editor. When the CG Template Editor starts, it

gains a lock on SYSTEM.TITLE-ENTRY, which guarantees that only one system

administrator can modify the set of templates at any given time. The Title-Entry queue

must be created, if it does not already exist, prior to creating templates. In that queue,

there is one story titled 000-installation, and that story contains the following text:

WARNING - This file is machine read/written - Never edit this text

(unless instructed to do so)

TEMPLATE ROADMAP= TE000001

Do not manually edit the data in this queue. For help creating this queue, contact Avid.

When configuring templates or setting up new ones, use the CG Template Editor provided in

the software. See “CG Template Editor” on page 229 for more information.

CG Template Backgrounds

Before creating CG templates for Title Entry, the system administrator should capture an

image of the actual CG templates on the character generator as bitmaps. These bitmaps are

used as background images in the creation process of corresponding templates in iNEWS.

nYou must create bitmaps in one of two sizes. Standard size is 400 x 300 pixels (for a screen

ratio of 4 x 3) with 256 or more colors. The iNEWS CG Title Entry also supports images for

a 16 x 9 screen ratio, which requires bitmaps with the larger dimensions of 560 pixels wide

by 315 pixels high.

You can store the bitmaps anywhere on the network as long as they are accessible from the

iNEWS Workstation used to run the CG Template Editor. When the CG Template Editor

program creates Title Entry templates, the chosen bitmaps are copied to the iNEWS

database, at which point the bitmaps on the network can be disposed of.

9 Character Generator Title Entry

228

Required Bitmaps

Two slightly different bitmaps of each unique CG template should be captured from the

character generator. First, capture the CG template with the text fields full of text.

nDo not use spaces.

Each text field in the actual CG template filled out with information from a user should have

a solid string of characters in it when the bitmap is made. Fixed-width fonts allow for

absolute accuracy; however, proportional fonts can be used. The character limit of a field

with fixed-width fonts will be the same no matter which letters of the alphabet are used to

fill it up. Proportional—also known as variable-width—fonts contain some letters that are

wider than others, so the character limit may vary. For instance, the character limit of a field

with a proportional font may be nine letters if “M” is used to fill up the field, but that limit

increases to 25 when the letter “I” is used instead. A good mix of wide and narrow letters

should be typed in the field to fill it up if a proportional font is used.

The first bitmap provides a graphical demonstration of character width allowed in a text field

and the position of that field on the screen. This bitmap will be used to align text fields and

fonts on the Title Entry template when created in the CG Template Editor.

Secondly, capture the same CG template with empty text fields as a bitmap.

CG Template Editor

229

This bitmap will replace the first one in the final version of the Title Entry template. It will

be used as the template background shown in the Title Entry dialog box.

CG Template Editor

System administrators should use the CG Template Editor to create and modify templates

referenced by the Title Entry dialog box.

nBefore starting the CG Template Editor, a character generator and their aliases must be

defined in SYSTEM.RESOURCE; otherwise, an error stating “No character generators

defined” will appear.

To start the CG Template Editor:

1. Log in to iNEWS.

2. Select Tools > CG Templates. For superusers, the Edit Title Entry Template window,

which is explained in the next section, will open.

nIn some cases, a password is required before access to the CG Template Editor is allowed.

See “Title Entry Security” on page 241 for more information.

9 Character Generator Title Entry

230

Edit Title Entry Template Window

The Edit Title Entry Template window contains several template options, which can be used

to create templates that graphically represent actual CGs aired from the character generator.

Some options available to the system administrator are:

• Select a bitmap for a CG template background

• Add, modify, or delete text fields in a template

• Reorder sequence of text fields

• Limit editorial access to text fields

• Modify font size, color, style, and so forth

• Provide helpful Tool Tip text, which appears in the Title Entry dialog box when a user

positions the mouse over a text field.

nOptions in the CG Template Editor do not directly affect features of actual CG templates on

the character generator, but should be used to correctly reflect to the iNEWS user facsimiles

of CG templates on the character generator that are as accurate as possible.

The Edit Title Entry Template window’s toolbars—located at the top and bottom of the

window—contain various buttons and drop-down menus, used to configure template

options.

CG Template Editor

231

The following table provides details about the toolbar buttons and menus in Edit Title Entry

Template window.

Menu, List, Field

or Button Options and Explanation

Template menu Options include: New, Open, Save and so forth. This menu is used to open

new or existing templates, save modified templates, and to close the window

Edit menu Options include: Background, Add Field, Font PreSets, and so forth. This

menu is used for adding or deleting items to a template, such as a background

or field, and setting predefined Fonts.

The Logo button is the same as the Background option in the Edit drop-down

menu. It allows the user to select a bitmap graphic as a template background.

9 Character Generator Title Entry

232

The Text Fields button is the same as the Add Field option in the Edit

drop-down menu. It allows the user to add a text field to a Title Entry

template, which can then be positioned and sized accordingly.

The X button is the same as the Delete Field option in the Edit drop-down

menu. It allows the user to delete the selected text field from a Title Entry

template.

The 1-2-3 button is the same as the Field Order option in the Edit drop-down

menu. It allows the user to rearrange the numerical tab sequence of the text

fields in a Title Entry template.

The Text Color button is the same as the Text Color option in the Edit

drop-down menu. It allows the user to change the color of the font used in a

text field as displayed in the Title Entry dialog box.

Justify list Options include: Left Justify, Right Justify, and Center Justify. This list is

used to set the alignment of text in a field. The drop-down list will continue

to display the current setting of the selected field when the list is closed. The

default is Left-Justify.

Editing list Options include: Writable, Read Only, Optional and Required. This list

allows the user to determine whether a field is Writable or Read Only, and

whether it is a required field. If Required is chosen, the user of CG Title

Entry will be required to fill out the field with text before saving the

production cue. Because the user is prevented from entering text in a

read-only field, if Read Only is chosen, the user of the CG Template Editor is

required to fill out the field with text before saving the template. Blank,

read-only fields are not permitted. The drop-down list will continue to

display the current setting of the selected field when the list is closed. The

default is Writable-Optional.

Allowed Characters

list

Options include: All characters OK, Uppercase Only, Lowercase Only, and

Define Subset. This list allows the user to limit the type of characters allowed

in a text field. For instance, if the text field should only contain numerical

sports scores, then the user could use the Define Subset option to limit the

allowed characters in that field to the numbers: 0123456789. As shown, do

not use a comma to separate the numbers or it too will be allowed in the field.

The Define Subset option is case-sensitive.

Menu, List, Field

or Button Options and Explanation (Continued)

CG Template Editor

233

Creating a New Template

The CG Template Editor is used to recreate a template that will simulate the appearance of

information sent to actual templates aired by the character generator. This section assumes

those actual CG templates were already captured as bitmaps and stored in a file accessible to

the user creating a new template. See “Required Bitmaps” on page 228 for more

information.

cSince template names must match the alias associated with the actual CG template

number used by the character generator, the aliases must be defined before opening the

CG Template Editor. For instance, if a user typically types

*CG loc1

as the first line of

a production cue for a 1-line location CG, then the Title Entry template created for that

CG should also be named loc1. Aliases are defined in SYSTEM.RESOURCE. The CG

Template Editor will not start if there are no available aliases to save templates to.

When the Create Title Entry Template window first opens, it appears with a graphic that

highlights the first step in the process for creating new templates.

Font PreSets list Options include: 10 user-definable font display settings. This list allows the

user to store up to 10 font display settings created by the user as PreSets.

These can later be selected when making new templates with fields that

contain the same size and style of font, saving the user from having to

recreate the font repeatedly. The first font stored is particularly important

because it becomes the field properties default for the Template Editor at start

up.

True-Type Fonts list Options include: any true-type font installed on the workstation, such as

Times New Roman. This list allows the user to select a font that matches or

closely resembles the font used on the actual CGs.

Font Style menu Options include: Bold, Italic, Underline, and Strike through. This allows the

user to define the style of font used in the selected text field.

Tool Tip field This field allows the user to type in text that will appear as a Tool Tip box in

the Title Entry dialog box, when a user positions the mouse over the text

field. For instance, if a user should type only a person’s name or location in

the field, the Tool Tip text for that field could be:

Type Person

Location

Name Here

Menu, List, Field

or Button Options and Explanation (Continued)

9 Character Generator Title Entry

234

To create a new template from the Create/Edit Title Entry Template window:

1. Define a temporary background for the template by doing one of the following:

tClick the Logo button.

tClick the Edit menu and select Background.

nUse the Template menu and select New to create another new template when an existing one

already appears in the window.

The Recycle -vs.- New background dialog box appears.

CG Template Editor

235

2. Click No.

The standard Windows-based Open dialog box appears.

3. Navigate to the directory where you stored the bitmap background and select a bitmap

from the directory where you stored them. This is the bitmap of the actual CG template

you want to recreate in the Template Editor. See “Required Bitmaps” on page 228 for

more information.

nThe first bitmap you choose should be the one that contains text fields filled with characters.

In upcoming steps, you will use this bitmap to align the text fields and the font in the

template, before replacing it with another bitmap containing empty text fields.

4. Add a text field by doing one of the following:

tClick the Text Fields button.

9 Character Generator Title Entry

236

tClick the Edit menu and select Add Field.

nIf a template already has a text field and it is selected, then any new field added to the

template will follow size and font styles for that original field.

5. Click on the new text field and drag it into position over the text-filled area pictured in

the bitmap—one field per line of text in the bitmap. You can also adjust the position of

the text field by using any of the following key combinations:

- Ctrl+Right Arrow move the field to the right

- Ctrl+Left Arrow moves the field to the left

- Ctrl+Up Arrow moves the field up

- Ctrl+Down Arrow moves the field down

6. Use the mouse to resize the text field to reflect the size of the text area in the bitmap.

7. Use the True-Type Font list or the PreSet list to select a font similar to the font used by

the character generator, as seen in the bitmap.

8. Type the same characters shown in the bitmap into the new text field. The font may or

may not line up exactly over that of the bitmap. To enable Title Entry to accurately

reflect the text as it will appear on actual CGs, you must align the field and characters

with those shown in the bitmap.

9. Adjust the height and width of the font by using any of the following key combinations:

- Alt+Right Arrow expands the width of the font

- Alt+Left Arrow contracts the width of the font

- Alt+Up Arrow increases height of the font

- Alt+Down Arrow decreases height of the font

This might take some time and will require experimentation with fonts and font styles,

before the characters align with those of the bitmap. The goal is to make certain the text

field you create in the template has the same character limit as the area shown in the

bitmap when the exact characters are used in both.

10. Use the Backspace key to erase characters from the field once the font and field

alignments are complete.

11. Determine the justification of text in each field. Select the field and use the Justify list.

12. Repeat steps 6-11 as needed for each text field in the template.

nIf text fields on several CG templates use the same font and field size, you do not have to

repeat the steps with each new template created. You can duplicate a field (including all its

size and font properties) within a template by holding the Control (Ctrl) key down, clicking

CG Template Editor

237

on the field, and dragging its copy to a new location within the template. You can also reuse

field properties by saving them as a Font PreSet, which can then be selected for use when

creating other templates. See “Using Font PreSets” on page 239 for more information.

13. Determine whether a user can write in each field, and whether the user is required to fill

in a field by using the Editing drop-down list. If you make a field required, then the user

must enter some data into that field when using Title Entry before iNEWS will accept

the production cue. This does not apply to the field while in the CG Template Editor.

However, if you make a field read-only, it must contain some text so you will be

required to put some text in the field while in the CG Template Editor. Users will be

prevented from altering that text in the read-only field when using Title Entry.

The Read Only option can be used for setting up templates that standardize certain

commonly used CGs. For instance, you have a CG that has two fields: one for any

council member’s name and the second that should contain the words, City Council

Member. But, users sometimes just write Councilman or worse, they misspell Council.

You could make the second field read only and pre-define the words that appear in the

field.

nIf a field is pre-defined on the actual CG template, such as LIVE or FILE, it should appear

as part of the background—saved as part of the bitmap—not as a read-only field on the Title

Entry CG template.

14. Determine which characters are allowed in each text field. Select the field, then choose

from the options in the Allowed Characters drop-down list. If you choose to define your

own subset of characters, a dialog box will appear, where you must then type in only

those characters you want to allow in the field. For instance, you can limit what a user

types into a field for a Sports CG to only characters:

1234OTF

—representing 1st-4th

quarter, OT for over-time, and F for final.

nThe Allowed Character option is case-sensitive. Also, notice the example in step 15 does not

include commas, such as:

1,2,3,4,OT,F

. If commas are included, then commas will also be

accepted in the field.

15. Type in the text for the field’s Tool Tip. The Tool Tip will appear in the Title Entry

dialog box when the user positions the mouse over that field. To enter Tool Tip text,

click on the Tool Tip field at the bottom-right corner of the Edit Title Entry Template

window, then type your text in the field provided. You must press Enter to save the tool

tip text.

nAlt+L can be used to select and enter data into the Tool-Tip field. Also, each Tool Tip will

appear with a number in the CG Template Editor window. The number indicates that field’s

order in the template. These numbers do not appear as part of actual Tool Tips over fields of

the Title Entry dialog box.

9 Character Generator Title Entry

238

16. Replace the background of the template with the bitmap of the CG Template containing

empty text fields. To chose another bitmap, do one the following:

tClick the Logo button.

tSelect Edit > Background.

The Recycle -vs.- New background dialog box appears.

17. Click No.

The standard Windows-based Open dialog box appears.

18. Navigate to the directory where you stored the bitmap background and select the correct

bitmap. This is the bitmap of the actual CG template you want to recreate in the

Template Editor. See “Required Bitmaps” on page 228 for more information.

19. Save the template by doing one of the following:

CG Template Editor

239

tSelect Template > Save.

tType Ctrl+S.

cThe template name must match the pre-defined alias associated with the actual CG

template number used by the character generator. Aliases are defined in

SYSTEM.RESOURCE.

Using Font PreSets

Font PreSets are a time-saving feature for system administrators using the CG Template

Editor to create Title Entry templates.

After a system administrator sets up a text field and saves it as part of a template, he can

store settings for that field as a Font PreSet. The Font PreSet can then be selected when the

system administrator needs to add a field with those same settings to another template. For

instance, the text field of a one-line location CG is saved as a Font PreSet, which is later used

to create the first field in a two-line name CG, a two-line live CG, and so forth, because all

fields use the same font style and field size.

nYou can have a maximum 10 Font PreSets in iNEWS. The first one stored is particularly

important, because it becomes the field properties default for the CG Template Editor at

start up. Save the PreSets for major font/field variations. Because you are limited to 10, it is

not recommended they be used for minor variations, such as a font color change. You can

replace any Font PreSet with a new one if all of the PreSets are taken.

To save a field as a Font PreSet:

1. Open the template containing the field you want to save as a Font PreSet.

2. Click on the specific field to select it.

3. Do one of the following:

tSelect Edit > Font PreSets.

tPress the F7 key.

The Manage Font PreSets dialog box appears with the first available PreSet option

highlighted.

9 Character Generator Title Entry

240

4. Click Add to save the selected field as a new Font PreSet. The name of the newly added

field will appear in place of existing data on the highlighted PreSet option.

5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

nYou cannot save a field’s settings as a Font PreSet until after the field is saved as part of a

template. If you attempt to set a Font PreSet using a newly created field from an unsaved

template, iNEWS will issue the following advisory.

To delete an existing Font PreSet:

1. Open the Manage Font PreSets dialog box by doing one of the following:

tSelect Edit > Font PreSets.

tPress the F7 key.

2. Select the PreSet you want to delete from the list.

3. Click Delete.

4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

To choose an existing Font PreSet for a selected text field:

1. Click the Font PreSets list at the bottom of the Edit Title Entry Template window.

2. Select the Font PreSet you want to use for the chosen field.

Title Entry Security

241

Title Entry Security

Access to CG Template Editor and CG Title Entry is determined separately per user account.

A user who can use CG Title Entry will not necessarily have access to CG Template Editor,

while another user can be denied the ability to use both features.

Access to CG Template Editor

Access to CG Template Editor is limited to system administrators, or superusers, and those

who know the password for dbmanager, if that user account is created by a system

administrator. This is the same dbmanager account that is used to modify database traits. See

“The Database Manager Account” on page 97 and “Changing Database Traits” on page 136

for more information.

When a non-superuser attempts to launch the CG Template Editor from the Tools menu, the

following dialog box appears:

If the correct password is not given, or if the user does not have read access to

SYSTEM.TITLE-ENTRY then iNEWS will notify the user and deny access to the Edit Title

Entry Template window.

nOnly one person on the network can use CG Template Editor to edit Title Entry templates at

a time.

Access to CG Title Entry

The availability of CG Title Entry is dependent on two things: cursor position in the iNEWS

Workspace and permission granted in the user’s account.

When a user’s cursor is in any panel other than the Story panel, the Titling option in the

Tools menu will appear gray, indicating that Title Entry is unavailable. Additionally, a

system administrator, or those authorized with the umanager password, can limit access to

Title Entry.

There is no individual user setting that enables or prevents access to CG Title Entry.

However, those users whose accounts are set as “Simplified” might be prevented from

accessing CG Title Entry.

9 Character Generator Title Entry

242

To prevent access to CG Title Entry for all simplified users:

1. Log in as a system administrator or with your own user account if you know the

umanager password.

2. Select Tools > Options > Users. System administrators will see the Manage User

Accounts window immediately. Others will be prompted first to give the umanager

password before the window opens.

3. Indicate the user by providing the User ID. The Search button is available to help locate

the user’s account if the ID is unknown.

4. Click the Simplified UI button. The Simplified User Interface dialog box appears.

5. Click on the Disable Title Entry check box to select it.

6. Click OK.

10 System Configuration

Information about your iNEWS system’s hardware devices (workstations), connections

(wires), and iNEWS Servers is stored in configuration files. This chapter contains a

representative sample of each iNEWS configuration file. A comprehensive list of sample

configuration files is contained in “System Files” on page 541. Procedures for editing

configuration files using the line editor, ed, are provided in “The Line Editor, ed” on page

655.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Overview

•Configuration File

•Hosts File

•System Profile Files

•Devices

•Intersystem Messaging

Overview

Configuration of the iNEWS newsroom computer system is controlled by settings stored as

text files in the (root) Site directory on the software area of the system’s hard disk. Files in

the Site directory or subdirectories include:

•/site/config

• /site/system

• /site/wires/<file name>

• /site/dict

Because many system files are located in the Site directory, they are also referred to as site

files.

nAll files in the Site directory, including the system profile and configuration file, can contain

only Roman characters.

Another important file is stored in the ETC directory, which is:

• /etc/hosts

Samples of these and other system files are provided in “System Files” on page 541.

Changes to system configuration are made by editing these text files. The recommended

method is at the console using the line editor, ed, because it works on all servers

simultaneously through the console. Unlike familiar graphical-based word processing

programs, ed deals with text files on a line-by-line basis.

nTo learn more about the line editor, refer to one of the books available in bookstores on the

Linux operating system with sections devoted to ed.

The most likely reason for you to use ed is to modify system files, such as /site/config or

/site/dict/queues. For instance, if you add a wire to your system, you will need to add the

wireserver’s configuration information to the configuration file in the Site directory. Some

procedures for editing certain files are provided in this chapter. For more information about

the line editor, type info ed at the console. Additional information, including details on how

to use the line editor, ed, is provided in “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655 of this manual.

cIt is vital that you ensure system files remain identical across all iNEWS Servers. When

you modify a site file, make the same changes to each server’s copy of the file, or your

system will not run properly. Select all servers before you open a file for editing to

ensure changes you make are applied to each server’s copy of the file.

Overview

245

nThe Linux graphical X-window login offers additional Linux GUI tools for system

management. Tasks such as changing IP addresses and checking hardware are much easier

within the X-window GUI. However, if all iNEWS Servers have the GUI installed as part of

the Linux installation, it does take additional resources to run and requires additional

hardware, such as monitor, keyboard, and mouse. Some system managers might not want to

run the GUI full-time so as to reserve memory and other resources for the iNEWS Server

processes.

While the impact of running the GUI is probably not terribly significant on modern

hardware with speedy processors and plenty of RAM, Avid does not test the software or

system performance with the GUI running. This editing alternative is not required or

supported by Avid.

Before editing any system file, Avid recommends you make a backup copy of the file.

Making a Backup File

When you want to make changes to a system file, begin by making a backup copy of the file,

and then edit the backup file. That way, if you make a mistake during the editing process,

your original file version is preserved.

To make a backup copy of a file:

tUse the copy command at the console in the following format:

cp <file pathname> <new pathname>

For instance, to copy the configuration file in the Site directory, type:

NRCS-A$ cp /site/config /site/config.backup

Viewing System Files

When viewing a system file, use the more command at the console.

The format is:

more <file pathname>

The more command allows you to view one page at a time, which is especially useful for

really long files. The cat command may also be used, particularly for smaller files.

To use the more command to view your copy of the configuration file:

tType:

NRCS-A$

more /site/config.test

Information similar to the following example appears:

10 System Configuration

246

nOnly part of the configuration file is shown here. An entire example is available in “System

Files” on page 541.

To use the cat command to view the system profile, a text file stored in /site/system:

tType:

NRCS-A$

cat /site/system

Licensing iNEWS Components

247

Information similar to the following example appears:

NRCS-A$ cat /site/system

id=INWS net=abc

lowwater=100000 highwater=105000 purgelimit=5

load=5 pausetimeout=0:05

;

; iNEWS 2008-07-31 16:01:20 - Added wordlength parameter

wordlength=6

;

; defaults - if parameter not present these values are assumed

; unless overridden on the command line.

;

; auto_upgrade=yes lowwater=100000 remotetimeout=0:00

; clockmax=12 maxhits=500

; excluded_video=none min_passwd_length=5

; highwater=105000 msgserver=silent security=or

; lastlogin=yes pausetimeout=0:30 timechar=:

; load=0 purgelimit=0 timer=verbose

; localtimeout=0:00 readrate=180

Licensing iNEWS Components

Each time the iNEWS newsroom computer system is configured, your licensing information

is checked. This information determines the number of devices you are authorized to

connect to the system. An error message appears if the configuration file defines more

devices than are licensed in any of the following categories:

• iNEWS workstations (sessions)

•COM

• Web Access

•Web Client

• Web Services API

•Wires

10 System Configuration

248

• Instinct

• Community

To display your system’s licensing limits, at the console, type:

NRCS-A$

status license

-OR-

status l

(lowercase L)

A message similar to the following will appear on your screen:

A is ONLINE and has been CONFIGURED. ID is INWS.

System is AB. Master is A.

Disk status is OK. The database is OPEN.

Site Key.............: 009999

CPUs.................: 3

Workstation addresses: 3000

Workstation resources: 1000

COM resources........: 5

Web Access resources.: 2

Web Client resources.: 10

Web API resources....: 5

Wire Server resources: 8

Instinct resources...: 10

Community Sessions...: allowed.

The Workstation addresses category indicates how many IP and/or MAC addresses can

be specified in the SYSTEM.CLIENT.WINDOWS story. The iNEWS Server will only

accept a connection from a workstation that is identified in the appropriate story;

otherwise, an error is given stating that the workstation is “not authorized to connect.” If

Workstation addresses shows a "site" license, the SYSTEM.CLIENT.WINDOWS queue

should be deleted, unless IP-specific restriction is still desired.

The resources category defines the total number of simultaneous login sessions. The

Wire Server resources line indicates the number of wire server resources allowed for the

Avid Data Receiver.

nWhen the system is configured, if the number of IP or MAC addresses present in the

SYSTEM.CLIENT.WINDOWS story exceeds the number of addresses, a diagnostic is

produced. The system will be configured. This differs from exceeding other license limits.

To change license allowances:

tContact an Avid sales representative.

Configuration File

249

Configuration File

The configuration file (/site/config) is a system road map. It lists all devices, servers, and

resources configured to run on your system and how they are connected. If a device is not in

the site configuration file, the system will not know about it and cannot use it. Standard

devices and resources you may configure in this file include monitors, iNEWS Workstations,

and wire services.

Each server for your system has a copy of this file that it reads when it starts up and when

you execute the configure command. However, it is only the configuration file on the master

computer that is active and used when the system is started up.

cWhenever you make changes to a site file, such as the configuration file, be sure to

select all servers in your system at the console. Unlike database stories, site files are not

automatically mirrored from one computer’s disk to another. See “Selecting One or

More Servers” on page 45 for more information. Also, see “The Line Editor, ed” on

page 655 for information on using the line editor, ed, to make changes to site files.

An example of a configuration file is located in “System Files” on page 541.

The site configuration file is divided into two major sections: the host section and the device

section (or body). The host section contains information about various configurations your

system can run, and devices used in each of those configurations.

The format for each host section is:

host <system configuration> <computer>

Parameter Description

System configuration

Specifies in what configuration this section will be used. For example, a

2-server system normally runs AB. But if one server fails, the

configuration would be A or B. The config file will contain entries for

all possible system configurations.

computer

Specifies the responsibilities of this particular computer in the

configuration. So if the system configuration is AB (for a dual-server

system), and the computer is A, this section will define the A computer's

responsibilities. See “Selecting One or More Servers” on page 45 for

more information.

10 System Configuration

250

The top host section details the device, resource, and utility program numbers that run on the

A server in a dual AB configuration. The second host section details ones assigned to server

Information in the third and fourth host section is used by the system if one of the servers

fails. In the sample site configuration file, the “

host a a

” section contains a list of all the

devices, including ones normally assigned to server B. If server B experiences a failure and

is shut down, the system can be reconfigured to run all devices, resources, and servers

(utility programs) on A. The “

host b b

” section contains a list of all the devices, including

ones that normally run on server A, in case that server experiences a failure and is shut

down.

When you run the configure command, the master computer (usually server A) looks at the

current system configuration and then assigns devices listed for each iNEWS Server in that

system configuration to each iNEWS Server.

In the sample /site/config file, the odd numbered devices are assigned to server A and even

numbered devices are assigned to server B in a dual AB configuration.

Any item number listed in the host section must have a corresponding line in the device

section or body of the configuration file, and vice versa. For instance, if you are adding an

iNEWS Workstation resource to the body of the file, you must also add it to one or more host

sections so the system knows which server would be responsible for it under various

conditions.

reslist

Refers to resources configured on that particular iNEWS Server in that

system configuration.

servers

Refers to various utility programs called servers that are configured to

run on that particular iNEWS Server in that system configuration. This

term should not be confused with the computers, also called servers,

which run the iNEWS application software. See “Servers” on page 315

for more information.

Parameter Description (Continued)

Configuration File

251

Here are the possible device configuration lines:

A colon can be used to specify value ranges in device configuration lines, as shown in the

following example:

server 301 monitor 301 – ; monitor

server 401 rxnet – – ; RXNET server

server 501 txnet 501 – ; TXNET server

server 601 action 601 – ; action server

server 801 ftsindex 801 – ; FTS index server

server 901 ftsseek 901 – ; FTS seek server

server 902 ftsseek 901 – ; FTS seek server (notice mailbox #)

server 1101 keyword 1101 – ; keyword server

server 1201 mailserver 1201 – ; mail server

server 1401 seek 1401 – ; seek server

aiws 1601 – gnews – ; Interplay session

api 1701 – gnews – ; Web Services API session

cinws 1801 – gnews – ; Community session

com 1901 – gnews – ; COM session

iiws 2001 – gnews – ; iNEWS-licensed Instinct session

inws 2101 – gnews – ; iNEWS workstation session

resource 2301 console – ; connect session

webclient 2401 – gnews – ; Web Client session

websession 2501 ; Web Access session

wireserver 2601 news AP – ; Wire server session

wireserver 2602 news BC join ; Wire server session with join enabled

inws 2101:2200 – gnews – ; 100 iNEWS workstation sessions

10 System Configuration

252

Also, individual devices can be restricted to specific IP or MAC addresses, as shown in the

following examples:

Editing the Configuration File

Whenever you add, remove, or modify devices on your system, you must make

corresponding changes to the configuration file—also referred to as the /site/config file.

Changing this file requires the use of the line editor. See “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655

for more information.

Before editing any system file, Avid recommends you make a backup copy of the file.

To edit the configuration file:

1. Select all servers.

2. Type:

ed /site/config

After you press Enter, the editor responds by displaying a numerical value indicating the

file size expressed as the number of characters, including spaces and returns.

nThis procedure, which modifies the /site/config file uses ed, the line editor. If you do not know

how to use ed to modify lines in the file, please see “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655.

3. What information is edited in the file depends on the device. Editing procedures for

specific devices are provided later in this guide. For more information, see “Adding

Devices” on page 265.

4. Type

to write (save) your changes to disk.

cDo not use an uppercase W in this step. Uppercase W will append the file you're editing

to the existing file. The resulting file may be unreadable and will lead to problems with

running your iNEWS system.

5. Type

to quit the line editor.

server 1301 rxnet 172.24.96.44 – ; INWS-B

inws 2101 00:19:B9:0E:7D:E1 gnews – ; control room PC

inws 2102 17.24.96.247 gnews – ; director laptop

Configuration File

253

Testing the Site Configuration File After Alteration

Whenever you make changes to /site/config, always run a test on the changes to ensure there

are no problems with the new configuration. By doing so, the test will warn of problems or if

license limits are exceeded. Some configuration problems will prevent system configuration

and startup.

To run the site configuration test:

tUse the configure console command.

The format is:

configure <config file> <system> <computer>

System refers to the set of servers that make up your iNEWS system, while computer is

the server whose configuration you have changed.

The following example shows the command for testing the configuration of server A in

an AB system:

NRCS-A$ configure /site/config ab a

When the prompt returns, the configuration file has been checked. If the system detects

any errors, it displays bad configuration messages.

Incorporating Configuration Changes

After testing the configuration, you can incorporate any changes that you made.

To put the new configuration into effect:

1. Stop any devices affected by the new configuration.

2. Take the system offline by typing:

NRCS-A$

offline

3. Configure the system, using the following format:

configure

4. Bring the system back online by typing:

NRCS-A$

online

5. Wait for messages from the system being configured, and then restart the newly added

devices or any devices affected by the new configuration.

To list contents of the site configuration file at the console:

tType:

cat /site/config

The configuration file that appears on your screen is similar to the sample file provided

in “System Files” on page 541.

Semicolons precede comments and blank lines separate sections.

The sample file to which we refer throughout this explanation might not match your

system’s file exactly, but it contains examples of the different kinds of entries you might

find in your file.

10 System Configuration

254

nOn lines of the /site/config files where device numbers are listed, a range of numbers may be

specified—two numbers separated only by a colon (:). This is useful at sites with many

resources, servers, and sessions. For instance, the resource line below shows device numbers

listed individually, then the line is repeated, showing how it might appear as a range.

reslist 100 100 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109

reslist 100:109

Similarly, you can specify a device range for definitions, such as:

inws 201:210 - gnews - ; iNEWS Workstation sessions

This is equivalent to 10 lines, each with a different device number, with all other information

on the line applying to each device definition. If an IP address is specified, a device range

cannot be specified.

Hosts File

The hosts file (/etc/hosts) is a road map to other computers on the network that your iNEWS

Servers need to know about or communicate with. It lists IP addresses of other computers

and the computers' names, along with any alternate names or aliases by which the other

computers are known. Workstations need not be listed in the hosts file.

If a computer is not listed in the hosts file, your iNEWS Servers will require DNS to find

them. Your iNEWS system may not be configured to use DNS. Also, if DNS fails, your

iNEWS Servers will be unable to use it to find external computers. By putting the external

computer in /etc/hosts, you make the connection more reliable..

An example of a hosts file is located in “System Files” on page 541.

System Profile Files

For your system’s servers to work together, they need access to basic system information,

such as how many computers are in the system and how the computers are connected. Each

server must also have access to system parameters, such as the default read rate and script

margins. This information is kept in system profile files whose names reflect the information

they contain. For instance, information about wires is kept in /site/wires.

Sample system profile files are in “System Files” on page 541. The most important of these

profile files is the system profile(/site/system), which is discussed in the sections that follow.

When you start your system, each server reads its copy of the system profile and

incorporates the material into its operation.

System Profile Files

255

An example of the system profile is provided in “Viewing System Files” on page 245.

The system profile contains several parameters. Each parameter begins with an identifying

keyword, followed by an equal sign (=) and the parameter’s value. When an iNEWS Server

reads its system profile, it finds each parameter’s value by searching for the keyword that

represents that parameter. If the server searched the system profile in the example on

page 245, it would find that NRCS was the parameter associated with the keyword, id.

Most, but not all, parameters have default values the system uses if the parameter is not

present in the system profile. Consequently, a system profile usually includes only

parameters you want set differently from their default values, and those that have no default

values and must be set in the system profile. Your system profile may not contain the same

parameters as the example.

Changing the System Profile

System profile parameters are configured in the system when servers are connected. After

the system profile in /site/system is modified, the system should be shut down and restarted

to get the servers to read the modified system profile. The following sample procedure lets

you change the localtimeout parameter in your system profile.

To change your system profile at the console:

1. Select all servers.

2. Type:

ed /site/system

nThis procedure, which modifies the /site/system file uses ed, the line editor. If you do not

know how to use ed to modify lines in the file, please see “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655.

A message similar to the following appears:

editing /site/system

213

3. Find the line that contains the localtimeout parameter, such as:

localtimeout=45:00 remotetimeout=30:00

4. Change the 45:00 value for that parameter to 15:00:

localtimeout=15:00 remotetimeout=30:00

5. Type

to write (save) your changes to disk.

cDo not use an uppercase W in this step. Uppercase W will append the file you're editing

to the existing file. The resulting file may be unreadable and will lead to problems with

running your iNEWS system.

10 System Configuration

256

6. Type

to quit the line editor.

nWhen you modify your system profile, separate parameters from each other with spaces, tab

spaces, or carriage returns.

7. Shut down and restart your system.

When you start the system, each server reads its system profile and incorporates

parameters in that file in its operation.

nYou must reboot the servers and connect the system to get the servers to read the system

profile file.

Listing Parameter Settings

The status all command lists values for all parameters defined in the profile, except for the

low and high watermarks and the purge limit.

To find out which parameters the system is using:

tAt the console, type:

status all

This command displays the system profile settings the system has incorporated in its

operation. Information similar to the following appears:

A is ONLINE and has been CONFIGURED. ID is NRCS.

System is AB. Master is A.

Disk status is OK. The database is OPEN.

System was last configured at 2009-08-10 13:53:49

No dbtraits group changes since boot.

No ctraits changes since boot.

auto_upgrade=yes maxhits=500

clockmax=12 min_passwd_length=5

excludedvideo=none pausetimeout=0:05 security=or

lastlogin=yes readrate=180 timechar=:

load=5 remotetimeout=0:00 wordlength=6

localtimeout=0:00

Parameters not explicitly defined in the system profile will appear in the list with their

default values.

System Profile Files

257

To list current low and high watermarks and the purge limit:

tType:

cat /site/system

See “Viewing System Files” on page 245 for more information.

System Profile Parameters

Each system profile description below includes information about the values that parameter

can have and whether or not the parameter has a default value. If a parameter does not have a

default value, you must give it a value in the system profile.

nThe connect command can override anything in the profile by adding

<parameter>=<value> on the connect command line.

Parameter Description

auto_upgrade=[yes | no]

Determines whether a user running an outdated version of the

iNEWS Workstation (client) software is allowed to upgrade it

automatically. If set to no, it means users of outdated software

are not asked if they want to upgrade. The default is yes.

clockmax=[12 | 24]

Determines how backtimes/cumetimes (cumulative) are

displayed—12 or 24-hour format. While the iNEWS

Workstation always displays these times in 24-hour format,

this setting is used by various utility (server) programs

whenever a date/time is formatted, such as when an action

server processes a mailto command and a story is sent as an

email message. The default value is 12.

excludedvideo=[director | none]

Determines the handling of director video when received in

Story Exchange Protocol (SEP) format. If set to none, this

text is converted into bold italic text. If set to director, the text

is converted into closed caption (CC) text. The default is

none.

highwater=<# of block units> (105000)

Establishes the upper limit to which dbserver attempts to

rebuild the free list. Set this parameter far enough above the

low watermark so the system is not in danger of slipping

beneath that mark. The number you enter represents actual

blocks of database space, where a block is one kilobyte. For

instance, a high watermark of 125000 (recommended for

most systems) represents 125000 blocks. The default value is

105000.

10 System Configuration

258

id=<system name>

Gives the system a name. The system uses this name in some

of its messages and in the prompts. It also appears in the

iNEWS Workstation representing the database. The system

name defined here must match that used in the /etc/hosts file

(minus the “-a” or “-b”), must be in uppercase, and can be up

to eight characters long. There is no default value, so you

must set it in the system profile.

lastlogin=[yes | no]

Lets you suppress on a user’s workstation display of last time

user was logged in. Setting no accomplishes this; the default

is yes.

load=<number of connections> (0)

Specifies the maximum numerical difference the system tries

to maintain between network connections from

Windows-based clients on different servers in your system.

This is called load balancing, and it is intended to keep one

server from handling a much higher number of connections

than any other server.

For instance, if you set this parameter to 5, the system

distributes connection requests so the difference in the

number of connections is no higher than 5. If you had 2 active

connections on server A, and 7 on B, the next request to

connect to B would be shifted to A. Connection requests for

A would be allowed, until the number of connections on A

was 5 more than on B.

The default value for this parameter is 0, which means load

balancing does not occur.

localtimeout=<min:sec> (00:00)

As a security precaution, your system automatically logs out

workstations if they are idle longer than the time set in this

parameter.

If a story is open at an idle workstation, the system saves the

story before logging out the workstation. Setting

localtimeout=00:00 prevents the system from logging out

workstations. This is the default setting.

The localtimeout parameter is set in minutes and seconds. For

instance, to have the system log out any workstation idle for

more than two hours, set this parameter to 120:00. The

maximum value is 540 minutes.

Parameter (Continued) Description (Continued)

System Profile Files

259

lowwater=<# of block units> (100000)

Establishes minimum disk space that the system tries to keep

available for immediate use. Use it with the highwater and

purgelimit parameters to control how the system recycles

space in the database. Set this parameter in units of actual

database blocks, where a block is one kilobyte (1KB). For

instance, a low watermark of 100000 (recommended for most

systems) equals 100000 blocks of database space.

If the number of blocks in the free list falls below the low

watermark, the system runs dbserver to reclaim the oldest

stories from the Dead queue, recycling the space onto the free

list. This continues until the free list is restored to the high

watermark. If you do not include this parameter, the system

uses the default value of 100000 blocks.

master=<computer name>

Designates one of your system’s servers as the master

computer, which controls all database activity and performs

the majority of housekeeping, such as running dbpurge every

hour and invoking dbserver when low on space.

Generally, this parameter is left out of the system profile,

causing the system to designate as the master computer the

server whose name is alphabetically first (usually server A).

You can specify a server as the master computer using the

connect console command. The format is:

connect <computer> master=<name>

maxhits=<number of hits> (500)

Defines maximum number of hits, or matches, that a

background search—including Fast Text Search (FTS)—can

find. For instance, setting this parameter to 50 limits the total

number of hits in a single search to 50. The maximum number

you can specify is 32765. If you do not assign a value, the

system uses a default value of 500.

min_passwd_length=<# of characters> (5)

Defines minimum password length for your users. For

instance, setting min_passwd_length=6 prevents users from

creating passwords shorter than six characters. The value may

range between 1 and 12 characters. This does not apply to

passwords you assign with the utraits command. The system

uses 5 as the default value.

Parameter (Continued) Description (Continued)

10 System Configuration

260

msgserver=[silent | verbose]

Used only for debugging. To find out whether or not a

mailbox is working, set this parameter to verbose. This causes

the console to display a message whenever activity occurs in

a queue with a mailbox assigned to it. Change this parameter

while the system is running using the msgdebug command.

The default setting is silent. This prevents messages regarding

mailbox activity from being displayed.

name=<computer name>

Each server must have a unique name (either A, B, C, or D) to

distinguish it from the other servers in the system. Typically,

assign these names during the startup process using the

connect console command—connect a for server A, and so

forth—so it need not appear in the system profile. There is no

default value assigned.

net=<computer names>

This allows you to specify all servers in the network. For

instance, in a system using three servers named A, B, and C,

this parameter would be set to net=abc in the system profile.

pausetimeout=<min:sec> (00:30)

Sets a default value for the PAUSE command, which is used

in some keyboard definitions. Users can override this default

value. If not set, the system assumes a value of 30 seconds.

purgelimit=<hours> (0)

If dbserver reclaims all space available in Dead queue without

restoring the free list to the low watermark, it begins to purge

old stories by making a series of passes through the database.

On each pass, dbserver temporarily decreases each queue’s

purge interval by one hour and removes any stories older than

the new purge interval. It continues doing this until it has

rebuilt the free list to the high watermark or reaches the purge

limit.

The purge limit sets the maximum number of passes dbserver

can make through each queue. The total number of hours

dbserver can purge from a queue is equal to the queue’s purge

interval minus your system’s purge limit.

Use the purge limit to prevent dbserver from purging

everything from important queues in its attempt to build up

the free list. For instance, if you set the purge limit to two

hours, queues with a 3-hour purge interval retain at least one

hour’s worth of stories, even in a low-on-space situation.

You can set the purge limit between 0 and 24. If not set, your

system uses a default value of zero hours, which prevents

dbserver from purging any queue beyond its purge interval.

Parameter (Continued) Description (Continued)

System Profile Files

261

readrate=<words/minute> (180)

Sets the system’s default read rate. When you add a user to

the system, the Add New User dialog box will default to a

read-rate of zero, which will be replaced by the /site/system

read rate when needed. After a user has been added, you can

change the user’s read rate using the Modify User Account

dialog box. If not set, the system uses a default read rate of

180 words per minute.

remotetimeout=<min:sec> (00:00)

This time-out value applies to all connect sessions, including

sessions that connect a workstation at your station to another

service. Disable the automatic logout of connect sessions by

setting this parameter to 00:00. The maximum value is

540:00. The default that the system uses is 00:00 if this

parameter is not included in the system profile.

security=[and | or]

Indicates how your system determines group access of a

particular user with a particular workstation (or other device).

If set to “and”, both user and workstation must be members of

the same group for the user to gain access to directories or

queues assigned to that group. If set to “or”, the user can

access any database items assigned to groups containing

either the user or workstation. The default value is “or.”

single=<computer name>

Tells the system it is running on only one server and names

that server. If your system consists of a single server, include

this parameter. Generally, in systems with only one server, the

name is A, and this parameter is set to single=a.

timechar=<character> (:)

Defines the character the system uses to separate hours,

minutes, and seconds in time displays. For instance, using a

colon as the time character displays the time as hh:mm:ss. A

colon is the default.

timer=[silent | verbose]

Your system contains a timer program that is always running.

If this parameter is set to verbose, the server sends a time

display to the console every 15 minutes.

A Sat Apr 3 14:45:00 2004 iNEWS

The default setting is verbose, so do not include when you

want timer messages to appear. To disable time displays,

include this parameter as timer=silent.

nAll time values in the system profile must be set in minutes and seconds in the format <mm>:<ss>. Set a

value for both minutes and seconds. For instance, to specify a time of two minutes, type: 2:00. To specify a

time of 25 seconds, type: 0:25.

Parameter (Continued) Description (Continued)

10 System Configuration

262

Devices

The iNEWS newsroom computer system supports the following devices:

wordlength=<numeric value>

This is the number of characters that are counted as one word.

When counting words for script timing, the system divides

the character count by the wordlength to determine the

number of “words” in the story. The value is required and

must be a whole number.

Parameter (Continued) Description (Continued)

Device Description

Instinct A connection used by some Instinct and NewsCutter clients to communicate

with the iNEWS Server.

Web Services API A connection used by Web-based services to communicate with the iNEWS

Server.

Web Access A connection that allows direct, read-only browsing of the iNEWS database

through the Web browser.

Community A connection used by clients from other systems in your iNEWS Community

to connect with your iNEWS Server.

COM A (connection) device used by some Avid applications, such as MOS

Gateway, to communicate with the iNEWS Server.

Workstation The PC device on which a user can log in to the iNEWS newsroom computer

system known as an iNEWS Workstation.

Web Client A connection through which a Web Client user can log in to the iNEWS

newsroom computer system.

Network Resource A device that allows a user to connect to another computer system from a

workstation.

Server A utility program that performs tasks on stories in a queue, based on defined

instructions. Supported server types include: action, distribution, parallel

wire, monitor, and keyword. Other servers facilitate searches, mail, and

printing, or are designed for Rx/Tx network links—receiving or transferring

stories between computer systems.

See “Servers” on page 315 for more information.

nThe server listed here is not the same as the computers used as iNEWS Servers, typically given

names with the station’s call letters and an A, B, or C. For instance, NRCS-A.

Devices

263

Viewing Information about Devices

The list c console command prints information to the console screen about configuration of a

device or devices. The format for this command is:

list c [<device type, device number, or program name>]

The device type or device number is optional. If you do not enter them, you get a list of the

configuration information for all devices in your system.

To view information about devices connected to your system:

tUse forms of the list c console command.

For instance, when you type

list c

at the console, information similar to the following

appears:

WireServer A device that allows an Avid Data Receiver instance to connect to the

iNEWS newsroom computer system.

Device Description

DEV DEVICE_TYPE COMPUTER NOTIFY OPTIONS DEVNAME

S201 mailserver A 201

S211 keyword A 211

S231 seek A 231

S241 monitor A 241

...

R391 console A

B401 websession A

G501 gnews A

w601 news A AP

g701 gnews A

A711 gnews A

C801 gnews A

a811 gnews A

10 System Configuration

264

If you follow list c with the name of a program, iNEWS lists every device on your

system that uses that program. For instance, to find out how many devices use the action

server utility program, type:

list c action

Information similar to the following appears:

Another example is

list c monitor

, in which case configuration information for your

system’s monitor servers are displayed, similar to the following:

If you want to know the configuration information for a specific device, use the device

number, such as typing:

list c 344

Information similar to the following appears:

List C Message Columns

There are six columns of information displayed in list c messages, as explained in this table:

...

DEV DEVICE_TYPE COMPUTER NOTIFY OPTIONS DEVNAME

S251 action A 251

S252 action A 252

S253 action A 253

S254 action A 254

DEV DEVICE_TYPE COMPUTER NOTIFY OPTIONS DEVNAME

S241 monitor A 241

S242 monitor B 242

S243 monitor A 243

S244 monitor B 244

DEV DEVICE_TYPE COMPUTER NOTIFY OPTIONS DEVNAME

S344 rxnet A

Devices

265

Adding Devices

When you add a device, such as workstations or wires, to your iNEWS system, you need to

put information about it in the appropriate configuration file(s). This section gives you the

complete procedure for adding workstations.

nThe iNEWS system receives wire services through an Avid Data Receiver wireserver

resource. For more information about wires, see “Wires” on page 291. For more on how to

set up wire ingest using the Avid Data Receiver, see “Adding a Wire – Avid Data Receiver”

on page 292.

Also, for information about adding connect services, see the iNEWS Operations and

Troubleshooting Manual.

Column Name Description

DEV Lists the device number. The number is preceded by a letter identifying the

type of device. These alphabetic identifiers are as follows:

A - Avid Instinct and Newscutter

a - Web Services API

B - Web Access

C - Community

c - COM device

G - iNEWS Workstation

g - Web Client

R - Network resource

S - Server (utility program)

w - Wire server

DEVICE_TYPE The program that runs the device. For instance, workstations have gnews

listed in this column.

COMPUTER Identifies the iNEWS Server on which the device is running.

NOTIFY Identifies the number of the mailbox the device uses to receive notifications.

OPTIONS Lists any modifiers to the device, such as IP or MAC address.

DEVNAME Lists the device’s name, if it has one, which can be used for group

membership and placed in the DEVNAME field of stories.

10 System Configuration

266

To add a new workstation to your system:

1. Choose a device number for the workstation—determine the next available number in

the range you have set aside for these devices.

2. Connect the workstation to the network.

3. Add workstation to the configuration file stored on each server in your system.

Add the workstation’s device number to a reslist line in the host definitions.

To configure a workstation, use the format:

inws <device #> <address> gnews <device name>

4. (Optional) Use the configure command to test your configuration changes.

The syntax is:

configure /site/config <system> <computer>

For instance, type:

configure /site/config ab a

When prompt returns, the configuration file has been checked. If the system detects any

errors, it displays appropriate bad configuration messages.

5. Reconfigure the system.

a. Select the master computer, which is typically server A.

b. Enter superuser mode, using the current password.

c. Take the system offline by typing:

NRCS-A#

offline

d. Reconfigure the system by typing:

NRCS-A#

configure

Parameter Description

device # Workstation’s device number.

address If you use a hyphen (-), this resource is available to any licensed PC on your

system. If you place an IP address here (example: 172.24.96.247), this

resource can be used only by the PC with that address.

Additionally, this can be the MAC address assigned to the PC’s network card

(example: 0019b90e7de1).

device name A device name up to eight characters used for group security. If you assign a

device name to a workstation, you can grant security permissions to the

workstation by adding that name to the appropriate group story.

When someone edits and saves a story at this workstation, its device name is

placed in the devname field (if one exists) in the Story Form panel. If you do

not want to give the workstation a device name, place a hyphen (-) in this

position.

Intersystem Messaging

267

e. When the prompt reappears, bring the system back online by typing:

NRCS-A#

online

f. Press Ctrl+D to leave superuser mode.

The pound sign (#) at the end of the console’s server prompt will change to a dollar

sign ($).

6. (Optional) Back up site files with the sitedump command any time you add a device.

Intersystem Messaging

Intersystem Messaging is a feature letting users exchange messages across separate iNEWS

newsroom computer systems, or an other third-party system with a compatible interface.

On iNEWS systems, intersystem messages can be sent from iNEWS Workstation sessions,

and from the console send utility. For intersystem messaging to work, a system must have an

agent that functions as described in the following section. For iNEWS, this agent is

integrated into the iNEWS Server software.

To receive intersystem messages, a system must have a TCPMUX service running.

TCPMUX is defined by RFC 1078, “TCP Port Service Multiplexer (TCPMUX).”

Additionally, the system must have an intersystem message service configured.

nRFC (Request For Comments) documentation is provided at the following Web sites:

http://sunsite.auc.dk/RFC or http://www.rfc-editor.org/

Sending Intersystem Messages

An intersystem send is attempted whenever a message send request has a recipient name

which includes an at symbol (@). It is assumed that this represents a name in

<user

name>@<system name>

format. This is the same format used for sending mail to a user on a

foreign system, such as the Internet. The

parameter can be an IP address in

standard notation, such as 172.161.131.2. When using Community messaging, the

@<system>

information can be excluded.

Your iNEWS Server will use its /etc/hosts file or DNS, if configured, to find the external

system.

A TCP connection to port 1 of the system is attempted. Port 1 is the “well known port” (as

defined in RFC 1700, “Assigned Numbers”) assigned to the TCPMUX service.

After the connection is established, the string

inter_system_message<cr-lf>

is sent. The

receiving system sends

+<explanation><cr-lf>

to indicate a positive acknowledgement.

This conforms to RFC 1078.

10 System Configuration

268

nThe service name—in this case,

inter_system_message

—is never case-sensitive and

is any text that helps to explain the reason for the response.

The sending system can then send the following string:

SEND<sp><user name><sp><sender’s name><sp><message text><cr-lf>

In this string, the user name and sender’s name do not contain any spaces, carriage returns,

or line feeds. The names are as they are used within their respective systems. The sender’s

name should be suitable to use as the user name in an intersystem message reply. The

message text can contain spaces but not carriage returns or line feeds. It is optional (so you

can check the logged-in status of the user). The iNEWS system will truncate this string at the

first line feed or at 72 characters.

After sending the intersystem message, the sending system should read a single line, which

is the receiving system’s response. On receipt of the response, the sending system should

close its connection. See “Receiving Intersystem Messages” on page 268 for more

information.

The sending system should be prepared to handle all of these error conditions:

• Time out on establishing connection to the receiving system’s TCPMUX port

• The receiving system actively refusing the connection on the TCPMUX port

• Connection closed by the receiving system at any time

• A negative response

-<explanation><cr-lf>

to the

inter_system_message<cr-lf>

request. This is a negative TCPMUX response, and

is any text that helps to explain the reason for the response.

Receiving Intersystem Messages

To receive intersystem messages, a system must respond to connections on the TCPMUX

port. On Linux systems, this is done by having a TCPMUX service defined in /etc/services

and /etc/inetd.conf.

To hook an intersystem message service into the TCPMUX service on a Linux system, an

entry must be included in the /etc/inetd.conf, such as:

tcpmux/+inter_system_message stream tcp nowait <agent> <parameters>

The

inter_system_message

string is the identifier used by the sending system to select

this service. This string is not case sensitive.

Intersystem Messaging

269

The plus character (+) preceding

inter_system_message

tells the inetd daemon to handle

the initial connection and negotiation. In this case, when the inetd daemon determines that it

has an intersystem message agent, it will perform the positive acknowledgement (the

+...<cr-lf>

response) and then invoke the agent program.

The agent program must be prepared to respond to the “SEND” command, as described

above.

The iNEWS agent program is /exc/ismessage. The suggested parameter for the iNEWS

intersystem message agent is ism. This parameter can be anything and is used to identify the

program in messages printed to the system’s console. If an additional parameter is supplied

and it is a non-zero decimal string, the /exc/ismessage program is put into a verbose mode.

When in verbose mode, the /exc/ismessage program will print its responses onto the system

console. This can be used to track frequency and identity of intersystem messages.

nThe actual message text is not printed onto the console.

For iNEWS, the /etc/xinetd.d/ismessage file contains:

# default: on

# description: The ism server serves iNEWS InterSystem Message requests.

service ismessage

{

id =iNEWS-ismessage

disable =no

flags =REUSE

socket_type =stream

wait =no

user =root

server =/exc/ismessage

log_on_failure+ =USERID

}

Responses from the receiving agent program must conform to the following syntax:

<3-digit response code><sp><explanation><cr-lf>

The 3-digit response code is modeled on FTP response codes. (See Section 4.2 of RFC 959,

“File Transfer Protocol”.)

nHowever, only single line responses are expected. The explanation is any text excluding a

carriage return – linefeed (cr-lf), which makes the response better understood.

The receiving agent program will generate one of the following responses, with the iNEWS

receiving agent including the following explanations:

10 System Configuration

270

The iNEWS receiving agent will print diagnostics to the system’s console when abnormal

conditions are encountered. The diagnostics are:

Errno is the Linux system error number returned on system function calls, and errno string is

an explanation of that error code.

Response Description

201 <user name> is logged in<cr-lf>

Message stored for the specified user (if there is

message text) and the user is currently logged in.

User is notified of message arrival.

202 <user name> is not logged in<cr-lf>

Message stored for the specified user (if there is

message text) and the user is not currently logged

in.

421 System not online<cr-lf>

System not connected, not configured, or not

online. Message is discarded.

430 No such user: <user name><cr-lf>

Username unknown on receiving system.

Message is discarded.

450 Message save failed for: <user

name><cr-lf>

Failed to properly store the message for the

specified user. Message is discarded.

500 Syntax error, command

unrecognized<cr-lf>

The first “word” on the line was not “send.” The

check for the word “send” is case insensitive.

Message is discarded.

501 Syntax error, insufficient

parameters<cr-lf>

The “send” line has fewer than three

space-delimited tokens. Minimally “send”, <user

name>, and <sender’s name> are required,

<message text> is optional. Message is discarded.

Diagnostics Description

ism: getpeername failed (<errno>)

The sender’s IP address could not be determined.

ism: fgets error (<errno>) <errno

string>

The read failed for the send command.

ism: gethostbyaddr failed (<errno>)

The sender’s IP address could not be converted

into a host name.

Intersystem Messaging

271

The iNEWS receiving agent will accept intersystem messages directed to the user’s

computer. Messages addressed to “computer” will be printed on the system’s console. The

word “computer” can be localized using the message dictionary token M_COMPUTER. A

201 computer is logged in

response will always be returned for messages directed to

“computer.”

iNEWS Workstation Session Behavior

There is virtually no difference between sending local messages and sending intersystem

messages. If the recipient’s name contains an at symbol (@), name validation is not

performed and an intersystem send is attempted.

The only difference on receiving messages is that the complete sender’s information is

always returned. If it is a local message, a simple user name is provided. If it is an

intersystem message, the sender’s name will be formatted as

<sender’s name>@<system

name>

10 System Configuration

272

11 Printers

Managing your local printer settings is covered in this chapter.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Local Printing

-Local Printing Dialog Box

•Creating and Using Print Styles

-Local Print Style Options

-Banner Format Options

-Example Style Story

Local Printing

Local printing is any print request sent to a printer directly accessible to the iNEWS

Workstation. The iNEWS system includes an enhanced Local printing feature, also called

Windows printing. These enhancements include a dialog box that offers users more options,

such as selecting a predefined style when printing locally.

When local printing a batch of stories, stories that have a BLANK body are not printed. You

can also have iNEWS skip a story when printing by putting an asterisk (*) in the story’s

PAGE-NUMBER field, located in the Story Form or Queue panel.

Local printing does require some setup preparation or alterations. For instance, there are

print style options that must be defined in SYSTEM.STYLES. Both print style options and

the dialog box are explained here, starting with the dialog box.

Local printing is not available when the cursor is in the Directory panel, unless it is on a

queue that is currently displayed in the Queue panel.

nLocal printing is not recommended for stories larger than 10 kilobytes or 5 minutes,

according to iNEWS timing. The iNEWS system will print these files, but because the local

printing is not handled in the background, it might cause the workstation to appear “frozen”

or “locked up” while the system processes the print request.

Local Printing Dialog Box

The dialog box is divided into five sections: Scope, Options, Story Preview, Copies, and

Grid. There are also several buttons, which include: Print Preview, Network, and Default.

Each of these sections and buttons are described in more detail in this part of the chapter.

Local Printing

275

Scope

The Scope section allows users to select one of four radio buttons to indicate what they want

to print.

The options these radio buttons offer are explained as follows:

11 Printers

276

nThe “Print the queue view” option determines whether the Story Preview checkbox is

available. See “Story Preview” on page 336 for more information.

• Print the queue view - This option is available in most cases. A user’s cursor does not

have to be in the Queue panel of the iNEWS Workspace for this option to be used. Even

if the cursor is located in the Story panel, the user can still print the queue view by

selecting this option.

• Print selected portion of queue - This option is available when a portion of the Queue

panel is selected. Only that highlighted portion of the queue view—which must be

contiguous—will be printed when this option is chosen. This option is not available

when noncontiguous lines in the queue are selected.

• Print all stories in the queue - This option is available from the Directory panel or Queue

panel if the queue has the printable (+p) database trait. This option will send the text of

all stories in the queue to the printer.

• Print selected stories - This option is only available if a row or rows of stories are

selected in the Queue panel. The option will send text of stories highlighted in the queue

to the printer.

• Print current story - This option is available in all three panels of the iNEWS

Workspace. It will send the story that currently appears in the Story panel to the printer.

Not all options are available all the time. Also, which option in the Scope section is selected

by default depends on which panel in the iNEWS Workspace is activated—that is, in which

panel the cursor is located.

Default Option Selection:

• From the Directory panel, if the queue has the printable database trait, it defaults to

“Print all stories.” If the queue does not have the printable database trait, it will default

to “Print current story.”

• From the Queue panel with one or more stories selected by the row selector button, it

will default to “Print selected stories.”

• From the Queue panel with no stories selected, it will default to “Print current story.”

• From the Story Panel, it will default to “Print current story.”

Story Preview

The Story Preview section allows a user to print a preview or sample of each script as part of

the queue image. Consequently, this section is only enabled if the “Print the queue view”

option is chosen in the Scope section of the dialog box. Otherwise, it will appear gray and be

unavailable.

Local Printing

277

The Story Preview section, once enabled, has three options a user can define, depending on

how the queue view should be printed.

• Story Preview - When this check box is selected, iNEWS will print lines of each story,

along with the queue view, as defined by the user in the Story Preview section.

• All lines - When this check box is selected, iNEWS will print all of lines of each story,

along with the queue image. When this option is selected, the remaining option called

Lines Per Story appears gray and is unavailable.

• Lines Per Story - When enabled, iNEWS will print the specified number of lines of each

story, along with the queue view. Lines of the story will be printed below the row that

corresponds to it in the queue view. This option is disabled (appears gray) when the All

lines option is checked.

For instance, if a user wants to see the first few lines of each story in addition to a show’s

lineup, the user selects the “Print the queue view” radio button in the Scope section of the

dialog box, selects the Story Preview check box, sets the Lines Per Story setting to 3, and

clicks OK to print it. The iNEWS system will print the first row of the lineup (or fields of the

Story Form), followed by three lines of that story, then the second row and three lines of the

second story, and so forth.

Rows as shown in the Queue panel may not match exactly rows of the queue image printed

with Story Preview selected. That is because iNEWS’ Story Preview printing feature is

configurable. System administrators can define what information appears in the columns of

a Queue panel and in fields of the Story Form panel. These two displays may or may not

match exactly. This is also the case for Story Preview printing. For instance, a system

administrator can designate which fields from the Story Form are not printed. The default is

to print all fields in the Story Form, as specified within each story.

Options

The Options section of the dialog box contains three choices for users: Styles, Line Spacing,

and Uppercase.

11 Printers

278

• Styles - A user can choose from a drop-down list of predefined styles.

nVarious print style options can be defined by the system administrator and are stored in the

first story in the queues within SYSTEM.STYLES. See “Local Print Style Options” on page

280 for more information.

• Line Spacing - A user can configure how much space appears between lines of text. A

setting of one would result in single-spaced text, two would be double-spaced, and so

forth. This option will override any line spacing predefined in the chosen print style.

nThe maximum number for line spacing allowed by default in the dialog box is 10. A print

style can exceed this maximum and that setting will appear in the Line Spacing box when

that style is chosen. However, if a user chooses to manually override the style setting by

changing it in the Local Printing dialog box, then the default maximum of 10 will again take

effect.

• Uppercase - When this check box is selected, iNEWS will print all text in uppercase (all

capitalized letters). Whether this check box appears selected by default when the dialog

box first opens can be set by the system administrator using a print style option. See

“Local Print Style Options” on page 280 for more information.

Copies

The Copies section allows the user to determine the number of copies printed and whether

multiple pages are collated.

The Collate check box is not available for selection unless the number of copies is set to a

number more than 1.

Local Printing

279

Grid

The Grid section of the dialog box contains two choices: Horizontal and Vertical.

• Horizontal - When this check box is selected, iNEWS will include horizontal grid lines

when printing the queue view image.

• Vertical - When this check box is selected, iNEWS will include vertical grid lines when

printing the queue view image.

The default behavior of these check boxes is based on a user’s preferences.

Print Preview and Network buttons

Print Preview - This button allows users to preview queues or stories on their screens prior to

printing.

nThe Print Preview button is disabled when Story Preview is selected.

• Network - This button offers the user more flexibility in selecting which printer is used.

The dialog box has two locations from which a user can select a printer. The first is a

drop-down list at the top of the dialog box that displays a list of printers loaded on, or

locally connected to, the computer the user is on. The second is the Network button,

which allows the user to select any printer available through the network.

• Default - This button returns settings of the Print dialog box back to default preferences

of the user.

11 Printers

280

Creating and Using Print Styles

For your printer profiles to be useful, you must have styles designed to take advantage of

them. Print styles can be used to define printed output. Each of your system’s styles is

defined in a separate story in your database, called a style story. Each style story creates a

particular kind of printed output by selecting forms and fonts necessary to produce the

output.

Each style story is held in its own queue in SYSTEM.STYLES. Queues in this directory

have names that are three-digit numbers, such as 001. This lets you refer to each style by a

number. For instance, a user can choose the print style defined in the style story in queue 001

by selecting that queue.

Each three-digit queue name in the example can be followed by a hyphen and a descriptive

name, such as SINGLE-SPACE. This optional name is used by the Local Printing dialog

box.

To create a new style story and queue:

1. Create the new queue in SYSTEM.STYLES. See “Creating a New Queue” on page 104

for more information.

2. Choose the next available three-digit number for the queue name. For instance, if 004 is

the last queue name used, create a style 005. Give the new queue a numerical name,

such as 005-Memo. The number is followed by a hyphen and the descriptive word,

Memo, which will appear as a style option in the Local Printing dialog box.

nThe largest number that you can use as a queue name is 255 and the lowest is 0. (Style 0 is

the default style your system uses when someone enters a print command without specifying

a style.) You can have as many as 250 separate style stories.

3. After the queue is created, open it by double-clicking on it in the Directory panel.

4. Create a new story to hold the style you want to create. See “Creating a New Story” on

page 111 for more information.

5. Create the new style by writing the various print style and banner options in the Story

panel. This is explained in more detail in the next sections.

6. Save the story.

Local Print Style Options

Local print style options are stored in the first story in queues within SYSTEM.STYLES.

Creating and Using Print Styles

281

In the story, options are specified with an option name—also known as a token—followed

by an equal sign (=) and then the parameter value. All options for local printing begin with

the letters WIN. Each option must be on its own line. A semicolon (;) will cause the

remainder of that line to be ignored, and can be used to make notes in reference to the print

option. The format looks like this:

A sample story containing local print styles is provided later in this document. See

“Example Style Story” on page 288 for more information.

The local print options are not case-sensitive, but do have default settings provided in the

following table:

Option Parameter Value Description

WinVTEmulation YES | NO Specifies whether blank lines will be added to

the script side to line up the production cue

and the marker (grommet) if the production

cue spans more than one line. The default is

NO and will keep local printing functioning

without inserting blank lines.

WinRundownFontFace <font> Specifies the font to be used when printing the

queue view. Underscores cannot be used to

represent a space in a font name. If a font

name is not specified, the currently displayed

font on screen will be used.

WinRundownFontSize <font size> Specifies a numeric value for the size of the

font in points when printing the queue view. If

a font face and font size is not specified, the

currently displayed font size on screen will be

used. If a font face is specified but the font

size is not, the font size will default to 12.

WinRundownLeftMargin <left margin> Specifies a numeric value for the left margin

when printing the queue view. Measured in

inches. Default size for the left margin will

depend on the width of the queue view.

WinRundownRightMargin <right margin> Specifies a numeric value for the right margin

when printing the queue view. Measured in

inches. Default size for the right margin will

depend on the width of the queue view.

11 Printers

282

WinRundownTopMargin <top margin> Specified a numeric value for the top margin

when printing the queue view. Measured in

inches. Default size is 1.

WinRundownBottomMargin <bottom margin> Specifies a numeric value for the bottom

margin when printing the queue view.

Measured in inches. Default size is 1.

WinRundownColumnHighlight YES | NO Specifies whether to include shading of

column headers when printing a rundown.

Default is YES.

WinRundownBorder YES | NO Specifies whether to print a border around the

rundown. Default is YES.

WinBannerBlanks <# of blank lines> Specifies the number of blank lines printed in

between the banner and the start of the story

form. Default is 0 (zero).

WinPrintRundownForm <form> Defines what form is used when printing the

queue view. If a form is not specified, the

currently displayed form on screen will be

used.

WinPrintHide YES | NO Specifies whether to prevent certain text in the

story body from printing. Default is NO. See

WinPrintHideStart and WinPrintHideStop on

how to define what text does not get printed.

WinPrintHideStart <character string> Specifies a character or character string that

will be used to mark the beginning of a

portion of text in the story body that is not to

be printed. Numbers and letters cannot be

used. Default is <<.

WinPrintHideStop <character string> Specifies a character or character string that

will be used to mark the end of a portion of

text in the story body that is not to be printed.

Numbers and letters cannot be used. Default is

>>.

WinWYSIWYG YES | NO Specifies whether to use WYSIWYG printing

in the printout. If YES, then the font style/size

for both the story form and story body will be

overridden by the font style/size currently

being used on screen for the form and body.

Default is NO.

Option (Continued) Parameter Value Description (Continued)

Creating and Using Print Styles

283

WinSegmentPageBreak YES | NO Specifies whether to force a page break in the

queue view printout at “Break” lines. Default

is NO.

WinSpacing <# of line spacing> WinSpacing supports the use of decimals. For

example, WinSpacing=1.5 can be used to

define line spacing of 1 1/2 lines. Default is 1.

WinColorPrint YES | NO Specifies whether to use color printing in the

story form on printouts. Default is YES.

WinPageFooter <queue name>.<footer name> Specifies the use of a footer. The <footer

name> must match the name of a story in a

queue, as defined by the <queue name>,

located in SYSTEM.STYLES. Default is

NONE.

WinPageHeader <queue name>.<header name> Specifies use of a header. The <header name>

must match the name of a story in a queue, as

defined by the <queue name>, located in

SYSTEM.STYLES. Default is NONE.

WinHeaderFontFace <font> Specifies font used in the header and/or footer

on the printout. Underscore cannot be used to

represent a space. Does not recognize bold,

italic, or underline. Default is MS Sans Serif.

WinHeaderFontSize <font size> Specifies a numeric value for the font size, in

points, used in the header and/or footer on the

printout. Default is 10.

WinBanner YES | NO Specifies whether to include the banner in

printout. Default is yes.

WinLeftBanner <format> Defines banner format options (such as user

name, page number, and queue name for

printout) on left side of banner. See “Banner

Format Options” on page 286 for more

information.

WinRightBanner <format> Defines banner format options (such as user

name, page number, and queue name for

printout) on right side of banner. See “Banner

Format Options” on page 286 for more

information.

Option (Continued) Parameter Value Description (Continued)

11 Printers

284

WinBannerFontFace <font> Specifies font used in the banner on the

printout. Underscore cannot be used to

represent a space. Does not recognize bold,

italic, or underline. Default is MS Sans Serif.

WinBannerFontSize <font size> Specifies a numeric value for the font size, in

points, used in the banner on the printout.

Default is 10.

WinForm YES | NO | ALL Specifies whether a form is included in the

printout of each story. The YES option

specifies printing the form on first page of

each story; NO specifies none; ALL specifies

printing the form on every page of each story.

WinPrintForm <form> Defines which form is used for printing.

Default is form specified within each story.

WinFormFontFace <form> Specifies font used in the form on the printout.

Underscore cannot be used to represent a

space. Does not recognize bold, italic, or

underlined text. Default is MS Sans Serif.

WinFormFontSize <font size> Specifies a numeric value for the font size, in

points, used in the form on the printout.

Default is 10

WinSeparator YES | NO Specifies whether a horizontal rule (line) is

printed after the Story Form row and before

the line of text from the story. Default is NO.

WinBlanks <# of blank lines> Specifies a numeric value for blank lines

printed following each story when printing the

Story Preview. Default is 2.

WinSpacing <# of line spacing> Specifies a numeric value for the line spacing

of printed stories and queues. Default is 1,

which results in a single-spaced printout.

WinScriptShift YES | NO Specifies whether iNEWS selects the

Uppercase checkbox in Local Printing dialog

box by default, and prints all text in

uppercase. Default is YES.

Option (Continued) Parameter Value Description (Continued)

Creating and Using Print Styles

285

WinBodyFontFace <font> Specifies font used in body of the printout.

Underscore cannot be used to represent a

space. System will print bold, italic, or

underlined text, as indicated in the original

text of story. This option also applies to

printed production cues. Default is MS Sans

Serif.

WinBodyFontSize <font size> Specifies a numeric value for the font size, in

points, used in the body of the printout. Also

applies to printed production cues. Default is

10.

WinOrientation <orientation> Specifies an override of page orientation in

the Printer Properties dialog. Allowable

options are portrait or landscape. Default is as

specified by the Printer Properties dialog.

WinScriptSplit YES | NO When enabled, stories are printed in a

dual-column layout regardless of whether the

story has any production cues if the user

chooses to print all stories, selected stories, or

the current story. Default is NO.

WinScriptLeftWidth <left width> Specifies a numeric value for the

width—measured in inches—of the left side

of the story that contains production cues.

Default is 3.

WinScriptRightWidth <right width> Specifies a numeric value for the

width—measured in inches—of the right side

of the story that contains story text. Default is

WinLeftMargin <left margin> Specifies a numeric value for the left print

margin—measured in inches. Default is .50.

WinRightMargin <right margin> Specifies a numeric value for the right print

margin—measured in inches. Default is .50.

WinTopMargin <top margin> Specifies a numeric value for the top print

margin—measured in inches. Default is 1.0.

WinBottomMargin <bottom margin> Specifies a numeric value for the bottom print

margin—measured in inches. Default is 1.0.

Option (Continued) Parameter Value Description (Continued)

11 Printers

286

Banner Format Options

In Local printing, iNEWS will include a banner at the top of printed text if the style selected

by the user includes the WinBanner=yes option.

nThe sum of the defaults: WinLeftMargin + WinScriptLeftWidth + WinScriptRightWidth + WinRightMargin

= .50 + 3 + 4 + .50 = 8.0. This width does not exceed a standard page of 8.5.

WinSequentialNumbering YES | NO When enabled, if the user chooses to print the

Queue panel or a portion of the Queue panel,

the pages of the queue view will be numbered

1, 2, 3, and so forth. Any information in the

page-number field of each story will be

printed as it exists in the system. When a user

chooses to print all stories, the story pages

will be numbered 1, 2, 3, and so forth with the

numbers continuing across stories. When a

user chooses a selection of stories, the story

pages will be numbered 1, 2, 3, and so forth

with the numbers restarting at each story. If a

user prints a current story, the story pages are

also numbered 1, 2, 3, and so forth.

When the Copies option is set to >1, the page

numbering will be repeated on each copy of a

story regardless of whether the Collate option

is selected. For instance, if the pages of story

#2 are numbered 4, 5, and 6, each copy of that

story will have pages 4, 5, and 6.

nThe page number will only be printed if f-page-number is listed as one of the attributes to include in the

WinLeftBanner or WinRightBanner options. This is true regardless of whether the user decides to enable

the WinSequentialNumbering option.

WinForceCollate YES | NO When enabled, multiple-copy print jobs are

collated regardless of whether the specified

printer accepts the Collate option if selected.

Default is NO.

WinCCShading <comma-delimited RGB value> Defines shading of closed captioning.

WinPIShading <comma-delimited RGB value> Defines shading of presenter instructions.

WinMIShading <comma-delimited RGB value> Defines shading of machine instructions.

Option (Continued) Parameter Value Description (Continued)

Creating and Using Print Styles

287

The banner comes in two parts—a left side and a right side—each with its own

user-configurable option. The system administrator can set what information appears in

either side of the banner by using the local printing style options WinLeftBanner and

WinRightBanner.

nLiteral text can be used with WinLeftBanner and WinRightBanner parameters. For instance,

if you want the banner to print the word, “User” followed by a user’s name, define the

parameter this way:

WinLeftBanner=USER-&u-name

See “Example Style Story” on page 288 for other literal text examples.

These options recognize parameters only in certain formats, as shown in the following table:

To define a banner in a local print style:

1. Navigate to SYSTEM.STYLES in the Directory panel.

2. Double-click on the queue you want to modify, opening it in the Queue panel.

3. Double-click on the first story in the queue, opening that story in the Story panel.

4. Position your cursor in the Story panel.

5. Press Enter to ensure your cursor is at the start of a new line.

6. Type

WinBanner=yes

on the new line. If this line already appears somewhere in the

style, you can skip this step.

7. Type

WinLeftBanner=

followed by a

. Separate multiple format

parameters with single spaces. Format parameters are shown in the preceding table.

For instance, if the left side of the banner should include the user’s name and date, the

local print style option would look something like this:

WinLeftBanner=&u-name &date

Parameter Description

&u-name user name

&q-name queue name

&date date (according to Windows regional setting)

&time time (according to Windows regional setting)

&f-title slug

&f-page-number page number

&f-presenter presenter name (according to the presenter field)

11 Printers

288

nThe left banner print style option should be defined even if it will be blank; otherwise, the

system uses the default setting. To define the left banner as blank, type: WinLeftBanner=

leaving the remainder of the line after the equal sign blank. The left banner default setting

is:

WinLeftBanner=&u-name &date &time

8. Press Enter to make certain your cursor is at the start of a new line.

9. Type

WinRightBanner=

followed by a

. Separate multiple

format parameters with single spaces. Format parameters are shown in the preceding

table.

For instance, if the right side of the banner should include the story slug and queue

name, the local print style option would look something like this:

WinRightBanner=&f-title &q-name

nThe right banner print style option should be defined even if it will be blank; otherwise, the

system uses the default setting. To define the right banner as blank, type:

WinRightBanner=

leaving the remainder of the line after the equal sign blank. The right banner default setting

is:

WinRightBanner=&q-name &f-title &f-page-number

10. Save the story.

Example Style Story

Here is an example of a local print style story stored in a queue located in

SYSTEM.STYLES:

nOther examples are provided in a starter database installed with every new iNEWS system.

WinWYSIWYG=yes

WinBanner=yes

WinLeftBanner=&q-name PAGE-&f-page-number SLUG-&f-title

WinRightBanner=Tal-&f-presenter USER-&u-name &date &time

WinBlanks=2

WinSegmentPageBreak=yes

WinColorPrint=no

WinScriptShift=no

WinScriptLeftWidth=3.5

WinScriptRightWidth=3.5

WinLeftMargin=0.75

WinRightMargin=0.75

WinTopMargin=1.0

WinBottomMargin=1.0

WinSeparator=yes

WinSpacing=1.5

Creating and Using Print Styles

289

WinForm=All ;NOTE-Other options=Yes, No

WinPrintForm=Rundown

WinPageHeader=header.default

WinPageFooter=footer.default

WinHeaderFontFace=Times New Roman

WinHeaderFontSize=10

WinBannerFontFace=Arial

WinBannerFontSize=12

WinFormFontFace=Arial

WinFormFontSize=10

WinBodyFontFace=Times New Roman

WinBodyFontSize=20

WinOrientation=portrait;Note-Only other options=landscape

WinRundownFontFace=Arial

WinRundownFontSize=10

WinRundownLeftMargin=0.50

WinRundownRightMargin=0.50

WinRundownTopMargin=0.75

WinRundownBottomMargin=0.75

WinBannerBlanks=2

WinPrintRundownForm=Rundown

WinPrintHide=yes

WinPrintHideStart=<<

WinPrintHideStop=>>

WinVTEmulation=no

WinCopyDriverSettings=yes

WinSequentialNumbering=no

WinScriptSplit=no

11 Printers

290

12 Wires

The profile files contain information about how the iNEWS system will use the hardware, or

instructions on how the software is to behave. Therefore, each wire service available to your

system can have a wire profile file. This file contains settings for options you can use with

that wire service to influence the behavior of the wire. When you restart a wire service, your

system checks its profile for necessary information.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Adding a Wire – Avid Data Receiver

-Phase 1

-Phase 2

-Phase 3

-Phase 4

•Wire Profile Options

•Wire Distribution

•Setting Up Wire Keyword Searches

-Additional Information about Search Jobs

-Keyword Search Rule Sets

-Keyword Checker Messages

Adding a Wire – Avid Data Receiver

The Data Receiver is a highly configurable wire server designed to handle a newsroom’s

subscription wire feeds (8 or fewer) in a single server, while giving iNEWS users access to

the data from their desktops. It processes incoming wire data from multiple input sources,

including e-mail and traditional serial feeds in multiple data formats. For more information

on the Avid Data Receiver, see the Avid Data Receiver Installation and Operations Manual.

When adding a wire for ingesting through the Data Receiver, you must complete four phases

in the setup.

• Phase 1 - Ensure the Avid Data Receiver software is installed, configured, licensed, and

the wire feed is connected to the appropriate port.

• Phase 2 - Create an entry for the wire service in the configuration file and a wire profile

for the wire service.

• Phase 3 - Add the wire distribution information.

• Phase 4 - Reconfigure the system and start the Avid Data Receiver so it can begin

receiving and distributing wire stories.

Phase 1

The procedures for installing and configuring the Data Receiver are provided in the Avid

Data Receiver Installation and Operations Manual. For integration with iNEWS, additional

tasks must be completed.

To ensure proper configuration and licensing, do the following on the iNEWS Server:

1. Add a wire server resource to the iNEWS Server license. An example of a license is

shown in “Licensing iNEWS Components” on page 247. Each wire instance on the Data

Receiver requires its own wire server resource be licensed and configured on the

iNEWS Server.

nConfiguring more wire server resources in the iNEWS configuration file (/site/config) than

are licensed will result in the system failing to configure. If this happens, the system will

display a message at the console indicating that license limits were exceeded and by how

much.

2. Choose a device number for each Data Receiver instance. This number is required for

later phases in the setup. Ensure that the number you choose is not already in use.

3. Connect the wire feed to the selected port on the PC running the Data Receiver software.

Adding a Wire – Avid Data Receiver

293

Phase 2

Wire service information are added to two files in the Site directory on the iNEWS

Server(s):

• The configuration file (/site/config)

• (Optional) The wire profile, located in /site/wires directory

To add wire service information to the configuration file:

1. Select all servers.

2. Modify the iNEWS configuration file by adding the following:

nSee “Editing the Configuration File” on page 252 for more information.

a. Add a resource list entry to the host section of the /site/config file on the iNEWS

Server.

The format is:

reslist <device #> ;<comments>

For instance:

reslist 801 ;Data Receiver instance

nFor dual or triple server systems, the configuration file will have multiple host sections to

define which server handles which devices under various circumstances. Resource list

entries should be added to each host section depending on which server you want the Data

Receiver instances to run. See “Configuration File” on page 249 for more information.

b. Add a wireserver resource line for each Data Receiver instance to the devices

sections of the /site/config file on the iNEWS Server.

The format is:

wireserver <device #> news <source> <join option>

Example:

wireserver 801 news AP -

Parameter Description

device # The Data Receiver instance device number.

source The wire’s source name (capitalized portion of the distribution name—AP,

UP, and so forth). It is the same as the source name used in the Data Receiver.

join option Links stories that have the same title. It is used with wire services that

routinely break stories into multiple takes. If you place

join

in this position,

users can view all takes of a story with the Get All Versions workstation

option. To leave this option out of the configuration line, enter a hyphen (-).

12 Wires

294

Adding a Wire Profile

The wire profiles associated with Data Receiver, and located in the /site/wires directory, use

only two wire profile options—form and idle. The wire profile must have the same name as

the Data Receiver instance’s device number. See “Wire Profile Options” on page 296 for

more information.

To add a wire profile:

1. Select all servers.

2. Use the ed command in the following format:

ed /site/wires/<device#>

For instance, type:

NRCS-A#

ed /site/wires/801

Since the file doesn’t exist, the system will create it, but display a line similar to the

following:

/site/wires/801: No such file or directory

nThis procedure, which modifies the wire profile in the /site/wires directory uses ed, the line

editor. If you do not know how to use ed, please see “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655.

3. Add the necessary text to the file by typing:

Everything you type after pressing Enter will now be added to the file. The two wire

profile options that must be defined for a Data Receiver are:

form <name>

idle <timeout> <interval> <notify group>

For instance, type:

form wires

idle 15:00 00:01 inews

For more information, see “Wire Profile Options” on page 296.

nThe words dictionary (/site/dict/words) contains W_WIRE_FORM /wires which is used as

the default if no form option is specified in the profile or if the profile doesn’t exist.

4. Stop adding lines to the file by typing a period (.) and press Enter.

5. Type

to write (save) your changes to disk.

nDo not use an uppercase W in this step.

6. Type

to quit the line editor.

Adding a Wire – Avid Data Receiver

295

Phase 3

Each Data Receiver instance must have its own set of instructions in a story, called the wire

distribution story, located on the iNEWS system in the Distribution queue in the

SYSTEM.WIRES directory. When you add a new wire to your system, you need to add new

instructions to your system’s wire distribution story so it knows how to distribute stories it

receives from that wire service.

You can view the story by logging in as a system administrator at an iNEWS Workstation

and navigating to SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION, which is the default location for

distribution stories.

nAvid recommends that you make a backup copy of the story before making any modifications

to the wire distribution story, .

To modify the wire distribution story:

1. At an iNEWS Workstation, select the story in the Queue panel. The story’s text will

appear in the Story panel.

2. Edit the story by changing or adding lines as necessary in the Story panel.

3. Save the story by doing one of the following:

a. Click the Save button.

b. Select File > Save.

c. Press Ctrl+S.

nThe wire distribution story is typically set up by Avid Customer Support technicians when

your system is installed. If you need assistance in modifying an existing wire distribution

story, contact Avid Customer Support. Also, a standard copy of a wire distribution story is

available in “System Files” on page 541.

12 Wires

296

Here is a partial sample of a wire distribution story:

AP#bloom## wires.bloomberg

AP#kip01## wires.kipling

APb###aa## wires.features

AP######o# wires.weather

AP######s# wires.sports

AP######i# wires.world URGENT

AP######w# wires.washington URGENT

AP######n# wires.national URGENT

AP######a# wires.national URGENT

AP######f# wires.biz URGENT

AP######## wires.all always URGENT

Phase 4

The final phase in adding a wire is to check your setup by reconfiguring the system and

starting the Data Receiver. This will incorporate the changes you made to the configuration

file in Phase 2.

To reconfigure the system:

1. Take the system offline by typing:

NRCS-A$

offline

2. Reconfigure the system by typing:

NRCS-A$

configure

3. When the prompt reappears, bring the system back online by typing:

NRCS-A$

online

nFor information on how to start the Data Receiver, see the Avid Data Receiver Installation

and Operations Manual

Wire Profile Options

Each wire option available may appear only once in a wire profile and may be assigned only

one value. Only two options—form and idle—are necessary in a wire profile for wires

ingested through Data Receiver.

•

form <name>

The form option is the form name assigned to the wire story, generally used to view the

story. This form is the story form assigned to queues that typically contain wire stories.

In wire profiles for Data Receiver instances, the <name> variable is usually wires.

Wire Distribution

297

nThe words dictionary (/site/dict/words) contains W_WIRE_FORM /wires which is used as

the default if no form option is specified in the profile.

•

idle <timeout> <interval> <notify group>

The idle option controls how your system handles a prolonged period of inactivity, when

no stories are received by iNEWS, for a wire. The timeout value indicates how long the

wire should be idle before users are notified. For instance, a time-out value of 2:00

triggers notification if no stories are received from this wire in two hours.

The notify group is optional; it contains the user group name on iNEWS that is notified,

through the bottom-of-screen message, if the time-out value is reached. A message is

always sent to the console when this happens. To disable sending a message to a group,

put a hyphen (-) in this position.

The interval value is used to repeat this notification if the wire remains idle for an

additional period of time beyond the time-out value. A time-out value of 2:00 combined

with an interval of 15 notifies users after two hours of idle time and every 15 minutes

thereafter, as long as the wire remains idle.

The time-out and interval can have any values between 2 minutes and 24 hours,

expressed in hh:mm format. Providing a value of 0 for the time-out, or omitting the idle

option from the profile altogether, disables the idle time alert for this wire. An interval

of 0 limits notification to one initial message.

Wire Distribution

The Data Receiver routes each wire story it receives to an appropriate queue, based on which

wire service sent the story and the story’s distribution code. This distribution system ensures

all sports-related wire stories are sent to the sports wire queue, weather forecasts are sent to

the weather wire queue, and so on.

This section explains the method wire programs use to categorize and distribute wire stories,

and provides a process for customizing the distribution of wire stories to keep up with the

changing needs of your newsroom.

The Wire Distribution Story

Each wire must have its own entry in the wire distribution story. The wire distribution story

is the first story in the SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION queue. If there is more than one

story in that queue, the first story is used. This entry consists of up to 150 instructions that

tell the wire how to distribute wire stories, based on their wire service codes.

12 Wires

298

Each line in the story is called a distribution line. Each distribution line consists of a

distribution name, a destination queue, and an optional notification priority constraint—all

of which are explained in more detail later in this section.

Although your distribution story was set up for you when your system was installed, you

might need to modify it by changing an existing distribution line or adding a new

distribution line to the story.

cWhen you add a new distribution line, you must add it above any distribution lines for

WIRES.UNKNOWN or WIRES.ALL within the section of the distribution story for

that wire.

Here is a sample of a wire distribution story:

AP#####a# wires.us-national

AP#####b# wires.us-national

AP#####d# wires.features

AP#####e# wires.briefs

AP#####f# wires.features

AP#####h# wires.business

AP#####h# wires.briefs

AP#####i# wires.us-national

AP#####l# wires.features

AP#####m# wires.business

AP#####o# wires.weather

AP#####p# wires.us-national

AP#####q# wires.sports-score

AP#####r# wires.rundowns

AP#####s# wires.sports-stories

AP#####t# wires.rundowns

AP#####v# wires.advisory.other

AP#####w# wires.washington

AP####### wires.all

AP####### wires.unknown

Distribution Name

Each distribution line must begin with a distribution name that sets the criteria a story must

meet to be sent to the destination queue specified in that instruction. Begin the distribution

name with the wire’s source name, as specified in the configuration file. Otherwise, the wire

ignores that instruction.

The source name is the contents of the fourth column for the wire in the /site/config file. For

instance, the following wire is named AX:

wireserver 801 news AX -

Wire Distribution

299

Follow the source name with the wire service code you want that instruction to handle.

There must be no spaces between the source name and code. Within the code, specify the

category, service level, selector, and priority codes a story must have for the wire to send it to

the destination queue specified in the instruction.

In most cases, you need only specify the category code to distribute wires. You generally use

only the source name and category code positions in the distribution name and fill the

remainder of positions in the distribution name with pound sign (#) characters, which the

wire ignores.

For instance, to create a distribution name that matches all Associated Press sports stories

you receive, begin the distribution name with the source name of the wire (AP in this

example) and put s in the ninth (second-to-last) position. It does not matter what is in the

remainder of the distribution name, so fill those positions with # characters: AP######s#.

nWhen you enter a distribution name, type the wire program’s source name in the same case

as it is defined in the configuration file. Similarly, Avid recommends entering wire category

and priority codes in lowercase in your distribution names.

Destination Queue

Follow the distribution name with the full pathname of the destination queue where you

want the wire to put any stories that match the distribution name. For instance, to have the

wire send every story that matches AP######s# to WIRES.SPORTS, specify that queue:

AP######s# WIRES.SPORTS

If you create a distribution line with a destination queue that does not exist, the system

creates the queue when you save the distribution story, only if all higher-level directories

already exist. For example, to distribute sports scores to WIRES.SPORTS.SCORES queue,

the WIRES.SPORTS directory must already exist in the system; if it doesn’t, the system

cannot create the queue. A queue created this way inherits directory traits assigned to the

Wires directory, including the purge interval. If you want a different purge interval, use the

Directory Properties dialog box to change it. See “Changing Database Traits” on page 136

and “Database Purge Intervals and Limits” on page 139 for more information.

Notification Priority

Normally, when your system receives a story the wire service has marked as either

BULLETIN or URGENT, it notifies everyone logged in. You can change the priority level a

story must have to merit notification by setting an optional notification priority constraint in

the distribution line.

12 Wires

300

For instance, to have the wire that handles the AP wire service put a copy of each Associated

Press brief it receives in WIRES.BRIEFS and notify you whenever it puts an AP brief

marked urgent in this queue, add the distribution line shown here:

AP######d# wires.briefs URGENT

You can set four notification priority constraint levels in each distribution line. Each level

restricts user notification to a higher degree. By convention, type them in uppercase.

WIRES.ALL Notification Priority

Your system sends only one notification for a story, even if the story matches two or more

distribution lines. However, since each line might have a different notification level, the

system chooses the lowest notification level and uses it to determine whether to send a

notification.

This is important when considering the distribution line for WIRES.ALL. By the way it is

typically set up, each story received is distributed to this line as well as others. Consequently,

the notification priority set for this line can also affect how notification levels are interpreted

for other lines.

For instance, if the distribution line for WIRES.ALL has a notification level of BULLETIN,

any other distribution line set to a notification level of FLASH or SILENT (higher levels) is

downgraded to BULLETIN.

Priority Level Description

URGENT The lowest constraint level. Any story marked FLASH, BULLETIN, or

URGENT by the wire service causes users to be notified if this constraint

level is specified.

BULLETIN The next-lowest constraint level. Any story marked flash or bulletin causes

users to be notified if this constraint level is specified.

BULLETIN is the default priority level; if you do not specify a notification

priority constraint in a distribution line, any story that matches the

distribution name in that line and has this level or higher priority causes

notification.

FLASH The second-highest constraint level. When you set a distribution line to this

constraint level, stories that match the distribution line’s distribution name

must have a priority of “flash” in your system to notify users.

SILENT The highest constraint level. It prevents your system from notifying users of

the arrival of any story processed by that distribution line. No story ever has a

high enough priority to override this constraint level.

Wire Distribution

301

However, by setting the distribution line for WIRES.ALL to SILENT (the highest

notification level), you can make certain that all other distribution lines for that wire have

notification levels lower than WIRES.ALL. This ensures their notification levels take

precedence over those for WIRES.ALL.

Transmit or Always Options

You can apply two other options, TRANSMIT and ALWAYS, to a distribution line.

WIRES.UNKNOWN

A wire puts stories that do not match any of its distribution lines in the queue

WIRES.UNKNOWN. Most systems have a distribution line that uses a wildcard distribution

code and the ALWAYS option to send a copy of every story to WIRES.ALL. As a result, no

story is unknown as far as the wire is concerned.

In many cases, you want to send stories that do not match normal distribution codes to both

WIRES.ALL and WIRES.UNKNOWN. To do this, you need a special distribution line in

the wire distribution story that sends a copy of any wire that does not match a normal

distribution code to WIRES.UNKNOWN before sending it to WIRES.ALL.

If your system uses more than one wire service, the distribution lines for each service should

be in separate groups. Each group should have its own distribution line for

WIRES.UNKNOWN at the bottom of that group of distribution lines, just above that group’s

distribution line for WIRES.ALL.

Option Description

TRANSMIT This option is used on distribution lines that send stories to queues scanned

by distribution servers. It causes the wire to give the story a distribution code

that matches its wire service code before sending it to the destination queue.

This way, a distribution server that scans the destination queue can distribute

the story, based on its original wire-service code.

ALWAYS If you want the wire to distribute a copy of every story it receives to a certain

queue, place ALWAYS on the distribution line that sends stories to that

queue. The word ALWAYS may follow or precede a notification priority

constraint. Most often, this is used to send a copy of every story received by

the AP wire service to WIRES.ALL:

AP####### wires.all ALWAYS

12 Wires

302

Maximum Number of Lines

Each wire’s entry in the distribution story can contain up to 150 distribution lines. To fix a

distribution story so your system can use it, divert distribution wires to the distribution server

so the total for each wire is no more than 150. Once you remove excess distribution lines and

save the story, your system should accept the distribution story and begin using it.

Avoiding Hidden Categories

When you add lines to your wire distribution story, you might get hidden category error

messages when you save the story. These errors occur when the line or lines you have added

are not in the proper position relative to other lines in the story. The following example

illustrates this problem and shows how to fix it.

Suppose you had this line in your wire distribution story:

UP######g# wires.regional

In addition to this line, you wanted to add a line like this one:

UP#xyz##g# wires.briefs

While this may seem straightforward, you get a hidden category error message if you add

the new line following the existing one. To understand why, look at the two lines together.

UP######g# wires.regional

UP#xyz##g# wires.briefs

Suppose a story came from the wire service with a distribution code of UPoxyzoogr or

something else that would ordinarily match your new WIRES.BRIEFS distribution line. The

problem arises because the story also matches the WIRES.REGIONAL line above that one,

and, since the wire distribution program stops checking the distribution story after it finds a

match, it never gets to the WIRES.BRIEFS line.

To avoid hidden category errors:

tEnsure that you arrange any distribution lines that have common elements so the more

specific line comes first in the distribution story, like this:

UP#xyz##g# wires.briefs

UP######g# wires.regional

nThis rule of distribution does not apply to distribution lines that have the same code but

distribute the stories to different queues. These lines still match the appropriate wire stories,

as long as they are placed together in the distribution story.

Setting Up Wire Keyword Searches

303

Mailboxes

Your system was installed with the reserved distribution mailbox assigned to the queue

SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION. This mailbox allows the wire distribution checker (a

server program) to know when you make changes to the distribution story. The checker in

turn notifies the wire programs that the distribution story has changed. This is the only way

the wire program knows to incorporate changes you make. See “Mailbox Tasks” on page

325 for more information.

nDo not assign a different mailbox to this queue or assign this mailbox to any other queue.

If you want everyone logged in on the system to be notified when a wire story is placed in

WIRES.ADVISORY.PRIORITY, you must assign the reserved mailbox “all” to that queue.

Mailboxes are assigned to queues using the Queue Properties dialog box. See “Changing

Database Traits” on page 136 and “Reserved Mailboxes” on page 327 for more information.

Purge Intervals

Nowhere in your database are proper purge intervals as important as in the Wires directory.

All queues in the Wires directory should have roughly similar purge intervals. If not, the

system may not reclaim space used by old wire stories efficiently.

nNever use the wire distribution story to distribute wire stories to queues not purged. Doing

so can eventually lead to a low-on-space condition as the queues fill up with old stories.

Internationalization

You can modify the FLASH, URGENT, BULLETIN, SILENT, ALWAYS, and TRANSMIT

options by changing appropriate entries in the words dictionary (/site/dict/words).

You must use the maketab command for the system to recognize dictionary changes.

The system expects each option to begin with a unique letter and looks at the first letter of

the word to determine what it is. The system would find TRANSMIT to be the same as TX.

Setting Up Wire Keyword Searches

In addition to receiving and distributing wire stories, a wire can also search stories it

processes for keywords you want. When it finds a story that satisfies one of your search

rules, it copies that story to a queue you specify. Using wire keyword searching can be an

easy way to collect stories of interest to specific writers in your newsroom.

12 Wires

304

Utility programs, called keyword servers, can do keyword searching in the same way as

wires. For example, they can perform this task on queues to sort scripts for archiving. They

are listed differently in the search job list, but otherwise searching and story distribution are

handled the same way.

nSee “Adding a Keyword Server” on page 361 for more information.

To set up a keyword search for a wire or keyword server:

1. Check the search job list for existing entries.

The search job list is the first story in the SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS queue.

Each job list entry uses the following format:

*[<number of queues>] [<name>] [< name>]

[<queue name>] [<base distribution folder>]

. . .

[<queue name>]

Begin each entry with an asterisk (*).

Follow the asterisk and number combination with the device name of the program that

uses this entry or a source name for a wire. List two or more names if you want more

than one program to use the entry. Program names are specified in the configuration file.

Follow the first line with one or more lines that specify queues containing keyword

stories you want the program to use. A keyword server can have as many as 20 queues.

If the program that uses the entry is a wire program, you can list as many as five

different queues here.

2. Create a keyword queue.

By convention, keyword stories are placed in queues in SYSTEM.WIRES, so create a

queue called SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS-AP.

See “Creating a New Queue” on page 104 for more information.

3. Assign the reserved keyword mailbox to the new keyword queue.

If this mailbox is not assigned to this queue, your system cannot notify the keyword

server when you add new search rules to the keyword story or modify existing ones. The

keyword server will not examine your changes for mistakes or notify programs that use

the keyword story of changes you made.

See “Keyword Mailbox” on page 311, “Changing Database Traits” on page 136 and

“Reserved Mailboxes” on page 327 for more information.

4. Add an entry to the search job list.

Setting Up Wire Keyword Searches

305

Ensure the keyword story queue you just created is listed in the wire program’s search

job list. The iNEWS system looks for the keyword story in the

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS-AP queue, so the wire program’s search job list

should look similar to this:

* AP

system.wires.keywords-ap

;

* kwdserver1

system.keywords.shuttle

system.keywords.recycle

When you save the story, the keyword checker examines your changes for errors. Then it

notifies all Data Receiver wire services that keyword changes were made.

nThe keyword checker (kwdcheck) validates keyword search stories just as the distribution

checker (catcheck) validates wire distribution stories. The keyword checker is different from

the keyword server, which is the utility program doing the actual wire keyword searching.

The number of queues you specify determines how many unique keywords can be in

each story. The formula for this is the maximum number of unique keywords a wire

program can use (250) divided by the number of stories you declare. For instance,

listing two queues would mean each story could have a maximum of 125 unique

keywords. See “Additional Information about Search Jobs” on page 306 for more

information.

5. Create a keyword story.

Wire and keyword server programs use the first story in the queue as the keyword story.

If there is more than one story, ensure your keyword story is at the top of the queue.

6. Add search rules to the keyword story. See “Keyword Search Rule Sets” on page 307 for

more information.

7. Save the keyword story.

The keyword checker examines the story for errors and creates any destination queues

that do not exist. If the keyword checker finds an error, it sends a message to your

workstation.

The most important of these messages advises you the story contains a destination

queue that does not have a purge interval.

Using a non-purging destination queue does not prevent the keyword story from being

used, but you risk collecting stories in that queue until the system runs out of space.

Avid strongly recommends all your destination queues have purge intervals.

12 Wires

306

The messages you see after saving a keyword story are advisory messages and do not

prevent the keyword story from being used. Once you have viewed all the messages, the

program for which the keyword story was designed begins using the rule sets in that

keyword story to search the stories it processes, as long as an entry for that program has

been made in the search job list.

Additional Information about Search Jobs

The following section provides additional information about search job list features and

important considerations.

Suppressing a Search

To prevent a program from doing any searching, create an entry for the program that consists

of an asterisk only and the program’s device or source name, or do not include an entry for

the program in the search job list. If your search job list contains a default entry, you need to

include entries for each wire and keyword server program you want to keep from doing any

searching.

Default Entry

A default entry is one that begins with an asterisk, but does not specify a device or source

name. A search job list must contain a default entry located at the bottom of the story. If a

program is unable to find an entry that contains its device name, it uses the default entry.

Your system uses a special utility (server) program, called keyword checker, to check any

changes you make to the search job list. For the system to notify the keyword checker when

you modify the search job list, assign the reserved system mailbox keyword to the

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS queue. See “Changing Database Traits” on page 136 and

the “Maintain Tab” on page 130 for more information.

Keyword Limitations

Each wire can have search rules containing no more than 250 unique keywords. Divide the

search rules among as many as five keyword stories in different queues. The maximum

number of unique keywords you can use in each queue’s keyword story is 250 divided by the

number of queues you specify in the program’s search job list entry.

In a similar way, keyword servers can use search rules containing a total of 1000 unique

keywords. Divide these search rules among as many as 20 different queues. The number of

unique keywords allowed in each keyword story is equal to the total number allowed for that

keyword server divided by the number of queues you include in the keyword server’s search

job list entry.

Setting Up Wire Keyword Searches

307

Keyword Search Rule Sets

Each keyword story is a collection of rule sets. Each rule set contains the search rules you

want your program to use to identify stories relating to a particular topic.

The format each rule set must have is as follows:

destination <queue name>

[<search rule>]

. . .

[<search rule>]

Each rule set begins with a destination line naming the queue where copies of stories that

satisfy any of the rule set’s search rules are placed. This line must begin with the word

destination, followed by the full pathname of the destination queue or the default directory

path. See “Default Directory Path” on page 310 for more information.

Two rule sets cannot use the same destination queue.

Follow the destination line with one or more lines that contain search rules you want a

particular wire and keyword server program to use to search. Each search rule occupies a

separate line in the rule set.

For instance, the rule set in the following example begins with a destination line that tells the

program to put copies of stories that satisfy either of the rule set’s search rules into

WIRES.KEYWORDS.DRUGS. The two lines that follow contain the search rules the

program uses to find stories relating to drugs:

destination wires.keywords.drugs

panama AND drugs

drugs NOT pharmacy OR (drugs AND smuggling)

cNever create a destination line that sends stories to a personal queue or any queue not

purged. Having a program send stories to such queues can lead to an out-of-space

condition.

Each search rule consists of one or more keywords you want a wire or keyword server

program to use to locate stories on a particular topic.

12 Wires

308

Each search rule is contained in a paragraph and is limited to approximately 1000 characters

or to the end of the paragraph, whichever is less. You can have more than one search rule

defined for each destination queue. The only limitation is that you cannot exceed the number

of unique keywords allowed for the story. For details on the maximum number of unique

keywords, see “Keyword Limitations” on page 306.

If your search rule contains more than one keyword:

• Include a space before and after each keyword so the system can identify the start and

end of each keyword. You can change default delimiters by customizing the dictionary

translation for the W_DELIMITERS token in the words dictionary. Use the maketab

command to let the system recognize dictionary changes. Your iNEWS system must

have all users logged out and all devices stopped to use the maketab command.

Delimiters defined by W_DELIMITERS are used by the wire, seek, and keyword server

programs to find the start and end of words in stories. These isolated words are matched

with keywords from the search list. Definition of the delimiters is not related to the task

of constructing search rules. Keywords are limited to a maximum of ten characters.

• Include the AND, OR, or NOT operator between two keywords:

AND requires that a story contain multiple keywords. For instance, a rule like “drugs

AND smuggling” finds only stories that contains both of these words.

OR requires that a story have any of multiple keywords. For instance, a rule like “cnn

OR panama” finds any story that contains either of these words.

NOT specifies that a story must not contain the keyword following the operator. For

instance, a rule like “drugs NOT pharmacy” finds any story that has the word “drugs” in

it but does not contain the word “pharmacy.”

Using Parentheses in Search Rules

Wire and keyword server programs evaluate a search rule from left to right. For instance, to

find stories that contain either “air quality,” “clean air,” or “dirty air,” create the following

long search rule:

air AND quality OR air AND dirty OR air AND clean

Because these programs evaluate rules from left to right, they first see if a story contains

both “air” and “quality.” If a story does not contain both of these keywords, the program

checks whether it contains both “air” and “dirty.” If the story does not, the program checks

whether the story contains both “air” and “clean.”

Using parentheses, you can control how a program evaluates the rule. For instance, by

rearranging the rule, we greatly simplify it:

air AND (quality OR dirty OR clean)

Setting Up Wire Keyword Searches

309

You can use as many sets of parentheses as necessary to have the program evaluate the

search rule.

For instance, to create a search rule that finds any story that contains either the word “smog”

or the words “air” and “quality,” but not “pollen” or “airline,” build a rule such as the

following:

smog OR ((air AND quality) NOT (pollen OR airline))

After you add your search rules to the keyword story and save, the keyword checker

examines your changes for errors. If there are no errors, it notifies any program that uses that

keyword story of what you have done so the program can use your changes.

Tips on Building Search Rules

• Each keyword must be a single word; two words without an operator between them

generate an error. For instance, you must use space AND shuttle rather than space

shuttle to find stories about the space shuttle.

• Each search rule is contained in a paragraph and is limited to approximately 1000

characters or to the end of the paragraph, whichever is less. Searches are not

case-sensitive, so you can use uppercase or lowercase letters.

• Be careful using keywords that form the first part of larger words. For instance, “air”

finds stories that contain words like “airline” and “airports” as well as “air.” To use a

keyword like “air,” include the NOT operator to exclude other words that begin with that

keyword, such as NOT airline.

However, wire and keyword server programs do not find keywords when they appear in the

middle or at the end of a word. For instance, searching for “ports” does not locate stories that

contain words like “airports” or “sports.”

The success of your search depends on how well you design the search rules; they should be

specific enough so programs that use them find only stories that relate to your topic.

Scanning stops either at the end of the story or after a maximum of 50 keywords are found.

Then the search rules are used on the set of located keywords. The program abandons that

rule set when it finds a search rule the story satisfies or when it exhausts all search rules in

the rule set.

nYou can increase the efficiency of your searches by putting rules that are most likely to find

stories at the top of each rule set. Put the least complex rules at the top.

12 Wires

310

User Notification

You can have the system notify you when a program finds a story that contains one of the

keywords for which you are searching. Assign a group you are in to the notification group

trait of the queue(s) where the program sends the stories. See “Notification Group” on page

172 for more information. Your system then notifies you every time the program places a

story in one of these queues.

Removing a Rule Set

When a rule set becomes obsolete, remove it. Because a large number of keyword searches

slows your system, removing unused rule sets helps maintain system efficiency.

If you are no longer using the rule set’s destination queue, remove it. This frees up space in

the database and helps keep it from being cluttered up with unused queues.

Sending a Story to More Than One Queue

Wire and keyword server programs check stories they process against each rule set in the

keyword stories they use. When the program finds a match, it sends a copy of the story to the

rule set’s destination queue and continues searching, using the remaining rule sets. Only the

first 50 words identified in the story will be used when checking the rule sets.

You can have a story copied to more than one destination queue by repeating the same

search rule in different rule sets.

You can also distribute to more than one queue by using an temp queue and an action server.

Have your keyword server send the story to the temp queue. This is a queue where the story

will only sit for a moment. It is typically hidden from ordinary users. Assign an action server

mailbox to this queue. In the action server joblist, have it scan the queue and dup the story to

each of the destination queues. On the last list, have the action server move rather than dup.

That will prevent stories accumulating in the temp queue. The temp queue should have a

long purge interval, to protect against story loss if the action server fails. Restarting the

action server in that instance should result in all accumulated stories being distributed.

Default Directory Path

You usually need the full pathname to specify each rule set’s destination queue. You must do

this for the program performing the search, to locate the destination queue.

Sometimes, all rule sets in a keyword story contain destination queues in the same directory.

In this case, set a default directory path for the keyword story and then specify the

destination queues by name rather than using the full pathnames.

Setting Up Wire Keyword Searches

311

To specify a default directory, enter the queue’s default directory in the search job list entry

that uses the keyword story. Follow the queue name that contains the keyword story with the

default directory pathname. For example set the keyword up like this:

* AX

system.wires.keywords-apx wires.keywords

Then, in SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS-APX, the entries can look like this:

destination cancer

cancer

The actual destination is WIRES.KEYWORDS.CANCER.

Use this feature with group security. You can allow users to manage their own keyword

searches but control where they send the stories.

Keyword Mailbox

Assign the reserved keyword mailbox to the queue SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS, which

contains the search job list. Otherwise, your system cannot notify the keyword checker when

you make changes to the search job list.

Always assign the keyword mailbox to queues that hold your keyword stories. If this

reserved system mailbox is not assigned, your system cannot notify the keyword checker

when you create new search rules or modify existing ones.

When you modify an existing search rule or create a new one, the keyword checker alerts

programs that use that rule about the change. If the queue does not have the keyword

mailbox assigned to it, the keyword checker cannot do this. Consequently, programs that use

the search rule you created or modified will not know about your changes until you restart

them.

See “Changing Database Traits” on page 136 and “Reserved Mailboxes” on page 327 for

more information.

Keyword Checker Messages

The following messages from the message dictionary may appear when you modify and save

a keyword story:

12 Wires

312

Message (Token) Description

Could not enter the queue (M_BADQUEUE)

The specified destination is not accessible or an error

occurred while creating or entering the queue.

Default keyword list must

be last

(M_WNOTLAST)

Placing the default keyword list anywhere but at the

bottom of the story will prevent those keyword lists that

follow it from being used.

Duplicate destination (M_DUPEDEST)

The specified destination has already been used for

another keyword list.

Keyword too long (M_KWDLONG)

Length of the keyword string is longer than maximum

length allowed. The maximum is 10 characters.

Maximum file number bad (M_FILENUM)

The number of keyword stories has exceeded the

maximum allowed.

The M_FILENUM diagnostic is produced if there is

anything other than a space, a five, or a twenty following

the asterisk in the

* AP

line of the wire program’s search

job list.

The

* AP

is equivalent to

*5 AP

meaning that you can

have at most 5 queue names specified for AP wire search

rules. Wires are limited to 250 unique keywords in the

search rules. So you can have 5 stories with each story

containing 50 unique keywords. If you have one story, it

can contain 250. If you have 2 stories, each story can

contain 125, and so forth.

Keyword servers are limited to 1000 unique keywords in

the search rules. You can specify

*20 kwdserver1

indicate that this keyword server may have as many as 20

queue names specified that will contain the search rules

for it. The example on page 395 limits the list to 5 and

therefore at most 250 unique keywords for kwdserver1.

missing (M_MISSING)

The keyword story does not understand the specified rule

set. Either an operator is missing (AND, OR, or NOT) or

an unmatched parenthesis exists.

No destination found (M_NODEST)

No destination is specified for a given rule set.

Not a queue (M_NOTQUEUE)

The specified destination is not a valid queue name.

Check whether it is misspelled, or whether it is a

directory.

Setting Up Wire Keyword Searches

313

Queue is never purged (M_PURGEZERO)

The specified destination queue is never purged, which

means stories may accumulate in it and eventually cause

a space problem in the database.

Syntax error (M_SYNERROR)

The keyword checker does not understand the specified

line. Check whether format of the line is correct.

System error (M_SYSERROR)

A system error has occurred that caused the keyword

checker to terminate. If you get this message, call Avid.

Too many expressions (M_EXPMAX)

A single search rule is too complicated. It contains more

than 500 words/operators.

Too many keyword

distribution files

(M_KWFMAX)

The number of keyword distribution files exceeded the

maximum allowed. The max is 5 for wireservers and 20

for keyword servers.

Too many keywords (M_KWDMAX)

The total number of unique keywords processed by the

keyword checker has exceeded the maximum allowed.

unexpected (M_UNEXPCTD)

The specified line has extra punctuation, such as an

unmatched parenthesis. Ensure that parentheses appear

only in pairs.

UPDATE queue (M_UPDATEQ)

The specified destination queue is an update queue. This

means that each time a story is placed into the destination

queue, the queue must be searched to determine if a copy

of the story is already in the queue. This puts an

unnecessary load on the system. Destination queues

should not have the update trait.

Message (Continued) (Token) Description (Continued)

12 Wires

314

13 Servers

Do not confuse servers in this chapter with physical servers, which are computers with the

iNEWS database and running the iNEWS application software. Those computers are

referred to in this chapter as iNEWS Server, server A, server B, and so forth. This chapter

explains setup and use of utility programs, also known as servers. There are various types of

these server programs, which perform a multitude of tasks.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Overview

•Adding a Server Program to the System

•Job Lists: Queues, Stories, and Commands

-Types of Tasks for Servers

-Mailbox Tasks

-Timed-Interval Tasks

•Action Servers

•Distribution Servers

•Parallel Wire Servers

•Keyword Servers

•System Servers

-Seek Servers

-Fast Text Search Servers

-Mail Server

•Monitor Servers

-Checklist: Monitor Server Configuration

-Creating Styles

-Using the Monitor Server

•Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links

Overview

Servers are utility programs, which automatically perform various actions on stories in the

iNEWS database. Some are general purpose and do jobs you define; others are narrowly

defined, needing no instruction from you. You can connect (network) server programs in

separate systems together using rx/tx links.

These various types of server programs are explained in more detail in individual sections

later in this chapter.

The types of servers available to you are:

• Action servers – general-purpose servers that move, duplicate, remove, or replace

stories added to or edited in certain queues

• Distribution servers – distribute stories to different queues, based on each story’s

distribution code

• Parallel wire servers – allow you to have a wire distribution backup in case you have

problems with one of the Data Receivers.

• Keyword servers – perform keyword searches on stories added to or modified in the

designated queues and then copy or move matching stories to a queue you specify

• System servers, including:

- Seek servers - perform searches

- Fast Text Search (FTS) servers - perform fast text searches and index stories in the

FTS database

- Mail servers - handle mail processing

• Monitor servers – check a show’s event requests for errors, create composite and event

lists, and send playlists to iNEWS Command or to an external playback system through

an iNEWS MOS Gateway.

Adding a Server Program to the System

The overall process of creating a server is the same for all server utility programs.

Adding a Server Program to the System

317

To add a server to iNEWS:

1. Check the configuration file (/site/config) and choose an available device number for the

server. Device numbers can range from 1 to 5000. Take note of existing device ranges in

your /site/config file. There might already be servers of the type you are adding. If

possible, add your new server to the end of the number range the existing servers use.

When setting number ranges, be sure to allow for expansion.

2. Add the server program to the configuration file on each iNEWS Server—such as server

A and server B—in your system.

cAlways back up the /site/config file before making any changes. See “Editing the

Configuration File” on page 252 for more information.

a. Select all iNEWS Servers.

b. Open and edit the configuration file, by typing (what appears in bold):

NRCS-A$ ed /site/config

1259

After you press Enter, the editor responds by displaying a numerical value

indicating the file size expressed as the number of characters, including spaces and

returns.

nThis procedure, which modifies the /site/config file uses ed, the line editor. If you do not know

how to use ed to modify lines in the file, please see “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655.

c. Add the server program’s device number to the servers line in the host section(s) of

the configuration file for the iNEWS Server on which the server program will run.

For instance:

servers 257 258 259

260

The device number 260 is added to the servers line in this example.

d. Add a configuration line for the server program. This line should contain the

mailbox number assigned to the server program, when necessary.

nDivide your server programs evenly among your iNEWS Servers to distribute the load they

put on your system. Additionally, ensure that you modify the servers line for alternate host

definitions for your iNEWS Servers to include the server program’s device number. This

ensures the server program can run on the surviving computer should one of your iNEWS

Servers stop functioning. See “Configuration File” on page 249 for more information.

The format for server programs’ configuration lines are:

server <device #> <type> <mailbox> <device name>

13 Servers

318

The following are sample configuration lines for various server programs:

Comments appearing after the semicolons (;) are optional.

e. When you finish making changes to the configuration file, save your changes and

exit the line editor by typing what appears in bold:

1279

Parameter Description

device # The device number assigned to the server program. This number must also be

listed in the servers line in a host definition.

type The type of server program, such as action, distribution, keyword, seek,

monitor, mailserver, ftsseek, and ftsindex.

mailbox The mailbox the server program uses. Valid standard mailbox numbers are 1

through 5000. This number typically matches the server program’s device

number. See “Types of Mailboxes” on page 326 for more information.

device name To give the server (utility program) a device name, enter that name here (up to

8 characters). If not, enter a hyphen.

server 201 mailserver 201 - ;mailserver

server 211 keyword 211 keyword ;keyword svr

server 231 seek 231 - ;seek server

server 241 ftsindex 241 - ;fts indexing

server 242 ftsseek 242 - ;fts searches

server 251 action 251 - ;action svr

server 251 action - - ;timed-action svr

server 271 monitor 271 - ;morning show

server 281 rxnet - -

server 291 txnet 291 -

Adding a Server Program to the System

319

Do not use an uppercase (W) in this step. When you press Enter, the editor responds

by displaying a numerical value indicating the file size, which should be identical

on all servers. See “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655 for more information.

nInformation pertaining to steps 3, 4, 5, and 6 vary depending on the type of server program.

These steps are described in more detail in individual sections for each server program later

in this chapter.

3. Create a job list queue in the System directory of the iNEWS database. See “Creating a

New Queue” on page 104 for more information. The name and location of the job list

queue in the System directory varies, depending on the type of server program.

4. Create a job list story with defined tasks.

nCheck your job list before you save the story. When you start the server, it checks for syntax

errors in time intervals, but does not catch errors such as misspelled queue names. You must

make sure everything is correct.

5. (Optional) Additional queues and stories may be required for some utility programs,

such as distribution and parallel servers. See individual sections for each server program

later in this chapter for more information.

6. Assign mailboxes to queues, if necessary. The queue’s mailbox number should match

the server program’s mailbox number, which appears in its configuration line in the

/site/config file.

7. (Optional) Test your configuration changes. See “Testing the Site Configuration File

After Alteration” on page 253 for more information.

8. Reconfigure the system. See “Incorporating Configuration Changes” on page 253 for

more information. When adding server programs, you do not need to stop anything to

reconfigure the system.

9. Start the server program using the following command format:

restart <device #>

For instance:

NRCS-A$

restart 271

10. (Optional) Back up site files.

13 Servers

320

Job Lists: Queues, Stories, and Commands

A server program, such as an action or distribution server, requires a job list queue to hold its

job list story. A job list story is a set of instructions telling the server program what you want

it to do. Each action, distribution, parallel, and keyword server must have its own job list

queue in the SYSTEM.CONFIGURE directory. The job list story must be the first story in

the appropriate queue. Also, the job list queue name must start with the server’s device

number.

For instance, an action server with device number 257 would have a job list queue named

257 in the Configure folder of the System directory. The full pathname would be:

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.257. You may want to add a description of the server’s function as

part of its queue’s name. Do this by using a hyphen, such as:

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.257-DUP-TO-ARCHIVE.

Further examples are provided in procedures for adding various server programs in their

corresponding sections later in this chapter. A complete list of job list commands is provided

in “Job List Commands” on page 527.

Types of Tasks for Servers

The job list story outlines tasks the server program is instructed to execute. There are two

types of tasks: mailbox tasks or timed-interval tasks. Most servers execute mailbox tasks,

while action servers and tx links can perform either timed-interval tasks or mailbox tasks.

Both tasks must have a scan line identifying the queue with which the task is associated. You

cannot specify a directory in an attempt to have the server process all sub-directories and

queues. See “Adding a Scan Line in a Job List Story” on page 321 for more information.

Follow this scan line with job list commands you want the server to execute if stories have

been added to or modified in the task’s scan queue. These commands are the task’s

command set. See “A Server’s Command Set” on page 323 for more information.

Mailbox tasks are activities the server program is prompted to do whenever something

happens to a queue or its contents. Timed-interval tasks are activities an action server or tx

link is instructed to do at certain times.

The server program is inactive and said to be “asleep” until it is “awakened” to execute a job

list, either when scheduled to (a timed-interval task) or when stories are added to or changed

in a queue (mailbox task).

The difference between the two tasks is that a timed-interval task begins at specified time

intervals and a mailbox task does not. Also, timed-interval tasks are only associated with

action servers and tx links, while mailbox tasks are used by other utility programs.

Job Lists: Queues, Stories, and Commands

321

The sequence of actions taken by an action server is shown in the following diagram.

Adding a Scan Line in a Job List Story

Both mailbox and timed-interval tasks must have a scan line identifying the queue you want

associated with the task. The server can perform commands in the task’s command set on

any new or modified stories in this queue.

nIt is also possible and even common to have the server perform tasks on all stories in a

queue without regard to their modified status; an example of this is a server that performs

auto-archiving tasks.

A scan line must begin with the word scan followed by the full pathname of a queue you

want the task to watch.

Its location in the story depends on the type of task. In a mailbox task, the scan line is the

first line in the task. See “Mailbox Tasks” on page 325 for more information. In a

timed-interval task, the scan line follows the time interval commands. See “Timed-Interval

Tasks” on page 329 for more information.

13 Servers

322

To add a scan line:

1. Open the job list story.

2. Enter the scan line in the appropriate task using the following format:

scan <queue name> [all | priority | everyentry]

nA normal scan reads stories in its scan queue in chronological order, with the oldest first. To

reverse this order, use bscan instead of scan. Apart from this distinction, scan and bscan

operate identically. Use bscan for long queues. By default a scan only processes modified

stories, which are stories added to or edited in the queue. The everyentry option causes

different behavior.

If a server’s job list tells it to scan more than one queue, each scan only processes 10

stories at a time from a queue before going on to the next queue, unless the queue is

designated as a priority queue or the all option is used. The all option overrides the 10

entry limit and will cause all entries in the queue to be processed before the server

moves on to the next scan set. The all option differs from the priority queue because the

scan queue does not preempt other scan sets and there is no limit to the number of scan

sets with the all option specified.

Defining a Priority Queue

You can set up a scan queue as a priority queue for processing new stories. This means that

the 10-story limit for scan does not apply to that queue; all qualifying entries in the queue

are processed before the server moves on to the next queue. If the priority queue has no

stories to process, the system will scan each of the queues in normal order, returning to the

priority queue between each queue to check for new stories.

To designate a scan queue as a priority queue:

tAdd priority to the scan line after the queue’s pathname.

For instance, type:

scan SHOW.SCRIPTS.AM priority

Defining an Every Entry Queue

The everyentry option forces the server to process each entry in a queue, not just modified

entries.

To designate a scan queue as an every entry queue:

tAdd everyentry (one word) to the scan line after the queue’s pathname.

For instance:

scan SHOW.SCRIPTS.AM everyentry

Job Lists: Queues, Stories, and Commands

323

A Server’s Command Set

Follow a task’s scan line with a command set containing the commands you want the server

to perform on qualifying stories in the queue.

Many servers have unique job list commands only they can use. However, almost every

server can use the following five commands: dup, replace, move, remove, and number. Each

command and its format are explained in this section, starting with dup.

nA complete list of job list commands is provided in “Job List Commands” on page 527. Also,

see “Ordered Queues and the Order Command” on page 325.

The format for dup is:

dup <destination queue name> [distribution code]

This dup command copies stories in the scan queue to a queue you specify, optionally

including a distribution code. It must be followed by the name of a queue into which you

want the server program to duplicate stories.

nWhen a server, such as an action server, duplicates a story, it replaces any old version of the

story in the destination queue with the updated version only when the update database trait

is applied to the destination queue. When dup’ing, moving, or replacing a deleted queue

entry, server programs will not issue notifications; however, an environment variable

(DELETE-NOTIFY) may be used to change this behavior.

The format for replace is:

replace <destination queue name>

Updates a story in the destination queue only if the original is changed in the scan queue; it

does not duplicate new stories from the scan queue into the destination queue. The original

story must already exist in the destination queue. Also, the destination queue must have the

update database trait.

The format for move is:

move <destination queue name> [distribution code]

The move command moves stories from the scan queue to a queue you specify, optionally

adding a distribution code to them. It must be followed by the name of a queue into which

you want the server to move stories and be the last instruction in a command set.

nFor dup, replace, and move, the destination queue name may be formatted using the strftime

syntax to create names based on the current date and time. Use

man strftime

on the

console to get a description. The queue will be automatically created if it doesn’t exist as

long as the beginning of the path already exists.

The format for remove is:

remove

13 Servers

324

The remove command deletes the story from a scan queue. It does not send stories to the

Dead queue but deletes them immediately. It must be the last instruction in a command set.

nDo not include both the remove and move command in a single scan set. The server program

cannot do anything else to the story once it executes either one of these commands. Only one

of these commands can appear in each command set.

Here is an example of a command set that has an action server duplicate new or modified

stories in SHOW.SCRIPTS.AM to BACKUP.MORNING-SCRIPTS and then remove them

from SHOW.SCRIPTS.AM:

The format for number is:

number <field name> <length> <error queue name>

Places a unique number in a specified name of each scanned story when the story is moved

or duplicated to a new location. The command should include the field name in which the

number is placed, the length in digits of the number (from 1 to 5), and the name of an error

queue where stories can be placed if the number cannot be inserted in their forms.

nThe error queue name may be formatted using the strftime syntax and will be automatically

created if it doesn’t exist.

Depending on how many digits you specify, the story number can range as high as 65535, at

which point it resets and starts over at 1. The number is also reset to 1 each day at midnight.

Specifying fewer digits results in the number rolling over at 9, 99, 999, or 9999. The number

is reset at startup. The version of the story with the number in it does not replace the original

story in the scan queue.

The numbered story is used for all operations in the command set that follow the number

command. So, if dup comes before number in the command set, the story duped is the story

from the source queue. If move or dup comes after number in the command set, the

numbered story is used for the move/dup.

Processing Deleted Stories

Ordinarily, servers process stories deleted from their scan queues. This counts as a

modification.

Job Lists: Queues, Stories, and Commands

325

To override this function so that the server takes no action when a story is deleted:

tInclude the ignore-del command in the job list, preceding any scan lines you want to

ignore deleted stories.

To switch back to the default handling of deleted stories later in the job list:

tInclude the send-del command at that point.

Ordered Queues and the Order Command

Action servers and tx links can order queues with the order command in the job list

command set. When dup, move, or replace commands are specified while the order option is

enforced, the destination queue will be ordered to mirror the scan queue. The order

command can be turned on or off. The format is:

order [yes | no]

The yes option turns on the order command and the no option turns it off. The order

command is reset (turned off) at the start of each new scan set within the job list story.

nThe order command cannot be placed between open and put commands, which are used by

tx links. Otherwise, it can appear anywhere within a scan set to control the ordering of

queues. Both open and put commands can appear between order yes and order no

commands.

Here is an example of the order command used in an action server’s job list story:

Mailbox Tasks

For a server program to respond immediately to changes in a queue, you must set up

mailbox tasks, by assigning the same mailbox number to the server and queue you want it to

watch. Otherwise, the server will not know when changes are made to the queue.

13 Servers

326

As long as no stories are added to or changed in that queue, the server is inactive or “asleep.”

However, when a story is modified in or added, the system wakes the server by notifying it

through the mailbox. On notification, the server program checks its job list for mailbox

tasks. For each mailbox task, it searches each scan queue to find modified stories and then

executes the instructions in it and goes back to sleep.

A server places some additional load on your system when it wakes and executes a task.

With mailbox tasks, you have no control over when the server wakes up. Use this kind of

task only when the server must act as soon as a story is added to or modified in a particular

queue.

In cases where the action can wait until a time when system use is light, use timed-interval

tasks as explained in “Timed-Interval Tasks” on page 329.

All mailbox tasks must precede any timed-interval tasks in a job list. If a queue identified in

a timed-interval task has the server’s mailbox assigned to it, the server is awakened when

changes are made to the queue but the queue is not scanned. That queue is scanned only at

the designated time. The server scans all mailbox task lists whenever it wakes up.

Types of Mailboxes

The server program and the queue it watches must share the same mailbox. There are two

kinds of mailboxes: reserved and standard.

• Reserved mailboxes are used with special server programs reserved for system

functions. See “Reserved Mailboxes” on page 327 for more information.

• Standard mailboxes are used by server programs you can configure, such as action

servers. There are 5000 standard mailboxes available, numbered 1 through 5000. When

you create a server, choose a mailbox number that is the same as the server’s device

number.

nThese mailboxes are not related to your system’s electronic mail feature, but are activation

mechanisms or “signal carriers” by which servers are notified to perform predefined tasks.

When the system detects that a story has been modified in or added to a queue, such as

PHONELISTS.PEOPLE, it checks to see if a mailbox is assigned to the queue. If so, it

notifies any utility program sharing that mailbox a change has occurred in the queue. That

message causes the utility program (in this case, an action server) to perform the task you

have assigned to it, such as duplicate information from PHONELISTS.PEOPLE to

PHONELISTS.ALL.

Job Lists: Queues, Stories, and Commands

327

Several queues can be linked to a single server just by sharing the same mailbox number as

the server program.

The following is an example of how the mailbox tasks would appear in the job list for the

action server.

Mailboxes are not limited to action servers, but can apply to other utility programs, such as

distribution, parallel, or keyword servers. For instance, the WIRES.ALL queue can be

assigned the same mailbox number as a distribution server, or you could set up a

WIRES.AP-SEARCH queue in Wires with the same mailbox number as the keyword server.

The mailbox is an activation mechanism for a server program, so if a queue has a mailbox

number matching a server program, then that server is the one activated or “awakened”

whenever something happens to the queue.

Reserved Mailboxes

Reserved mailboxes are used only with servers reserved for your system to use. Each of

these mailboxes links a specific system queue or directory to the server that watches that

queue. Each queue that needs a reserved mailbox was assigned the correct one when your

system was installed. The information presented here is intended to help you understand

13 Servers

328

how your system uses these reserved mailboxes. Unlike standard mailboxes, reserved

mailboxes are referred to by name, not by number. The name and purpose of each of the

reserved mailboxes appears in the following table.

Assigning a Mailbox to a Queue

You must assign a standard mailbox for a server to associated queues in order to set up that

particular server.

To assign a mailbox to a queue:

1. Choose an available mailbox number (1 through 5000). This number should match the

server’s mailbox number. Also you must ensure no other device is using the chosen

mailbox number by using the list c command at the console.

For instance, type:

list mailbox=2001 c

Information similar to the following appears:

DEV DEVICE_TYPE COMPUTER NOTIFY OPTIONS DEVNAME

Mailbox Purpose

All Assigned to a queue used by your system to notify all users when an event

occurs. The All mailbox should be assigned to the queue where urgent wire

stories are sent.

Distribution Assigned to the queue containing your system’s distribution story for wires

(usually SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION). This mailbox is used by the

server program, known as the distribution checker, which distributes

incoming wire stories to the appropriate destinations.

Group Assigned to the system’s group queue (SYSTEM.GROUPS). This mailbox is

used by the server program, known as the group checker, which checks your

system’s group description stories for errors.

Keyboard Assigned to the directory that contains your system’s keyboard stories

(usually SYSTEM.KEYBOARDS). It’s assigned to the directory so that any

queues created under it inherit the trait. This mailbox is used by the server

program, known as keyboard checker, which checks your system’s keyboard

description stories for errors.

Keyword Assigned to the queue with your system’s keyword stories (usually

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS). This mailbox is used by the server

program, known as the keyword checker, which checks your system’s

keyword stories for errors.

Job Lists: Queues, Stories, and Commands

329

If you see the device configuration header with no information below it (as shown), then

no device has that mailbox, and you can use that number. However, if configuration

information for a device appears below the header, that device has the same mailbox as

the one you chose. Therefore, choose another mailbox number.

nMultiple queues can share the same mailbox number. To list all queues and directories in the

database with a certain mailbox, use this format of the list d command:

list mail=<mailbox number> d

2. Log in to iNEWS Workstation as a system administrator or use the database manager

3. Assign the mailbox database trait to the queue.

Mailboxes are assigned to queues in the same way other database traits are—using the

Queue Properties dialog box. See “Changing Database Traits” on page 136, “Database

Traits Summary” on page 122, and “Maintain Tab” on page 130 for more information.

Timed-Interval Tasks

Timed-interval tasks allow you to specify what time you want an action to take place. For

instance, you may want an action server to watch a queue but not do anything until a certain

time. Alternately, you may want an action server to monitor a queue and wait until everyone

is done using that queue before performing some action. Timed-interval tasks are also used

with rundown mirroring. See “Configuring Rundown Mirroring” on page 340 for more

information.

In addition to action servers, timed-interval tasks are also associated with tx links. However,

this type of task is not used by other server programs, like distribution and parallel servers.

Unlike a mailbox task, a timed-interval task acts like an alarm clock and wakes the server at

a time you specify. On waking, the server examines the queues associated with that

timed-interval task. If there are any new or modified stories in these queues, the server

executes the commands in the tasks.

nAll mailbox tasks must precede any timed-interval tasks in a job list. If a queue identified in

a timed-interval task has the server’s mailbox assigned to it, the server is awakened when

changes are made to the queue but the queue is not scanned. That queue is scanned only at

the designated time. The server scans all mailbox task lists whenever it wakes up.

For instance, you may create a timed-interval task that wakes the server at 3 a.m. to look for

scripts added to or modified in the SCRIPTS.TODAY queue in the last 24 hours. If the

server finds any, you could instruct it to move them to SCRIPTS.HOLDING.

13 Servers

330

When you create a timed-interval task, you must begin it with the time interval in which you

want it to execute by using one or more of the following job list commands:

You can combine these commands to create very specific time intervals. For instance, a

timed-interval task created to execute at 10 a.m. every weekday would begin with the

following time interval:

at 10:00

on mon tue wed thu fri

Example of Timed Interval Tasks

Here is an example of how an action server’s job list uses timed-interval tasks to move old

scripts out of each show’s script queue after the show has aired:

• Separate timed-interval tasks for each show wakes the server 15 minutes after the show

has aired. Because the three shows are not aired on weekends, the timed-interval tasks

wake the server only on weekdays.

• The morning show ends at 8 a.m., so the first timed-interval task could wake the server

at 8:15 a.m. and move the scripts in SHOW.MORNING.SCRIPTS to

SCRIPTS.TEMP-ARCHIVE.

• The noon show ends at 1 p.m., so the second timed-interval task could move the scripts

in SHOW.NOON.SCRIPTS to SCRIPTS.TEMP-ARCHIVE at 1:15 p.m.

• The evening show ends at 6 p.m., so the third timed-interval task could move the scripts

in SHOW.EVENING.SCRIPTS to SCRIPTS.TEMP-ARCHIVE at 6:15 p.m.

Job List Command Description

at <hh:mm>

Sets the time of day when you want the task to wake up the server. Set the

time in hours and minutes using a 24-hour clock where 12 a.m.

(midnight) is 00:00 and 12 p.m. (noon) is 12:00.

For instance, at 3:30 wakes the server at 3:30 in the morning. If the time

is after midnight but before noon, you do not have to put a 0 in front of

the hour.

every <D.HH>

Specifies an interval (the number of days and hours in D.HH format) that

you want the task to follow when waking the server.

For instance, every 0.12 wakes the server every 12 hours.

on <day> [<day>...]

Names the day or days on which you want the task to wake up the server.

For instance, on mon tue wakes the server on Monday and Tuesday only.

nNames of the days of the week are defined in /site/dict/words.

Job Lists: Queues, Stories, and Commands

331

Each timed-interval task must begin with a time interval indicating when you want it to wake

the server. This is followed by a scan line identifying the queue you want the server to

examine on that day and time. Finally, the scan line is followed by one or more tasks to be

performed on stories in that queue at that time.

You can have multiple command sets controlled by a single timed-interval. In this example,

the finished tasks look like this:

13 Servers

332

Action Servers

An action server is a general-purpose utility program that automatically performs specified

routine tasks, such as moving or copying stories added to or edited in certain queues,

according to a job list you define. One action server can perform multiple tasks not

necessarily related to each other. Here are some examples:

• Example: You want an action server to update a phone list. You have organized several

queues as phone lists: PHONELISTS.AGENCIES, PHONELISTS.COURTS,

PHONELISTS.STAFF, PHONELISTS.SPORTS, and PHONELISTS.PEOPLE.

Additionally, you have created another queue as a master phone list, PHONES.ALL,

that holds all numbers in the individual source phone queues. What you want the action

server to do is have PHONES.ALL updated whenever anyone adds or changes a number

in one of the source phone queues.

• Example: You also want the action server to make a daily archive of all the scripts used

in your morning, noon, and evening news shows. After each show, you want to move

scripts in that show’s script queue to the queue SCRIPTS.ARCHIVE-TEMP. At the end

of the day, you want to move everything in this queue to an archive queue named

SCRIPTS.MAY.01 on May 1, SCRIPTS.MAY.02 on May 2, and so forth. You want the

action server to automatically perform all of these activities for you, rather than having

to do them manually.

• Example: You want to replicate data from a primary queue to a backup queue, including

any story additions, deletions, modifications, and reordering, on the same system or

through a tx link to another system’s iNEWS Server or to an external third-party FTP

server.

In the first bulleted example, mailbox tasks are required to achieve the desired results. The

server shares the same mailbox of the queue(s). See a visual representation of how an action

server uses mailbox tasks to maintain a master phone list in “Mailbox Tasks” on page 325.

In the second example, timed-interval tasks are needed. See “Example of Timed Interval

Tasks” on page 330 for another example of an action server using timed-interval tasks to

archive scripts. A timed-interval action server operates on a queue at specified times without

requiring a shared mailbox.

In the final example, polling is required for the rundown mirroring process. See “Rundown

Mirroring” on page 339 for more information.

Action Servers

333

Adding an Action Server

Action servers can perform multiple or single tasks. They can be time-related or respond to a

system change. In this section, we will outline a procedure where we will create an action

server that performs the following activities:

• Update the master phone list as soon as anyone makes a change to any of the source

phone lists.

• Move each show’s scripts to SCRIPTS.ARCHIVE-TEMP at the end of the show.

To add an action server to your system:

1. Choose a device number and mailbox number for the server which will also be used for

associated queues. In this procedure, 256 is used as the example.

2. Add the server (utility program) to the configuration file on each iNEWS Server—such

as servers A and B—in your system.

For instance:

server 256 action 256 - ;action server

Details for this step are provided in “Adding a Server Program to the System” on page

316.

3. Create a job list queue in the Configure folder of the System directory in the iNEWS

database. The queue’s name, such as 256, is the number selected earlier.

For instance, the full pathname is SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.256.

nSince the action server has a number of tasks, you can end the name with a hyphen and a

descriptive word, such as “general.” The pathname would then look like:

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.256-GENERAL. See “Creating a New Queue” on page 104 for

more information.

4. Create a job list story with tasks for the server.

a. Open the job list queue, such as SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.256.

b. Create a new story, the first in the job list queue, to hold the action server’s job list.

See “Creating a New Story” on page 111 for more information.

c. Add tasks you want the server to perform; mailbox tasks first, followed by

timed-interval tasks. Ensure each task in the job list story has a scan line identifying

a queue to scan, followed by job list commands the server should execute.

See “Job Lists: Queues, Stories, and Commands” on page 320 and “Job List

Commands” on page 527 for more information on tasks and job list commands.

13 Servers

334

Here is a job list story with mailbox tasks:

Here is a job list story with timed-interval tasks added:

nYou can have one server watch many different queues by putting a separate task for each

queue in the server’s job list. You can have one server perform several tasks or have

separate servers perform each task, depending on the task. The number of jobs—a job is a

scan plus the actions for that scan—for a mailbox activated server should be as small as

possible because a change in a single queue could cause the server to do a lot of work; when

activated it will scan all queues in the job list, excluding timed actions.

Ideally each queue should have a server, but because of system resource limitations, this

organization is rarely possible. Group queues according to the rate they are generally

updated (rarely, moderately, or frequently) and assign servers to the groups.

Action Servers

335

5. Assign mailbox database traits to the appropriate queues, using the number matching

the mailbox assigned earlier to the server in the configuration file.

a. Open the Queue Properties dialog box for a scan queue, such as

PHONELIST.AGENCIES. See “Changing Database Traits” on page 136 for more

information.

b. Click on the Maintain tab. See “Maintain Tab” on page 130 for more information.

c. Select the Standard radio button.

d. Type in the mailbox number, such as 256.

e. Click OK to save changes.

6. Test your configuration changes. See “Testing the Site Configuration File After

Alteration” on page 253 for more information.

7. Reconfigure the system. See “Incorporating Configuration Changes” on page 253 for

more information. When adding server programs, you do not need to stop anything to

reconfigure the system.

8. Start the server program using the following command format:

restart <device #>

For instance:

NRCS-A$

restart 256

9. (Optional) Back up site files.

Field Validation

Validation is an option for use with action servers and tx links. With it, you can provide an

action server or tx link with a list of acceptable values for certain fields. When the action

server or tx link processes a story, it checks the contents of these fields to make sure each

contains an entry you have defined as acceptable for that field. See “Adding Rx/Tx Links”

on page 410 for more information.

If all fields you want checked contain acceptable entries, the server or tx link continues to

process the story according to the command set for the task it is executing. However, if one

of the fields you want checked contains an invalid entry, the action server or tx link puts the

story in an error queue and ignores the remaining commands in the task.

Possible Uses of Validation

Validation can help users attach accurate distribution codes to stories before sending them to

a distribution server. See “Distribution Servers” on page 344 for more information. Part of

its function is to combine entries in each field it checks into a distribution code. If all fields

contain acceptable values, it attaches that code to the story. You can have the action server or

tx link use a move or dup command to overwrite this code with another one.

See “Distribution Codes” on page 345 for more information.

13 Servers

336

This way, a user can put a code the user wants to attach to a story in one of the story’s fields.

The user can send the story to an action server or tx link that is set up to check that field. If

the field contains a valid distribution code, the action server or tx link attaches that code to

the story and sends the story to a distribution server. Otherwise, it sends the story to an error

queue and notifies the user of the error.

You can also use validation to allow people to enter different parts of a distribution code in

different fields. If the action server or tx link determines that these fields contain acceptable

values, it combines the contents of the fields into a distribution code, which it attaches to the

story before sending it to a distribution server.

Though validation was designed primarily to help create accurate distribution codes, you can

use it anywhere you need to have an action server or tx link verify the contents of one or

more of a story’s fields before processing the story. For instance, you could use validation to

have an action server check the created by and modified by fields in each story it processes

to ensure that it accepts only stories created or modified by certain users.

It could also be used to rid the rundown of unwanted pages before archiving by searching for

a specific string in a field and removing any stories with that string. Any stories the producer

did not want or need to archive could be coded with that string and later stripped from the

rundown by a timed-interval action server using validation.

Using Field Validation

You can use validation with an action server or a tx link. Adding validation to either uses the

same process.

For example, set up the tx link to send stories marked with a distribution code indicating

whether they are news or sports stories and whether they are intended for television or radio.

First, create a form writers can use to mark stories as either news or sports stories and

indicate whether they are intended for television or radio.

The writer indicates whether the story is for television or radio by selecting from a

drop-down list or typing either tv or radio in the TV/RADIO field. Likewise, the writer

indicates whether the story is a news or sports story by typing either news or sports in the

NEWS/SPORTS field.

Set up the tx link to check each of these fields. If it determines both contain valid entries, it

combines the contents of these fields into a distribution code. Then it attaches that code to

the story and sends the story to the affiliate.

To use the validation feature with a server:

tCreate a validation story containing instructions you want the server to use for

validation. This story can be in any queue, such as SYSTEM.VALIDATION.

Action Servers

337

The validation story consists of one or more verification instructions. Each verification

instruction identifies a field you want the server to check and specifies a list of values

that field is allowed to contain. The format for a verification instruction is:

verify <field name> <length> [ignore]

a. Begin each verification instruction with the word

verify

followed by the name of

the field you want to check. For instance, put

title

here to check a TITLE field.

b. Specify the number of characters you want to check in that field. For instance, to

check three characters, type

. The server compares only the first three characters

that appear in that field against the list of acceptable values for the field.

This number also controls how many characters in a field are used in the

distribution code. If you specify three, only the first three characters in the field are

used. The server converts any space characters (trailing or embedded) to hyphens so

that it can add them to the distribution code.

c. (Optional) Use the ignore validation story in an instruction to indicate whether—if

the field is validated—the server should skip validation of the other fields and build

the distribution code as if all fields contained acceptable values. If a preceding field

failed validation, the story will be considered invalid.

If the field fails verification, the server moves to the next field to be verified and

does not consider the story to be invalid. You can use ignore only once in a

validation story.

d. List the values you allow for the field. The value list must start on the line following

the verify command.

If you list more than one value, separate them with spaces. List as many values on

as many lines as necessary. Include plus and minus characters to indicate ways in

which you want the field to be checked.

- A plus sign (+) means the field can be blank.

- A minus sign (-) means the field can be any value except blank.

- A plus and minus sign (+ -) used together means that any value is acceptable for

the field. This is not the same as using the ignore option on that field.

nFor clarity, provide more characters for each item in the list of acceptable values for a

certain form than you have specified in the verify line. The server ignores the extra

characters. You can list possible values along with the + - option, which tells the server to

accept anything in that field as valid. Any values you list in addition are superfluous, but

harmless.

13 Servers

338

Validation Job List Commands

An action server or tx link has a job list containing a separate task for each queue you want it

to watch. If you want an action server or a tx link to validate fields, you must put the

appropriate validation commands in each task of the job list where you want it to check the

fields.

The validate command must appear after the task’s scan command Any commands

preceding the validate command are processed before the validate command; therefore,

those commands are not dependent on the outcome of the validation. Two commands, ignore

and quiet, alter the behavior of the validate command. If present, they must precede the

validate command to affect it.

quiet no

ignore yes

validate <validation queue name> <error queue name>

These job list commands are described as follows:

Job List Commands Description

quiet no

An action server or tx link that validates fields

displays a message only if it encounters a field

that does not contain an acceptable value.

Otherwise, it processes the story. If you include

the quiet no validation instruction in the task, the

action server or tx link also displays a message

indicating success whenever it successfully

validates a story.

ignore yes

Occasionally, you may want to create a task that

builds distribution codes from the contents of

certain fields, but does not validate those fields.

Include the ignore yes validation instruction in

the task. Then, the action server or tx link accepts

whatever appears in the fields you have it check.

Action Servers

339

Rundown Mirroring

Rundown mirroring takes what’s written in a primary queue and copies it to a backup queue

like a one-way mirror. All production activities—conducted only in the primary

queue—including story additions, deletions, modifications, and reordering are replicated to

the backup queue by a timed-interval action server configured for polling. Rundown

mirroring is also available for tx links.

nConducting production activities directly into the backup queue is not supported and may

cause undesirable behavior. Avid suggests assigning a restricted write group, such as

“nobody-writes” to all designated backup queues. This write group restriction will not

prevent the timed action server from completing its polling and replicating tasks.

Here are some additional guidelines for mirroring rundowns:

validate <validation queue name> <error

queue name>

Include this instruction in the task for the action

server or tx link to validate fields when it executes

the task. This instruction must begin with the

word

validate

followed by the queue containing

the validation story that you want the server to

use with that task. Then, list the error queue

where you want the action server or tx link to

place stories that it cannot validate.

If you use either

ignore yes

quiet no

, they

must precede this instruction.

nThe <

error queue name

> is subject to

strftime

formatting.

Job List Commands (Continued) Description

Feature Primary Rundown Backup Rundown

Story and queue forms Same as backup Same as primary

Mailbox number Different than backup Different than primary

nRundown mirroring allows for two monitor servers to load data from identical rundowns to

separate iNEWS Command Servers, possibly controlling separate video servers. For this to

work, each rundown is linked to a separate monitor servers through different mailbox

numbers.

13 Servers

340

Polling Commands for Action Servers/Tx Links

Two job list commands, poll and bpoll, allow iNEWS to poll a local source queue for a

specified duration of time at specified intervals. The source queue is scanned at every

interval and stories with modified times greater than the time of the last scan are processed.

Polling stops when the system time is greater than the time of the initial poll plus the polling

duration. The poll command scans the queue in a forward direction, while bpoll scans the

queue in a reverse direction. The syntax for both commands is as follows:

poll/bpoll <queue name> [<polling interval> [<polling duration>]]

If the polling interval and/or polling duration are omitted, a single scan of the queue will be

done. The syntax for the polling interval and polling duration is hh:mm:ss, mm:ss, or ss. For

the hh value, the range is 0 to 23. For the values of mm and ss, the range is 0 to 59. Both

commands are restricted to a timed action set. They are not available as mailbox triggered

actions.

Configuring Rundown Mirroring

The configuration procedure for rundown mirroring involves steps conducted at the console

and at an iNEWS Workstation.

Purge interval May have a zero purge interval

to allow producers to manually

delete the previous day’s

contents.

Must have a purge interval that

ensures the previous day’s

contents are purged prior to

production and rundown

mirroring the next day.

Update trait Not enabled Must have the update trait

enabled.

Feature (Continued) Primary Rundown Backup Rundown

Action Servers

341

To configure rundown mirroring:

1. Determine what action servers are configured on your system and are available to be

used for rundown mirroring. At the console, you can use the grep command to pull out

all the lines from the /site/config file that have the word "action" in them:

NRCS-A# grep action /site/config

server 244 action 244 - ;

server 245 action 245 - ;

server 251 action - - ; timed-action

server 252 action - - ; timed-action

server 253 action - - ; timed-action

In the example above, five action servers are outlined in the configuration file. Those

numbered 251 - 253 have no mailbox assigned to them, having a dash in the fourth

column. Normally action servers are linked via a shared mailbox number to a queue. But

that is not necessary for timed-interval action servers. For the purposes of this

procedure, 252 will be used.

nAn alternative to the grep command is to type:

list c action

2. Create a job list queue for the timed-action server in the SYSTEM.CONFIGURE

directory. Its name must start with the number of the server. You can add a hyphen, then

a descriptive name. For instance, any of the following would be valid queue names for

an action server numbered 252.

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.252-ACTION

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.252-MIRRORING

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.252-10PM-NIGHTCAST-MIRROR

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.252-TIMED-ACTION

Action server 252 will look for its job list in the queue you create. The job list is a

listing of commands the action server will perform. See “Creating a New Queue” on

page 103 for more information.

3. Create a new story in the queue, if one does not exist, and start writing the job list. Here

is a sample job list for action server 252:

at 20:30

poll SHOW.10PM-NIGHTCAST.RUNDOWN 00:00:05 3:30:00

order yes

dup SHOW-MIRROR.10PM-NIGHTCAST.RUNDOWN

13 Servers

342

nTimed-interval action servers work off the iNEWS Server's clock. All times must be listed in

24 hour time. So, 20:30 in the above example instructs the action server to begin at 8:30

PM.

The sample action server is instructed to poll the Nightcast rundown queue once every 5

seconds (00:00:05) for a total of three and a half hours (3:30:00) before automatically

turning off at midnight (20:30 start time + 3:30:00 duration).

You may use the bpoll command instead of poll to instruct the action server to begin the

scan at the opposite end of the queue, in which case the second command line of the job

list would appear as follows:

bpoll SHOW.10PM-NIGHTCAST.RUNDOWN 00:00:05 3:30:00

The order yes command ensures that re-ordering events in the polled queue get

transmitted to the backup queue. Without this, the timed-interval action server would

not pick up any reordering of the rundown by the producer. The primary rundown queue

and the backup rundown queue would have the same stories, but they would not be in

the same order after the sequence of stories was changed in the primary rundown. See

“Ordered Queues and the Order Command” on page 325 for more information.

nThe order yes command is only relevant when polling to or from an iNEWS Server. It is not

possible to "order" stories mirrored through a tx link to an external, third party FTP server.

Overlapping Job Lists

Each joblist in a SYSTEM.CONFIGURE queue can have more than one polling instruction

servicing more than one rundown. For example, the job list for timed-interval action server

252 might look like this:

at 09:30

poll SHOW.NOON.RUNDOWN 00:00:05 3:30:00

order yes

dup SHOW-MIRROR.NOON.RUNDOWN

;

at 15:30

poll SHOW.6PM.RUNDOWN 00:00:05 3:30:00

order yes

dup SHOW-MIRROR.6PM.RUNDOWN

;

at 20:30

poll SHOW.10PM-NIGHTCAST.RUNDOWN 00:00:05 3:30:00

order yes

dup SHOW.10PM-NIGHTCAST.RUNDOWN

Action Servers

343

The only restriction is that none of the polling actions in a job list for a single timed-interval

action server can overlap. Since the Noon show begins at 09:30 and runs for three and a half

hours, polling won't be done until 1 PM (or 13:00). So another show cannot be scheduled to

start in this job list until after 1 PM.

If an overlap in polling is necessary, separate job lists for separate timed-interval action

servers are required.

Polling Issues Related to Tx Links

Rundown mirroring may be used to poll rundown queues in an iNEWS system and replicate

the data to another system’s iNEWS Server or to a third-party FTP server. The guidelines for

mirroring still apply, such as overlapping job list restrictions, purge intervals, and update

traits. The following are examples of job lists for rundown mirroring through a tx link:

at 15:55

poll SHOW.4PM.RUNDOWN 00:00:05 1:00:00

open myftpserver user3 html system.webforms.s.scripts

put /shows/4pm

The above example would begin polling the SHOW.4PM.RUNDOWN at 3:55 PM, at

five-minute intervals for one hour, then open a connection to an external FTP server using

the name, user3, and place stories in the /shows/4pm folder in HTML format based on the

HTML skeleton outlined in the SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.S.SCRIPTS queue. See “Web

Publishing” on page 430 for more information.

nFTP servers do not order stories, so the

order yes

command line is not valid. Also, the

username in the job list (user3, in the above example) must exist as an account in the iNEWS

database and on the external FTP server. It must have the same password on both systems,

and have proper permissions on the FTP server to create and overwrite files. If the user

account is only used for outbound tx links, it may be blacklisted on the iNEWS Server to

prevent it being used for actual logins.

at 15:55

poll SHOW.4PM.RUNDOWN 00:00:05 2:00:00

order yes

open AVID-A transmituser nsml

put SHOWS.MADISON.4PM.RUNDOWN

nNews Story Markup Language (NSML) is the default format for transmitting to iNEWS

Servers, so the nsml on the open command line is optional. Also, the pathname for the put

command line uses periods (.) when transmitting between iNEWS systems, unlike the slashes

(/) used when transferring to an FTP server.

13 Servers

344

Distribution Servers

A distribution server is used to route stories based on their distribution codes. Distribution

codes are text strings of up to 32 characters which you can assign to your stories. A

distribution code longer than 32 characters is truncated to 32 characters before being

assigned to the story. When you assign a distribution code to a story, you overwrite any

distribution code that story may already have.

Distribution servers are usually used by large stations or networks who write their own wire

stories and send them to their affiliates. By attaching distribution codes to these stories, their

affiliates can distribute the stories to appropriate queues.

Distribution servers can also monitor a queue. When a new story is added to a queue, the

distribution server will move the story to another queue based on the distribution code and

instructions you assign.

Also, distribution instructions in a distribution story can use the same always, silent, urgent,

flash, and bulletin options that wire service distribution instructions use. These options must

appear at the end of the distribution instruction if you use them.

nA distribution server is different from an action server in that it will always remove each

story from the source queue after distributing it. An action server depends on the move and

remove commands.

Distribution Servers

345

Distribution Codes

You can create a distribution instruction that matches more than one distribution code by

using a wildcard, which is a special character—a pound sign (#) in this case—that matches

any character.

For instance, the following distribution instruction tells the distribution server to match all

code that begin with “tv” and send the story to INEWSWIRE.TVNEWS:

tv# inewswire.tvnews

When the wildcard character is placed at the end of the pattern, the distribution server

interprets it as an instruction to match all remaining characters. If it occurs anywhere else in

the pattern, the distribution server matches only characters that occur in that position.

•

tv#

– matches anything that begins with tv

•

AP#a

– matches any code that begins with AP and contains the letter a in the fourth

position.

When the distribution server is trying to match a story’s code to an instruction line, it stops at

the first matching line. It then looks at the next line to see if it matches as well. If it does, it

looks at the next line. Once it sees a line which does not match, it stops looking and

distributes the wire to the destinations named on the matching lines.

Suppose you have the following two instructions, and the distribution server is trying to

match a story with distribution code tvsports.

tv# inewswire.all

tvsports inewswire.tvsports

The distribution server matches the first instruction that contains the pattern tv#, and then it

looks at the next line to see if it also contains the pattern tv#. In this case, there is no such

line, so it sends the story to INEWSWIRE.ALL and not to INEWSWIRE.TVSPORTS.

If you use just a wildcard character as a distribution code, that instruction should come at the

end of the job list story. You would do this to create an instruction for all stories with

distribution codes that do not match any other distribution instructions. After the server

matches a wildcard only, it stops looking for additional matches for the story.

Wildcards and the Destination Queue

You can also use a wildcard as a part of a distribution instruction’s destination queue.

Whenever the distribution server uses that instruction line, it replaces the wildcard with the

distribution code attached to the story it is processing.

13 Servers

346

For instance, suppose that your distribution story has the following instruction line:

tvnews inewswire.#

In this case, whenever it processes a story with the distribution code tvnews, it uses this line.

In doing so, it uses the story’s distribution code in place of the wildcard in the destination

queue and distributes stories with the distribution code tvnews to INEWSWIRE.TVNEWS.

This is most useful when you also use a wildcard in the instruction’s distribution code. You

can create an instruction that handles stories with several different distribution codes.

For instance, suppose you want your distribution server to send stories with the distribution

code tvnews to INEWSWIRE.TVNEWS and stories with the distribution code tvsports to

INEWSWIRE.TVSPORTS. You can do this with a single instruction if you use a wildcard in

the instruction’s distribution code and destination queue:

tv# inewswire.#

This instruction causes the server to copy each story with the distribution code tvnews to

INEWSWIRE.TVNEWS. Likewise, it causes the distribution server to copy each story with

the distribution code tvsports to INEWSWIRE.TVSPORTS.

nIf you try this, ensure that what gets substituted into the wildcard portion of the destination

queue forms the pathname of an existing queue. Otherwise, the server cannot copy stories to

that queue and sends them to SYSTEM.UNKNOWN, or the default error queue you named. If

the queue does not exist, it will be created. If any directory in the path does not exist, it will

not be created, and the stories will be placed in SYSTEM. UNKNOWN.

Move and Dup Commands

When moving or dup’ing stories from a session on an iNEWS Workstation, you can use the

move and dup commands to attach a distribution code to a story. If people on your system

use these commands frequently to attach distribution codes to stories, publish the codes you

want them to use.

Action Servers or Tx Links

You can attach distribution codes to stories that you send to a distribution server using an

action server or a tx link. There are two ways to use action servers and tx links to do this.

• Dup or Move commands

• Validate commands

nTx links are explained in “Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links” on page 407.

Distribution Servers

347

Dup or Move Commands in Job Lists

You can use the move and dup commands in action server and tx link job lists to attach

distribution codes to the stories those servers process. For instance, the following job list

shows how you may have an action server attach a distribution code to any story added to

TVNEWS.OUT:

scan tvnews.out

dup inewswire.send tvnews

The job list tells the server to attach the code tvnews to each story it handles and then copy

the story to INEWSWIRE.SEND.

Use this method to automatically assign a particular distribution code to every story added to

a particular queue. If you need more flexibility in how the server assigns codes, see

“Distribution Codes” on page 345.

Validate Commands in Job Lists

Action servers and tx links support a feature called validation. This feature allows you to

have an action server or tx link extract a distribution code from a story’s form and check

whether it is a valid code. If the code is valid, the server attaches it to the story and sends the

story to the distribution server. If the code is invalid, the server puts the story in an error

queue and notifies the user. Validation is covered in more detail in “Field Validation” on

page 335.

Instructions in the Wire Distribution Story

A wire program relies on instructions in the wire distribution story to determine what to do

with each story it receives. This allows the wire program to use each story’s wire service

code to determine where to send the story.

Each wire program can have no more than 150 distribution instructions. If you need to

handle more than 150 codes from a particular wire service, you can use a distribution server

to get around this limit.

Add special distribution instructions to the wire distribution story. These instructions cause

the wire program to look for stories with the wire service codes you want the distribution

server to handle. The wire program assigns each story a distribution code matching its wire

service code and sends it to the distribution server’s source queue.

13 Servers

348

Those instructions should match the following format. They should begin with a wire

service code that you want the distribution server to handle. Follow the code with the

distribution server’s source queue. You must follow the destination queue with the

TRANSMIT option:

<wire service code> <destination queue name> TRANSMIT

When a story comes in with that wire service code, the wire program gives the story a

distribution code that matches its wire service code. Then the wire program sends the story

to the destination queue specified in the instruction.

You can use options such as ALWAYS, SILENT, and URGENT with the TRANSMIT

option. A distribution instruction that assigns stories distribution codes matching their wire

service codes does not have to send those stories directly to a distribution server. The

instruction can send them to an intermediate queue and then an action server can send them

to the distribution server.

Matching and Case

When using two or more distribution instructions that begin with the same code, you must

enter the codes in the same case. If you do not, the distribution server does not execute all

the instructions when it receives a story with that distribution code.

When a distribution server processes a story, it begins by checking whether the first

instruction in its distribution story matches the story’s distribution code. If not, the server

checks the second instruction, and then the third, and so on, until it finds one that matches

the story’s distribution code.

When it finds a match, it sends the story to the queue specified in that instruction. Then the

distribution server does a case-sensitive search on the remaining instructions in the

distribution story to see whether any use exactly the same distribution code (that is, the same

code entered in the same case) as the instruction that it has matched. If any instructions

match, the server sends the story to the queues specified in those instructions as well.

For instance, if a distribution server successfully matches an instruction with a distribution

code of tvnews, it looks for other instructions that also begin with tvnews and sends the story

to the queues specified in those instructions. It ignores instructions that have that code in a

different case, such as TvNews or TVnews.

Matching and Order

The order of instructions is important, especially when you have a distribution code that also

forms the beginning of another distribution code, such as

and

tvnews

. In this case, you

need to make sure that instructions that use the longer code appear before those that use the

shorter code.

Distribution Servers

349

When the distribution server attempts to match an instruction’s code to a story’s distribution

code, it considers that it has a match if the instruction’s code matches some initial portion of

the story’s distribution code. For instance, the distribution server would match an instruction

for code

to a story with distribution code

tvnews

After the distribution server has matched an instruction code to the story, it stops trying to

match additional instructions to the story. Instead, it looks for other instructions that have the

same code as the instruction code that it has matched. It never matches the instructions with

the longer codes.

If you had a distribution story with the following instructions in the order shown below, and

if you were to send a story with distribution code

tvnews

to this distribution server, the

distribution server would match the first instruction in the distribution story but would never

execute the second:

tv newswire.tv

tvnews newswire.tvnews

In this example, the server always matches the first instruction to any story that has a

distribution code that begins with

. Then it looks for other instructions that have

their code. It never executes the instruction that has the code

tvnews

. Always arrange such

instructions so that those with longer codes come before those with shorter codes. That way,

only stories with the distribution code

tvnews

(or longer) match the first line. Stories with

the code

fall through the first line and match the instruction in the second line.

13 Servers

350

Adding a Distribution Server

Additional details for the first two steps in the following procedure are provided in “Adding

a Server Program to the System” on page 316.

To set up a distribution server to watch a queue and distribute stories placed in a

queue:

1. Choose a device and mailbox number for the server that will also be used for associated

queues.

2. Add the server (utility program) to the configuration file on each iNEWS Server—such

as servers A and B—in your system.

For instance:

server 257 distribution 257 - ;distribution server

3. Create a job list queue in the Configure folder of the System directory in the iNEWS

database. The queue’s name, such as 257, is the same as the device and mailbox number

selected earlier. For instance, the queue’s full pathname is SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.257.

You can also end the name with a hyphen and a descriptive word, such as distribution, in

which case the queue’s full pathname would then look like this:

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.257-DISTRIBUTION.

4. Create a job list story for the server, by doing the following:

a. Open the job list queue, such as SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.257.

b. Create a new story, the first in the job list queue, to hold the distribution server’s job

list. See “Creating a New Story” on page 111 for more information.

5. Add tasks that you want the distribution server to perform; include a separate task for

each queue the server watches.

Each task in the job list story consists of two lines with the following format:

source <queue scanned by server>

distribution <distribution queue> [<error queue>]

Command Description

source

Identifies which queue the distribution server should scan. This job list

command is the same as the scan command, used by action servers. The

queue is known as both the scan queue and source queue.

distribution

Specifies the queue containing the distribution story and, optionally, an error

queue for stories whose distribution codes cannot be processed.

nIf you do not specify an error queue, the distribution server sends any such stories to

SYSTEM.UNKNOWN.

Distribution Servers

351

For instance, the job list story may appear like this:

source newswire.in

distribution system.distribution.257 newswire.error

nUnlike action servers where the scan queue identifier (scan line), tasks, and commands

(instructions) are located altogether in the job list story, a distribution server separates the

instructions (except for the distribution command), placing them in another queue and story,

called the distribution queue and distribution story, respectively. The distribution queue is

typically given the same numerical name as its corresponding job list queue and should be

located in a directory, typically called SYSTEM.DISTRIBUTION.

6. Create the distribution queue and story, by doing the following:

a. Navigate to SYSTEM.DISTRIBUTION. (If this directory does not exist, create it.

See “Creating a New Directory” on page 102 for more information.)

b. Create a new queue, giving it the same numerical name as the job list queue for the

distribution server, such as 257. The full pathname for the new queue would be

SYSTEM.DISTRIBUTION.257. See “Creating a New Queue” on page 104 for

more information.

c. Open the new queue and create the distribution story.

Each instruction in the distribution story is one line long and has the following

format:

<distribution code> <destination queue> [<options>]

For instance, suppose we know that some stories sent to our distribution server have

tvnews

as their distribution code and others have tvsports. We want the distribution

server to send stories with the

tvnews

code to INEWSWIRE.TVNEWS and those

with

tvsports

to INEWSWIRE.TVSPORTS.

In this case, you would type the following two instructions in the distribution story:

tvnews inewswire.tvnews

tvsports inewswire.tvsports

If you want to send stories that have a certain distribution code to more than one

queue, follow this example:

tvnews inewswire.news

tvnews inewswire.all

tvsports inewswire.sports

tvsports inewswire.all

The choices for the options parameter are: ALWAYS, BULLETIN, FLASH,

SILENT, and URGENT.

13 Servers

352

7. Assign mailbox database traits, using the number matching the mailbox number chosen

earlier in this procedure to the appropriate source queue(s)—the queue(s) to be scanned

by the server.

For instance, the job list queue is named 257, so that is the standard mailbox number

assigned to queues identified in the job list associated with the distribution server.

a. At an iNEWS Workstation, open the Queue Properties dialog box for a scan queue,

such as NEWSWIRE.IN.

b. Click on the Maintain tab.

c. Select the Standard radio button.

d. Type in the mailbox number, such as 257.

e. Click OK to save changes.

8. Repeat the previous step as needed for each source queue in the job list.

9. (Optional) Test your configuration changes. See “Testing the Site Configuration File

After Alteration” on page 253 for more information.

10. Reconfigure the system.

11. Start the distribution server.

When you see the

System being configured

message, select the iNEWS Server

where the distribution server is configured and start the distribution server. For instance,

to start a distribution server with device number 257, type:

restart 257

12. (Optional) Back up site files using sitedump command.

Parallel Wire Servers

353

Parallel Wire Servers

Another use for a distribution server is to help provide backup wire distribution in case the

usual wire distribution fails—if, for instance, the Data Receiver receiving the wire goes

down. This is accomplished by a distribution server working in tandem with a parallel wire

server.

A parallel wire server works as follows:

• The same wire service is received through two different wireservers, preferably from

two different Data Receivers sending to two different iNEWS Servers. One of these

wires uses the standard wire distribution feature, with a line added to distribute its wires

13 Servers

354

to the queue monitored by the parallel wire server. The second wire uses one line in the

distribution story, which routes its wire stories to the queue monitored by the parallel

wire server.

• The parallel wire server checks to make sure that each story received from the secondary

wire has a counterpart from the primary wire. If a secondary wire story cannot be

matched, it is passed on to a distribution server. No action is taken on unmatched

primary wire stories, since they were already distributed normally.

• If the primary wire fails, each secondary story your system receives lacks a

corresponding primary story, so the parallel wire server passes each one to a distribution

server. This server uses a distribution story nearly identical to the wire distribution story,

so stories are routed to the same queues as with standard wire distribution. Wire

reception thus appears normal to users.

Although using two wireservers for the same wire may seem like a waste of a device, this

redundancy can be a lifesaver in the long run. However, a parallel wire server is useful only

for problems within the system such as a computer problem. If the reception problem is in

phone lines,satellite antenna, or the wire service distribution box, receiving wire stories on

two wireservers does not help.

Database Components for Backup Wire Distribution

Only one set of parallel and distribution servers are necessary, even if you are providing

backup for up to ten wires. For backup wire distribution to work, distribution and parallel

servers require certain database components, which are:

• A pair of scan queues to hold incoming wire stories for comparison by the parallel

server—typically SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A1 and SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A2

• A queue where the parallel server forwards unmatched stories for the distribution server

to scan—typically SYSTEM.PARALLEL.WIRES

• A queue containing the wire distribution story for the distribution server, should it need

to take over wire distribution—typically SYSTEM.PARALLEL.DISTRIBUTION

• Queues containing job lists used by the parallel and distribution servers located in the

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE directory

Adding a Parallel Wire Server

A parallel wire server monitors two wire inputs of the same wire on different wireservers. If

the primary source fails, the system will obtain stories from the secondary. For your parallel

wire server to be truly redundant, each wire of the parallel server must be connected to an

independent source of the incoming service.

Here, we assume that your site requires continuous reception of the AP wire, so we set up

two wire inputs and a parallel wire server to receive stories from that wire service.

Parallel Wire Servers

355

Additional details for the first two steps in the following procedure are provided in “Adding

a Server Program to the System” on page 316.

To add a parallel wire server:

1. Choose a device and mailbox number for the server that will also be used for associated

queues.

2. Add the server (utility program) to the configuration file on each iNEWS Server—such

as servers A and B—in your system.

For instance:

server 258 parallel 258 - ;parallel server

However, additional editing of the configuration file (/site/config) is required for parallel

servers.

a. You must create a line for the new wireserver and modify the existing wireserver.

Change the device name AP to A1 to avoid name duplication:

wireserver 600 news A1 - ; primary wire from DR1

b. Add the secondary wire:

wireserver 601 news A2 - ; backup wire from DR2

c. When you finish making changes to the configuration file, save your changes and

exit the line editor by typing what appears in bold:

1795

Do not use an uppercase (W) in this step. When you press Enter, the editor responds

by displaying a numerical value indicating the file size, which should be identical

on all servers. See “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655 for more information.

nDo not reconfigure or restart the wire programs yet. They do not match the codes in

SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION, so all wires would be sent to WIRES.UNKNOWN.

3. Log in to an iNEWS Workstation. (You must create several queues and stories, as well

as modify some that might already exist.)

4. Create a folder (directory) called Parallel in the System directory. The full pathname for

this folder is SYSTEM.PARALLEL. See “Creating a New Directory” on page 102 for

more information.

5. In SYSTEM.PARALLEL, create four new queues, giving them the following names:

A1, A2, Wires, Distribution. The full pathnames for these queues will be:

- SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A1

- SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A2

13 Servers

356

- SYSTEM.PARALLEL.WIRES

- SYSTEM.PARALLEL.DISTRIBUTION

See “Database Components for Backup Wire Distribution” on page 354 for more

information on the purpose for each of these queues. Also, see “Creating a New Queue”

on page 104 for information on how to create a queue.

nWhen wires are being distributed normally, the parallel server immediately removes

matching stories from A1 and A2 queues. If the primary or secondary wire input stops

reaching the A1 or A2 queue, automatic removal of stories from either queue stops. If the

parallel server (or the iNEWS Server it is on) dies, both queues continue to fill up until you run out of

space. Finally, if the distribution server dies, SYSTEM.PARALLEL.WIRES fills up. To

prevent these problems, set a short purge interval (less than six hours) for these three

queues: A1, A2, and Wires. See “Database Purge Intervals and Limits” on page 139 for

more information.

6. Assign mailbox database traits to three of the new queues, according to the following

criteria:

- SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A1 – shares same mailbox number as parallel server, such

as 258

- SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A2 – shares same mailbox number as parallel server, such

as 258

- SYSTEM.PARALLEL.WIRES – shares same mailbox number as distribution

server, such as 257

Mailbox numbers must match the server’s mailbox number, as indicated in the

configuration file. Otherwise, changes in the queue will not activate the correct server

program.

a. Open the Queue Properties dialog box for a queue, such as

SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A1. See “Changing Database Traits” on page 136 for more

information.

b. Click on the Maintain tab. See “Maintain Tab” on page 130 for more information.

c. Select the Standard radio button.

d. Type in the mailbox number, such as

258

e. Click OK to save changes.

f. Repeat above substeps until queues have assigned mailboxes.

7. Create the parallel server’s job list queue in the SYSTEM.CONFIGURE directory in the

iNEWS database. The queue’s name, such as 258, is the number selected earlier in this

procedure for the parallel server. The queue’s full pathname is

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.258.

Parallel Wire Servers

357

nYou can also end the name with a hyphen and descriptive word, such as “parallel,” in which

case the queue’s full pathname would then be: SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.258-PARALLEL.

8. Create a job list story with tasks for the parallel server.

a. Open the job list queue, such as SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.258.

b. Create a new story—the first in the job list queue—to hold the parallel server’s job

list. See “Creating a New Story” on page 111 for more information.

c. Add tasks that you want the parallel server to perform. Each task in the job list story

consists of three lines, in the following format:

local <queue scanned by server>

remote <queue scanned by server>

distribution <destination queue>

nThe commands, local and remote, do not describe actual queue locations; both queues are

on the same system.

For instance, the job list story may appear like this:

Command Description

local Identifies which queue contains wire stories forwarded to the parallel server

through normal wire distribution. This job list command is similar to the scan

command, used by action servers. The parallel server will scan the local

queue and compare its contents to those in the remote queue.

remote Identifies which queue contains the wire stories received from the secondary

Data Receiver. This job list command is similar to the scan command, used

by action servers. The parallel server will scan the remote queue and compare

its contents to those in the local queue.

distribution Specifies the destination queue where the parallel server forwards unmatched

stories from the remote queue—the source queue scanned by the distribution

server.

13 Servers

358

nIf the distribution server has not been set up, you must create it as well as its job list queue

and story. See “Adding a Distribution Server” on page 350 for more information.

9. Modify the distribution server’s job list story.

For instance, go to SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.257-DISTRIBUTION and add the

following lines to its job list story:

source system.parallel.wires

distribution system.parallel.distribution

10. Since you want the distribution server to distribute stories in the same way as standard

wire distribution, copy the system’s wire distribution story (in

SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION) to the SYSTEM.PARALLEL.DISTRIBUTION

queue.

nYour system’s wire distribution queue and story were included when your system was

installed.

a. Open the first story in SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION.

b. Select Edit > Copy To.

c. Enter SYSTEM.PARALLEL.DISTRIBUTION, the destination queue.

11. Back up the original wire distribution story in the SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION

queue by making a copy of the story in that queue.

12. Return to SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION to make the following modifications:

a. Modify the bottom story (Leave the top copy unchanged, for now) so your system’s

wire distribution sends a copy of every incoming wire story to the two queues

scanned by the parallel server (SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A1 and

SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A2) as specified in the parallel server’s job list story. To do

this, add two lines (as shown) below the line that sends a copy of each wire story to

WIRES.ALL. It should look like this:

AP######## wires.all ALWAYS URGENT

A1######## system.parallel.a1 ALWAYS

A2######## system.parallel.a2 TRANSMIT

b. Modify every line in the wire distribution story that starts with AP, changing AP to

A1. This makes it possible to tell whether a given wire story came from standard

wire or parallel server distribution. When you are done, the three lines in the story

should look like this:

A1######## wires.all ALWAYS URGENT

A1######## system.parallel.a1 ALWAYS

A2######## system.parallel.a2 TRANSMIT

Parallel Wire Servers

359

nDo not change the last line’s A2 to A1. The A2 indicates the line that transmits stories to the

SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A2 queue.

c. Save the story.

d. Move the modified distribution story (at the bottom) to the top of the queue; this

will make it the primary wire distribution story.

13. Connect the secondary wire to the secondary Data Receiver.

14. Reconfigure the system.

15. Start the original wireserver and the parallel and distribution servers.

For instance, when you see the

System being configured

message, start the servers

with device numbers 257, 258 and stop wireserver 600 by typing what appears in bold:

NRCS-A$ restart 257 258 stop 600

NRCS-A$ stop 600

A message similar to the following will appear:

S258: Mon Jun 28 08:22:13 2010 matching system.parallel.a2

The message is from the parallel server and appears when it is started,indicating the

server is alive and comparing the standard wire reception with wire stories routed to the

A2 queue.

If primary reception fails, the parallel server gives the following message when it wakes

up the distribution server:

S258: Mon Jun 28 08:22:13 2010 distributing system.parallel.a2

This message is the only way to tell when the parallel server is forwarding secondary

wire stories for distribution. You can tell if these stories are being distributed by A2

instead of A1 by checking the wiredistribution codes in the stories.

nThere might not be any indication if secondary wire distribution fails. Check the local queue

(SYSTEM.PARALLEL.A1) occasionally to see if it is accumulating stories. If so, this would

indicate a problem with reception of the secondary wire.

If there is a problem with something other than the primary Data Receiver—for

instance, if the wire fails in the phone or satellite connection—the redundancy provided

by the parallel wire server cannot provide continuous wire service reception.

13 Servers

360

Keyword Servers

A keyword server is a utility program that searches stories it processes for specific

keywords. It distributes copies of each story to different queues, based on which keywords

the story contains. Unlike wire programs, which are limited to searches that contain no more

than 250 unique keywords, a keyword server can perform searches that contain as many as

1000 unique keywords.

When you install a keyword server, it runs on one of your system’s iNEWS Servers. While

this lets the keyword server handle long lists of search rules, it also means the keyword

server may affect your system’s performance.

Suppose we have set up a wire program to perform keyword searching on stories it receives

from the Associated Press (AP). Wire programs can only use 250 unique keywords in

searches they perform.

To get around this limitation, a keyword server can be created to help the wire program,

which still searches each story it receives using its own search rules. However, it also sends a

copy of each story it receives to the keyword server, which in turn searches each copy using

its own search rules. This effectively increases the number of unique keywords allowed to

1250: 1000 for the keyword server and 250 for the wire program.

An instruction is required in the wire distribution story that has the wire program duplicate a

copy of each story it receives to a queue, which the keyword server watches. Some

modification of the wire program’s keyword job list queue

(SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS) will also be required.

Database Components for Expanded Wire Keyword Searches

For expanded wire keyword searches to work, the keyword server requires certain database

components. These components are:

• A queue containing job list used by the keyword server. It must be located in the

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE directory.

• A source queue to hold incoming wire stories for scanning by the keyword server—such

as WIRES.AP-SEARCH.

• A queue—typically named SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS—containing the search job

list story. This queue is used by the system’s standard wire searching feature; therefore,

it should already exist in your database.

• Queues containing stories with search rule sets of keywords and destination queue

names. The maximum number of search rule queues are 20 per keyword server.

Keyword Servers

361

• Destination queues where the keyword server forwards stories/search results.

• A queue containing the wire distribution story—typically named

SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION. This queue is used by the system’s standard wire

distributing feature; therefore, it should already exist in your database.

Here is a sample workflow diagram for a keyword server:

Adding a Keyword Server

Additional details for the first two steps and the last four steps in the following procedure are

provided in “Adding a Server Program to the System” on page 316.

13 Servers

362

To add a keyword server:

1. Choose a device and mailbox number for the keyword server which will also be used for

associated queues. A device name should also be chosen, such as key1; it will be needed

for the next step in the procedure.

2. Add the server program (server line) to the configuration file on each iNEWS

Server—such as servers A and B—in your system.

nIn addition to adding the keyword server to the standard host definition of the iNEWS Server

on which you want it to run, ensure you also add it to each alternate host definition.

A keyword server’s device name, such as key1, is used in the search job list; ensure that you

always include a device name when adding a keyword server to the system. For instance, the

configuration line might appear like this:

server 211 keyword 211 key1 ;keyword svr

3. Create a job list queue in the Configure folder of the System directory in the iNEWS

database. The queue’s name, such as 211, is the same as the device and mailbox number

selected earlier. For instance, the queue’s full pathname is SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.211.

nYou should end the name with a hyphen and descriptive word, such as “key1.” The

queue’s full pathname would then look like: SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.211-KEY1. See

“Creating a New Queue” on page 103 for more information. In this example, the

keyword server’s device name is used as the descriptive word for the job list queue

name. The device name is an important factor of later steps in this procedure.

4. Create the keyword server’s job list story in the database, by doing the following:

a. Open the job list queue, such as SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.211-KEY1.

b. Create a new story, the first in the job list queue, to hold the keyword server’s job

list.

c. Add tasks that you want the keyword server to perform; include a separate task for

each queue the server watches. Each task in the job list story consists of only one

line, with the following format:

source <queue scanned by server>

For instance, here is an example of a job list story for a keyword server that scans

WIRES.AP-SEARCH when it gets a wake-up notification:

Command Description

source

Identifies which queue the keyword server should scan. This queue is the

same queue to which the wire program will be instructed to send wire story

copies.

Keyword Servers

363

A single task is defined in the keyword server’s job list, with a commented line—a

line preceded with a semicolon (;)—offering further details about the keyword

server.

nWhen the keyword server processes a story, it deletes it from the source queue. You do not

need to clear old stories out of the keyword server’s source queue. It is recommended that

you hide the source queue from general user accounts, by assigning it a read group, such as

sysops.

5. Assign mailbox database traits, using the number matching the mailbox number chosen

earlier in this procedure, to the appropriate source queue(s)—the queue(s) to be scanned

by the server.

For instance, the job list queue is named 211, so that is the standard mailbox number

assigned to queues identified in the job list associated with the distribution server.

a. At an iNEWS Workstation, open the Queue Properties dialog box for a scan queue,

such as WIRES.AP-SEARCH.

b. Click on the Maintain tab.

c. Select the Standard radio button.

d. Type in the mailbox number, such as 211.

e. Click OK to save changes.

6. Repeat the previous step as needed for each source queue in the job list.

7. Create the queues and stories to hold search rule sets for the keyword server to use.

nEach keyword server can have 1-20 search rules queues, each with its own keyword story,

containing keywords. Each keyword story must be the first one in the queue, and contain a

number of keywords equal to 1000 divided by the number of search rule queues. For

instance, if four queues are set up for a keyword server, each queue’s keyword story can hold

13 Servers

364

up to 250 keywords. This evenly distributes the 1000 keywords allowed for keyword servers

across search rules queues and their stories. If 10 queues are set up, then each queue’s

keyword story can have up to 100 keywords.

a. In this sample procedure, two search rules queues are created in the

SYSTEM.WIRES directory. For instance, the queues’ full pathnames could be

SYSTEM.WIRES.KWDSERVER-1 and SYSTEM.WIRES.KWDSERVER-2.

b. In each queue, the first story is considered the keyword story, and contains the rule

set of keywords.

See “Setting Up Wire Keyword Searches” on page 303, “Keyword Limitations” on

page 306, and “Tips on Building Search Rules” on page 309 for more information.

The format each rule set must have is as follows:

destination <queue name>

[<search rule>]

. . .

cNever create a destination line that sends stories to a personal queue or any queue not

purged. If a program sends stories to such queues, it can lead to an out-of-space

condition.

Here is an example of what a keyword story and its rule set might look like:

destination wires.keywords.drugs

panama AND drugs

drugs NOT pharmacy OR (drugs AND smuggling)

Each search rule occupies a separate line in the rule set. Also, the number of

keywords allowed (1000 for keyword servers) is defined by the words, not the

number of lines. For instance, in the previous example, four keywords are

used—since you do not count each occurrence of a word (just the first), drugs is

only counted once.

Command Description

destination

Identifies the queue into which the keyword server will place the results of its

keyword search. The name and location of this queue is customizable.

Each search rule consists of one or more keywords you want a keyword

server (utility program) to use to locate stories on a particular topic.

Keyword Servers

365

nEach keyword in the story can have a maximum of 10 characters. To search on longer words,

only use the first 10 characters. More examples and detailed information on rule sets and

keyword searches are available in Chapter 12. See “Operating Wire Keyword Searches” on

page 394 for more information.

8. Add an entry to the first story in the search job list queue, typically named

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS.

a. Go to that queue and open the first story for editing.

b. Insert an entry for the keyword server into the job list, which must begin with *20,

followed by the keyword server’s device name. Use the same device name, which

was defined in the configuration file during an earlier step, and the queues with the

search rules, which were also created in a previous step of this procedure.

If you do not want the program to do any searching, that is all you need to put in the

entry. If you want the program to search for keywords, follow the device name with

one or more lines that list queues containing search rules you want the keyword

server to use.

For instance, the keyword server has key1 as its device name and should use search

rules in queues: SYSTEM.WIRES.KWDSERVER1 and

SYSTEM.WIRES.KWDSERVER2.

Here is an example of how the story might appear:

nAn optional destination prefix may also be included with the indirect list entries:

*20 <device name> [<destination prefix>]

If provided, the prefix is prepended to the destination queue of the destination line of the

search rule.

13 Servers

366

9. Modify the wire distribution story, which is the first story in

SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION. For the keyword server to search stories sent by

the AP wire service, the wire program must duplicate a copy of each story it receives to

the keyword server’s source queue. For this to happen, the wire distribution story must

be modified. So, open the story and add the new instruction on a single line, using the

following format:

<dev name><wire code> <distribution queue> [<options>]

nThere must be no spaces between the device name and the wire service code. The

[<options>] should also be on the same line, separated from the distribution queue by a

space.

10. (Optional) Test your configuration changes.

11. Reconfigure the system.

12. Start the keyword server.

When you see the

System being configured

message, select the iNEWS Server

where the keyword server is configured and start the keyword server. For instance, type:

NRCS-A$ restart 211

13. (Optional) Back up site files using sitedump command.

Code Description

For instance, the wire program’s device name is AP. If you want this

instruction to match all wire stories regardless of their wire service code,

use

########

as the code, because it matches any code. See

“Distribution Name” on page 298 for more information.

The distribution queue is where you want stories with the specified code

to be duplicated, such as WIRES.AP-SEARCH.

[<options>]

Finally, you can end the line with any of the following options:

ALWAYS, SILENT, URGENT, FLASH, BULLETIN, or TRANSMIT.

For instance, end the instruction with the ALWAYS option to ensure that

every wire the AP wire program processes is duplicated to the keyword

server’s source queue.

The finished instruction looks like:

AP######## wires.ap-search ALWAYS

nSee the table in“Notification Priority” on page 299 for more information on these options.

System Servers

367

System Servers

Utility programs called system servers are usually included on your system at installation.

You cannot customize them; therefore, they are described here in a limited way.

System servers include:

•Seek servers

• Fast Text Search (FTS) servers (Search and Index)

• Mail servers

The information in the following sections should be enough for you to maintain and use

these servers, or add them if necessary.

Seek Servers

Seek servers allow users to search for text in the background, while users continue with

other program activities, such as script writing. A seek server must be installed on your

system.

The seek server program runs on the iNEWS Server, while you continue to work on your

client computer (iNEWS Workstation). The seek server works by scanning the iNEWS

database, story by story, going through the area you specified in the Find All dialog box. The

seek server then returns stories resulting from its search as stories are encountered in the

iNEWS database.

Seek search is used by anyone who uses iNEWS. The seek server can search any

non-indexed queue or folder in your iNEWS database. If your site does not have a Fast Text

Search (FTS) server, you will use the seek search exclusively.

Adding a Seek Server

This procedure involves editing the configuration file, which requires use of the line editor.

See “Adding a Server Program to the System” on page 316 and “The Line Editor, ed” on

page 655 for more information.

13 Servers

368

To set up the seek feature on your system:

1. Choose a device and mailbox number for the server program.

2. Add the server program’s information to the configuration file.

a. The seek server’s device number, such as 260, must appear in the servers line in the

host definition for the iNEWS Server, such as server B, on which it runs. The line

might appear as follows:

servers 257 258 259 260

nIn addition to adding the seek server to the standard host definition of the iNEWS Server on

which you want it to run, add it to each alternate host definition.

b. Next, create a configuration line for the seek server at the bottom of the

configuration file.

A seek server configuration line should look similar to this:

server 260 seek 260 - ;seek server

c. After adding information to the configuration file, save your changes.

3. Create the seek queue in the database.

The seek queue’s name is defined in the Q_SEEK token in the /site/dict/queues file.

Usually this name is SYSTEM.SEEK. Go to your System directory and see if this queue

exists. If it does not, create it. See “Creating a New Queue” on page 104 for more

information.

nThis queue must exist for the SEEK command to work. Ensure the write group restriction is

not applied so all users can use SEEK. See “Write Group” on page 172 for more

information.

4. Assign a form to the Seek queue, SYSTEM.SEEK.

A standard seek form was included with of your standard forms. The form is stored in

SYSTEM.FORMS.S.SEEK. See “Find All Form” on page 221 for more information.

For the SEEK command to use this form, assign it to the Seek queue using the Queue

Properties dialog box and its Form tab. See “Changing Database Traits” on page 136,

“Database Traits Summary” on page 122, and “Forms Tab” on page 123 for more

information.

5. Assign a mailbox to the Seek queue.

For the seek server to process a seek request placed in the Seek queue, your system must

notify the seek server that a new seek request has arrived there. So, the Seek queue’s

mailbox number must match the seek server’s mailbox number, as indicated in the

System Servers

369

configuration file. Otherwise, changes in the queue will not activate the correct server

program. Multiple seek servers can be configured. All seek servers should use the same

mailbox, which is 260 in our example.

a. At an iNEWS Workstation, open the Queue Properties dialog box for a queue, such

as SYSTEM.SEEK.

b. Click on the Maintain tab.

c. Select the Standard radio button.

d. Type in the mailbox number, such as 260.

e. Click OK to save changes.

6. (Optional) Test your configuration changes.

7. Reconfigure the system.

8. Start the seek server.

For instance, type:

NRCS-A$ restart 260

9. (Optional) Back up site files using sitedump command.

Fast Text Search Servers

There are two server (utility) programs related to Fast Text Search (FTS): the one that

performs fast text searches and the one that indexes stories in the FTS database. Both are

explained in this section.

FTS is an alternative to the seek feature. FTS allows fast, efficient searching through large

quantities of text material using indexes.

nWhile both seek and FTS searches operate in the background—that is, the user can continue

with other activities at the iNEWS Workstation while the system searches the iNEWS

database—FTS searches will be faster than seek searches.

Fast text searching involves two separate activities: indexing data and searching the index for

data. Different components are required for these separate activities to function.

13 Servers

370

The following figure shows the workflow iNEWS follows to create Index files of database

stories, which can be queried later.

In a fast text search, the FTS server gets copies of material from those queues and folders in

the iNEWS database marked with the Index icon (as shown in previous graphic). The system

administrator identifies which queues and folders the system should index. See “Batch

Indexing” on page 377 for more information. The material in those queues and folders is

fully indexed in the FTS server, so every word is added to an index file.

For each word, the index lists information about all stories where that word was

encountered. The index is updated each time a story is added, changed, or deleted in an

indexed queue. For instance, a story is added to WIRES.ALL. The system identifies that

queue as an indexed queue and prompts the ftsindex server program to forward copies of the

data to the FTS server for indexing.

nThe iNEWS system supports up to 50 separate index bases, 0-49. FTS handles the separation

of the bases, but an administrator must assign index bases to directory records that should

be placed in index bases other than 0 (zero), the default index base.

System Servers

371

The following figure shows the workflow for a user’s FTS request—the procedure iNEWS

Workstation follows to search Index files and respond with results (pointers to database

stories containing search criteria specified by the user).

In the above example, the user sends an FTS query to the iNEWS Server. The request is

received in SYSTEM.FTS, which notifies the ftsseek server program to conduct the search.

(This is accomplished because both the SYSTEM.FTS queue and the server program share

the same mailbox number.) The ftsseek server program contacts the FTS server, which

conducts a search of its Index files for data matching the user’s search criteria, and then

responds with pointers to those stories located in the iNEWS database. The ftsseek server

program forwards the FTS server’s results to the user at the iNEWS Workstation.

Fast text search acts much like an index in a book. In other words, the fast text search stores

references to where the information you search for is stored. For instance, if you were to

search for the word Bush, the FTS server will note that the word appears in story 1, 8, 12,

and 16. If you looked for the word Cheney, the FTS server will find the word in stories 2, 8,

and 12. If you look for stories containing Bush & Cheney, you can view stories that appear

in both lists (in this example, stories 8 and 12). This is faster than examining every story in

the queue to see which contain both words. Instead, the system does that for you, and you

benefit from the search.

13 Servers

372

If you invoke a background search (Find All or Find Global) for material in a folder or queue

marked with the Indexed icon, iNEWS sends your search request to the FTS server. The FTS

server will look up the words you specified in the index, and return a list of the resulting

stories to the iNEWS Workstation.

Not all queues can be searched with the fast text search, simply because it takes space and

effort to maintain an index. Therefore, system administrators will usually index only those

queues searched often. You can determine which queues are available for fast text searches

in three ways:

• In the Directory panel, the queue will display an Index icon as shown in the

WIRES.ALL queue below:

• In the Find All dialog box, you will see an Advanced tab.

• In the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box, the directory/queue will have the index

database trait selected.

Installing FTS Components on the Windows-based Server

FTS is an optional feature that requires certain configurations within the iNEWS system as

well as additional hardware and setup. For instance, FTS requires the set up of two utility

programs (ftsindex and ftsseek) on iNEWS Servers. Additionally, two executable files

(ftsidx.exe and ftssch.exe) must be installed and running on a Windows-based server. The

installation of these components are described here. For more information about the utility

programs on the iNEWS Servers, see “Setting up FTS Components on the iNEWS Servers (Linux)” on

page 374.

The Windows-based server running the two FTS executable programs (ftsidx.exe and

ftssch.exe) is known as the FTS server. This computer is not to be confused with the two

FTS utility programs (discussed in “Setting up FTS Components on the iNEWS Servers

(Linux)” on page 374) known as ftsindex and ftsseek servers.

nThe FTS server should be running a Windows-based operating system. For information on

the current operating system and service pack, contact Avid.

To install the executable files (FTS programs) required for FTS:

1. Insert the iNEWS DVD into the FTS server’s DVD ROM drive.

2. Navigate to the FTS folder on the DVD.

System Servers

373

3. Double-click on the setup program (setup.exe) and follow instructions as they appear on

screen.

4. The setup program will install several files, including ftsidx.exe and ftssch.exe. Make a

note of the directory (folder) where they are installed.

5. A batch file is used to start the FTS processes (executable files installed in the previous

step). The batch file is called go-fts.bat, and a shortcut is copied to the desktop.

The batch file contains two command lines in the code that you might need to modify

based on the ports used by FTS. The batch file is in the installation directory. To allow

editing of the bile, right-click on the file and select Properties from the context menu.

Then uncheck the Read-only attribute and click OK. To open the batch file for editing,

right-click on the file and select Edit from the context menu. Locate the two lines in the

code that look like this:

@cgi-fcgi -start -connect :6100 ftsidx.exe

@cgi-fcgi -start -connect :6101 ftssch.exe

The number 6100 corresponds to the Index

port

defined for W_BINDFTSI on the

iNEWS Server, and 6101 corresponds to the Search

port

defined for W_BINDFTSS

on the iNEWS Server. Ports 6100 and 6101 are defaults used by the FTS Index and

Search programs. The W_BINDFTSI and W_BINDFTSS tokens are defined in the

/site/dict/words file.

6. You must also create a directory (folder) on the FTS server that will be used by the

Index program to hold index files it makes. You can create the directory using Windows

Explorer.

a. Click Start.

b. Locate and select Windows Explorer in the Start menu.

c. Navigate to where you want the new directory to be and right-click.

d. Select New Folder from the context menu and name it, such as FTS.

For instance, the full pathname could be:

C:\FTS

nThe token W_INDEXBASE in the /site/dict/words file must be defined to reference the

directory created in this step. See “Setting up FTS Components on the iNEWS Servers

(Linux)” on page 374 for more information.

cThe MSDOS command console window, which is opened by the batch file, must not be

closed (although it may be minimized) after starting the ftsidx.exe and ftssch.exe

programs. Closing the window will cause the two programs to exit.

13 Servers

374

7. Place a copy of go-fts.bat in the Startup folder for All Users.

a. Right-click on the Start icon on the Windows taskbar.

b. Select Explore All Users.

c. Open up Start Menu, Programs, Startup and place the copy there. This will ensure

FTS starts whenever someone logs into the computer.

Setting up FTS Components on the iNEWS Servers (Linux)

The two utility programs used by FTS, known as ftsindex and ftsseek servers, must be set up

on iNEWS Servers—that is, computers running the Linux operation system and iNEWS

Server application, such as server A and server B.

To set up these utility programs, you may need to create some queues, such as

SYSTEM.INDEX and SYSTEM.FTS, if they do not already exist in the iNEWS database.

Also, some editing of files in the Site directory is required, particularly files in the /site/dict

directory. To edit files in /site/dict, you will use ed, the line editor.

The following table shows tokens defined in the Queues and Words dictionary files in

/site/dict. If the token name starts with a Q, the dictionary is in /site/dict/queues. If it begins

with a W, it is defined in /site/dict/words.

FTS Dictionaries Explanation

Q_INDEX queue Identifies the queue—typically SYSTEM.INDEX—that holds index requests

from various server programs. The ftsindex program reads index requests

from this queue, which is not visible on iNEWS Workstation.

Q_FTS queue Identifies the queue—typically SYSTEM.FTS—that holds indexed search

requests, much like SYSTEM.SEEK holds seek requests.

W_INDEXED The word— typically set to INDEXED— used in indexed search requests to

indicate that an indexed search is being requested. This type of search is

similar to “fast” and “slow” seek searches.

W_INDEXBASE Defines location of index files on the FTS server. Its format is

which is a directory that exists on the FTS server. That directory contains a

subdirectory for each index. The subdirectories have three-digit names with

leading zeros. For instance, with W_INDEXBASE defined as

/C:/FTS

, the

index base 0 would be in the directory

C:\FTS\000

and index base 32 would

C:\FTS\032

System Servers

375

To set up the ftsseek and ftsindex servers:

1. At an iNEWS Workstation, verify whether the Index and FTS queues exist in the

System directory. If SYSTEM.INDEX and SYSTEM.FTS do not exist, you must create

them.

2. At the console, add a definition for Q_INDEX to /site/dict/queues.

For example:

Q_INDEX /system.index

3. Add a definition for Q_FTS to /site/dict/queues.

For example:

Q_FTS /system.fts

4. Configure ftsindex and ftsseek server programs.

a. Choose device and mailbox numbers for each server program.

b. Edit /site/config , ensuring there is a server line for each server program.

For example:

server 261 ftsseek 261 - ;fts searches

server 262 ftsindex 262 - ;fts indexing

c. Assign mailbox numbers to the appropriate queues in the System directory. The

ftsseek server must be assigned the same mailbox that is assigned to SYSTEM.FTS.

For instance, assign 262 to the queue defined for Q_INDEX, such as:

SYSTEM.INDEX, and assign 261 to the queue defined for Q_FTS, such as:

SYSTEM.FTS. Further details for assigning mailbox numbers (database traits) to

queues are found in “Assigning a Mailbox to a Queue” on page 328. Also, see

“Changing Database Traits” on page 136 for more information.

W_BINDFTSI Identifies the binding address for the FTS server and its port, used for

indexing. The format is

. The

is the hostname

of the FTS server and

<port>

is the dedicated port number used for FTS

search indexing. The default is ftsserver:6100 where ftsserver should be

replaced with the FTS server name and 6100 should be replaced with the

number for the TCP port used by the ftsidx.exe program. If you alias the FTS

server as ftsserver in /etc/hosts and used port 6100, then no change is

necessary.

W_BINDFTSS Identifies the binding address for the FTS server and its port, used for

searching. The format is

. The

is the hostname

of the FTS server and

<port>

is the dedicated port number used for FTS text

searching. The default is ftsserver:6101 where ftsserver should be replaced

with the FTS server name and 6100 should be replaced with the number for

the TCP port used by the ftsindex.exe program. If you alias the FTS server as

ftsserver in /etc/hosts and used port 6101, then no change is necessary.

FTS Dictionaries Explanation

13 Servers

376

d. Assign a queue form and story form to queues defined for Q_INDEX and Q_FTS

(SYSTEM.INDEX and SYSTEM.FTS, respectively). The forms should be the same

queue and story forms assigned to the queue defined for Q_SEEK, such as

SYSTEM.SEEK. See “Assigning Forms to Queues” on page 390 for more

information.

5. Add a definition for W_INDEXED to /site/dicts/words. It should be set to INDEXED.

For example:

W_INDEXED /INDEXED

6. Add a definition for W_INDEXBASE to /site/dicts/words. Ensure the associated path

exists on the FTS server and has appropriate access privileges. It should be an absolute

path.

For example:

W_INDEXBASE /c:/FTS

7. Set the binding address for indexing by adding a definition for W_BINDFTSI to

/site/dict/words. Use the format:

For example:

W_BINDFTSI /dexy:6100

In the example, the FTS server has a hostname of “dexy.”

8. Set the binding address for searching by adding a definition for W_BINDFTSS to

/site/dict/words. Use the format:

For example:

W_BINDFTSS /dexy:6101

nYou must define separate port numbers for W_BINDFTSI (indexing) and W_BINDFTSS

(searching) on the FTS server.

9. (Optional) Assign index bases, using the dbtraits command in the following format:

dbtraits <dir> ftsindex <base>

Values for <base> can be any numerical value from 0-49. All directories default to index

base 0 (zero).

For example:

dbtraits wires ftsindex 1

dbtraits archive.2008 ftsindex 2

dbtraits archive.2009 ftsindex 3

nThe list d-i command displays at the console the index base used by a directory. When the

index base is changed, the directory is automatically removed from its current base and

added to the new one.

To start the ftsseek and ftsindex servers on the iNEWS Server:

tUse the restart console command in the following format:

restart <device number> <device number>

System Servers

377

For example: select the appropriate server at the console, and type:

restart 261 262

To stop the ftsseek and ftsindex servers on the iNEWS Server:

tUse the stop console command in the following format:

stop <device number> <device number>

For example, select the appropriate server at the console, and type:

stop 261 262

To stop the FTS programs on the FTS server from the console:

tType:

ftsdebug index shutdown

ftsdebug search shutdown

Batch Indexing

Batch indexing is a way for a system administrator to define queues that should be indexed

or de-indexed, and cause an update of the index base to incorporate the current state of the

queues’ stories in the index base.

nAn index base is the set of four index files on the FTS server. The iNEWS system can

maintain up to 50 index bases in the folder defined by the W_INDEXBASE token in

/site/dict/words.

Batch indexing can be performed at either the queue or directory level by applying the index

database trait. See “Changing Database Traits” on page 136 and “Database Traits Summary”

on page 122 for more information.

For instance, if you want to mark a queue as indexed and schedule an index base update, you

can apply the Indexed database trait to the queue using the Queue Properties dialog box.

13 Servers

378

This command marks the chosen queue as indexed and submits a request to update entries in

the index base for all stories in the queue.

When indexed, the queue will appear with the Indexed icon (shown at left) in the Directory

panel of the iNEWS Workspace.

Similarly, you can uncheck the Indexed check box in the Queue Properties dialog box if you

want to mark a queue as deindexed and schedule an index base update. This command marks

the chosen queue as not indexed and submits requests to remove all story entries for the

queue from the index base.

Directories (Folders)

Batch indexing can be applied to multiple queues in a directory. For instance, you can mark

all queues at every level under a directory (folder) as indexed and schedule an index base

update by applying the index database trait to the directory, using the Directory Properties

dialog box. Similarly, to mark all queues at all levels under a directory as deindexed and

schedule a de-index, uncheck the Indexed check box in the Directory Properties dialog box.

System Servers

379

The ‘Apply changes to all subdirectories and queues’ check box must be checked to have the

change propagated to all subdirectories and queues of the directory.

When indexed, the directory will appear with the Indexed icon (shown at left) in the

Directory panel of the iNEWS Workspace.

nThe database traits program will ignore requests to index or deindex the queues defined for

the dictionary entries Q_SEEK, Q_FTS, Q_INDEX, and Q_DEAD in /site/dict/queues.

Dynamic Indexing

Dynamic indexing is a function of the iNEWS Server that automatically triggers an index

change when a story is added, changed, moved, or deleted. If you set index database traits

for queues to be indexed, the iNEWS Server will automatically schedule updates to the

index base whenever a story in an indexed queue changes.

Archival and Backup

If you want to save the current state of an index base, you must copy the Index files to

another location and then archive/back up the files as you would normally do for a

Windows-based server system. (See Microsoft’s server documentation for details on backing

up and archiving files.)

nArchived index bases might be out of sync with the active iNEWS database.

Reindexing (Optional)

If an index base becomes unusable, you should reindex.

13 Servers

380

To reindex:

tAt the console, issue a dbtraits command with the reindex option for one or more folders

that might contain indexed queues. This will traverse the folder's hierarchy and schedule

index requests for each indexed queue found.

For instance, type:

dbtraits wires reindex

This will cause the system to revisit all queues anywhere under the Wires directory and

schedule indexed queues for indexing.

nThe ftsdebug command may be used to troubleshoot communication between the iNEWS

Servers and FTS programs, compare contents of indexes and indexed queues, etc. For more

information on this command, see the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Operations and

Troubleshooting Manual.

Mail Server

Your system provides a mail feature that allows users to send mail messages to other users.

To enable the mail feature, a utility program known as the mail server must be installed on

your system. Generally, this is done when your system is installed.

Disabling Mail to All Users

Ordinarily, a user can send mail to all, which sends a copy of the mail story to every user on

the system. If you want to disable this feature, include an alias for all in a story in

SYSTEM.GROUPS that maps the word all onto a nonexistent user name. The new alias may

look like this:

alias all

not-allowed

Because not-allowed is not a valid user on your system, anyone who tries to send mail to all

will get the error message:

Returned mail: User unknown

Network Mail

Your system has a hosts file that it uses to communicate with other devices on the network.

This file is found in /etc/hosts. Each iNEWS Server’s hosts file is like a directory that

includes the network addresses of all computers on the network. The iNEWS Servers use

that directory to find the address of other computers. See “Hosts File” on page 254 for more

information.

The typical format of a line in the hosts file lists the Internet address of a computer or other

network device, followed by its name.

Monitor Servers

381

For instance, here is an /etc/hosts file for a three-server system:

10.0.0.1 nrcs-a a

10.0.0.2 nrcs-b b

10.0.0.3 nrcs-c c

nSome sites may have DNS, not just a hosts file. E-mail servers will refuse e-mail from iNEWS

if it comes from a non-verifiable domain, such as nrcs-a, so to ensure everything works

correctly, check network settings at the site and on e-mail servers and put the iNEWS

Server’s FQDN as the first entry against its IP address in /etc/hosts.

Monitor Servers

Monitor servers are utility programs—running on the iNEWS newsroom computer

system—that check shows’ event requests for errors, create composite and event lists, and

send playlists to Command, ControlAir, or MOS Gateway.

A monitor server must be assigned device and mailbox numbers—typically, these numbers

are the same, which makes the configuration easier to remember. A device number is chosen

for a monitor server so iNEWS recognizes the server (utility) program as a valid device. The

device number must be entered in the system’s configuration file. The mailbox number must

be assigned to both the show’s monitor server and its rundown queue.

A mailbox is an activation mechanism for a server (utility) program, so if a queue has a

mailbox number matching a server program, then that server is the one activated or

“awakened” whenever something happens to the queue.

The mailbox enables iNEWS to notify the monitor server of changes made to a rundown

queue—the one sharing the same mailbox number—while that show is monitored. The

monitor server then updates composite and event lists, if necessary.

The monitor server is turned on when a user at an iNEWS Workstation turns it on. When on,

monitor server checks its assigned rundown for machine control events, and builds playlists.

It continues to monitor the rundown for changes and performs as much error checking as it

can—by comparing machine control events with styles located in the

SYSTEM.RESOURCE queue—without communicating with any broadcast equipment,

including Command. To learn more about styles and how monitor servers check for errors,

see “Creating Styles” on page 400.

The monitor server loads data to the Avid iNEWS Command system or the MOS Gateway

system when a user instructs it to do so from an iNEWS Workstation.

13 Servers

382

nIt is recommended that producers turn the monitor server on early so it can check the

rundown queue throughout much of the show’s development.

Monitor Servers

383

Checklist: Monitor Server Configuration

When configuring monitor servers, there are certain tasks that must be performed on the

iNEWS Servers at the console, and other tasks at an iNEWS Workstation. These tasks must

be completed to download playlists and updates to the playout system.

This section assumes:

• Your site has a fully functioning network.

• Your newsroom computer system servers are operational and running the iNEWS Server

software.

• All iNEWS Servers are connected to a console multiplexor, to which Avid technicians

have dial-in access.

• The person performing the installation has attended an iNEWS system administration

course or has equivalent experience. This includes having a working knowledge of ed,

the line editor and selecting servers at the console.

The following steps do not include setting up external devices, such as character generators,

which play broadcast events. Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation provided with the

device for that information. For more configuration details, other resources include: the Avid

iNEWS Command Installation and Configuration Guide as well as Device Manager Guides,

provided on the ControlAir installation CD.

Complete the following tasks in the order that they are listed. If you are viewing this

checklist online, you can easily link to a topic that provides procedural details for the task.

Return to this main checklist after you have completed each task.

Tasks Refer to...

Create a monitor server for each show. “Creating a Monitor Server for Each Show” on

page 384

Create composite and event list queues. “Creating Composite and Event List Queues” on

page 387

Set up queue and story forms. “Set up Queue and Story Forms” on page 390

Assign forms to queues. “Assigning Forms to Queues” on page 390

Create an entry in the SYSTEM.MAP

story.

“Creating an Entry in the SYSTEM.MAP Story”

on page 391

13 Servers

384

Creating a Monitor Server for Each Show

This section assumes rundown queues for the shows being monitored already exist. If not,

create them before continuing.

To create and configure a monitor server:

1. Check the configuration file (/site/config) and choose the next available device number

for the monitor server, from the range of numbers reserved for use by your system’s

server programs, such as 201 to 300.

2. Choose a mailbox number. Although valid standard mailbox numbers are 1 through

5000, for simplicity, this number is usually set to the same device number.

Remember, you must ensure no other device is using the chosen mailbox number by

using a variation of the list c command at the console.

For instance, to check whether a specific mailbox number, such as 267, is assigned to a

server program, type:

list mailbox=267 c

Information similar to the following appears:

DEV DEVICE_TYPE COMPUTER NOTIFY OPTIONS DEVNAME

If you see the device configuration header with no information below it (as shown), then

no device has that mailbox, and you can use that number. However, if configuration

information for a device appears below the header, that device has the same mailbox as

the one you chose. Therefore, choose another mailbox number.

nIf the mailbox number is already being used, and you must choose another, you might want

to try another device number for the monitor server as well. Typically, mailbox numbers

match utility program device numbers, although this is not required. However, the mailbox

number you select must also be assigned to the queue monitored by the monitor server

(utility program), a step which is covered later in this procedure.

You can also use a variation of the list command to view all mailbox numbers assigned

to monitor servers or other utility programs and devices. See “Viewing Information

about Devices” on page 263 for more information.

3. Add the monitor server to the /site/config file on each iNEWS Server—such as server A

and server B in a dual server system—by doing the following:

(Optional) Update the iNEWS system

dictionaries.

“Updating the iNEWS System Dictionaries” on

page 397

nSome configurations require updating styles in the SYSTEM.RESOURCE story. For more

information on how to do that, see “Creating Styles” on page 400.

Tasks (Continued) Refer to...

Monitor Servers

385

cAlways back up the /site/config file before making any changes. See “Editing the

Configuration File” on page 252 for more information.

a. Select all servers.

b. Open and edit the configuration file, by typing (what appears in bold):

NRCS-A$ ed /site/config

1259

After you press Enter, the editor responds by displaying a numerical value

indicating the file size expressed as the number of characters, including spaces and

returns.

nThis procedure, which modifies the /site/config file uses ed, the line editor. If you do not know

how to use ed to modify lines in the file, please see “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655.

c. Add the monitor server’s device number to the servers line in the host definition for

the iNEWS Server that will run the monitor server program.

For instance:

servers 261 263 265

267

The device number 267 is added to the servers line in this example.

nDivide your server programs evenly among your iNEWS Servers to distribute the load they

put on your system. For instance, put odd numbered programs on server A and even

numbered ones on server B. Additionally, ensure that you also add the configuration line for

the monitor server to alternate host definitions for your iNEWS Servers. This ensures it can

run on the surviving computer should one of your iNEWS Servers stop functioning.

d. Add a configuration line for the monitor server in the host definition belonging to

the iNEWS Server that will run the server program. This line begins with the word

server and contains the mailbox number assigned to the monitor server.

The format for server programs’ configuration lines are:

server <device #> <type> <mailbox #> <device name>

nDo not confuse the configuration line in this step, which starts with server, and the servers

line mentioned in the previous step, which lists device numbers. They are not the same.

Parameter Description

device #

The device number assigned to the server program. This number must also be

listed in the servers line in a host definition.

type

The type of server program is monitor.

13 Servers

386

The following are sample configuration lines for monitor server programs:

server 264 monitor 264 - ;monitor server

server 265 monitor 265 - ;monitor server

server 266 monitor 266 - ;monitor server

server 267 monitor 267 - ;monitor server

Comments appearing after the semicolons (;) are optional.

e. When you finish making changes to the configuration file, save your changes and

exit the line editor by typing (what appears in bold):

1279

Do not use an uppercase (W) in this step. When you press Enter, the editor responds

by displaying a numerical value indicating the file size. See “The Line Editor, ed”

on page 655 for more information.

4. (Optional) Test your configuration changes.

5. Reconfigure the system. When adding server programs, you do not need to stop

anything to reconfigure the system.

nUnlike other utility programs, it is not necessary to start a monitor server when you add it to

the configuration file. It starts when someone uses the monitor on or monitor load command

for the rundown queue to which you have assigned the monitor server. See “Using the

Monitor Server” on page 405 for more information.

6. (Optional) Back up site files using sitedump command.

7. After you’ve chosen the monitor server’s mailbox number and verified that it is not used

by another device, you must also assign it to the show’s rundown queue, being

monitored by the monitor server.

For instance, if the monitor server’s mailbox number is 267 and it will monitor the

SHOWS.6PM.RUNDOWN queue, then that number must be assigned to that queue.

This step is done at an iNEWS Workstation, usting the Queue Properties dialog box. See

“Assigning a Mailbox to a Queue” on page 328 for more information.

mailbox #

The mailbox the server program uses. This number typically matches the

monitor server’s device number.

device name

Monitor servers do not use a device name; enter a hyphen (-).

Parameter Description (Continued)

Monitor Servers

387

cBecause multiple queues can share the same mailbox number, care must be taken to

avoid conflicts. Rundown queues should never share the same mailbox number.

Since multiple queues can share the same mailbox, you can use a variation of the list d

command at the console to list all queues and directories in the database that are using a

certain mailbox, such as 267. To do this, type:

list mailbox=267 d

Creating Composite and Event List Queues

The monitor server scans stories for machine control events and builds lists of these events.

These lists, known as composite and event lists, are optional, yet valuable, resources for a

show’s director and production device operators. An event list contains details for a specific

device, while a composite list contains status information for all devices connected.

You might want to create only composite and/or event lists for certain production devices. If

you do not create list queues for some devices, the monitor server will still function

normally.

For these lists to exist, queues for them must be created—if they do not already exist—and

they must be “mapped” to the monitor server so it knows where to put composite

information and event lists.

The following procedure explains how to create queues. For more on mapping them, see

“Creating an Entry in the SYSTEM.MAP Story” on page 391.

To create and configure the composite and event list queues:

1. At an iNEWS Workstation, create the queues in the iNEWS database by following the

procedure given in “Creating a New Queue” on page 104

2. Name the new queues, such as COMPOSITE and CG1.

13 Servers

388

nThe pathname of each device’s event list queue is a combination of the event list directory

and the device manager’s name. For instance, if you want an event list for the 6PM show

that has a character generator called CG1, you may select to place the event list queue in

the SHOWS.6P directory. The pathname would be SHOWS.6P.CG1. Using the same

example, the pathname for the composite list queue would be SHOWS.6P.COMPOSITE.

The newly created queue will inherit database traits of its parent directory initially. You

can open the new queue by double-clicking on it. For more information about queues

and their database traits, see “The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories” on page

99.

3. Set the display of the composite and event list queues.

a. Log in as a system administrator at an iNEWS Workstation.

b. Navigate to and right-click on the composite or event list queue in the Directory

panel.

c. Select Properties from the context menu.

The Queue Properties dialog box appears.

Monitor Servers

389

nAccess to the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box and its appearance vary, depending on

certain circumstances. See “Database Traits Summary” on page 122 for more information.

d. Select the User Interface tab.

e. Set Preview Lines to the number of lines you want displayed in the Queue panel.

To have monitor server display information in these lists properly, each queue must

have a 1-line display and be assigned the proper queue form. Assigning these forms

is covered in “Assigning a Form as a Queue or Story Form” on page 208.

f. Click OK to save changes.

4. Ensure that you can use the queues effectively by removing the inverted database trait

and (optionally) applying the refresh database trait to them. This can be done by

removing the check mark from the Inverted checkbox and selecting the Refresh

checkbox on the User Interface tab of the Queue Properties dialog box at any iNEWS

Workstation.

For more information about assigning database traits to queues, see “Changing Database

Traits” on page 136.

5. Assign a write security group to your event and composite list queues to ensure that only

the monitor server makes changes to the composite and event lists. It is recommended

that you restrict writing access of these queues to superusers.

For more information on how to assign write groups to queues, see “Group Traits for the

Database” on page 170.

6. On the Maintain tab, set the queue to purge in 18 hours, select the Skip Backup check

box, and set Save Old Versions to Save None.

13 Servers

390

After the composite and event list queues are created, the monitor server must be

created—as described in “Creating a Monitor Server for Each Show” on page 384—and

mapped to them. This will enable the monitor server to determine the queue where the

composite list should be placed and the directory where the event list queues are located.

The procedures for mapping the monitor server to composite and event list queues are

explained in “Creating an Entry in the SYSTEM.MAP Story” on page 391.

Set up Queue and Story Forms

All three queues—rundown, composite, and event list—use forms with fields that may be

filled in by monitor server programs.

Add fields to existing rundown queue and story forms in iNEWS, as well as forms used by

the composite and event list queues, using the following guidelines:

• Two fields are used in forms for all three queues: VIDEO-ID and EVENT-STATUS.

• Two fields are used in forms for rundown queues: STATUS and TAPE-TIME.

• The following fields are used in forms for composite and event list queues:

MOS-TITLE, CG-ADDR, ITEM-CHANNEL, STILL-ID, CG-TEXT,

CG-TEMPLATE, STILL-PRESET, STYLE, and EFFECT.

nFor a field to exist in a queue form, it must also exist in a story form. See “Forms” on page

197 for more information about forms and field types.

Assigning Forms to Queues

After you create queues to hold the composite and event lists, you must assign forms

containing iNEWS fields to each queue. For instance:

• Assign a form designed to display composite list information to

SHOWS.6PM.COMPOSITE.

• Assign a form designed to display the information in a character generator’s event list to

SHOWS.6PM.CG1.

nYour system includes default forms—located in the SYSTEM.FORMS directory—for

composite, character generator, and video event list queues. If upgrading to iNEWS from a

previous product version, you must update forms for composite and event list queues,

including rundown forms.

To assign a form to a queue:

1. At an iNEWS Workstation, navigate to the queue you want in the Directory panel.

2. Right-click on the queue.

3. Select Properties from the context menu.

Monitor Servers

391

The Queue Properties dialog box appears.

nAccess to the Directory/Queue Properties dialog box and its appearance vary, depending on

certain circumstances. See “Database Traits Summary” on page 122 for more information.

4. Do either or both of the following:

tUse the Queue drop-down list on the Forms tab to select the form you want to apply

to the queue as the queue form database trait.

tUse the Story drop-down list on the Forms tab to select the form you want to apply

to the queue as the story form database trait.

You must assign a queue form and a story form. The queue form determines the look of

the queue. The story form determines how an event request is displayed when you

double-click it.

For instance, to assign the standard composite list queue form to the

SHOWS.6PM.COMPOSITE queue, select the appropriate form from the Queue

drop-down list in the Queue Properties dialog box. To assign a story form to this

composite list, select the appropriate form from the Story drop-down list in the Queue

Properties dialog box.

nThe forms will only appear in the drop-down lists if they exist in the database. For more

information about the Forms tab and how to create your own forms or modify existing forms,

and about database traits, see “The Database: Directories, Queues, and Stories” on page

99 and “Forms” on page 197.

5. If you made changes to an existing form, you must select the Update existing stories to

use story form. When this check box is selected, iNEWS changes the story form

assignment for existing stories with the queue.

6. Click OK to save changes and apply the new queue/story form settings.

nUsers should log off and sign back on to view the new queue/story form settings.

Creating an Entry in the SYSTEM.MAP Story

The map story is a standard iNEWS database story and is always the first story in the

SYSTEM.MAP queue (as defined by Q_MMAP). It can be opened and edited like any other

iNEWS database story; however, access to it is typically limited to system administrators

who already have access to the System directory.

When you create a show’s map story entry, you might want to specify that monitor server

create and maintain event and composite lists when someone monitors the show.

13 Servers

392

After creating the show’s monitor server, add an entry for the show to your system’s map

story. This entry specifies to the show’s monitor server the location of the show’s rundown

queue, and composite and event lists. Without this information, the monitor server will not

create lists. The map story entry also specifies the list of groups that can monitor a queue,

and when the monitor server turns itself off.

To add an entry for the show in the map story:

1. Open the SYSTEM.MAP story, which contains a separate entry for each show that will

be produced using Command, ControlAir, or MOS Gateway.

2. Create an entry header for the show.

Each show’s SYSTEM.MAP story must begin with a line called the entry header. The

format for the entry header is:

<RD queue> <EL directory> <CL queue> <monitor grp> <mon off time or

duration>

Parameter Definition

This is the show’s rundown queue. Enter the full pathname.

(Optional) This is the event list directory. Enter the directory in which event

lists are stored. The monitor server combines information you put here with

the device name. For instance, if you specify SHOWS.6PM here and you

have a CG machine called “cg1,” the monitor server puts the character

generator’s event list in shows.6pm.cg1. It is a good idea to use the same

directory that holds the show’s rundown. If you do not use this field, put a

dash here.

(Optional) This is the composite list queue. Enter the full pathname of the

queue in which the show’s composite list is stored. It is a good idea to put the

composite list in the same directory as the show’s rundown queue. If you do

not use this feature, put a dash here.

(Optional) Put a security group in this field so that only superusers and

people assigned to that group can monitor the show.

Put a dash here if you do not want to restrict who can monitor the show.

Consider using different security groups for each show in a series of

back-to-back shows to prevent one show’s producer from starting or stopping

another show’s monitor server.

Monitor Servers

393

The following lines are a couple of examples of entry headers, one with and one without

a monitoring security group defined:

show.noon.rundown show.noon show.noon.composite - 1245

show.6pm.rundown show.6pm show.6pm.composite monitor D2

3. Enter the information line for a server.

The entry header is followed by an information line in the following format:

<mon off time or

duration>

The time you want the show’s monitor server to turn itself off—when you

want the system to stop monitoring the show.

You can enter this time as either a specific time of day or a duration.

• Enter the time of day in 24-hour format. For instance, type 1915 to have

the monitor server turn itself off at 7:15 PM.

• Enter a duration by typing D or d before a numeric value. An uppercase D

denotes a duration in hours, and a lowercase d denotes a duration in

minutes.

Parameter Definition (Continued)

Parameter Definition

The options for server type are:

• WNASVR - used for a Command Server

• CASVR - used for a ControlAir Server

• MOSSVR - used for a MOS-based server, such as one running the MOS

Gateway software.

The server name is the network resolvable address of the server machine.

The backup server field may contain a placeholder if no backup server is

configured. The backup server can be loaded in place of the primary server;

however, both may not be loaded at the same time.

CAWS stands for ControlAir Workstation. If the CAWS form field contains a

placeholder, the story form assigned to the composite list queue will be used.

If no composite list queue is configured, the story form assigned to the

rundown queue will be used. For best performance, a CAWS form should be

created and assigned here. That form should contain only the title and

page-number fields, and any event-related fields such as VIDEO-ID,

MOS-TITLE, etc.

13 Servers

394

4. List the devices—production devices for which you want the show’s monitor server to

process event requests.

The monitor server can only process event requests for devices specified in the device

list; event requests for other devices generate errors.

Each line in the device list contains information for each device manager configured on

that server. All device information lines share three required fields: device type, device

name, and alias name, followed by device-dependent information.

For Command Servers (wnasvr), the format for video, CG devices are:

video <device name> <alias name> <default channel>

cg <device name> <alias name> <default channel> <style>

For ControlAir Servers (casvr), the format for video, CG, and MOS devices are:

video <device name> <alias name> <channel assignment agent>

cg <device name> <alias name> <msg drive>:<msg dir> <tmplt

drive>:<tmplt dir> <start address> <end address> <address offset>

mos <device name> -

Parameter Definition

The options for device type are: video, cg, or mos.

In some cases, iNEWS users may create machine control events

that specify devices by type rather than name. When the monitor

server encounters such an event, it sends it to the first device of

that type defined in the show’s SYSTEM.MAP story entry. If you

have a show that uses two devices of the same type, decide which

device you want as the monitor server’s default, and define it first

in the show’s SYSTEM.MAP story entry.

nThe iNEWS newsroom computer system stores a Machine Control System (MCS) dictionary

file—named mcs—in the /site/dict directory. The /site/dict/mcs file usually defines production

device types as CG for character generator and VIDEO for video servers. You must specify in

the device list a valid production device as defined in the dictionary file; otherwise, the

monitor server ignores that line and any that follow it, so it cannot properly process event

requests.

Monitor Servers

395

Specify the name of the production device in this parameter.

Device names for Command Server devices must match the

channel group name in Command. See the Avid iNEWS Command

Administration Guide for more information.

Device names for ControlAir Server devices must match the

device name specified in the DMP file for one of the device

managers configured on the ControlAir Server. See the Avid

iNEWS ControlAir Operations Manual for more information.

The alias name field may contain a placeholder if an alias is not

used. A device alias name provides a means to enter generic

production cues into stories which may be resolved to different

device names when those stories are copied to different rundown

queues. The default alias name for any device manager is the

device type. When a production cue is processed, the device name

in the cue is compared to the device list for that rundown. If no

match is found, the alias list is searched. If a match is found in that

list, the production cue is assigned to the corresponding device

manager. Duplicate device names are not allowed. However, alias

names are not checked for uniqueness. If an alias applies to two or

more devices, the first in the list will be selected.

This parameter specifies whether the iNEWS system or the

ControlAir Workstation assigns channels. Use these codes:

1 to have channel assigned by iNEWS

3 to have channels assigned by ControlAir Workstation

Enter the disk drive and directory you want the machine to use.

CG drive and directory fields still use a colon (:) to separate two

components. A placeholder (-) or single colon will cause both to

be empty. If you leave this field empty, the machine uses its

default drive.

CG devices can specify a separate drive and directory where

template messages are stored on the CG. A placeholder (-) or

single colon will cause both to be empty. If you leave this field

empty, the machine uses its default drive.

Parameter Definition (Continued)

13 Servers

396

Here is an example where all of the options are used:

casvr casvr bsvr bcs-bcw

video airspace - 3

cg deko1 deko C:MSG - 500 799

cg max - C:MAX D:TEMPLATES 400 599 20

mossvr mosgw - event-mos

mos sony -

In the above example, the information lines for two servers are shown before the device

lines. The two servers are:

- a ControlAir Server called “casvr”

- a MOS Gateway Server called “mosgw”

Both a video device manager called “airspace” and a cg device manager called “deko1”

are on the ControlAir Server, as well as a third device manger for a different character

generator.

<start address> <end

address>

Specify a range of addresses in these fields. The monitor server

uses this range to store the forms it builds.

To specify a range of addresses, enter the starting address,

followed by a space and the ending address.

For instance, to reserve addresses 1 through 199, type:

1 199

The range of numbers must be large enough to hold all

character-generated graphics—also known as supers—that

monitor server is likely to build for the show. Also, ensure you do

not select a range that conflicts with the addresses the character

generator uses to store its permanent supers or CG forms.

nBecause the monitor server may skip an address to keep them contiguous within a story, this

range should be larger than the largest number of possible addresses used.

The CG address offset field is optional. If entered, it is the number

of CG addresses to skip when a new story is parsed before

assigning new addresses for the next story. When new CGs are

added to a story in a monitored rundown, the monitor program

re-assigns all the addresses within that story to keep them

contiguous. Using this option will reduce the number of times

adding a new CG causes the address range to shift to a higher set

of numbers.

Parameter Definition (Continued)

Monitor Servers

397

In the next example the first two device managers are individually configured on

separate servers called “video” and “fonts”.

casvr video bsvr bcs-bcw

video airspace - 3

casvr fonts - bcs-bcw

cg deko1 deko C:MSG - 500 799

5. Save the map story.

6. Test monitor the show to ensure map story entries are functioning correctly.

The monitor server only examines the show’s map story entry when a user turns it on, so

any changes to the show’s map story entry will not take effect until then. Changes made

to the show’s map story entry after the show is monitored do not take effect until the

next time the show is monitored.

For this reason, you should monitor the show after creating or modifying the show’s

SYSTEM.MAP story entry to test the changes you make. Monitoring the show allows

the monitor server to check your work and ensures smooth operation when you produce

the show.

Updating the iNEWS System Dictionaries

Machine Control System (MCS) dictionary files in iNEWS can be modified to customize the

appearance of status indicators from various devices. For instance, an Omnibus device,

connected to iNEWS, shows a video play-back status of “OnAir,” but the status field in the

show rundown on iNEWS shows “Play” instead. If the system administrator wants the two

status indicators to match, the MCS dictionary file in iNEWS must be modified. This will

“translate” the iNEWS status wording so that it corresponds to what appears on the actual

device.

nThe monitor server uses the MCS dictionary to show status for all devices, so ensure that

words you choose apply to all devices. For instance, there is no way for the play status to be

“OnAir” for character generators and “Playing” for video servers simultaneously.

Dictionary files are located in the /site/dict directory. This section covers changes made only

to the /site/dict/mcs file; if changes are made to other dictionaries in the /site/dict directory,

the procedure may require more steps.

In the following procedure, as an example, the term “Play” is changed to “OnAir” in the

/site/dict/mcs dictionary file.

13 Servers

398

To edit the dictionary file:

1. Select all servers at the console, so changes you make are made to each server’s copy of

the file.

2. Open /site/dict/mcs for editing by typing:

ed /site/dict/mcs

3. Navigate to the line with the word you want changed, such as “PLAY” by typing:

/PLAY

The console will respond with a display similar to the following:

A_EVPLAY /3PLAY

In the above example, PLAY appears twice in the line.

nWhen navigating in the file, remember the line editor is case-sensitive. So, typing either

/Play

/play

will not locate a line with “PLAY.”

4. Substitute the new word, such as “OnAir,” for the second occurrence of the existing

word, PLAY, by typing:

s/3PLAY/3OnAir

The console will respond with a display similar to the following:

A_EVPLAY /3OnAir

5. When you finish making changes to the dictionary file, save your changes and exit the

line editor by typing (what appears in bold):

1279

Do not use an uppercase (W) in this step. When you press Enter, the editor responds by

displaying a numerical value indicating the file size. See “The Line Editor, ed” on page

655 for more information.

nSee Appendix C for more information about Dictionary files.

If you change your existing MCS dictionary files, you must apply those changes by

running the makemontab command at the iNEWS console; however, any monitor

servers that are running at the time the command is entered will not apply the changes.

The monitor servers must be stopped prior to running the makemontab command.

cA system administrator who knows the device numbers for monitor servers can choose

to stop just those programs; however, it should be done only during off-peak hours,

when the monitor servers are not used to monitor on-air shows.

To update your iNEWS dictionaries:

1. Select all servers.

2. Enter superuser mode, using the current password.

Monitor Servers

399

3. At the specified time, select one server and type

list s

to check who is still logged in

and which server programs are still running.

A message similar to the following appears:

S264 2Af4 B

R801 stevens A

The list s command displays the device controlling the session, the user account used for

the session, and the server servicing the session. In the example, the first line starts with

an S, indicating a server (utility program), such as a monitor server. The number after

the S is the device number. If you are unsure whether the device number is that of a

monitor server, check the iNEWS configuration file (/site/config) for monitor servers

and their assigned device numbers. You can do this by using the list c command at the

console, in the following format:

list c <device number>

cServer programs are only listed as a result of the list s command if they are actually

running, so they may be in use. Do not stop them without first checking with

production staff to ensure you are not stopping a monitor server that is monitoring a

show that is on-air.

4. After checking with production staff, type list s again to confirm whether all monitor

servers are off.

5. Use the stop command followed by the device number(s) of monitor servers. This

further ensures they are stopped. For instance, type:

stop 264

6. Type

makemontab -i

to translate dictionaries used by monitor servers.

7. Log off the iNEWS console.

Unlike other utility programs, monitor servers do not have to be restarted from the

iNEWS console. They are turned on and off from the iNEWS Workstation.

13 Servers

400

Creating Styles

Some sites use the monitor server alone—without any direct connection to devices,

Command, or ControlAir—to check machine control events within scripts for errors and

produce playlists that personnel can print out or refer to during broadcasts.

Whether the monitor server in iNEWS is used alone or with ControlAir to create a list of CG

events, it must have a defined set of styles to work properly.

Styles apply to machine control events for character generators (CGs). Video servers and

MOS devices do not use styles.

Styles are defined in stories located in the SYSTEM.RESOURCE queue of the iNEWS

database. Each style represents elements necessary for the device (CG) to produce a

particular playback event.

Each device must have its own list of styles. If there are two production devices of the same

type, such as two CGs, users may assume that a style that works on one device also works on

the other. Consider creating a new story for each device, defining the same styles for both

devices to avoid confusion. Because SYSTEM.RESOURCE stories for several devices can

be lengthy, users can find information they need more efficiently if there is one story per

device, or one story per type/topic. For instance, one story for general lower-third CGs, and

separate stories for sports, locations, etc.

Styles make it easier to create event requests because they simplify the information users

must put into the request. Most importantly, styles provide the information required for the

monitor server to check machine control events for errors, which is then reported to iNEWS

users through instant messages or by changing the color of the event when displayed in the

Story panel at an iNEWS Workstation. This information can also be forwarded to the

ControlAir system.

Monitor Servers

401

The following diagram shows where styles appear in the workflow.

nStep 2 in the diagram applies only to CG events.

If you use effects in your character generator styles, you should develop a strategy for using

them. How you use effects depends on whether or not you use the ControlAir system:

• If you have a ControlAir Workstation and want to include an effect in a style, you must

first define the style effect in the DMP file for the device manager that controls the

production device.

• If you do not have a ControlAir Workstation, the effects you include in your styles serve

as instructions to your production device operators. Develop a standard set of effect

names that your production device operators can easily understand.

Styles are stored in stories, which are saved to the SYSTEM.RESOURCE queue. These

stories are created and edited like any other story in the iNEWS newsroom computer system.

However, if the queue has a write security group assigned to it, you must belong to that

group or be logged on as a superuser to edit stories in the SYSTEM.RESOURCE queue.

cIf your SYSTEM.RESOURCE queue does not have a write security group, one should

be assigned. Because its stories define styles people will use to request playback events,

assigning a write security group helps ensure that only authorized personnel can edit

these stories. See “Groups” on page 151 for more information.

13 Servers

402

To create a style:

1. At an iNEWS Workstation, navigate to the SYSTEM.RESOURCE queue.

2. Do one of the following:

tOpen an existing story to edit.

tSelect File > New Story.

The new story is created and will appear with a blank Story Form (top) and Story Text

panels, as shown:

3. The story should begin with a commented header and parameter line similar to the

following:

;Resource File

;Dev Style Template Effect # of Fields ;Comments

nLines beginning with a semicolon (;) are comments and ignored by the system. Comments

may also be added to the end of lines.

4. Do one of the following:

tIf editing styles in an existing story, move to the appropriate line(s) in the story.

tIf creating a new story, type the header as shown in the previous step.

5. Enter a style entry line for the device, ensuring all parameters are addressed, as

explained in the following table.

Parameter Definition

Device The device name of the character generator to which the style applies. This

name is defined in the device’s entry in the ControlAir configuration file. For

instance, CG, CG1, and CG2.

Style The name of the style. Specify a name, eight characters or less, containing at

least one alpha character. For instance, 1LINE , 2-LINE , and LLBOX are

valid style names, but 412 is not.

Monitor Servers

403

6. When finished editing the styles in the story, save it by clicking the Save button or

selecting File > Save.

7. Test new or edited styles by monitoring a rundown. Changes to SYSTEM.RESOURCE

stories do not take effect until a show containing scripts with machine control events

using the styles is monitored. Also, if a monitor server is running when changes are

made, they will not take effect for that monitor server until it is restarted.

Template Preset Enter the character generator address where the pre-recorded super or

template that you want to use is located.

nMany CGs allow alphanumeric addresses. Template addresses for these machines can also be

alpha-only addresses of 20 characters or less, which are very useful to CG operators. (Don’t

use the filename extensions.)

Effect The name of a special effect you want to include in the style. If you do not

want to include a special effect, such as FADE or WIPE, type a dash for this

parameter.

If you have a ControlAir Workstation and want to include an effect in a style,

you must first define the style effect in the DMP file for the device manager

that controls the production device.

If the operator plays the event requests from the device’s console, you can use

any name up to eight characters long to represent the effect you want.

However, ensure the operator is familiar with the name. When an event

request uses this style, the monitor server puts the effect name you specify

here in the event list entry for that event request. The operator uses the effect

name to identify what effect should be used when the event is played.

# of Fields If the style uses a template, use this parameter to specify the number of fields

(or lines) in that template. Typing a number of fields here specifies to

ControlAir the address refers to a template. The number here also ensures

that this style cannot be used to add more text than there are fields in the

template.

If the style uses a pre-recorded super address, type a zero here to specify to

ControlAir this parameter refers to a specific CG address. When you type a

zero for this parameter, ControlAir ensures that this style cannot be used to

add text to the CG.

Parameter Definition (Continued)

13 Servers

404

Some examples of styles for a character generator are shown in the sample

SYSTEM.RESOURCE story below:

Monitor Servers

405

Using the Monitor Server

This section provides some basic user information, which can be used to test when the

monitor server is set up and working properly. Procedures include how to turn the monitor

server on and off, as well as how to instruct it to load or unload machine control event data.

To use the monitor server:

1. Log in to an iNEWS Workstation.

2. Open the appropriate rundown queue.

3. Select Tools > Monitor.

The Monitor Queue dialog box appears.

The automatic shut-off time appears at the bottom of the dialog box as either a Duration

(shown) or Quit Time.

nDuration indicates how long machine control will remain on once the monitor server is

turned on. Quit Time indicates a specific time (in 24-hour format) that machine control is

automatically turned off.

4. Select a Monitor Mode based on the following options:

Option Description

On Turns the monitor server on and creates an event list for each device in the

rundown queue.

Load Instructs the monitor server to load event lists to devices you select.

13 Servers

406

nThe status bar in the iNEWS Workstation displays the current status of the monitor server,

such as: MON=OFF, MON=ON, MON=LOAD, and MON=PART, which stands for partial

device loads.

The Devices section of the Monitor Queue dialog box displays a list of devices based on

those defined for the rundown queue in the SYSTEM.MAP story.

The list could include any one or all of the following servers, such as:

- Command Server

- ControlAir Server

-MOS Gateway Server

If you select Load, specify the device or server to load from the Devices list, or select

the All Devices checkbox to load all devices associated with the rundown queue. To

select multiple devices from the list, without selecting all, press the Ctrl key while you

click on each item. If you select a server, the data will be loaded to all devices associated

with that server.

If you select the MOS Gateway Server that is interfacing with a device that has multiple

channels, such as an OmniBus automation system, a second dialog box will appear,

allowing you to select the channel from a drop-down list. To enable this workflow, the

MOS server name and MOS device name must match.

5. Click OK to return to the previous dialog box.

6. Click OK again.

Unload Clears device event lists (also known as playlists) without turning the monitor

server off.

Off Turns the monitor server off, overriding the Quit Time setting.

Option Description

Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links

407

Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links

This section introduces you to rx/tx links and explains their operation. Use rx/tx links to

transfer stories between iNEWS systems and other systems using the Ethernet network. To

send stories across a network connection, use network rx/tx links. You can connect several

servers or systems into a network using rx/tx links.

For one system to send stories to another, it must have a Tx (transmit) link configured. The

other system must have an Rx (receive) link configured to receive stories the tx link sends.

nInformation relevant to this section is also contained in “Field Validation” on page 335.

Sending Story Forms

Your system can transmit story form information by sending the form name with a story or

by sending the full form with a story. The first way reduces the time it takes the system to

send a story to another system by omitting the form and sending only the text of the story,

including any text contained in the form’s fields, and the form name. When the receiving

system gets a story without a full form, it uses the form name supplied with the story. The

form may not exist on the receiving system, but no check is made by the rx link.

If the receiving system gives a story a new form, it fills in the fields of that form as much as

possible with the story’s original field text. For transfers using the NSML format, if the

original story had fields that are not present in the new form, the text from those fields are

stored in the field section of the story, but are not displayed on screen and will be discarded

when the story is modified.

To ensure that transmitted stories have the same form on both systems:

tAdd a sendform line to the Tx job list.

This instructs the system to send the full form with the transmitted stories. The

sendform line must appear in the job list immediately following the scan line.

nFor transfers using the NSML format, if using the tx sendform option, the queue on the

receiving system should have the FORMS_ALLOWED attribute. Avid recommends that if the

volume of stories transferred is high, whatever forms are used for stories should be resident

on both systems, especially when the two systems are owned by the same customer.

Setting Automatic Update

When a new version of a story is transmitted to a queue that already contains an older

version of the same story, you usually want the receiving system to replace the older version

of the story with the new one. To do this, enable the update trait on the queue where the

received stories are placed.

13 Servers

408

For instance, suppose an affiliate in Washington sends stories it uses for its six o’clock show

to your system as these stories are added to or modified in the show’s rundown queue. On

receipt of these stories from Washington, your system puts them in the queue called

WASHINGTON.RUNDOWN.6PM. You want your system to dispose of old versions of

stories as new versions come in from Washington.

To set an automatic update:

1. Log in as a system administrator at an iNEWS Workstation.

2. Navigate to the queue, such as WASHINGTON.RUNDOWN.6PM, and right-click on it.

3. Select Properties. The Queue Properties dialog box appears.

4. Click on the Maintain tab.

5. Click on the Update check box to turn on the update database trait in the queue.

6. Save changes and close the dialog box.

cIf you change the update trait and stories are in the queue, those stories will not be

replaced by updated versions. Turn on the trait when the queue is empty.

After you apply the update database trait, your system starts replacing older versions of

stories in WASHINGTON.RUNDOWN.6PM with new ones as they come in from

Washington.

If you have a tx link that sends stories to an update queue, any change you make to a

story in a queue watched by the tx link affects the copy of the story in the other system.

This includes killing a story, which causes the tx link to notify the receiving system that

the story has been killed. The second system then kills its copy of the story as well. You

can use the ignore-del command to prevent the tx link from notifying the receiving

system when stories are killed.

Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links

409

Update Trait - Queue Considerations

A story’s final destination queue and any intermediate queues through which the story

passes before reaching the destination queue must have their update trait turned on. If not,

the final destination queue does not get updated. It does not matter if the queue where the

story was created has its update trait turned on.

The example below shows which queues must have their update trait turned on if a story is

transmitted directly from the queue in which it is created to its final destination queue.

If the story passes through an intermediate queue before reaching its destination queue, both

the intermediate queue and destination queue must have their update traits turned on, as

shown below:

Similarly, if a story received from one system is copied to another queue for transmission to

a third system, enable the update trait on every queue through which the story passes, as

shown below:

13 Servers

410

Changing Queue Order

Ordinarily, when a queue in the transmitting system is ordered, changes are not evident in

the receiving system’s corresponding queue. This is adequate for many queues, because their

story order is not important. However, story order is very important for other queues (for

example, rundown queues). These queues must be identical on the local and remote systems.

To have the system transmit queue ordering information:

tAdd an order line to your network tx job list.

When a local queue is ordered, information is sent to the remote queue. That queue is

ordered, identical to the local queue. This also applies to action servers.

nThe destination (remote) queue must have its update trait turned on.

Also, additions and deletions to a sorted queue on the local system do not cause the system

to transmit queue order change information. Ensure that you turn on the sort attribute in the

destination queue.

Adding Rx/Tx Links

If your iNEWS system is connected to the same network as another iNEWS system, you can

use network rx/tx links to allow one system to automatically send stories to the other. For

each rx or tx link, create an entry in your system’s configuration file that defines where the

link runs and how it sets up.

You can also use network rx/tx links to have a networked iNEWS system periodically send

stories ready for archival to a third-party archive system on the same network. Set these links

up so that people can place stories ready for archival in archive queues on the iNEWS

system. Then, on Sunday morning, the iNEWS system moves these stories to queues on the

archive system.

Give the iNEWS system a tx link that performs two tasks. At 3 a.m. every Sunday, the first

task moves any stories added to ARCHIVE.SCRIPTS since the previous Sunday to

SYSTEM.TRANSFER.SCRIPTS on the archive system. Then, at 4 a.m. every Sunday

morning, the second task moves any stories added to ARCHIVE.PACKAGES that week to

FROM.NEWS.PACKAGES on the archive system.

To add network rx and tx links to your iNEWS system:

1. Ensure both systems are in the hosts file or can be resolved through DNS.

For two systems to use network rx/tx links to exchange stories, each must be network

resolvable, via either /etc/hosts or DNS. To test DNS, type

ping -c 3 <server name>

on the console command line for each iNEWS Server.

Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links

411

Use the cat command to check each system’s hosts file and ensure that necessary servers

are listed. For instance, check the iNEWS system:

NRCS-A$ cat /etc/hosts

A message similar to the following will appear:

125.0.0.1 NRCS-A

125.0.0.2 NRCS-B

125.0.0.3 ARCHIVE-C

...

The archive system’s server (ARCHIVE-C) is listed in this file. Now check the archive

system’s hosts file for NRCS-A and NRCS-B.

If you find that either system’s hosts file does not contain the names of the computers

belonging to the system to which you want it to connect, call Avid for help in modifying

the file.

2. Choose device numbers for the links.

Reserve a range of numbers for network devices and always choose the next available

number from within that range. In the examples for this procedure, we have reserved

numbers 301-399 for network devices.

To see which numbers are taken, check your system’s configuration file. For this

example, the device number 301 is chosen for the network tx link. On the archive

system, we use device number 101 for our network rx link.

3. Create the tx link job list queue in the database.

See “Creating a New Queue” on page 104 for more information.

This queue must be in SYSTEM.CONFIGURE. Its name must begin with a three-digit

number matching the tx link device number.

For instance, create a queue named 301 to hold the job list. Follow the number with a

hyphen and a descriptive name, such as:

-txnet-to-archive

. The full pathname of the

queue would be SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.301-txnet-to-archive.

nNetwork rx links do not require job lists.

4. Open the newly created tx link job list queue.

5. Create the tx link job list story in the database.

Like action servers, tx links use mailbox and timed-interval tasks. Tasks that you want

the tx link to execute as soon as a story is modified in a queue must be mailbox tasks,

while those that you want the tx link to execute at a specific time must be timed-interval

tasks. See “Types of Tasks for Servers” on page 320 for more information.

13 Servers

412

In a network tx link’s job list, you must always follow the scan line with an open line

and a put line, both of which are used only in this type of job list.

The open line uses the open command in the following format to open a network

connection to the receiving system:

open <computer name>[:<port>] <username> [<format>]

The computer name must match be network resolvable. Use the ping command to test.

The port is the port number used by the rx link on the receiving system. If it is omitted,

the tx link program will use the port defined by the rxnet service in its local /etc/services

file; if there is not an rxnet service defined, the tx link program will look up the FTP

service in its local /etc/services file.

The user name must have the same password on both systems.

nIf going to a third-party system, be aware that iNEWS sends all passwords in lower-case.

To improve security of your tx link, apply the blacklist user trait to the user name

(account) you list here on both systems, which prevents anyone from logging in under

that name. This has no effect on name use in a job list. See “User Traits” on page 69 for

more information.

If the format is HTML, then the open command syntax has two more parameters. See

“Web Publishing and Access” on page 429 for more information.

Possible formats are:

- NSML - News Story Markup Language

- 2NSML - 2nd version of NSML contains extensions for MOS support. Default

format.

- HTML - Hypertext Markup Language

- SEP - Avid Netstation Story Exchange Protocol

nThe rxnet program uses an inactivity timer set to the system localtimeout value. If rxnet does

not receive a command within the inactivity interval, it will exit. If the localtimeout value is

zero (0), the inactivity timer is disabled. You can and should set a separate inactivity timer

for rxnets by creating the story /site/env/rxnet and using the RXSITEDILE=<# of seconds>

variable to control rxnet timeouts.

You must follow the open line with a put line, which uses the put command in the

following format to send stories to a queue on the receiving system:

put <target queue name>

Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links

413

nThe target queue name may be formatted using the strftime syntax, may be whatever

directory pathname that is appropriate for the target system if not an iNEWS system, and

will be automatically created if it doesn’t exist, and if the target system allows.

If you do not name a queue, the put command uses the destination queue assigned to the

user you specified in the open command.

If you want stories you transmit to be distributed to more than one queue, set up an

action or distribution server on the receiving system to do this. See “Adding an Action

Server” on page 333 and “Adding a Distribution Server” on page 350 for more

information.

In this example, the network tx link’s job list requires two timed-interval tasks. At 3 a.m.

each Sunday, the first task sends copies of everything added to ARCHIVE.SCRIPTS in

the last week to SYSTEM.TRANSFER.SCRIPTS on the archive system. Then, at 4 a.m.

every Sunday the second task sends copies of everything added to or changed in

ARCHIVE.PACKAGES to FROM.NEWS.PACKAGES on the Archive system.

nTo ensure forms are transmitted with stories, include a sendform line in the Tx job list. The

sendform line must be added to the job list anywhere after the scan command and applies to

all following put commands. The sendform option setting persists to the end of the current

task or until a sendform no command changes the setting within that task.

If you want any queue order changes in your scan queue to be transmitted to your

remote queue, include an order line in the Tx job list. The order command must precede

the open command to affect the put command. Also, make sure the update trait of the

destination queue is turned on.

After the tx link has completed the first tasks, you may want it to remove stories it sent

from the scan queue. To have it do this, end both tasks with the remove command.

nIf you use either move or remove, it must be the last command in the task’s command set.

The finished job list looks like the following:

13 Servers

414

You can use the following job list commands in a network tx link job list. (These are the

same commands used by action servers.)

The following commands can only be used by tx link: open, put, publish, and extension.

The mailto joblist command’s synax is:

mailto <recipient1> [<recipient2> ...]

The list of recipients is a space separated list; do not use commas.

The effect of this command is to send the modified story from the scan queue as an

email text message.

The sendform joblist option causes the field contents of the modified story to be

prefixed to the story's text.

at ignore-del remove

bscan mailto replace

dup move scan

every number send-del

fast no on sendform

ignore order validate

quiet

Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links

415

The story form assigned to the modified story is used to determine which fields are

included and the order of the fields. When placing a field into the email text message,

the field will be preceded by the label text from the story form. Each label/field pair will

be put on a separate line of the email text message. If the field does not have any label

text, the field name is used.

The AIR-DATE, MODIFY-DATE, and CREATE-DATE fields are formatted with the

strftime format: %x %X. This format can be controlled by setting the environment

variable—VT_TIME—to the desired strftime format and including it in the action /

txnet program environment. Contact Avid for assistance.

nOnly the modified story's text (and field text if the sendform option is "on") is put into the

email text message. No production cues, anchor points, nor attachment text is put into the

email text message.

If write access for the destination queue on the receiving system in the put command is

restricted, the connection must be established with the appropriate security to send

stories to this queue. The user name you specify in the task’s open command must

belong to the necessary group on the receiving system.

nUsually, you assign a read group to the System directory that prevents most users from

reading stories in that directory. If you do not want to restrict all of the System directory,

consider restricting who can modify stories in SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.

6. Add links to the configuration file on each iNEWS Server in your system.

a. Select all servers.

b. Open and edit the configuration file, by typing (what appears in bold):

NRCS-A$ ed /site/config

1259

After you press Enter, the editor responds by displaying a numerical value

indicating the file size expressed as the number of characters, including spaces and

returns.

nThis procedure, which modifies the /site/config file uses ed, the line editor. If you do not know

how to use ed to modify lines in the file, please see “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655.

c. Add the network tx link’s device number to a reslist line in the appropriate host

definitions. For instance, put the network tx link on server A by adding a servers

line in its host definition beneath the servers line, which is the last line in the host

configuration.

servers 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263

servers 301

13 Servers

416

nTo keep the network tx link running if one of the iNEWS Servers fails, add this line to each

alternate host definition before proceeding.

7. Add a server line for the tx link, using the format shown:

server <device #> txnet <mailbox> <device name>

The finished line (in bold) for the tx link should appear at the end of the line grouping:

server 256 action 256 actphon ;action svr

server 257 distribution 257 devname1 ;dist server

server 258 parallel 258 devname2

server 259 keyword 259 key1 ;keyword server

server 260 seek 260 seek ;seek server

server 261 ftsseek 261 - ;fts searches

server 262 ftsindex 262 - ;fts indexing

server 301 txnet 301 - ;tx link

8. Create a server line for the rx link. Like the server line for the tx link, place this line at

the end of the file.

The general format for a network rx link configuration line is similar to that of a

network tx link:

server <device #> rxnet [<IP address> or <MAC address>] <device name>

The rx link does not use the device name field so place a hyphen in that position. If an IP

address is specified for the fourth column, the rx link will only be used for connections

from the system with that IP address.

The rx link and tx link would be on different systems if supporting a job list like the one

shown below:

Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links

417

The finished line should look like this:

server 101 rxnet - -

9. When you finish making changes to the configuration file, save your changes and exit

the line editor by typing (what appears in bold):

1279

Do not use an uppercase (W) in this step. When you press Enter, the editor responds by

displaying a numerical value indicating the file size. See “The Line Editor, ed” on page

655 for more information.

10. Test your configuration changes. See “Testing the Site Configuration File After

Alteration” on page 253 for more information.

11. Reconfigure the system. See “Incorporating Configuration Changes” on page 253 for

more information.

Repeat this step on the archive system to incorporate the network rx link into its

operation.

12. Start the tx link using the following command format:

restart <device #>

For instance:

NRCS-A$

restart 256

When the system displays a Hot-to-go message, the tx link has been successfully

started.

nA network rx link is not restarted after you add it to your system. The system starts the rx link

automatically as soon as it receives something from the transmitting system.

13 Servers

418

13. (Optional) Back up site files using sitedump command.

14 iNEWS Community

The iNEWS Community feature that allows customers with multiple iNEWS systems to

share content and collaborate on stories. A user can view, edit, and search for content stored

on any of the iNEWS systems from a single iNEWS Workstation. Community is a licensed

feature, however, and requires some configuration to enable it. This chapter provides the

details for how to do that.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Configuring iNEWS for Community

-Syntax of the ctraits Command

•Viewing Remote Systems or Community Sessions

-Restrictions

-Local and Remote SYSTEM.MOS-MAP

•Removing a System from Community

•Connection Issues

-System Messages in the iNEWS.log

Configuring iNEWS for Community

In this section, the sample iNEWS systems are two dual-server systems identified as:

WAVD-A/B and WNWS-A/B.

nIf upgrading from a version earlier than iNEWS v2.6.5, you need to create the Community

database file by using the

dbgen C

command at the console prior to doing the following

configuration procedure.

To configure iNEWS for Community:

1. Ensure all servers can ping each other by name, and that all workstations can ping all

servers by name.

2. Ensure all systems have unique site keys. Use the

status l

command at the console to

display the site key.

3. Modify /site/config on each system accordingly:

a. Remove any Remote Search devices. Remote Search has been replaced by

Community.

b. Create devices for the Community connections, namely cinws, as shown below:

host ab a

reslist 801 803 805 807 809 ; Community

host ab b

reslist 802 804 806 808 810 ; Community

; INWS (COM and RSEARCH) SESSIONS

cinws 801:810 - gnews - ; Community

4. (Optional) To activate the Community logging feature, you must modify the

W_LOGTYPES token in /site/dict/words, as shown:

Before:

W_LOGTYPES=/D

After:

W_LOGTYPES=/DC

5. (Optional) If you would like to restrict the remote iNEWS Server versions that can

connect to the local system, create the queue

SYSTEM.CLIENT.COMMUNITY-VERSIONS, and insert a story with the allowed

server versions listed.

Configuring iNEWS for Community

421

6. Create generic users with usernames matching the incoming systems' names. The

permissions set for these users' traits define the permissions of generic incoming

connections from servers of those same names.

nIf the generic user for the local system does not exist on the remote system, users on the local

systems whose usernames do not exist on the remote system will not be able to connect to the

remote system.

- On WAVD, create a user name that matches the connecting system name, such as

WNWS.

- On WNWS, create a user name that matches the connecting system name, such as

WAVD.

- Local users who are not explicitly defined on the remote servers will log in to the

remote servers with the properties defined by these generic users.

7. If you would like to restrict which non-superuser users can see other systems, create

groups defining who can connect to the target systems. For example:

- On WNWS, create a group name, such as grpWAVD. The group name has no

requirements; grpWAVD is just an example.

- Add all non-superuser users who should be able to connect remotely to WAVD to

the group.

8. Add each system to the other system's Community using the ctraits command in the

following format: ctraits <system name> [<option> <value>]...[+flag]...[-flag]...

- For instance, on the WAVD iNEWS Server, in superuser mode, enter the following

command:

ctraits WNWS suffix AB +m +o +i

This command will add the system WNWS to the local system's Community file,

instructing the local system to connect to the server WNWS-A and check for the

requested username. If WNWS-A is unavailable, connection to WNWS-B will be

attempted. If the suffix were reversed to BA, then connection to the B server would

be attempted first.

A system cannot be added to its own Community file.

nA suffix or list of suffixes is required, and the

flag is required to allow messaging to the

system. For more information, see “Syntax of the ctraits Command” on page 422.

- On the WNWS iNEWS Server, in superuser mode, enter the following command:

ctraits WAVD suffix AB group grpWAVD +m +o +

In the above example, only superusers and users in the grpWAVD group will see

and be allowed to connect to WAVD from WNWS.

nChanges made do not take effect until the next time the systems are configured.

14 iNEWS Community

422

9. Take each system offline by typing:

offline

10. Configure each system by typing:

configure

11. Bring each system back online by typing:

online

After you have configured both systems and they are back online, the systems should be

ready to go.

Syntax of the ctraits Command

You must be in superuser mode at the console to use the ctraits command.

The syntax for the ctraits command is:

ctraits <system name> [<option> <value>]...[+flag]...[-flag]...

The options and flags are explained in the following table:

Option or Flag Description

suffix <list> The required suffix option defines the order in which the local system will

contact the remote system's servers. The list is the combination of ABCD in

the preferred order. For instance:

ctraits suffix BA

would first contact the

remote system's B server, and then the A if B was unreachable.

group <group> (Optional) Defines the list of users who are permitted to access the remote

system when connected to the local system. Superusers on the local system

will see all available Community members, regardless of group definitions.

remove (no value) Remove a system from a Community. For example, type

ctraits WNWS

remove

to remove WNWS from WAVD’s Community.

+m | -m This flag is required to allow messaging to the target server.

+o | -o This flag is required to allow outgoing connections to the target server. All +o

systems appear in the Directory panel for permitted users.

+i | -i This flag is required to allow incoming connections from the target server.

Viewing Remote Systems or Community Sessions

423

Viewing Remote Systems or Community Sessions

You can use variations of the list command to view information about remote systems and

Community sessions.

To view the remote system in the local system’s Community:

tEnter

list C

(with a capital C) on the iNEWS Server, which will display the following:

SYSTEM SUFFIX MOI GROUP

WAVD AB moi grpWAVD

For more information, see “list C” on page 503.

nPermissions on the remote system are defined by usernames on the remote system. A user's

local permissions are disregarded by the remote system.

To view Community sessions at the console:

tEnter

list s

on the iNEWS Server.

The system will display a list of current sessions. Community sessions appear in the

output as C sessions.

G850 jsmith A

C950 tjones A

C951 jdoe A (c)

The G session for user jsmith is an example of a standard local iNEWS session (inws).

The C session for user tjones is a Community session (cinws) using the person’s true

username. And the C session for user jdoe is a Community session (cinws) using the

generic username. This means the jdoe user name does not exist on the remove server.

nThe localonly user trait, when applied, restricts remote users with that username from

connecting through Community. For example, setting the generic “avid” superuser to

localonly will cause incoming users named “avid” to be rejected at log in. The localonly

user trait can be applied by either selecting the Local Only checkbox in the User Properties

dialog box or by using the

+localonly

option with the utraits command at the console.

Restrictions

Users will experience some restrictions when connecting via Community.

• Local users cannot modify queue, directory, or user properties on remote systems.

• Users connecting as generic users will be prohibited from using EasyLock (also known

as UserLock) to lock stories and directories; however, KeyLock is available.

14 iNEWS Community

424

Local and Remote SYSTEM.MOS-MAP

Stories and items are validated against the destination system’s SYSTEM.MOS-MAP.

Plug-ins that create MOS or CAP events will create events that display the AMCPID

appropriate for the destination system.

When stories containing events are moved to other systems, the destination system will

attempt to match MOSID to AMCPID using the destination SYSTEM.MOS-MAP.

For Example:

• In SYSTEM.MOS-MAP, WAVD has:

MOS001 WAVDamcp

• In SYSTEM.MOS-MAP, WNWS has:

MOS001 WNWSamcp

In this example, when a story containing a MOS001 event is moved from one server to

another, the AMCPID defined in the destination server will be used when the story is saved.

If there is no matching MOSID on the destination server, no modification is made to the

event, and the following system message appears:

WNWS-B C908: Community move: mosID [MOS001] not in MOS-MAP

Removing a System from Community

You must be in superuser mode at the local system’s console to remove another system from

its Community. In the following procedure, the dual-server system WAVD A/B is used as an

example.

To remove a system:

1. At the console, in superuser mode, enter

ctraits WAVD remove

2. Take the system offline by typing:

offline

3. Configure the system by typing:

configure

4. Bring the system back online by typing:

online

nChanges made do not take effect until the next time the systems are configured.

Connection Issues

425

Connection Issues

If experiencing connection issues, here are some troubleshooting ideas to consider:

• Ensure all systems can ping other community members by name.

• If DNS issues appear, add /etc/hosts definitions.

• If a node is available but offline, the entire system is considered offline. The next suffix

will not be attempted.

• An unreachable system will introduce a delay in message name checking. The server

attempting to connect will wait for a response, but will force a timeout after five

seconds.

• If a user cannot connect, ensure that either their username exists on the remote server or

that the remote server has a user with the local system's name. If neither exists, the

connection will be refused. If one of the names does exist and the connection is still

refused, ensure that the username does not have the localonly trait set on the remote

server.

• If connection is refused, ensure that the remote system has the local system listed as +i.

• If connection is refused and no system messages appear, ensure that the remote system

has available cinws sessions.

• If connection is refused, ensure that the connecting server is of an appropriate version,

as defined in SYSTEM.CLIENT.COMMUNITY-VERSIONS.

System Messages in the iNEWS.log

The systems, both local and remote, log connection refusal reasons in a log file, which

should be consulted whenever connection issues arise. The log is located at

/var/log/iNEWS/iNEWS.log.

In the following examples, the local system is WAVD, and the remote system is WNWS.

• Remote system does not have local system as an allowed incoming connection

(

ctraits wnws suffix ba +m +o –i

)

- Local message:

WAVD-A G520: Not authorized to connect to WNWS-B

- Remote message:

WNWS-B work: 172.24.96.48 is not in Community

• Remote system does not allow local system’s version in

SYSTEM.CLIENT.COMMUNITY-VERSIONS.

- Local message (appears once for each suffix attempted):

WAVD-A G521: No connection to WNWS-B (not compatible)

WAVD-A G521: No connection to WNWS-A (not compatible)

14 iNEWS Community

426

- Remote message: none

• Local system cannot find remote system in DNS or /etc/hosts.

- Local message: At login (appears once for each suffix attempted):

WAVD-A G521: Unable to get messages from WNWS-B - Unknown host

WAVD-A G521: Unable to get messages from WNWS-A - Unknown host

- Local message: At connection attempt (appears once for each suffix attempted):

WAVD-A G521: Unable to connect to WNWS-B - Unknown host

WAVD-A G521: Unable to connect to WNWS-A - Unknown host

- Local message: At message send (appears twice for each suffix attempted):

WAVD-A G521: Community send to WNWS-B failed 521:unknown host

WAVD-A G521: Community send to WNWS-A failed 521:unknown host

- Remote message: none

• Local system has an IP address for remote, but remote is not running.

- Local message: At connection attempt (appears once for each suffix attempted):

WAVD-A G519: Unable to connect to WNWS-B - Timed out

WAVD-A G519: Unable to connect to WNWS-A - Timed out

- Local message: At message send (appears twice for each suffix attempted):

WAVD-A G519: Community send to WNWS -B failed 422:connection

timed out

WAVD-A G519: Community send to WNWS -A failed 422:connection

timed out

- Remote message: none

• Remote system is offline.

nIf the remote system’s primary suffix is offline, the entire system is considered offline.

- Local message:

WAVD-A G521: Community server WNWS-B is offline

- Remote message: When local user logs in to local system:

WNWS-B work: System is currently OFFLINE (30:172.24.96.48)

- Remote message: When local user attempts connection to remote system:

WNWS-B work: System is currently OFFLINE (29:172.24.96.48)

• Remote system does not have any ‘cinws’ sessions configured.

- Local message: WAVD-A G522: No configured sessions on WNWS-B

- Remote message: none

Connection Issues

427

• Remote system is out of available ‘cinws’ sessions.

- In this situation, there will be no system messages printed. The client will show

WNWS is unavailable

• Remote system is missing both the local username and the local generic name.

- Local message:

WAVD-A G519: Cannot login to community server WNWS

(32)

- Remote message:

WNWS-B C906: [4453] gnews 906 C-WAVD - 2.7.0.17 Hot-to-go

WNWS-B C906: Attempted login wavd 172.24.96.48 2.7.0.17 from WAVD

• Destination server does not have a matching MOSID for an event moved from the

source server:

- Source server message: none

- Destination server message:

WNWS-B C908: Community move: mosID [MOS001]

not in MOS-MAP

14 iNEWS Community

428

15 Web Publishing and Access

The iNEWS Web publishing feature allows users to publish news on the World Wide Web

(WWW) by transmitting stories to other computers in Hypertext Markup Language (HTML)

format. Web Access allows direct, read-only browsing of the iNEWS database through a

Web browser. This chapter covers the Web publishing installation and process, as well as

Web Access.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Web Publishing

-Setting up Txnet to Send HTML

-The HTML Export Template

-Publishing iNEWS Stories to the Web

•Web Access

-The Web Server

Web Publishing

Configuring Web publishing for iNEWS involves the following:

• Setting up Txnet to send Hypertext Markup Language (HTML)

• Modifying the default or creating a new HTML export template and putting it into a

queue

After the setup is complete, you can complete the Web publishing process. See “Publishing

iNEWS Stories to the Web” on page 446 for more information.

Setting up Txnet to Send HTML

To set up txnet to send HTML:

1. Establish Tx links.

See “Network iNEWS Systems Using RX/TX Links” on page 407 for more

information.

The links (txnet) transfer stories between systems. You can send stories to non-iNEWS

systems. The only requirement is that the receiving computer supports File Transfer

Protocol (FTP) so the iNEWS Server can send stories to it.

2. Get the name of the Web server to which you will send the stories and be sure it is listed

in /etc/hosts.

3. Create a valid user account on the Web server.

4. Create that same user account on the iNEWS Server.

nThe Web server and iNEWS Server must have matching logins with matching passwords.

5. Create an entry in the job list for the txnet to specify sending stories in HTML format

rather than the standard iNEWS format, News Story Markup Language (NSML).

open <computer name> <user name> HTML [<queue name>] [<story name>]

a. Specify the Web publishing server name as the computer name.

nThe computer name can include a suffix in the form of :<port>. If :<port> is omitted, the

txnet program will use the port defined for the rxnet service in the /etc/services file and if

there is not an rxnet service defined, the txnet program will look up the FTP service in the

/etc/services file. This allows the txnet program to connect to computers that use a different

port for FTP connections.

Web Publishing

431

b. Specify the user name that gives you access to the Web publishing server (common

user name and password).

c. Specify the format as HTML to enable Web publishing.

d. (Optional) Specify the <queue name> as the queue that contains the HTML export

template. If no queue is specified, a default is used. See “The HTML Export

Template” on page 432 for more information.

cIf you specify a queue, the entire queue name must be specified in the open command.

Otherwise, the system will issue a “Failed to get form from...” error message when

txnet is restarted. Also, if you specify a queue that does not contain an HTML export

template, Web publishing will not work.

e. (Optional) Rather than use the default, which is the first story in the queue, specify

the story name in the queue.

Here is an example of a correctly written open command line:

open ntsrvr webtx html system.webforms.s.script-tx

6. After you have edited the txnet job list, restart txnet for your changes to take effect.

When HTML stories are placed on the Web server, they are assigned a unique filename,

similar to the following:

f6daab8.html

f6daab9.html

f6daaba.html

Additionally, a story named published.html can be created in the directory written to.

The published.html file contains a listing of each file exported to the server, in that

directory, referenced by the quick index field of the story. The format is:

<A HREF="qstamp.html">quickindex  </A><BR>

Here is an example:

<A HREF="f6daab8.html">pre-show tease  </A><BR>

<A HREF="f6daab9.html">bosnia  </A><BR>

<A HREF="f6daaba.html">fort bragg  </A><BR>

This story could be used as a base for creating an index page. Generation of the

published.html file can be turned off by a job list command after the scan line: publish

no. The default for this job list command is yes. See “Job List Commands” on page 527

for more information.

A txnet job list command, called extension, is used to control the suffix for file names

when sending stories from txnet using the HTML format option. The syntax is:

extension <suffix>

15 Web Publishing and Access

432

The <suffix> is any string of characters. When the story is output, the story name will be

constructed as:

The <suffix> does not include the dot and will also apply to the published file. So,

instead of that file always being called published.html, it will now be called

published.<suffix>. If no extension command is found in the job list, the suffix will be

set to html.

nIt is also possible to use this same process to export data formatted as XML rather than

HTML.

The HTML Export Template

The HTML export template defines the appearance of stories transmitted out of

iNEWS—that is, exported in HTML format. The template is stored as a news database story

whose text is in HTML, with optional embedded references to story entities.

The iNEWS system contains an HTML export template to use as the default, but you can

customize it or create new templates. The default HTML export template is shown in

“Default Story Template” on page 449.

If you do not specify a queue in the job list where the HTML export template resides, the

system uses the default location. The default location is constructed from the dictionary

entries Q_WEBPUB_FORMS and W_WEBPUB_FORM. These entries are normally

defined to be SYSTEM.WEBFORMS and PUBLISH-FORM respectively; therefore, the

default location is SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.P.PUBLISH-FORM. If this queue does not exist,

or does not have an HTML export template, a hard-coded default Web form is used instead.

Story Entity References

In creating the HTML export template, you use HTML tags and add story components or

entities.

Specify entities in the HTML export template using an ampersand (&) to mark the beginning

of an entity and a semicolon (;) to mark the end. When put in this notation, an entity is called

a story entity reference.

The following table shows the three basic entities of a story, the format for each basic story

entity, and its corresponding story entity reference:

Web Publishing

433

Basic Entity Definition and Format

Field IDs Story information such as story title, creation date, writer, and so forth. It is

the information you see in a Queue or Story Form panel.

Field ID format is:

&f-<field_id>;[<optional format string>]

The field ID is replaced in the HTML output by information associated with

it. For instance, to create a field ID such as the title of a story to appear in the

HTML template, use the following:

<title>&f-title;</title>

You are combining HTML tags with the story entity reference. The

information in the field ID is now a title in the HTML export template, and

when it is merged with an actual story, it will contain the story’s title, in

HTML format. For instance, the title will look like this:

<title>LOTTERY-WIN</title>

The optional format string defines the format to be applied to the field ID

entity. The string applies to fields that are time-related, such as the date or

length of a story. Format strings are optional and defaults are assumed if they

are not specified. See the section on optional format strings for more

information on how to modify this default display for date or time fields.

Body Story text.

Body format is:

&body;

When encountered in the export template, it is replaced by the story text in

the resulting HTML output.

Production cue set Production cues entered in the Instruction pane—to the left of a story’s text.

Production cue format is:

&aeset;

When encountered in the export template, it is replaced in the resulting

HTML output by a list of production cues defined in the production cue set, a

collection of all production cues for the story. Production cues—also known

as anchored elements—are anchored at specific positions in the story text.

How they display depends on their content and the application displaying

them.

nThe term aeset stands for anchored element set.

15 Web Publishing and Access

434

The rules for entity reference names are:

• ASCII characters a-z, A-Z, period (.), and hyphen (-) are allowed. The first character of

a name is always in the set a- z or A-Z.

• A name can have a maximum of 12 characters.

• Entity names are not case-sensitive, which means that &body, &BODY, and &Body are

equivalent.

nDo not forget to precede the entity with an ampersand and close it with a semicolon, such as

&F-TITLE; or &DEFINE:P;”BR”.

The story entities are:

Entity Explanation

&BODY;

Interpolate the story BODY section in place of the entity.

[false if story body section is empty]

[true if story body section is not empty]

&AESET;

Interpolate the story AESET section in place of the entity.

[false if story aeset section is empty]

[true if story aeset section is not empty]

&F-<name>;

Interpolate the named field from the story in place of the entity.

If the entity is one of F-AIR-DATE, F-CREATE-DATE, F-MODIFY-DATE,

F-MOS-DURATION, F-AUDIO-TIME, F-BACK-TIME, F-CUME-TIME,

F-TOTAL-TIME, or F-TAPE-TIME, the field is output using the strftime

function.

Furthermore, a formatting string can follow these fields. The formatting

string must immediately follow the ‘;’ of the entity and be enclosed in single

or double quote characters.

See “Optional Format Strings” on page 439 for more information.

[true if the field is present in the story]

[false if the field is not present in the story or is blank or empty]

&IF;<entity-name>;

If the entity yields a true condition, process template text up to a closing

ELSE or ENDIF in the output stream. If the entity yields a false condition,

skip over all template text up to the next ELSE or ENDIF (not output).

Empty and blank fields are treated as a false IF condition. Only fields which

are present and contain at least one non-blank character cause a true IF

condition.

Web Publishing

435

NSML to HTML Conversion

The iNEWS system uses the News Story Markup Language (NSML) as its native story

storage format. When HTML format is selected, the txnet program converts the NSML into

HTML as stories are exported.

Various NSML tags can be redefined on export and translated to another code, if desired. For

instance, it would be possible to translate the NSML paragraph tag into an HTML break tag

(<BR>) instead of the default HTML paragraph tag (<P>).

By placing DEFINE statements at the top of the HTML export template before the

<HTML> line, the default conversion of NSML tags into HTML tags can be modified.

Format of a DEFINE statement is:

&DEFINE:<tag>;“<string>”

&DEFINE;<tag>;’<string>’

nSingle or double quotes can be used.

The string includes all characters up to the matching delimiting quote; this allows inclusion

of the other quotation mark within the string.

Standard definitions, which can be redefined, are listed below:

&ELSE;

Terminates the first part of an IF condition. If the IF condition was “true,” it

is now treated as “false” and all template text up to the closing ENDIF is

skipped. If the IF condition was “false,” it is now treated as “true” and all

template text up to the closing ENDIF is processed.

&ENDIF;

Terminates an IF condition or an IF/ELSE combination.

&FIELDS;

Only used for test conditions

[false if story fields section is empty or blank]

[true if story fields section is not empty]

Entity Explanation (Continued)

Opening NSML Tag Output String Closing NSML Tag Output String

BODY “” /BODY “\r\n”

AESET “” /AESET “\r\n”

P “\r\n<p>” /P “</p>”

I “<i>” /I “</i>”

U “<u>” /U “</u>”

15 Web Publishing and Access

436

Here are some examples:

nThe delimiting quotation mark must immediately follow the end of the entity, namely the

semicolon.

Use \r and \n in the <string> to include a carriage return or a line feed.

B “<b>” /B “</b>”

PI “<i>” /PI “</i>”

CC “<b><i>” /CC “</i></b>”

A “\r\n”

AE “\r\n” /AE “\r\n”

AP “\r\n<p>” /AP “</p>”

MC “\r\n” /MC “\r\n”

PB “\r\n”

TAB “\r\n”

WP “\r\n”

RTL “<rtl>” /RTL “</rtl>”

BG “<bg>” /BG “</bg>”

LINK “<link>” /LINK “</link>”

SHOW “<show>” /SHOW “</show>”

URL “<url>” /URL “</url>”

HIDDEN “<hidden>” /HIDDEN “</hidden>”

Opening NSML Tag Output String Closing NSML Tag Output String

Example Purpose

&DEFINE:P;“output this”

Redefines the open paragraph conversion.

&DEFINE:/P;“found a close paragraph tag”

Redefines the close paragraph conversion

Web Publishing

437

The DEFINE statement can also be used in the HTML skeleton form to modify the display

format for date or time fields.

Statement Explanation

&DEFINE:<type>;“<format>”

&DEFINE:<type>;‘<format>’

Define default formats. The format includes all characters

up to the matching delimiting quote (this allows inclusion

of the other quotation mark within the format).

The <type> can be DATE or TIME.

The default format for DATE is:

“%D:%T”

The default format for TIME is:

“%M:%S”

DATE applies to <date> fields. TIME applies to

<duration> fields.

Format strings are defined by the strftime function.

You can still include a format string to override the default

when referencing a <date> or <duration> fields

individually, as in:

&f-create-date;“%c”

nA lowercase c is recommended; an uppercase C would denote the two digit century, such as

&f-create-date;”%C”

&DEFINE:<entity name>;“<string>”

Define standard entity representations for each of the four

characters: left and right angle brackets (< >), ampersand

(&), and quotation mark (“).

&DEFINE:lt;“...”

&DEFINE:gt;“...”

&DEFINE:amp;“...”

&DEFINE:quot;“...”

The default definitions are (respectively):

, and

15 Web Publishing and Access

438

SHOW and HIDE statements can also be used in the HTML skeleton to modify output.

Web Story Directives

Any story can contain Web Story directives. Directives are included as text. This allows

system administrators to embed HTML codes within stories. Without these directives,

characters and symbols such as the greater than sign (

) would normally be translated to

and not appear as HTML coding when exported to the Web server.

Statement Explanation

&SHOW:A;

Causes output of tags for locating and referencing anchors

and production cues (anchored elements). This is the

default, which is the opposite functionality prior to

introduction of this entity.

The string produced whenever an NSML <a> tag is

encountered in the “template” is:

For an NSML <ae> tag, the string produced is:

The <id> is the production cue identifier, typically a small

number.

This results in strings such as “[1]” appearing as HTML

links in the text at the anchor point and also preceding the

production cue. The two links point at each other.

&HIDE:A;

Suppresses output of HTML anchor tags.

&HIDE:COMMENTS;

Empty fields and non-present fields in the HTML output

are noted with comments similar to the following:

If the

&HIDE:COMMENTS;

entity is processed, comments

normally generated for the conditions “field not present”

and “field is empty” will not be output to the HTML

document.

This does not affect comments generated from error

conditions.

&SHOW:COMMENTS;

Generation of these HTML comments can be turned back

on using

&SHOW:COMMENTS;

Web Publishing

439

Optional Format Strings

Optional format strings apply to date and time-related fields that you use for the field ID

story entity references. You can add several time or date elements together (after the field

ID) to create an optional format string, which changes the presentation of the time or date

information field.

nThe optional time format strings must be enclosed within quotes in the HTML export

template.

The time and date elements to use in an optional format string to modify date and time field

ID areas may vary depending on the version of Linux. Use info strftime at the console to get

the format directives.

The difference between %U and %W is which day is considered the first day of the week.

Week number 01 is the first week in January, with a Sunday for %U or a Monday for %W.

Week number 00 contains those days before the first Sunday or Monday in January for %U

and %W, respectively.

Only certain fields—those relating to time and date—can recognize the optional format

string, made up of the time and date elements. Specify these fields in field IDs, using the

types shown here:

Directive Explanation

#HTMLSTART#

All text in the story after this directive is processed as literal text. Four

characters—<, >, &, and ”— are output without being converted into HTML

entities. Furthermore, all NSML tags are stripped from the input stream so

they are not converted. However, to make viewing the HTML source a little

easier, each paragraph closing tag is converted and output as a

Carriage-Return / Line-Feed pair.

#HTMLEND#

This will terminate the processing of story text as literal text.

FIELD TYPE

(* cell type) Description Default Format

AIR-DATE The date and time a story airs, using the show timing

function

%D%T

CREATE-DATE Seconds since January 1, 1970 00:00:00 GMT %D%T

MODIFY-DATE Seconds since January 1, 1970 00:00:00 GMT %D%T

15 Web Publishing and Access

440

nDuration Control and Calendar Control are possible cell types for data entry, not to be

confused with the standard iNEWS field types provided in the rest of the previous table.

See “Form Field Types and Definitions” on page 208 for more information.

If you use field names in the field IDs without creating an optional format string, default

formats for the field types, as listed in the previous table’s “Default Format” column, are

used.

For instance, you decide to include a story creation date in the HTML template. Instead of

using defaults provided for the CREATE-DATE field (%D %T - date as %m/%d/%y and

time as %h:%m:%s), you want the creation date information to appear differently.

• So, you should choose the following date and time elements:

- %a – Abbreviated weekday name

- %B – Full month name

- %d – Day of month (01 - 31)

- %Y – Year as ccyy

-%r – Time as %I:%M:%S [AM|PM]

• Then, enter elements in the optional format string, enclosing the string within quotes.

The field_ID story entity reference looks like this:

&f-create-date;“%a %B %d %Y %r”

The field_ID is embedded in HTML format tags. If the HTML export template is

applied, the entry looks like this:

<b>CREATE-DATE:</b>&f-create-date;“%a %B %d %Y %r”

MOS-DURATION Runtime, in seconds, of a MOS item that is inside the

Story Form

%M:%S

AUDIO-TIME Audio read time of the story in seconds. Normally

based on read rate and word count, but can be

entered by the user

%M:%S

BACK-TIME Hard in-time of the story, in seconds %M:%S

CUME-TIME Hard out-time of the story, in seconds %M:%S

Duration Control (*) Number of seconds %M:%S

Calendar Control (*) Seconds since January 1, 1970 00:00:00 GMT %D%T

FIELD TYPE

(* cell type) Description Default Format

Web Publishing

441

Data from the field would appear on the page similar to this:

CREATE-DATE: Sat July 10 2004 5:30:45 PM

nWithout the spaces between each element inside the quotation marks—such as,

“%a%B%d%y%r”—the date will appear as one continuous word. For instance:

CREATE-DATE: SatJuly1020045:30:45PM

Sample HTML Export Template

The following sample shows a news story in an iNEWS HTML export template used to

define the appearance of the story, and the resulting HTML output.

Characteristics of the Story

The story has the following characteristics:

• TITLE field with an associated value:

TEASE-BREAK

• MODIFY-DATE field with an associated value:

862347754

• PRESENTER field with an associated value:

SB*

• PAGE-NUMBER field with an associated value:

• Two production cues (each formatted in its own paragraph):

VO ENG

Coming Up Next…

•Story text:

(BELL)

STILL AHEAD ON EYEWITNESS NEWS...

THE MAXWELL CLUB HONORS SOME OF OUR AREA'S BEST HIGH SCHOOL FOOTBALL

PLAYERS. YOU'LL MEET THEM... COMING UP.

15 Web Publishing and Access

442

Contents of the Export Template

An HTML export template is applied to the story. The template’s contents look like this:

<html>

<head>

<title>&f-title;</title>

<h1>

&f-title;

</h1>

</head>

<body>

<tr>

<b>PAG:</b>&f-PAGE-NUMBER;

</td>

<b>MOD-DATE:</b>&f-modify-date;

</td>

<b>PRESENTER:</b>&f-PRESENTER;

</td>

</tr>

<tr>

<h2><th colspan=2 align="left" align="left">Story:

</th></h2>

Web Publishing

443

</tr>

<tr>

<td colspan=2 align="left" width="100%"> <p>&BODY;

</td>

</tr>

<tr>

<h2><th colspan=2 align="left" >Anchored Element List:</th></h2>

</tr>

<tr>

&AESET;

</td>

</tr>

</table>

</body>

</html>

The next section shows the HTML output as a result of this process.

15 Web Publishing and Access

444

Resulting HTML Output

<html>

<head>

<title>TEASE/BREAK</title>

<h1>

TEASE/BREAK

</h1>

</head>

<body>

<tr>

<b>PAG:</b>75

</td>

<b>MOD-DATE:</b>04/29/97 14:02:34

</td>

<b>PRESENTER:</b>SB*

</td>

</tr>

<tr>

<h2><th colspan=2 align="left" align="left">Story: </th></h2>

</tr>

<tr>

Web Publishing

445

(BELL)

STILL AHEAD ON EYEWITNESS NEWS...

THE MAXWELL CLUB HONORS SOME OF

OUR AREA'S BEST HIGH SCHOOL FOOTBALL

PLAYERS. YOU'LL MEET THEM... COMING

UP.

</td>

</tr>

<tr>

<h2><th colspan=2 align="left" >Anchored Element List:</th></h2>

</tr>

<tr>

<p>Coming Up Next…

</td>

</tr>

</table>

</body>

</html>

15 Web Publishing and Access

446

Publishing iNEWS Stories to the Web

After the Web Publishing configuration is complete you can publish stories to the Web.

To publish to the Web:

1. Select a story from the news database.

2. Merge pieces of the story with an HTML export template to recreate the story as an

HTML document.

3. Use the txnet facility to put the HTML document onto another computer, known as the

Web Publishing server.

4. Revise the HTML-formatted story, if necessary, to complete the publishing process.

Web Access

The Web Access software, which is normally installed with your iNEWS newsroom

computer system, is used to:

• Access the database

• Format the story the user selects into Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), using the

default HTML export template

• Present the story to the user’s Web browser

Formatting of information sent to the user’s Web browser is configurable by the system

administrator. How the directory listing, queue contents, and stories are converted to HTML

for presentation are governed by HTML templates inside the database.

The Web Server

The Apache Web server is loaded on iNEWS Servers as part of the Linux system, and

automatically launches when those servers are booted. You can check to see if the Apache

Web server is currently running on your system by pointing your browser to:

http://<servername>

The <servername> is the iNEWS Server name you normally log in to from the iNEWS

Workstation. If the Web server is running, you should see a test page with the Apache logo.

Web Access

447

Logging in via Web Access

You must have at least one Web session configured on your system to log in over the Web.

The format of a Web session resource in the /site/config file is:

websession <session number>

For instance:

websession 401

Each websession resource must be included in a reslist list in each appropriate host section

of the /site/config file.

To log in to the iNEWS database with a Web browser:

tEnter a URL in the following format:

http://<servername>/cgi-bin/NewsWeb

This will open a page containing a drop-down list of iNEWS Servers accessible via the

Web. When you select one of those servers and click submit, you will be taken to a login

screen. If you know the servers configured for Web Access, you may include their

names in the URL to go directly to the login dialog page:

http://<servername>/cgi-bin/NewsWeb.nrcs-a

At the login dialog screen, enter your user name and password and click login. When

logging in over the Web for read-only database access, group security on the system is

respected. Users who do not have access to queues and directories protected by a

read-group will not see those areas when they log in over the Web.

nThe message of the day screen is not displayed when logging in via a Web browser.

Web Acess Story Templates

When users view a story in their Web browser, the system presents the story in HTML

format. The appearance of this story is configurable by the system administrator via a Web

Access template, similar to the HTML export templates used for Web publishing.

When accessing iNEWS over the Web, the story form assigned to a story is noted and a

corresponding Web Access form is searched for under queues specified by the

Q_WEBACC_FORMS entry in the system’s queues dictionary. The default location for the

Web Access form (HTML export template) is SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.

The appropriate Web Access form is sought from:

SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.<first letter of story form>.<story form>

For instance, if the form assigned to the story was called script, then the Web Access

form—that is, the top HTML export template—in the queue,

SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.S.SCRIPT would be used to display the story. Stories assigned the

15 Web Publishing and Access

448

rundown story form would be displayed with the Web Access form in

SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.R.RUNDOWN. Stories assigned the memo story form would look

for the top HTML export template in the queue, SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.M.MEMO, for

their display on the Web browser.

If a corresponding Web Access form was not created, the system uses the HTML export

template in the default Web Access queue as specified by the W_WEBACC_FORM entry in

the words dictionary. The default value is ACCESS-FORM. So, a story assigned a form that

does not have a corresponding SYSTEM.WEBFORMS queue will be displayed with the

system-wide default HTML export template in

SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.A.ACCESS-FORM.

nIf a system-wide default Web Access form has not been created, the story will be displayed

with a hard-coded default.

The following Web Access form locations will be checked, in order, for an HTML export

template to display stories:

•

SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.<first letter of story form>.<story form>

•

SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.A.ACCESS-FORM

•

Hard-coded internal default

You may create HTML export templates to define the appearance of stories viewed via a

Web browser. The export template is stored as an iNEWS database story whose text is in

HTML with optional embedded references to story entities. The iNEWS system contains an

HTML export template to use as the default, but you can customize it or create new

templates, using story entities. A full listing of all entities available to Web Access forms

used for database browsing appears in “Template Entities” on page 451.

nThe same HTML export templates set up on your system for exporting stories in HTML

format can also be used when browsing the database over the Web. See “The HTML Export

Template” on page 432 for more information.

Web Access

449

Default Story Template

The following is a default story template provided with the iNEWS software.

<html>

<head>

<title>&F-TITLE;</title>

</head>

<body>

<tr>

<td colspan=1 width='50%'><b>CREATED BY:</b>&F-CREATE-BY;

</td>

<td colspan=1 width='50%'><b>CREATED:</b>&F-CREATE-DATE;

</td>

</tr>

<tr>

<td colspan=1 width='50%'><b>PAGE:</b>&F-PAGE-NUMBER;

</td>

<td colspan=1 width='50%'><b>MODIFIED:</b>&F-MODIFY-DATE;

</td>

</tr>

<th align=left colspan=2>Story:

</th></h2>

</tr>

<tr>

<td colspan=2 width='100%'>&BODY;

15 Web Publishing and Access

450

</td>

</tr>

<th align=left colspan=2>Anchored Element List:

</th></h2>

</tr>

<tr>

<td colspan=2 width='100%'>&AESET

</td>

</tr>

</table>

</body>

</html>

Web Access Directory and Queue Templates

The iNEWS system allows the system administrator to customize the display of directory

listings and listings of a queue’s contents via system-wide directory and queue HTML

export templates rather than predefined formats. However, it is not necessary to customize

directory and queue templates. Defaults can be used, if desired. See “Default Directory

Template” on page 456 and “Default Queue Template” on page 458 for more information.

The template used for directory pages is located in the queue defined by the

Q_WEBACC_FORMS and W_WEBACC_FORM definitions

(SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.A.ACCESS-FORM). To distinguish this directory template from

the story template, the directory template is identified by having the word directory as the

first word in the index field (also known as the sortfield). Only a single template is required

for directory page construction.

The template used for queue pages is located in the queue defined by the

Q_WEBACC_FORMS definition and the queue form name assigned to the queue being

displayed. This is similar to how story forms are handled. To identify the template as a

queue template, the word queue must appear as the first word in the index field (also known

as the sortfield). This allows both the queue template and story template with the same name

to reside in the same queue.

Web Access

451

If a queue template is not found using the queue form name of the queue, the system looks in

the queue defined by the Q_WEBACC_FORMS and W_WEBACC_FORM definitions,

similar to story templates. The queue template is identified with the word queue as the first

word in the index field.

Put the system-wide default Web Access form (HTML export template) at the top of the

SYSTEM.WEBFORMS.A.ACCESS-FORM queue. Place stories titled directory and queue

beneath the form used by default to display story contents.

Template Entities

The following table lists all of the available entities that can be placed in either a story,

directory, or queue template. The Q- and D- entities are only valid for Web Access. They are

not available for Web Publishing. If an entity is not valid for a certain type of template, it is

noted in the entity description.

Each entity has IF condition definitions included following the text handling description. If

an entity is not valid for a certain type of template, it will always result in a false condition

when tested. Empty and all blank fields produce a false IF condition. Only fields present in

the story and containing at least one non-blank character cause a true IF condition.

nDo not forget to precede the entity with an ampersand and close it with a semicolon, such as

&F-TITLE;

&DEFINE:P;”BR”

Entity Explanation

&BODY;

Interpolate story BODY section in place of entity.

[false if story body section is empty]

[true if story body section is not empty]

&AESET;

Interpolate story AESET section in place of entity.

[false if story aeset section is empty]

[true if story aeset section is not empty]

15 Web Publishing and Access

452

&F-<name>;

Interpolate the named field from the story in place of the entity.

If the entity is one of F-AIR-DATE, F-MOS-DURATION,

F-CREATE-DATE, F-MODIFY-DATE, F-AUDIO-TIME, F-BACK-TIME,

F-CUME-TIME, F-TOTAL-TIME, or F-TAPE-TIME, the field is output

using the strftime function.

Furthermore, a formatting string can follow these fields. It must

immediately follow the ‘;’ of the entity and be enclosed in single or double

quotation marks.

Default format for the *-DATE fields is “%D %T”. Default format for the

*-TIME fields is “%M:%S”.

[true if the field is present in the story]

[false if the field is not present in the story or is blank or empty]

&IF:<entity name>;

If the entity yields a true condition, process template text up to a closing

ELSE or ENDIF in the output stream. If the entity yields a false condition,

skip over all template text up to the next ELSE or ENDIF (not output).

Empty and blank fields are treated as a false IF condition. Only fields

which are present and contain at least one non-blank character cause a true

IF condition.

&ELSE;

Terminates the first part of an IF condition. If the IF condition was “true,”

it is now treated as “false” and all template text up to the closing ENDIF is

skipped. If the IF condition was “false,” it is now treated as “true” and all

template text up to the closing ENDIF is processed.

&ENDIF;

Terminates an IF condition or an IF/ELSE combination

&FIELDS;

Only used for test conditions

[false if story fields section is empty or blank]

[true if story fields section is not empty]

&REPEAT;

Bracket a section of the template text, up to an ENDREPEAT entity. The

bracketed text will be processed for each object to be displayed on the

page. This is only valid for directory and queue templates. If there are no

objects to be displayed, the directory or queue is empty, and all of the

bracketed text is skipped over.

&ENDREPEAT;

Terminates a REPEAT section. If there is another subdirectory or queue

entry to be displayed on the page, template processing will continue at the

preceding REPEAT entity. If there are no more objects to be displayed,

template processing continues at the point following this entity.

Entity Explanation (Continued)

Web Access

453

&D-CHILD;

Interpolate current subdirectory name in place of the entity. Not valid for

queue or story templates.

[always true]

&D-COUNT;

Interpolate number of sub-directories contained in current directory. This

is intended primarily for test conditions, to determine if a directory is

empty. Not valid for queue or story templates.

[false for empty directory]

[true for directory with at least one entry]

&D-CURRENT;

Interpolate a link reference, such as HREF, to current sub-directory entry in

place of the entity. Not valid for queue or story templates.

[false for an empty directory]

[true for a directory with at least one subdirectory]

&D-DIRECTORY;

Nothing, only used for test condition. Not valid for queue or story

templates. This is the opposite of D-QUEUE.

[true if the current subdirectory is a directory]

[false if the current subdirectory is a queue]

&D-LOGOUT;

Interpolate a link reference, such as HREF, which includes a Web Access

server logout request in place of the entry.

[always true]

&D-NAME;

Interpolate the current directory name in place of the entity.

[always true]

&D-PARENT;

Interpolate a link reference, such as HREF, to the parent directory of the

current directory in place of the entity.

[false when current directory is the root directory]

[true when current directory is not the root directory]

&D-QUEUE;

Nothing, only used for test condition. Not valid for queue or story

templates. This is the opposite of D-DIRECTORY.

[true if the current subdirectory is a queue]

[false if the current subdirectory is a directory]

&D-SERVER;

Interpolate the server name (computer name) in place of the entity.

[always true]

Entity Explanation (Continued)

15 Web Publishing and Access

454

&Q-COUNT;

Interpolate number of queue entries contained on current page. This is

intended primarily for test conditions, to determine if a queue is empty.

Not valid for directory templates.

[false for empty queue]

[true for queue with at least one entry]

[always true for story template]

&Q-CURRENT;

Interpolate a link reference, such as HREF, to current queue entry in place

of the entity. This includes the complete URL-string to identify the current

story position within the queue. Not valid for directory templates.

[false for empty queue]

[true for queue with at least one entry]

[always true for story template]

&Q-HREF;

alias for Q-CURRENT (preferred name)

&Q-LOGOUT;

Interpolate a link reference, such as HREF, which includes a Web Access

server logout request in place of the entry.

[always true]

&Q-MODIFY-DATE;

Interpolate modified time of current queue entry in place of the entity. Not

valid for directory templates. The modified time is formatted using the

strftime function with a default format definition of “%D %T”. This

format can be redefined via the DEFINE:DATE entity described below. Just

as with *-DATE fields, you can supply a format following this entity.

[always true]

nThis is the queue entry modified time and NOT the story modified time.

&Q-NAME;

Interpolate current queue name in place of the entity.

[always true]

&Q-NEXT;

Interpolate a link reference, such as HREF, to the next queue entry within

the queue. This includes the complete URL-string to identify the next

queue entry position within the queue. Not valid for directory templates.

[false in queue template when current page contains last queue entry]

[true in queue template when current page does not contain last queue

entry]

[false in story template when current story is the last story in the queue]

[true in story template when current story is not the last story in the queue]

Entity Explanation (Continued)

Web Access

455

See “NSML to HTML Conversion” on page 435 for more information.

&Q-PARENT;

Interpolate a link reference, such as HREF, to parent directory of current

queue in place of the entity.

[always true]

&Q-PREV;

Interpolate a link reference, such as HREF, to the previous queue entry

within the queue. This includes the complete URL-string to identify the

previous queue entry position within the queue. Not valid for directory

templates.

[false in queue template when current page contains first queue entry]

[true in queue template when current page does not contain first queue

entry]

[false in story template when current story is the first story in the queue]

[true in story template when current story is not the first story in the queue]

&Q-QUICK-INDEX;

Interpolate quick index contents of current queue entry. Not valid for

directory templates.

[always true]

nTwenty (20) characters are always interpolated. This is different than story field contents

where only the text present is interpolated.

&Q-SERVER;

Interpolate the server name (computer name) in place of the entity.

[always true]

&Q-STORY-TIME;

Interpolate story read time of current queue entry in place of the entity. Not

valid for directory templates. The modified time is formatted using the

strftime function with a default format definition of “%M:%S”. This

format can be redefined via the DEFINE:TIME entity described below. Just

as with *-TIME fields, you can supply a format following this entity.

[always true]

Entity Explanation (Continued)

15 Web Publishing and Access

456

Default Directory Template

The following is the default directory template included with the iNEWS software:

<html>

<head>

&IF:D-PARENT;

<title>&D-SERVER;</title>

&ELSE;

<title>&D-SERVER;:&D-NAME;</title>

&ENDIF;

</head>

<h3>

&IF:D-PARENT;

<img hspace=5 src=’/icons/folder.open.gif’>[&D-SERVER;]&D-NAME;

&ELSE;

<img hspace=5 src='/icons/comp.gray.gif'>[&D-SERVER;]

&ENDIF;

</h3>

<img src='/icons/blank.gif' hspace=5><a href=&D-LOGOUT;>[Logout]</a>

&IF:D-PARENT;

<img src='/icons/back.gif' hspace=5 border=0>Return to Parent Directory

</a>

&ENDIF;

<hr>

Web Access

457

&IF:D-COUNT;

&REPEAT;

&IF:D-QUEUE;

&ELSE;

&ENDIF;

&D-CHILD;

</a>

<br>

&ENDREPEAT;

&ELSE;

<img src='/icons/blank.gif' hspace=5>[Empty]<br>

&ENDIF;

</body>

</html>

15 Web Publishing and Access

458

Default Queue Template

The following is the default queue template included with the iNEWS software:

<html>

<head><title>&Q-SERVER;:&Q-NAME;</title></head>

<body>

<h3>

[&Q-SERVER;]&Q-NAME;

</h3>

<hr>

<img src='/icons/blank.gif' hspace=5><a href=&Q-LOGOUT;>[Logout]</a>

<img src='/icons/back.gif' hspace=5 border=0>Return to Parent

Directory

</a>

&IF:Q-PREV;

15 Web Publishing and Access

460

<img src='/icons/left.gif' hspace=5 border=0>[Previous Page]

</a>

&ENDIF;

&IF:Q-NEXT;

[Next Page]<img src='/icons/right.gif' hspace=5 border=0>

</a>

&ENDIF;

&ELSE;

<img src='/icons/blank.gif' hspace=5 border=0>[Empty]<br>

&ENDIF;

</body>

</html>

Web Access

461

Web Access Configuration

Error messages returned by the Web Access server can be adjusted by editing a system

dictionary. In addition, various default parameters can be adjusted.

Configuration parameters for the Web Access server must be included in the file

/site/web/configuration, accessible by the Web Access server on the computer on which the

Web Access server is running. This file is read once when the Web Access server starts.

Parameters Definition

announce attempted logins=<value>

If the value is non-zero, all unsuccessful logins

will be printed on the console. This includes

failures due to an unknown user name, an invalid

password, or a blacklisted user. The default is

zero (0).

announce logins=<value>

If the value is non-zero, all logins will be printed

on the console. The default is zero (0).

diagnostics=<value>

This is primarily for debugging purposes. The

value is a bitmask, which controls printing of

diagnostics. For instance, if the value is odd, such

as the 1 bit is on, a diagnostic is printed every

time a session is requested but all session licenses

are in use.The default is zero (0).

hard expire = <seconds>

Number of seconds of inactivity which will force

a reauthentication by the user and release the Web

session for another user to log in to. The default is

1200 (20 minutes).

putenv=<environment string>

Allows environment settings to be put into the

initial environment. The environment string

should be of the form name=value. This will be

primarily used for debugging purposes.

queue entries per page = <number>

Number of stories to put on a queue page. This

can be a number from 1 to 50. The default is 50.

15 Web Publishing and Access

462

The following definitions must be present in the file /site/web/strings, accessible by the Web

Access server on the computer on which the Web Access server program is running. The

format of this file is the same as all dictionary files. This file is read once when the Web

Access server starts. Definitions can be localized, as necessary.

soft expire = <seconds>

Number of seconds of inactivity before the

session license can be reused for another session.

This will only affect a user if the server gets a

session request and does not have any free session

licenses. The server attempts to obtain the oldest

session license—that is, the one that has been

inactive the longest. If that session has been

inactive for more than the soft expire interval, it

will be reused. (Anytime a session is inactive for

more than the hard expire interval, the user will

be required to reauthenticate the session.) The

default is 300 (5 minutes).

Parameters Definition (Continued)

session error /iNEWS news session error

session login /iNEWS news session login

session terminated /Your iNEWS news session has been successfully terminated!

offline /iNEWS news is offline.

try again later /Please try again later.

cannot set subdirectory /Cannot set subdirectory.

cannot open dir file /Cannot open directory file.

cannot open queue /Cannot open queue.

cannot access /Cannot access

invalid certificate /Invalid session certificate

no license /No Web Access licenses available.

name /Name:

password /Password:

clear login /Clear Form

Web Access

463

enter login /Please enter your name and password

reauthenticate /iNEWS news Web session reauthentication

session expired /Your iNEWS news session authentication has expired

reenter login /Please re-enter your user name and password.

not authorized /You are not authorized to access the iNEWS database

bad login /The user name and/or password you entered are not valid.

no login see admin /If you do not have a login, see your system administrator.

story unavailable /You cannot access this story.

cgi short post /input length less than CONTENT_LENGTH

cgi empty post /CONTENT_LENGTH is missing

cgi empty query /QUERY_STRING is null

cgi unknown request /unknown REQUEST_METHOD

cgi expression error /Expression error

cgi upload error /Create of upload file failed

cgi no request /REQUEST_METHOD is missing

;

;Used by “NewsWeb” script

;

no servers /There are no iNEWS Servers configured.

server session /iNEWS Server selection

server error /iNEWS Server selection Error

server admin /See your system administrator

server submit /submit

server select /Please select an iNEWS Server and click on “submit.”

15 Web Publishing and Access

464

16 iNEWS Projects

The iNEWS Project feature is a way of categorizing stories by topic so that news teams

working on a particular topic can find everything related to it in a single place, without

moving or copying the original source information from its current location in the database.

Facets are sub-topics, providing additional granularity to projects. This chapter covers the

setup and use of projects and facets within an iNEWS system.

This chapter contains the following main sections:

•Overview of Projects and Facets

•Setting up the iNEWS Database for Projects

•Creating Projects

•Creating Facets

•Associating Stories with Projects or Facets

Overview of Projects and Facets

At an iNEWS Workstation, projects appear in a tree-style structure in the Directory panel via

the Project tab. Like directories, projects are expandable, which lets users view each

project’s ALL queue, QUERY queue, and sub-topics, known as facets. The following

graphic shows a variety of sample projects and facets.

For instance, the Financial project has facets for topics like Recalls, Stock Market, and

Taxes.

Setting up the iNEWS Database for Projects

467

Every project has an ALL queue that displays in the Queue panel all stories associated with

the project and its facets. Any indexed story can be associated with a project or facet. Stories

associated with a project retain their original source permissions; therefore, a user without

read access to a story’s source queue will not be able to see that story in a project to which its

associated even if the user has read access to the project.

Every project has a QUERY queue—identified by the magnifying glass icon—which is the

search queue that runs the project’s query. For more information about search queues, see

XREF.

nSystem administrators can view a list of existing projects and facets in the system from the

console by typing,

list p

. Projects and facets are distinguished from each other in the list

by the letters P (for project) and F (for facet). A question mark (?) is used to indicate

projects or facets belonging to other systems, which cannot be used by the current iNEWS

system.

cDo not use the dbdump command to transfer projects across systems. The dbdump

command should only be used for project backup.

Setting up the iNEWS Database for Projects

Before users can benefit from the Projects feature, the iNEWS database must be set up to

properly handle projects and their facets.

To set up iNEWS for projects:

1. Run dbgen p to create the project file.

2. Run dbgen m to re-initialize the mailbox to handle additional updates that come with

projects.

3. Modify user accounts to enable the creation of new projects and facets by certain users.

Such permissions may be assigned from the console or an iNEWS Workstation:

a. From the console, use the utraits command in the following format:

utraits <user> +mp

For instance, type:

utraits jdoe +mp

b. At an iNEWS Workstation, select Tools > Options > Users and search for the

user(s) you want to permit to modify projects. Then click the Modify button and

from the Modify User Account dialog box, select the Manage Projects check box

located in the Session Features section of the dialog box.

16 iNEWS Projects

468

Creating Projects

Before you can create projects, you must be logged in to an iNEWS Workstation as a user

with proper permission (user trait) to manage projects.

To create a project:

1. Select the Project tab.

2. Select Project > New Project from the menu bar.

The Create New Project/Facet dialog box appears.

Creating Projects

469

3. Type the name of the project. Project names can be up to 40 characters in length and can

contain spaces, hyphens (-), or ampersands (&), but they cannot contain periods.

nYou cannot create a facet for the project until after the project itself is created. Therefore, the

Facet and Facet Form fields will appear disabled when creating a project.

4. (Optional) Enter a description of the project.

5. Click Modify to create a query for the project.

The Set Query String dialog box appears in which you can select the indexed queue or

queues you want to query and the search criteria you want to use.

16 iNEWS Projects

470

For instance, if you are creating a project for your planned news coverage of upcoming

elections, you can create a query to search through political wires for various

candidates.

To select multiple queues, hold the Control key down and click two or more indexed

queues you want to query.

You can use the Search For area of the Search Criteria tab to define the query, or write it

out using the Raw Query Editor. The Date Search area lets you define a time frame for

the query; you can search by the date a story aired or was created, or by last date a story

was modified. Maximum hits can also be set in the Set Query String dialog box.

6. Click OK. Your search criteria is saved and the Set Query String dialog box closes.

7. In the Create New Project/Facet dialog box, continue the configuration by setting a read

group, if any. The default is ! <none>. If set to ! <none>, no read group is defined;

therefore, no restriction is applied to the project, so all users will be able to see the

project and its facets.

8. Set the start and end date, if necessary. These dates define the date range in which the

project appears in iNEWS Workstations. Projects will no longer appear after midnight

(00:00) on the morning of the end date. Projects cannot have an end date prior to the

start date.

Creating Facets

471

nUsers can view expired projects and facets by right-clicking on one and selecting Show

Expired Projects.

9. Define which forms should be used for the ALL and QUERY queues. For more

information about queue forms, see “Forms” on page 197.

10. The Notify Users box defines who receives notifications when project stories are added

or modified. These notifications appear in the status bar of iNEWS Workstations. As the

project administrator creating the project, you can select individual users or groups of

users to add to the Notify Users list, but after the project is created, users with read

access to the project can subscribe to receive notifications by right-clicking on the

project in the Directory panel.

11. After you’ve completed setting up your project, click OK to save it. The project will

appear on the Project tab in the Directory panel.

Creating Facets

Facets are sub-topics within a project that enable additional granularity in organization. You

can create a facet after the parent project to which that facet will belong is created.

To create a facet:

1. Select the Project tab.

2. Right-click on the parent project.

3. Select New Facet.

The Create New Project/Facet dialog box appears with some information already filled

in and displayed as read only.

16 iNEWS Projects

472

For instance, the following example shows the dialog box as it would appear when

creating a new facet for a project called Elections.

4. Type the name of the facet in the Facet field. Facet names can be up to 40 characters in

length and can contain spaces, hyphens (-), or ampersands (&), but they cannot contain

periods.

5. Set the start and end date, if necessary. These dates define the date range in which the

facet appears in iNEWS Workstations. Facets will no longer appear after midnight

(00:00) on the morning of the end date. Facets cannot have an end date prior to the start

date. Facets also cannot have start or end dates beyond those defined by their parent

projects.

nUsers can view expired projects and facets by right-clicking on one and selecting Show

Expired Projects.

6. Define which queue form should be used for facets. For more information about queue

forms, see “Forms” on page 197.

Associating Stories with Projects or Facets

473

7. The Notify Users box defines who receives notifications when facet stories are added or

modified. These notifications appear in the status bar at at iNEWS Workstations. As the

project administrator creating the facet, you can select individual users or groups of

users to add to the Notify Users list, but after the facet is created, users with read access

to the project can subscribe to receive notifications by right-clicking on the facet in the

Directory panel.

8. After you’ve completed setting up your facet, click OK to save it. The facet will appear

on the Project tab in the Directory panel.

Associating Stories with Projects or Facets

Any indexed story can be associated with a project or facet.

To associate an indexed story to a project or facet:

1. From an iNEWS Workstation, navigate to an indexed queue in the Directory panel, and

open it.

2. In the Queue panel, right-click on the story and select Associate Project/Facet.

3. When iNEWS requests confirmation that youwant to edit the story, click Yes.

The Associate Projects to Current Story dialog box appears.

16 iNEWS Projects

474

4. Select the project(s) or facet(s) to which you want to associate the story.

5. Click Save.

If a story is associated with a project or facet, a Project tab is displayed in the Story panel

next to the Story tab when a user opens that story. The Story tab appears on top by default

and displays the body of the story as usual, including production cues and machine

instructions, if any. Users can click a story’s Project tab to view the projects and facets with

which that story is associated, along with related stories, if any.

nUsers can also use the Shift+ALT+Left or Right Arrow keystroke combinations to navigate

between the Story and Project tabs.

ACommand References

Most of your system’s commands are special commands provided by Avid. The commands

you are most likely to need are listed and explained in this appendix, along with examples.

cSome available commands are meant to be used only by Avid technicians or under the

supervision of Avid personnel. These commands may cause damage if used improperly.

They are listed in this appendix on “Commands Used by Avid Personnel Only” on page

476.

This appendix contains the following main sections:

•Programs Invoked by iNEWS

•Commands Used by Avid Personnel Only

•Linux Commands Used in iNEWS

•Console Control Commands

•Console Server Commands

•Job List Commands

•Dialog Commands

476

Programs Invoked by iNEWS

The following programs are invoked and used by your iNEWS system. Do not use them as

commands.

Commands Used by Avid Personnel Only

The following commands are used by Avid personnel only.

action ftsseek nxserver

bio.conf gnews parallel

bioserver ismessage rxnet

boot keyword seek

brand license server

cgi-fcgi mailserver snews

connect.sh monitor start

disconnect news webaccserver

distribution newsmail workserver

ftsindex NewsWeb.fcgi

attach detach number

bdump diddle qcheck

binhex edit qstampcheck

biodebug finit qxcheck

biosleep ftsdebug rcat

biostat ifis strerror

catcheck ifmaster sysname

ccuputkey ifsu traverse

cmrdebug keycheck userclean

Linux Commands Used in iNEWS

477

Linux Commands Used in iNEWS

The following Linux commands are available in iNEWS. For further

information, see the reference material that came with your Linux system. To obtain

command syntax and other usage information, type the

man

command along with the

command name.

For instance, to get information about the

grep

command, type:

man grep

dbcopy kwdcheck wordbreaks

dbgen link workdebug

dblinks msgdebug wxlate

dblock netterm xi

dbsize nsupgrade

cat kill pwd

cp more rm

date mv sync

df passwd telnet

grep ps

478

Console Control Commands

The table below lists available console control commands and their functions.

Keyword Explanation

bottom

Moves you to the newest (bottom) line in the history.

computer

[computer-name(s) | *]

Selects one or more of your system’s servers, so that you can type a

command on the selected server(s). The command may be abbreviated:

typing c or computer plus the computer name(s) of the servers you want

to select will work. Type the command plus an asterisk (*) to select all

servers, such as c *.

down [number-of-lines |

keyword>

Moves you that many lines forward (down) in the history.

•

down

number-of-lines moves you that many lines forward in the

history. For example, typing down 30 moves you forward 30 lines. If

you follow down with a number greater than the number of lines

between your current position and the last line in the history, the down

command moves you to the last (newest) line in the history.

•

down

keyword searches forward through the history from your current

position for that word. For example, to search forward for a line

containing the word, list, type: down list.

The down command is not case sensitive. If you specify

PEOPLE

people

is a valid match. If the system does not find the keyword before reaching

the bottom of the history, the console beeps and you are returned to the

current line.

•

down

with no parameter moves you down one line.

A wildcard character (#) can be used to match any character or to a search

for a number. For instance, down 160# will search for the number 160

instead of moving down 160 lines.

Exit Function

To leave the console program and return to the MS-DOS prompt:

1. Press the Command key.

2. Press Ctrl+E.

3. Press Enter.

(You cannot type

exit

at the Command prompt.)

Type

console

at the prompt to restart the console program.

Console Control Commands

479

function-key-number=

definition

Assigns a command to a console function key. For instance, to assign the

list s command to the F9 key, type f9=list s. To include Command and

Enter keys in a function key definition, use braces. For instance, to

include those keystrokes in the previous assignment example, type

f9={list s}. To list the current assignment of a function key, type the key

number by itself plus Enter on the command line. The valid range is

f1-f14. Avid recommends no definition be made for F14, which defaults

to the Command key. F13 corresponds to the plus (+) key on the numeric

keypad.

list [#-of-lines | all]

Sends some number of lines of the history to the printer attached to the

console multiplexor.

•

list

followed by a number, such as list 3, prints that many lines of

the history beginning at the current line.

•

list all

prints everything from the current line to the

newest line.

•

list

with no parameter prints the current line.

When using

list

, the word

PRINTER

appears on the command line. If

PRINTER

is displayed but nothing is being printed, ensure that the printer

is plugged in, turned on, online, and has paper. The console assumes a

printer is connected to the PC’s parallel port, where output is sent. To

cancel a list command while output is printing, press any key; printing

stops and your position in the history moves to the last line sent to the

printer.

logclose

Writes all history currently in memory to disk and then disables disk

logging. You can use it to change log disks.

logopen

Resumes history disk logging after it has been disabled with logclose.

logout

Logs you out from a remote console. To log out, press the Escape key and

type logout. The remote console displays the

PASSWORD

prompt, and you can then hang up your modem.

modem

Typed at the main console, this command logs out a remote console user.

Before you type this command, ensure that the remote console user is not

in the middle of an operation. The command may be abbreviated: typing

m or modem will work.

Keyword Explanation

480

print [number-of-lines | all]

Displays a number of lines of the history on the console screen.

•

followed by a number displays that many lines of the history

beginning at the current line.

•

print all

displays everything from the current line to the newest

line.

•

with no parameter displays the current line.

To cancel a

command while it is displaying console history, press

any key. The console stops at the line last displayed on the screen, and

your position in the history moves to that line.

reset Attempts to unfreeze one or more of the console’s I/O ports, if

communication has failed between the console and your system’s servers.

To use

reset

, select the servers that are affected, press the Command key,

and type the command. The command may be abbreviated: typing r or

reset will work.

top Moves you to the oldest line in recent console history. To see history older

than this, use the view command to view a history disk log file.

up [number-of-lines |

keyword]

Moves you backward (up) some number of lines in the history.

•

number-of-lines moves you that many lines back in the history.

For example, typing up 30 moves you back 30 lines.

If you follow up with a number greater than the number of lines between

your current position and the first line in the history, the up command

moves you to the first line in the history.

•

keyword searches backward through the history from your current

position for that word. For example, to search backward for a line

containing dbpurge, type up dbpurge.

The up command is not case sensitive. If you specify

PEOPLE

people

is a

valid match. If the system does not find the keyword before reaching the

top of the history, the console beeps and you are returned to the current

line.

•

with no parameter moves you back one line.

A wildcard character (#) can be used to match any character or to a search

for a number. For instance, up 160# will search backwards for the number

160 instead of moving up 160 lines.

Keyword Explanation

Console Control Commands

481

nFor commands that include an individual server letter (A, B, C, or D), use the pound (#)

character to send to multiple servers without typing them individually; The console will

convert the # to the server’s letter, such as A or B. For instance, if you type connect #, the

console sends the command connect A to server A, connect B to server B, and so forth. To

enter a # without it converting to a server letter, press the Enter key on the numeric keypad,

then press Shift+3.

view <drive:filename>

Displays a DOS text file on your console screen.

Use this command to look at old history that has been saved to disk or to

read other disk files, such as the console configuration file. Before you

type this command, use the zoom command to display only one server’s

region on the console screen. (You can choose any server.)

While you are viewing a file, you can only move down through it (as

opposed to back or up in the file). Each time you press the Enter key, the

file scrolls down one line.

To stop viewing the file and return to normal console operation, press the

Command key.

The command may be abbreviated: typing v or view plus the filename

will work.

Restarts the sending and receiving of information by the computers’

console ports.It stands for XON and causes an XON character to be sent

to the server for each selected region. If you are having trouble

communicating with your servers from the console, try this command. If

it does not work, use the reset command.

zoom <computer-name>

Selects a single server and fills the console screen with its region. To

return the screen to its normal split-screen, multi-region state, select any

server with the computer command. The command may be abbreviated:

typing z or zoom plus the computer name will work.

Keyword Explanation

482

Console Server Commands

You must enter commands in lowercase. Your system does not recognize commands entered

in uppercase.

broadcast

broadcast [-dl | --] <message>

Sends a message to everyone logged in. The -d option will issue the broadcast in a popup

window. The -l option will issue the broadcast only to those directly logged in to the local

system, not through Community. For instance, to send a message, select one server and type:

NRCS-A$ broadcast -d System going down at 12:00

nCertain characters are interpreted by the bash shell program, so when including characters,

such as angled brackets, exclamation points, asterisks, or pound signs (<,>,!,*,#) in the

<message>, the entire message should be placed within quotation marks to prevent the

program from interpretting them.

configure

configure [-ns] [<config file> [<system> <computer>]]

Incorporates changes to your configuration file into your system’s operation, and checks the

configuration file for any errors.

For instance, suppose you made changes to rxnet 310 and 311, which are connected to server

A in an AB system. To test these changes, become a superuser and type:

NRCS-A# configure /site/config ab a

If no <config file> is specified, /site/config is used.

If a service has been added to a database story in SYSTEM.SERVICE, use configure -s so

the service can be recognized.

If an Ethernet or Internet address has been added to a database story in the

SYSTEM.CLIENT.WINDOWS directory, use configure -n to validate the address and allow

it to be recognized by the system.

In both cases, you must first take the system offline, enter the configure command, then put

the system back online.

Console Server Commands

483

connect

connect <name> [<option>=<value>] …

The connect command names each server in the system, and tells each how many other

servers there are in the system and how to communicate with them. For instance:

NRCS-A$ connect a net=ab

nThe connect command reads the /site/system file for options. If an option is specified on the

command line and also in the /site/system file, the command line setting takes precedence.

ctraits

ctraits <system name> [<option> <value>]...[+flag]...[-flag]...

The ctraits command adds systems to a Community and defines the order in which a local

system will contact a remote system’s server in the Community, as well as membership,

messaging and connections.

connect Command Options

auto_upgrade=<yes | no> msgserver=<silent | verbose>

clockmax=(12 | 24) name=<a | b | c |d>

disk=<status> net=<name,name[,name]>

excludedvideo=(director | none) pausetimeout=<mm:ss>

highwater=<number_of_blocks> purgelimit=<number of hours>

id=<system name> readrate=<number of words per minute>

lastlogin=<yes | no> remotetimeout=<mm:ss>

load=<number> security=<and | or>

localtimeout=<mm:ss> single=<name> or net=<name,name[,name,name]>

lowwater=<number_of_blocks> timechar=<character>

master=<a| b | c |d> timer=<silent | verbose>

maxhits=<number> wordlength=<number>

min_passwd_length=<number>

484

You must be in superuser mode at the console to use the ctraits command. For instance:

NRCS# ctraits WNWS suffix AB +m +o +i

dbclean

dbclean [-x] <directory name>

When starting up after a power failure, use dbclean to remove any edit or order locks in the

database. Run the command before startup or log everyone off the system by typing

logout all before issuing this command.

The most common usage of dbclean scans all queues except those marked with the skip flag.

To use this command, after logging out all the users, type:

NRCS-A$ logout all

NRCS-A$ dbclean -x .

dbclose

Closes the database.

cIf you use this command while users are active, changes to stories will be lost.

Option or Flag Description

suffix <list> The required suffix option defines the order in which the local system will

contact the remote system's servers. The list is the combination of ABCD in

the preferred order. For instance:

ctraits suffix BA

would first contact the

remote system's B server, and then the A if B was unreachable.

group <group> (Optional) Defines the list of users who are permitted to access the remote

system when connected to the local system. Superusers on the local system

will see all available Community members, regardless of group definitions.

remove (no value) Remove a system from a Community. For example, type

ctraits WNWS

remove

to remove WNWS from WAVD’s Community.

+m | -m This flag is required to allow messaging to the target server.

+o | -o This flag is required to allow outgoing connections to the target server. All +o

systems appear in the Directory panel for permitted users.

+i | -i This flag is required to allow incoming connections from the target server.

Console Server Commands

485

dbdev

Reports the disk partitions in use and the number of blocks allocated for the database on

each disk partition. To find out the size of your database, type:

dbdev

A message similar to the following appears

/dev/rp5 0 60000

/dev/rp6 60001 120123

/dev/rp7 120124 999999

The numbers reported are the first and last blocks for each partition. The last number of the

report (999,999 in the example above) is the size of the database.

dbdump

dbdump <keys> [<option>] …

Dumps individual stories or the entire database to tape.

This command can be interrupted. The program will continue dumping to reach an

appropriate quitting point.

Valid Keys Description

a Append to current dump

c Create new dump

C Create new dump, don’t ask if it’s ok.

d Dump the news directory

i Dump indexed files (such as, user index)

s Show quick index of dumped stories

v Verbose output

x Ask before dumping indexed file

486

To dump everything except those directories marked with a skip flag, type:

dbdump c

To dump a queue to a new tape, add -n and the queue name to the command. For instance, to

dump the queue SCRIPTS.JUNE.01 to a new tape, type:

dbdump c -n scripts.june.01

By replacing the c with an a, you can add a queue to a tape without erasing information

already on the tape. For instance, to append SCRIPTS.JUNE.10 to a tape, type:

dbdump a -n scripts.june.10

Dumps already on the tape are skipped and this dump is added to the end.

nThis command does not skip the contents of all subdirectories and queues if only the parent

directory has the skip trait enabled; contents will only be skipped by dbdump if the actual

subdirectory or queue has the skip flag.

dbfree

dbfree [-cf]

Reports the size of the database and the size of the free list—that is, the amount of free

blocks available. To display this information, type:

dbfree

A message similar to the following appears:

data base size 4106240, free 72600=18%, freelist 2904

nThe freelist is compressed, so there can be as many as 5000 free blocks accounted for in

each freelist block.

To display the amount of free space in your software area, type:

Valid Options Description

-a <device> Use alternate device for dump

-d Dump news directory skeleton (no stories)

-f [file] Dump to file (use ‘+’ for standard output)

-m <minutes> Dump files modified in last x minutes

-n <namelist> Only dump listed directories

-N <computer name> Network dump to specified computer

Console Server Commands

487

Prior to the system being configured, there are two maintenance options that may used with

the dbfree command.

The format is dbfree [-cf].

The c option is used to check for cleared free blocks. The f option is used to “unclear”

cleared free blocks.

dblines

dblines [b | c | f | n | q | s | v |+S|-S|-O] <pathname>

Checks the database for story errors.

nThe dblines program normally will not fix script related errors; if you want to do so, the +S

option must be specified and the n option must not be specified.

Use this command weekly as part of normal database maintenance. Start dblines before you

go home and run it in the background. Including a period with the command checks the

entire database.

Valid Keys Description

b Story block count only (no checking)

c Complete check

f Compare fields in story form with fields in story. Report those not found in

both.

n Do not fix errors

-O Do not report orphaned story record errors

q List queue names

s Skip queues that are skipped by

dbdump

+S Fix script related errors

-S Skip (not report) script related errors

v Verbose output

w Check word counts

x For qstamp checking

488

If dblines finds any errors related to queue corruption, call Avid for assistance.

dboriginal

dboriginal [-a] <pathname>

Removes all old versions of stories in a queue to the freelist, so use it only on queues where

you do not need to retain these old versions. For instance, to remove the old story versions in

ARCHIVE.MARCH, type:

dboriginal archive.march

Use the dboriginal command to reclaim space when the system is low on space.

The dboriginal command will print diagnostics, indicating how many stories were examined

and how many old versions were removed. The command removes old versions for unshared

stories—those with a link count of 1—in a queue. The option, -a, allows the command to

remove old versions from all stories (shared and unshared).

nThe dboriginal command can also be used to remove old versions from stories in a queue

that has the save none attribute. When stories are moved to or copied to a queue, all old

versions are retained even if the queue has this attribute; only when a story is edited are the

old versions removed.

As indicated by the pound sign (#) in the prompt, you must be in superuser mode to execute

commands. Also, you must use 24-hour military time.

It should only be necessary to run this command once or twice a year. Below is an example

of using the at command to execute a dboriginal command at a specified schedule and

directing it to a specified area (archive).

NRCS-A# at 11:10

/exc/dboriginal archive

<Ctrl+D>

job 1001340809.a at Sat Jul 10 11:10:00 2004

NRCS-A#

dbpurge

(Superuser conditional)

dbpurge <path> [- h | l | f] [<interval>]

dbpurge purges the database to regain space.

Console Server Commands

489

nAny queues that have a write group assigned will not be purged when dbpurge runs as a

non-superuser.

The system automatically purges the directories and queues each hour to move old material

from high-turnover queues (such as the Wires queues) into the Dead queue. Normally locked

and held stories are not purged regardless of their age. Use this command only in an

emergency when you need to regain some space. Stories can receive a date in the future if

your system date is inaccurate. If you have future-dated stories because the system date was

inaccurately set, remove them using the

-f

option or wait until the date expires. You must be

a console superuser to run

dbpurge

on write-protected queues. For instance, to purge all

stories in the Wires queues older than five hours, type:

dbpurge wires 5

Typing dbpurge - purges all queues in the database according to each queue’s purge interval.

dbpurge -v does the same, and prints a message on the console for each queue purged.

You can also use dbpurge to remove held and locked stories from the database. To remove all

locked stories from all queues in the People directory, type:

dbpurge people -l

To remove all held stories from a queue, use

dbpurge

, but substitute

-h

for

-l

nThe

dbpurge

command can be run only on the master computer.

dbrestore

dbrestore <key> [option] ...

The dbrestore command restores data dumped via dbdump to the iNEWS database.

Automatic data conversions are performed to convert data from older database revisions to

the current database format.

Valid Keys Description

- Condition used as <path> parameter. Purges all queues with the default interval

-v Condition used as <path> parameter. Purge all queues listed in the command in

verbose mode

-h Include held entries (must be superuser to use this option) in the purge

-l Include locked entries (must be superuser to use this option) in the purge

-f Include future dated entries (must be superuser to use this option) in the purge

Interval is expressed in <hours> or <days>.<hours>

490

If your database is damaged, you can restore it from your backup tape by typing:

dbrestore div

When you use dbrestore, restoring large numbers of stories can cause a temporary

out-of-space condition.

Press Delete to stop a dbrestore in progress.

dbrestore Command Key Options

Keys:

s Restore stories only

d Restore stories with their original directories

i Restore ISAM files

v Verbose output; list directory names

vv List directory names and each title

x Ask before restoring each ISAM file

f Print facts about blocks and times

t Print table of contents; do not restore

Options:

-a <device> Restore from alternate device

-c <filename> Database conversion profile filename

-d <date>[-<date>]

-f [file] Restore from a file (use ‘+’ for standard input)

-i Do not index. Do not post index request to SYSTEM.INDEX when a story is

restored in an indexed queue.

-k <keyword> (You can specify multiple keywords.)

-L <size>[:<repeat>] (large story diagnostic - default 1000:1500)

-m <value> Maximum number of stories to restore

-M Preserve modification times

-n [=] <directory>[=<new name>]

-N Read from network socket for dump data

Console Server Commands

491

nYou cannot use both the s and d options in the same command. Select one or the other; not

both. Additionally, you must be a superuser to list ISAM files.

dbserver

dbserver <high water>

Reclaims space from the Dead queue and places it on the free list. Use dbserver to build up

the free list prior to periods of peak use.

When you use dbserver, specify the total number of free blocks you want to have in the free

list. If the free list contains 25,000 blocks and you want to build up the free list to 100,000

blocks, type:

dbserver 100000

nWhen the free list contains the desired number of blocks dbserver stops. If you specify a

number that is smaller than the current free list size, dbserver will not do anything.

You can also use dbserver to place all space in the Dead queue on the free list. To do so,

specify that you want to rebuild the free list to an unreasonably large size.

For instance, on a maximum 16 gigabyte database, type:

dbserver 16000000

The

dbserver

command is invoked when the system is booted and runs in the background

continually monitoring the number of free database blocks based on the high and low water

marks specified in the system profile.

dbsort

dbsort [-v] <queue name>

The dbsort command sorts stories in any queue by the quick-index field, and should

primarily be used to verify that the quick-index field accurately reflects the story sort field

contents. For instance, if RUNDOWN.AM has the page-number field set as its quick-index

field, type the following to sort the queue by page number:

dbsort rundown.am

-p <queue> Only with key letter s, will create queue

-s <platform> sgi, mip, or sco

dbrestore Command Key Options

492

If no quick-index field has been set for the queue, its stories are sorted by the value of the

title field. If a sorted queue is ordered, the sorting is disabled. Using

dbsort

starts the

sorting again. Only a superuser can sort queues with nonzero write groups.

nDbtraits will automatically sort a queue when the sort attribute is turned on with the +so

option. An ordered queue is automatically sorted when the ordered attribute is turned off

with the -o option.

Use the -v option to verify the sort field. The system checks that the quick-index field in the

database has the same data as the sort field in the story. This option provides no sorting

function, but it updates the quick-index field so that your next sort is based on current

information.

dbtraits

dbtraits <pathname> [only] [<option> <value>]

[+|- mode] …:

Sets and modifies database traits.

To assign a story form called rundown to the RUNDOWNS.5PM directory, type:

dbtraits rundowns.5pm storyform rundown

To assign a queue form called rundown to the RUNDOWNS.5PM directory, type:

dbtraits rundowns.5pm queueform rundown

nAssigning forms can be combined to one command line, such as:

dbtraits rundowns.5pm storyform rundown queueform rundown

dbtraits Command Options

changeform or cform queueform or qform

displaylines readgroup or rg

editorialgroup or eg reindex

ftsindex save

interplay or ip sortfield or sf

mailbox or mb storyform or sform

notify or ng stripform

purgeinterval <days.hours> writegroup or wg

Console Server Commands

493

dbvisit

dbvisit -<d | v | i> -[r | m name] [-s] [block# …]

dbtraits Command Modes

f Forms allowed

g General

iInverted

index Indexed

o unorder (- only)

pPrintable

q Queue operations allowed

r Read access

refresh Queue refresh

s Sequential

so Sorted

t Text timing clocks

u Update

w Watch appends

xSkip

dbvisit Command Options

-d Display progress by printing dots

-i Validate ISAM file record and key sizes

-m Machine name to disconnect (for online use)

-r Read only; do not rebuild free list

-s Operate in slow mode to eliminate cache usage

-v Verbose output; print name of each queue

494

nThe validation is a validation of ISAM key and record sizes to prevent problems after

software upgrades when the key and/or record sizes of any ISAM files changed for the new

software release.

Scans the database for errors, then rebuilds the free list and fixes bad story-link counts. A list

of block numbers can be specified, as shown by the [block# …] parameter above. A

diagnostic is printed whenever dbvisit encounters one of the specified blocks, which is

helpful for tracking down database corruption. Use dbvisit once a month as a part of your

regular maintenance.

There are two ways to run dbvisit:

• Without the -m option: The system must be offline and shut down. No one can log in

until dbvisit is complete.

• With the -m option: Specify a machine that will be running dbvisit. The system must be

offline and shutdown only long enough to enter the dbvisit command. Remaining

machines can be brought up for users to log into. After the dbvisit procedure is

complete, the machine running dbvisit can be reconnected following the normal

procedure.

cBefore you run dbvisit, ensure the system is offline and the system is shut down. If

dbvisit reports any errors, do not rebuild the free list; call Avid for assistance.

The dbvisit uses asterisks to display information related to search queues as opposed to other

queues or queue entries:

• Each dot = 1 queue

• Each asterisk = 1 search queue

• Each colon = 1000 queue entries

For instance:

NRCS-A# dbvisit -d

-----removed for documentation brevity-----

14:57:22 traversing directory

14:57:22 (each dot = 1 queue; each asterisk = 1 search queue; each colon

= 1,000 queue entries)

14:57:22 **......:::::::::10:::::::::20:::::::::30:::::::::40::

14:57:50 :::::::50:::::::::60:::::::::70:::::::::80:::::::::90::

-----removed for documentation brevity-----

Console Server Commands

495

dictionary

dictionary [-update] <dictionary> | <directory> ...

Any combination of dictionary names and dictionary directories can be specified. For each

directory specified, all dictionaries within that directory will be compared to their standard

dictionary counterpart. Only missing and obsolete dictionary tokens are identified;

definitions are not compared.

The standard dictionary name begins with a pound sign (#) and is expected to reside in the

same directory. A dictionary update is only done when the -update flag is specified;

otherwise, the dictionary is only checked, by default. Any tokens found in the standard

dictionary that are missing from the dictionary will be added and those found in the

dictionary that are missing from the standard dictionary will be removed.

diskclear

(Superuser only)

diskclear [-|u]

Marks each block of a server’s database as invalid so that you can copy a new database to the

disk. To clear the disk, select a server and type:

diskclear -

Do this prior to connecting a replacement server to a running system.

cUsing this command erases the server’s entire database.

To reverse the effects of diskclear, type:

diskclear u

Arguments Description

- Clear database

-+ Writes to disk (cannot be repaired by running diskclear u)

-- Read database blocks

-<number> The number of blocks to process at one time

u Unclear database

496

diskcopy

diskcopy -[<# of simultaneous copies>]

diskcopy <start block> [<end block>]

Copies database from master computer (usually server A) to a replacement computer. Enter

it on the replacement server.

doc

To get text from database use:

doc -gt[u] <queue> [slug...]

or:

doc -gts[u] <queue> <story id>

To get NSML from database use:

doc -g[2] <queue> [slug...]

or:

doc -gs[2] <queue> <story id>

If no slugs are given, the entire queue is done. The slug must be one word or enclosed in

quotes.

To put text into the database use:

doc -pt[u] <queue> [file...]

To put NSML into the database use:

doc -p[2] <queue> [file...]

If no files are given, standard input is read.

The -g option does not take any file name parameters; standard output is assumed. If output

is to be written into a file, shell file redirection must be used (as in “> output-file-name”).

The -g option defaults to NSML format input / output and lines are terminated with CR/LF

characters.

The t modifer specifies that the input / output will be in plain text format. The u option

specifies Linux line termination is used—that is, lines are terminated with an LF character.

The -p option will take input from its standard input if no files are specified. This will put a

single story into the database composed of the data read from its standard input up to an end

of file condition.

ed <file pathname>

Console Server Commands

497

This command initiates the line editor used to edit text files. Since each server has its own

copy of each site file, always select all servers before editing a site file. Procedures for using

this line editor are covered in “The Line Editor, ed” on page 655. The line editor is a

Linux-supplied program; refer to Linux documentation for more information.

enter

This command creates directories or queues.

enter -d[irectory] | -q[ueue] <pathname>

Add the specified directory or queue to the news directory.

enter -m[ail] [-f[ix]] <username> (can include trailing *)

Check that the specified users’ mail queues exist and optionally add the ones that are

missing.

force

(Superuser only)

force -

force [-q] [<name>] ...

force [-q] “created>date1<date2” [<name>] ...

force [-q] “lastlog>date1<date2” [<name>] ...

force [-q] “passchg>date1<date2” [<name>] ...

nWhen using angled brackets (>,<)in a parameter, they must be enclosed within quotation

marks. The same applies to characters, such as the exclamation point (!) and asterisk (*).

This command forces users to change their password. For instance, to force user Harris to

change her password, type:force harris

grpcheck

grpcheck [-v] <group story queue>

This command validates groups and aliases defined in each of the stories in the group

directory (SYSTEM.GROUP by default). It then builds the alias file used by iNEWS.

498

gtraits

(Superuser only)

gtraits add <group name>

This command creates groups of users and modifies the security of existing groups.

The following lines show syntax for the gtraits command:

gtraits changegroup <pathname>

gtraits delete <group name>

gtraits interactive

gtraits list-

gtraits list [<group name>|<user name>]

gtraits rename <old group name> <new group name>

gtraits transfer <source group name> <destination group name>

The first letter of each option can be used for shorthand.

help

help <command name>

Displays information on how to use other commands. For instance, to get instructions for the

list command, type:

help list

grpcheck Command Options

-v

Display processing status as grpcheck traverses the queue.

-vv

Display processing status as well as group, user, and alias statistics

encountered.

-vvv

Display messages from -v and -vv, as well as the final list of groups and

their members.

Console Server Commands

499

A message similar to the following appears:

usage:

list configuration [<termid> | <name>...]

list directory [<name>...]

list terminal [<termid> | <name>...]

list user [<name>...]

list queue <name> [<record limit>]

hogs

hogs [<pathname>]

Scans the directories or queues you specify and displays usage information for them. You

can use this command to get an idea of which queues are consuming the most space and how

much is being consumed. This command is most useful when used on the People directory.

For instance, to display usage information for the People directory, type:

hogs people

Below is an example of using the at command to execute a hogs command at a specified

schedule, sending the results to a file (hogs.report), and then using the doc command to copy

that file to a queue for later review.

NRCS-A# at 11:10

/exc/hogs . > /tmp/hogs.report

doc -ptu people.sysadmin.notes /tmp/hogs.report

<Ctrl+D>

job 1001340698.a at Sat Jul 10 11:10:00 2004

NRCS-A#

As indicated by the pound sign (#) in the prompt, you must be in superuser mode to execute

commands. Also, you must use 24-hour time.

idiff

idiff <file1> <file2>

500

This command allows you interactively compare two files and select and/or edit the portions

of the files that differ and create a composite file. The program displays the differing

portions of two files and gives you the option to put the portion from the first file or the

second file into the output file.

You can also edit the display using the vi program and put the resulting portion into the

output file, named idiff.out.

list

list Community [<name>...]

list [options] configuration [<termid> | <name>...]

list [options] directory [- (f | g | i | o | s | u | v)] [<name>...]

list group [<name | {name} | - | + >]

list [options] queue [- (a | b | d | f | g | m | s | v)] [<name> [<record limit>]]

list session [- (p | v | V)] [<termid> | <name> ...]

list [options] user [- (b | h | l | m | r | t | v)] [<name | groupname>...]

list Blob [-v] [<name>]

Configuration Options

computer=<name>

mailbox=(<number> | <name>)

type=<name>

Directory Options

flags=<flags>

nThe flags=<flags> directory option allows the use of directory flags from the

set SRP(p/l)opLIsUGQ(O/N/A)XWFi to be used to select the directory entries to

be listed. To see all indexed directory entries use: list flags=i d. To see all

sequential, read-only, and printable directory entries use:

list flags=SRP d.

form=<name>

Console Server Commands

501

nThe form=<name> directory option matches the directory entry queue form

and story form names.

fts=<index>

ip=<index>

(eg | ng | rg | wg |rwg | rnwg)=<group>

mailbox=(<number | name>)

purge=(<days>.<hours> | <hours>)

save=(last | original | none | all)

sortfield=<field>

-f form

-g groups

-i interplay/fts

-o order-user

-s sons

-u lock-user

-v verbose

Queue Options

qindex=<index value>

-a address

-b backwards

-d deleted

-f form

-g groups

-m modified by

-s stamp

-v verbose

Session Modifiers

-p process id

502

list B

Lists details of the “system blobs” stored on the server. System blobs are used to store

bitmaps for the title-entry tool and for the simplified user interface settings.

-(v|V) workstation IP address (V - don’t resolve)

User Options

blacklist=(b | -)

keyboard=<number>

localonly=(l | -)

password=

readrate=<number>

session=<number>

simplified=(s | -)

su=(n | -)

created>date1<date2

lastlog>date1<date2

passchg>date1<date2

-b blob

-h home

-l last login

-m mail

-r real name

-t management information

-v verbose

Console Server Commands

503

The following is a sample output:

# list B

File-Id Size Date Time Name

449 7287 Jul 10 00 07:27:19 BM000001

457 7238 Jul 10 00 07:28:16 BM000002

84435 6066 Nov 30 00 08:16:39 BM000003

84363 6066 Nov 30 00 10:44:13 BM000004

84403 1171 Nov 30 00 10:56:40 BM000005

88956 265255 Jan 4 01 16:05:18 BM000006

103749 15439 Mar 22 01 00:40:24 BM000007

498 11212 Jan 14 00 15:35:28 BM000008

530 15439 Jan 14 00 15:53:46 BM000009

546 91416 Jan 26 00 09:47:30 BM000010

638 14342 Apr 4 00 13:11:17 BM000011

653 8608 Apr 4 00 13:18:09 BM000012

662 26673 Apr 5 00 13:46:54 BM000013

104423 40 Mar 21 01 15:16:28 SimplifiedUISettings

list C

Lists Community configuration information, including system names and server suffixes.

NRCS-A$ list C

SYSTEM SUFFIX moi GROUP

NRCSWX AB -oi -

NRCS-UK AB moi -

TESTDB A moi sysops

NRCS-A$

504

list c

Lists current configuration of the system.

list d

list [<option>] d-[a | f | g | o | s | u | v] [<directory name>...]

list C Information Description

SUFFIX The suffix is the order in which the remote systems are

contacted.

m Messaging is enabled.

o Outgoing is enabled.

i Incoming is enabled.

GROUP The group is the group name allowed to see the associated

server.

list c Command Options

computer=<name>

mailbox=[<number> or <name>]

list d Command Options

d-a Abstract printing traits

d-f Queue and story form names

d-g Group information

d-i ftsindex and Interplay information

d-o Order user

d-s Son count and sequence number

d-u Lock user

d-v Verbose mode

Console Server Commands

505

Lists information about the specified directory or queue. If no directory or queue name

follows

, the command displays information on the entire database.

For instance:

# list d dead

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory

Q-R-----I--G--X---- TITLE P3.0 D1 - DEAD

# list d-f dead

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT queue form story form directory

Q-R-----I--G--X---- DEAD

# list d-v dead

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge ap, al, as dis mbox

DEAD:

Q-R-----I--G--X---- TITLE P3.0 A000,000,000 D1 -

rg=- wg=- ng=-

queue form= story form=

For search queues, this command displays an S in the first column and the name of the

search queue in the final column, such as:

# list d news.football

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory

S------I---------- TITLE P3.0 D1 - !NEWS.FOOTBALL

list g

list g [<user or group name>] ...

Lists group information.

506

list p

list p [-u] [<uuid> | <name>]

list project [-u] [<uuid> | <name>]

Lists projects and facets.

NRCS-A# list p -u 161a2017-5cb9-4d41-bb51-9494d4151e5d

start expire rg name

P - - - Elections

F - - - Governor's Race

F - - - US HOUSE Races

F - - - US Senate Race

F - - - US President's Race

F - - - State Legislature Races

F - - - REFERENDUMS

Projects are indicated by a P, while F indicates a facet, and a question mark represents

projects or facets that belong to other systems and therefore cannot be used by the current

system.

list p Command Options

sysid=<sysid>

-s System ID

-u Universally Unique Identifiers (UUIDs)

nA project has a 36-character UUID. A facet’s UUID is the parent project’s UUID followed by

a period and another 36-character UUID.

Console Server Commands

507

Here is another example of the list p command:

NRCS-A# list p

start expire rg name

? - - - BP Payout

? - - - Gulf Businesses

P - - - CRIME

F - - - MOST WANTED

F - - - Local

F - - - STATE

F - - - Federal

P - - - EDUCATION

F - - - COLLEGES & UNIVERSITIES

F - - - SCHOOL BOARD

F - - - ELEMENTARY or HIGH SCHOOL

F - - - HOME SCHOOLING

P - - - ENVIRONMENTAL

P - - - Financial

F - - - Holiday Sales

F - - - Stock market

F - - - Taxes

F - - - Consumer Tips

F - - - Recalls

F - - - Jobs - Unemployment

P - - - Health and Medical

P - - - SWEEPS WEEK

508

list q

list [<option>] q-[a | b | d | f | g | m | s | v] <name> [<limit>]

Lists information on the contents of a queue. For instance:

NRCS-B$ list q people.palmer.new 1

A display similar to the following appears:

PEOPLE.PALMER.NEW id=126126

rec quick index LHDM-WObfpRmF f.id time modified-time

25 h-disd ---M--------- 13735 1 May2 17:07 2000

The index value consists of the selected sort field of the story you want to list. The quick

index (qindex) value is optional, but must be a single word, and is not case-sensitive.

For instance, to get information for a story called “Nomad” in the queue

PEOPLE.SMITH.NOTES, type:

list qindex=nomad q people.smith.notes

list s

list s -[p | v] [<session id> | <name>]...

Lists session information, such as users currently logged in.

list q Command Options

q-a Record address

q-b Reverse order

q-d Include deleted entries

q-f Story form

q-g Read-and-write group information

q-m Who moved, duplicated, or killed the queue

q-s Queue stamp

q-v Verbose output

Console Server Commands

509

The -p option causes the process id for the controlling session process to be printed. The -v

option causes the IP address for the session to be printed if the session is a network session,

such as an iNEWS Workstation.

list sq

list sq [-v] [<search queue name>]

Lists the specified search queue’s query ID. The -v option displays the search queue’s query

as well. For instance:

NRCS-A$ list sq-v news.football

NEWS.FOOTBALL query id:10522758

{MaxFound=100[NRCS]WIRES.ALL}((football))

The example shows the NEWS.FOOTBALL search queue’s query of the WIRES.ALL

indexed queue on the NRCS system for the word football, with the Max Hits set to 100.

list u

list [<option>] u[-(h | l | m | p | t | r | v)] [<user or group name>]...

Lists user traits information, such as read rate, the keyboard description story, system setup

and preferences, and mail and home queues.

If no name follows u, the command displays information about all users; otherwise, it

displays information about the listed user, such as:

NRCS-A$ list u-v danielmi

The verbose result of the command will look something like this:

user rr kb su m SOEKCVTH sc queues

danielmi 180 0 n i -OEKCVTH sc dest: PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI.NOTES

home: PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI

mail: PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI.MAIL

NRCS-A$

The flags (rr kb su m SOEKCVH sc) in the header provide current status information. The

flags are:

rr Readrate K Can Kill All

510

The letters in the header are defined as follows:

kb Keyboard C Can Connect

su Superuser V Can Video Browse

m Insert/Overstrike Mode H Can Highlight Read

S Simplified User s Can Configure Shortcut Toolbar

O Can Order c Can Configure Colors

E Can Enter & Remove

u-h Home queue

u-l Last login

u-m Mail queue

u-p Preferences

u-r Real name

u-t Tracking information

u-v Verbose output

<option> list blacklist=[b | -] user

list “created>date1<date2” user

list keyboard=<number> user

list “lastlog>date1<date2” user

list “passchg>date1<date2” user

list password= user

list readrate=<number> user

list session=<number> user

list simplified=[s | -] user

list su=[n | -] user

Console Server Commands

511

nWhen using angled brackets (>,<)in an option, as shown above, they must be enclosed

within quotation marks. The same applies to characters, such as the exclamation point (!)

and asterisk (*), as shown below.

list user “a*”

Lists all users whose login names begin with the letter ‘a’.

logout

logout [<device #>] ...

logout all

Logs out a workstation. When you use

logout

, it saves the user’s work before logging out

his or her workstation. This command does not log out users in a connect session.

To log out specific workstations, follow the

logout

command with the device numbers of

the workstations you want to log out.

For instance, to log out workstations 12, 34, and 91, type:

logout 12 34 91

To log out all workstations, use logout all. Before logging users out, always broadcast a

warning message and give them a chance to log out on their own.

makemontab

Installs translations for monitor-related files.

You must be in superuser mode at the console. For instance:

NRCS-A$ makemontab -i[sv]

makeshift (Super user only)

makeshift -[v|i|a|p|r|f <shift-file>] file1 file2 ...

makemontab Command Options

s Standard. Use default translations.

v Verbose. Show progress.

vv Very verbose. Show progress plus translations.

512

Manages the case-shifting dictionary that iNEWS uses to determine how to convert

lowercase characters to their uppercase counterparts, and vice-versa.

Use the makeshift command in maintenance mode when you install iNEWS to implement

the case-shifting dictionary appropriate for the national language used at your site.

maketab

(Superuser only)

maketab -i[sv]

makeshift Command Options

v Verbose. To diagnose the case-shifting dictionary for potential errors,

displaying messages for each line in the file. Checks that the file is readable

and contains shift tables.

i Install. To install the shift table into files you specify in the filename list.

a Ask. To confirm installation of each file as you are installing the shift tables.

Forces installation.

p Print. To print shift tables contained in each file you specify in the filename

list, with formatting similar to that in the default case-shifting dictionary. This

option does not build or install the shift tables.

f File. Specify with a <shift-file> filename, to use a file other than the default

file for the case-shifting dictionary. The default file is (/site/dict/shift).

r Recursive. (For directories.)

<shift-file> When you specify the -f option, enter the case-shifting dictionary name you

want to use instead of the /site/dict/shift file.

<file1> <file2> ... When you specify the -i or -p option, enter one or more file names to install

or print. If you specify a directory path instead of a file name, the makeshift

program processes each file in the directory, then returns to the original

directory.

[path] When processing files in a directory, the makeshift program ignores

additional directory pathnames it encounters, rather than recursively scanning

child directories. To have makeshift scan all files in a directory, specify the

directory path in the filename list.

maketab Command Options

s Standard translations

Console Server Commands

513

Use this command after making changes to the dictionaries (or before the system is

connected) to build the new translations into programs.

To use this command, become a superuser and type:

maketab -i

nFor maketab, the dictionary definitions are installed into the following programs: /exc/news,

/exc/gnews, /exc/snews, /exc/nxserver, and /exc/newsmail. Day and month abbreviation

definitions are installed into:/exc/news,/exc/gnews, /exc/snews, /exc/nxserver, /exc/newsmail,

/exc/rxnet, and /exc/server.

msgclean

msgclean-<options> [-f <from name>][-a <age in days>][-x] [<username>]

nWhen using characters, such as angled brackets (>,<), the pound sign (#), exclamation

point (!) and asterisk (*), they must be enclosed within quotation marks.

Type

help msgclean

at the console to view msgclean options at any time.

v Verbose output

maketab Command Options

msgclean Command Options

r Remove messages

d Show messages that are removed

o Show outstanding messages

t Tabulate outstanding messages

f Restrict messages to those from the specified sender. Sender is used

exactly as specified, no case shift. An empty sender can be specified

with quotes ("").

a Restrict messages to those older than the specified number of days.

x Restrict to nonexistent users.

<username> For specified user. Use trailing asterisk (*) for wildcard match. If no

username is specified, then an asterisk will be assumed.

514

Removing Messages Sent to Existing or Non-Exiting Users

The msgclean command removes messages to existing users as well as non-existing users.

When the -r option is used, msgclean prompts for approval for each existing user whose

messages are going to be removed.

NRCS-A$ msgclean -t west

west 7 messages

7 total qualifying messages.

NRCS-A$ msgclean -r west

Do you wish to remove messages sent to west (y/n)? y

7 messages removed.

If you remove any users who have unread messages, those messages remain in the database.

Use the -x option to force msgclean to act only on usernames that no longer exist. Messages

removed from non-existent users do not prompt for confirmation. The following example

shows deletion of three messages pending to a guest user.

NRCS-A# msgclean –tx

0 total qualifying messages.

NRCS-A# utraits guest remove

User guest removed

NRCS-A# msgclean –tx

guest 3 messages (no such user)

3 total qualifying messages.

NRCS-A# msgclean –rx

3 messages removed.

Console Server Commands

515

When

msgclean -t

is used with the -a <age in days> option, information is provided

showing which users have messages in a tabular format.

NRCS-A# msgclean -t -a 50

loyd 77 messages older than 50 days

jones 3 messages older than 50 days

halls 10 messages older than 50 days

smith 23 messages older than 50 days

...

147 messages older than 50 days.

147 total qualifying messages.

Here is an example of how to remove a certain user’s messages that are older than the

specified age of 50 days:

NRCS-A# msgclean -r -a 50 loyd

Do you wish to remove messages older than 50 days to loyd (y/n)? y

77 messages removed.

516

Display or Remove Messages from a Specific User

The -f <from> option can be used to display or remove all messages from a specific user.

The <from> username is case sensitive and literal, meaning wildcards cannot be used. The

following example first identifies the number of messages sent from ‘monitor’ to ‘avid’,

removes them, and then confirms the removal:

NRCS-A$ msgclean -tf monitor avid

avid 496 messages from monitor

496 total qualifying messages.

NRCS-A$ msgclean -rf monitor avid

Do you wish to remove messages from monitor to avid (y/n)? y

496 messages removed.

NRCS-A$ msgclean -tf monitor avid

avid 0 messages from monitor

0 total qualifying messages.

Wildcard Assumed when No User is Specified

If no username is specified, msgclean assumes an asterisk (*) or all users.

NRCS-A# msgclean –tx

Jones 8 messages (no such user)

Smith 1 message (no such user)

Taylor 2 messages (no such user)

11 total qualifying messages.

NRCS-A# msgclean -tx jones

Jones 8 messages (no such user)

8 total qualifying messages.

Console Server Commands

517

offline

offline [silent]

Puts iNEWS offline. Users cannot log in, but users already on the system can continue

normal function. The silentoption suppresses diagnostics for network connections that are

refused because the system is offline. Both nxserver and workserver typically generate these

diagnostics.

The datastamp generator, server timer, includes an indication that the system is offline in the

timestamp messages produced on the console. This provides feedback that the system is

offline when the silentoption was specified.

The status command will print “OFFLINE (silent)” when the system is offline with the silent

option turned on.

You can keep the system offline and turn off the silent option by reentering the offline

command without the silent option.

online

Puts iNEWS online. Users can log in and use the system.

otod

otod <number> …

otod Command Options

leading 0 Octal

leading 0x Hex

leading = Next characters (as characters)

leading - Negative number

leading _ Two-character compose sequence

leading % strftime format - subsequent numbers formatted with format for

local and gmt times

leading L locale to use for date formats

518

This command converts numbers from one base (such as decimal) to another (such as octal).

For instance, to convert decimal 32, type:

otod 32

A message similar to the following appears:

h(0x20) o(040) d(32) u(32) SP

32.0.0.0 Wed Dec 31 16:00:32 1969

In this listing, h stands for hexadecimal, o for octal, d for decimal, and u for unsigned

decimal. The number conversions are followed by the corresponding ASCII character

(space, in this case), and the date value. The 32.0.0.0 is the number shown in IP address

format.

The % and L options can assist you in handling different locale settings and formats. The

following are two examples:

Type:

otod %X 32

A message similar to the following appears:

h(0x20) o(040) d(32) u(32) SP

0.0.0.32 Wed Dec 31 18:00:32 1969

lcl: 18:00:32

gmt: 00:00:32

Type:

otod Lfr 32

A message, with the date in French, similar to the following appears:

locale is fr

h(0x20) o(040) d(32) u(32) SP

0.0.0.32 mercredi 31 décembre 1969, 18:00:32

reconnect

reconnect <name> [<option>=<value>] …

The options for this command are the same as for the

connect

command.

Console Server Commands

519

cEnter the correct identifier, such as A, B, C,or D, for the host computer (server). The

reconnect command must be entered on all of the currently connected servers as well

as the server to be reconnected. Thereconnect command will exit with a diagnostic if

the specified server is already connected.

Connects a server to a running iNEWS newsroom computer system. You must type the

diskclear command first on the server being reconnected before reconnecting it to the

iNEWS newsroom computer system.

remove

remove <pathname>

Removes specified queues or folders from the database. The queue or folder specified in

must be empty for the remove command to succeed.

For example:

NRCS-A# remove show.6pm.special

rename

(Superuser only)

rename [- u|v|r] <old name> <new name>

cSystem must be offline. Resuming interrupted operations after changing queue or

directory names could cause loss of data.

Renames any directory or queue in the database. You must become superuser, take the

system offline, and log out all users before using rename.When you use this command, the

system must be named and offline.

For instance, to rename the People directory to PEOPLE.STAFF, type:

rename people people.staff

rename Command Options

-u Update user records only, changing mail, destination, and home directory

entries that match <old name>

-v Verbose output

-r Resume interrupted operation

520

The command creates any new directory levels that are necessary.

reorder

reorder <parent> <child> <position>

This allows you to change the order of a directory by putting one of the child entries into a

new position in the directory. Reordering is only done for Sequential directories.

The <position> parameter can be:

-a <sibling> (place <child> after <sibling>)

-b <sibling> (place <child> before <sibling>)

-<number> (move <child> up <number> positions)

+<number> (move <child> down <number> positions)

<number> (place <child> at <number> position)

The <child> and <sibling> parameters do not include the full pathname; only the last level

name relative to the parent name.

restart

restart [-v] <device> | all

cIf you restart a device when a user is editing, data could be lost.

Restarts one or more devices. The restart command stops and reloads the currently executing

program(s).

To restart a device, type restart followed by the device number. For instance, to restart txnet

41, type:

restart 41

After each restart, you see a Hot-to-go message for each device as it starts. If the device does

not start, you see a message indicating that the restart of that device has failed.

searchtape

searchtape [on <device>] [from <date> to <date>]

[<max # stories>] for <word> …

searchtape [on <device>] [just <date>]

[<max # stories>] for <word> …

Console Server Commands

521

Use one of the following date formats: YY, YYMM, YYMMDD, or CCYYMMDD.

Searches a tape created by the dbdump command and recovers stories from it. Stories that

contain a word specified in your search are restored to the queue SYSTEM.SEARCHTAPE.

For instance, to search a tape for stories containing the word “dinosaur,” type:

searchtape for dinosaur

A message similar to the following appears:

8 stories restored to SYSTEM.SEARCHTAPE

In this case, searchtape found eight stories containing the word “dinosaur” and placed them

in SYSTEM.SEARCHTAPE.

When searching a tape, you can specify a date range when the story was saved, as well as the

maximum number of stories for the system to restore.

send

send <username> “<message>”

Lets you send instant and intersystem messages to users from the console. Messages can be

sent to the special user—computer—on another system by using the username,

computer@other-system. These messages are printed on the console of the other system.

Here are two examples of messages sent to user Smith:

send smith “are you editing ap-arson”

send smith “please log out now”

shutdown

cTyping this command while users are editing may cause data loss.

Stops all devices and closes the database. It is used before halting the system. To use this

command, you must first select all servers and log everyone off the system.

sitedump

(Superuser only)

sitedump [-d<device> | -f<file>] [-ehv]

522

Makes backups of your system’s site files.

siterestore

(Superuser only)

siterestore [-d<device> | -f<file>] [-ehtv] [<file> ...]

cAll site files will be replaced by the version on the backup tape. You will lose the

version currently on your system.

Restores site files and programs backed up to tape with sitedump.

nAfter performing a siterestore, run the grpcheck command to rebuild the mail aliases file.

sitedump Command Options

-d <device> is the name of a tape device. The actual device name used will be /dev/<device>.

The default is /dev/tape.

-f <file> is the name of a file to use as the archive.

-e Eject tape when done.

-h Help - show usage information.

-v Verbose

siterestore Command Options

-d <device> is the name of a tape device. The actual device name used will be /dev/<device>.

The default is /dev/tape.

-f <file> is the name of a file to use as the archive.

-e Eject tape when done.

-h Help - show usage information.

-t Show table of contents; no files are restored.

-v Verbose

<file> ... Only the named files are restored. If a directory is specified, all files in the directory will

be restored.

Console Server Commands

523

startup

Starts the system’s devices after they have been shut down. The system must be offline and

all devices must be stopped.

status

status [all | license]

Displays system connection information: which server is the master, if system is running

single or dual, and the disk status.

There are three disk statuses:

• OK - When the system is up and running either as dual or single.

• Cleared - When you have cleared the database of a failed server.

• Unknown - When you reconnect the CPUs following a

diskclear. When the diskcopy procedure has completed and the database has been

mirrored, the disk status will change back to OK.

To list basic system information, type:

status

A message similar to the following appears:

A is online ID is NRCS

System is AB. Master is A.

Disk status is UNKNOWN

To list system options set in the system profile, type:

status all

To list the system’s license information, type:

status license

stop

stop [-v] all | <device number>

cIf you stop a device when a user is editing on the device, data could be lost.

Stops activity on a server prior to shutting it down. Before using the stop command to stop

an activity, use the broadcast command to notify users the system will be going down, and

log out all devices on the affected servers. To stop all devices on a server, use stop all.

524

To stop a device, follow stop with the number of the device you want to stop. For instance, to

stop workstation 12, type:

stop 12

The stop all command differs from the shutdown command in that the free list remains in

memory and is not flushed back to the disk.

This Linux command allows you to enter superuser mode. Type su, then type the superuser

password when prompted.

The display looks similar to the following:

NRCS-A$ su

password:

SU: so /dev/console

unbusy

unbusy [-i] <queue name>

Removes edit and order locks from the specified queue in your database.

The -i option allows you to ignore the inverted database trait.

cIf a user is actually working in the file, removing the lock could cause data loss.

utraits

(Super user only)

utraits <username> [<option> <value>] [+|- flag]

utraits Command Options

clone remove

destination mail

editmode realname

keyboard su

Console Server Commands

525

nThe bloblist option is useful for removing iNEWS Workstation user preferences should they

become corrupted.

utraits Command Flags

Sets a user’s traits. For instance, to assign keyboard 12 to user Jones, type:

utraits jones keyboard 12

The <username> can be “all”, a pattern, or a user name. You can enclose the real name in

quotation marks to allow for embedded spaces. Use “<string>*” to indicate wildcards. For

instance, “a*” applies to all users with names starting with the letter A.

version

version [-<alternate pattern>] <filename> …

version [+]

Displays the version and platform of the iNEWS software you are using.

Type:

version

readrate home

mail password

utraits Command Options

b Blacklist hr Highlight read

bloblist Remove blob list ka Kill all

c Connect log Log client/server communication

cc Configure colors o Order

cs Configure shortcut toolbar

s simplified user interface

er Enter and remove vb Video browse

526

A message similar to the following appears and displays product version information:

This computer program is protected by copyright law and international

treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program, or

any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalities.

U.S. GOVERNMENT USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS: Use, duplication or disclosure

by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in

subparagraph (c)(1) of FAR clause 52.227-19, COMMERCIAL COMPUTER

SOFTWARE - RESTRICTED RIGHTS or, in the case of the Department of

Defense or its subcontractor, is subject to DFARS 227.7202-3, RIGHTS IN

COMMERCIAL COMPUTER SOFTWARE OR COMMERCIAL COMPUTER SOFTWARE

DOCUMENTATION.

ICU License - ICU 1.8.1 and later

others

[...]

version: 3.0.0.238 RH5

You can also use this command to display a particular program’s version number. Type

version followed by the program’s name.

For instance, to find out which version of the dbsort program you are using, type:

version dbsort

A message similar to the following appears:

dbsort: 3.0.0.238 RH5

wholockedit

wholockedit <queue name> [all]

Displays who locked a story.

For instance, to find out who locked a story in PEOPLE.SMITH, type:

wholockedit people.smith

Job List Commands

527

To find out who last modified each story in a queue, type

wholockedit

followed by the

name of the queue and the keyword all.

Job List Commands

The following section provides a list of commands that can be used in a job list, which is

created and modified in the database. The command’s format and description are provided,

followed by a list of servers that can utilize the command in their job lists.

at <hh:mm>

Specifies the time of day when a task will take place. You can combine this instruction with

the keyword on to specify both the day and time for the task. Applies to action servers and tx

links.

bpoll

bpoll <queue name> [<polling interval> [<polling duration>]]

Works like poll, except it reads stories in the primary queue in reverse direction. If the

polling interval and duration are not specified, a single scan of the primary queue will be

done. Applies to timed-interval action servers and tx links.

bscan

bscan <queue name> [priority | all | everyentry]

Works like scan, except it reads stories in the scan queue in reverse chronological order,

reading the newest stories first. This is convenient for very large queues. Applies to action

servers and tx links.

The priority option forces the action/txnet server to interrupt the scan of another queue if the

action/txnet server receives a mailbox notification. The all option forces the action/txnet

server to scan the entire queue instead of the limit of 10 stories when it has more than one

queue to scan. The everyentry option forces the server to process each entry in a queue, not

just modified entries.

distribution

distribution <distribution story queue> [<error queue>]

528

Specifies the queue containing the distribution story and, optionally, an error queue for

stories whose distribution codes cannot be processed. Applies to distribution and parallel

servers.

dup

dup <destination queue> [<distribution code>]

Copies the stories in the scan queue to a queue you specify, optionally including a

distribution code with them. Applies to action servers and tx links.

every

every <dd.hh>

Specifies the interval at which a task is performed. You can set this value in days and/or

hours. Applies to action servers and tx links.

extension

extension <file extension>

Applies to tx links. When transmitting stories using HTML format, each transmitted story

has a filename composed of a hexadecimal representation of the entry’s qstamp and a

filename extension of .html. Use the extension command to specify a different extension. Do

not include the period in the <file extension> parameter. The defined extension will also be

used in place of html for the published file. See the publish job list command for more

information.

fast

fast [yes | no]

Including fast no in a job list (before the open) forces txnet to use separate connections for

all data transfers and commands. This command is used if firewalls or WAN accelerators

cause interruption in txnet connections. The default is fast yes, which means iNEWS uses

the fast FTP protocol and shares a single connection for data transfers and for commands.

ignore

ignore [yes | no]

Job List Commands

529

Including ignore yes in a job list that performs validation ensures the server accepts any

values for the fields it is validating. The default is ignore no. Applies to action servers and tx

links.

ignore-del

Causes a server to take no action when a story is deleted from its scan queue. Applies to

action servers and tx links.

nThis option is not reset for each scan/bscan command set. Use send-del to restore processing

of deleted queue entries.

local

local <queue name>

Specifies the primary wire queue. Applies to parallel servers.

mailto

mailto <recipient>...

Mails the story as an e-mail text message to each recipient. The list of recipients is a

space-separated list. If the sendform option is on, the content of fields in the story is

included at the start of the e-mail text message. Only fields present in the story form

assigned to the story are included. Each field is identified by the label text associated with

the field in the story form assigned to the story.

move

move <destination queue> [<distribution code>]

Moves stories from the scan queue to a queue you specify, optionally adding a distribution

code to them. It must be the last instruction in a job list task. Applies to action servers and tx

links.

number

number <form field> <length> <error queue>

530

Assigns a unique number to each story as the story is processed. Specify the form field that

will contain the number and the number of digits for the number. Applies to action servers

and tx links.

on <day> ...

Indicates on which days of the week a time-interval task will occur. You can combine this

instruction with the at keyword to indicate both day and time. Applies to action servers and

tx links.

open

open <computer> <username> [<format> [<queue name> [<story name>]]]

Initiates a network connection to a remote system for story transfer. The

username

you

specify must exist with identical passwords on both the local and remote systems. Applies to

tx links.

The <computer> can include a port number. The format is host:port. If no :port is included

in the <computer> parameter, the port defined by the rxnet service is used, if defined;

otherwise, the port defined by the FTP service is used.

The <username> can specify a simple name or a name in the format name@host. Only the

name portion is used to locally look up a password. The entire username is sent in the FTP

USER command. This may allow connections to be made through proxy servers.

The format, if specified, must be one of the following: 2nsml, nsml, sep, or html.

The queue name and story name are only used when the format is set to HTML. The queue

name and story name are used to get the Web publishing template that controls the

formatting of the story into an HTML page. If the queue name is not specified, the template

is taken from the SYSTEM.WEBFORMS queue. The story name can be used to select a

specific template from the queue. If not specified, the first story in the queue is used.

order

order [yes | no]

Indicates that order changes in the scan queue should be transmitted to the remote system.

For this to work correctly, the destination queue on the remote system must have its update

trait turned on.

Job List Commands

531

The order command applies to tx links and action servers. For action servers, the order of

the scan queue is propogated to each of the dup, move, and replace command destination

queues. Specifying order without yes or no is the same as order yes.

poll

poll <queue name> [<polling interval> [<polling duration>]]

Reads stories in the specified primary queue in a forward direction at certain intervals for a

specified duration. Polling is used in conjunction with the put or dup commands for rundown

mirroring. Stories with modified times greater than the time of the last scan are processed. If

an interval and duration are not specified, a single scan of the primary queue will be done.

Applies to timed-interval action servers and tx links.

publish

publish [no|yes]

When placed following a scan or bscan line, the txnet publishing option, publish no, disables

appending information to the PUBLISHED.HTML file on the remote system when using

HTML export. The default is set to yes. Applies to tx links.

put

put [<queue name>]

Sends stories over a tx link to a specified queue on the remote system. Applies to tx links.

The <queue name> parameter is optional. When it is not included, the story is put into the

default destination queue of the user on the remote system.

quiet

quiet [no|yes]

Including quiet no in a job list that performs validation sends a message whenever the server

successfully validates a story. The default, quiet yes, means a message is sent only when a

story fails validation. Applies to action servers and tx links.

remote

remote <queue name>

Identifies the secondary wire queue. Applies to parallel wire servers.

532

remove

Deletes stories from the scan queue. It must be the last instruction in a job list task. Applies

to action servers and tx links.

replace

replace <destination queue name> [<distribution code>]

Works like the dup command, except that it updates stories in the destination queue only

when they are already present in the destination queue. It does not add new stories to the

destination queue. Applies to action servers and tx links.

scan

scan <queue name> [priority | all | everyentry]

Specifies the queue monitored by this task. The scan line must come before any instructions

that manipulate stories in the queue, like dup or move. Ten stories are scanned at a time from

each scan queue; adding

priority

to a scan line means all new or modified stories in that

queue are scanned at once. The queue identified in the

scan

command as the priority queue

is always the next queue in the multiple-scan job list, so if it is idle, other queues are

processed. The system checks after every queue to see if new stories are ready for processing

on the queue identified in the scan command. Applies to the action servers and tx links.

The priority option forces the server to interrupt the scan of another queue if the server

receives a mailbox notification. The all option forces the server to scan the entire queue

instead of the limit of 10 stories when there are multiple queues to scan. The everyentry

option forces the server to process each entry in a queue, not just modified entries.

nDeleted entries are still controlled by the send-del option.

send-del

Instructs the server to process story deletions in the scan queue; this is the default behavior.

Use ignore-del to have the server take no action when a story is deleted from a scan queue.

Applies to action servers and tx links.

Dialog Commands

533

sendform

Instructs the Tx link to transmit the full form text of each story, rather than just the story’s

form name. Applies to tx links.

source

source <queue name>

Specifies a queue that a distribution or keyword server should check each time it wakes up.

Each task in a job list for such a server must begin with a source line. Applies to the

distribution and keyword servers.

validate

validate <validation queue> <error queue>

Activates form field validation for a server. It must include the queue name containing the

validation story and an error queue for stories that cannot be validated. Applies to action

servers and tx links.

Dialog Commands

This section describes the dialog commands. Some of these commands are equivalent to

those available to a user during a connect session, while others are unique to dialogs.

Each command must begin on a new line and can be uppercase or lowercase. The system

does not check dialogs for errors.

Many of these commands take one or more strings as their parameters. These strings are text

and can be entered from the keyboard or, if you need to include characters not available from

your keyboard, use their aliases or decimal equivalents. This applies to nonprinting

characters, such as Escape and Enter, which are represented by <esc> and <cr> respectively.

Depending on which character set is used by the device to which you connect, you may need

to translate certain keyboard characters to characters understood by the device. You may also

need to translate some of the characters sent by the device to characters usable by your

system.

534

Translating characters is called mapping, and there are three commands (

map

mapin

, and

mapout

) that allow you to do this. While these commands are also available to users, system

administrators will usually use them in dialogs to set up the translations for users rather than

leave it for users to do after they have connected.

capture

capture <destination queue name>

Places a copy of all text received from the remote connection during a session in a story into

the queue you specify.

Usually you invoke capture from the cmd> prompt. However, to turn capture on in a dialog,

place the capture command and destination queue name at the point in the dialog where you

want to begin capturing material.

You must include a destination queue unless you are restarting capture after having paused

it. If you have not paused capture earlier in the dialog, leaving out the queue name generates

an error and terminates the dialog.

delay

delay <# of seconds>

Pauses the dialog for a number of seconds.

When the specified time has passed, the dialog resumes. Put the command where you want

the dialog to pause and follow it with the number of seconds you want the dialog to pause.

For instance, to pause the dialog for five seconds, type delay 5.

Although the dialog is suspended while this command is in effect, you can use the

quit

connect command to close the connection.

diag

diag [on | off]

Normally, a dialog’s diagnostic mode is off and screen output is suppressed while the dialog

is running. However, you can use the diag command to turn the dialog’s diagnostic mode on

so you can see what the dialog is doing as it executes.

Usually you want the diagnostic mode on only when you are debugging a dialog, so you can

determine exactly where any errors occur. Place a diag on command in the dialog at the

point where you want to start debugging.

Dialog Commands

535

To see what happens during just one part of a dialog, bracket that portion of the dialog with

diag on and diag off commands.

echo

echo [on | off]

Turns local echo on or off.

Turn on local echo in any dialog used to connect to a device or information service that does

not echo back what the user enters. This way, the user can see what he or she is entering.

To turn on local echo, place echo on in the dialog where you want local echo turned on. Use

this command at or near the beginning of the dialog.

While you can turn local echo off using the echo off command, you are not required to do so.

Local echo is turned off automatically when the dialog finishes.

escape

escape <escape character>

To change the escape character (used to bring up the cmd> prompt) from within a dialog, use

the escape command.

For instance, to change the escape character from the default Ctrl+] to Ctrl+Z, use the escape

command. Represent the Ctrl+Z character as <26> (its decimal value).

nDo not change the escape character to Ctrl+A, Ctrl+Q, or Ctrl+S. These characters have

other important functions.

The escape character is reset to the default (Ctrl+]) when the user closes the connection.

expect

expect <delimiter><string1><delimiter><string2><delimiter>...

Instructs the dialog to wait for the device to which the service has connected to send a string

(string1). If that string is not received within five seconds, expect sends the second string

(string2) to the device and waits for a third string (string3). This continues until an expected

string is received within the five-second limit or expect runs out of strings.

536

To use the expect command, follow it with the character—that is,

—you want

to use as the delimiter to separate each string in the list. The delimiter can be any character.

Follow this with the first string you want expect to wait for. Then add a delimiter and the

string you want expect to send if it does not receive the first string. You can add as many

strings as you want.

For instance, some devices may not display a

prompt unless you press Enter. To

have the dialog send a carriage return to the device if it does not receive the

prompt

immediately, use the expect command. If the first character following expect is a comma,

this sets the comma as the delimiter used to separate strings following the command from

each other.

If you do not place a string between two delimiters, this indicates a null string. If you have

the expect command wait for a null string, it considers any string it receives to be a match. If

you have the expect send a null string, it does not send anything, but instead waits for the

next expected string.

Although the dialog is suspended while this command is in effect, the user can employ the

quit connect command to close the connection.

heol

heol [on|off]

If necessary, you can have the system insert a hard end-of-line character (HEOL) after each

line of captured text.

Put the heol on command in the dialog at the point where you want this feature turned on.

To turn off this feature, use heol off.

If you are calling a device that contains information in tables or columns, have the system

insert an HEOL at the end of each captured line. This way, tables and columns you capture

retain their format. Put the heol on command in the dialog.

map

map <local character> <remote character>

Translates a character (local character) entered at the keyboard to some other character

(remote character) before sending it to the device to which you are connected. Likewise, if

the system receives a remote character from the device, the map command translates it to

local character before sending it to a workstation.

Dialog Commands

537

mapin

mapin <remote character> <local character>

Translates a specific character (remote character) received from the device to which you are

connected to another character (local character).

This translation affects only characters received from the device to which you are connected.

It has no effect on the character when you enter it.

mapout

mapout <local character> <remote character>

Translates a particular character entered at the workstation (local character) to another

character (remote character) before it is sent to the device to which you are connected.

For instance, some devices use a limited character set that does not recognize lowercase

letters. To connect to such a device, you would want to map all lowercase characters to their

uppercase equivalents. For instance, to map a to A, use this

mapout

command:

mapout a A

This has no effect on characters received from the device. Only characters typed at the

workstation are translated.

message

message <string>

Sends the string to the screen.

This command informs users that the system is active and functioning during a dialing

session.

pass

pass <resume character>

Suspends a dialog and yields control to the user.

Whatever the user enters after the

pass

command is sent directly to the device to which the

user is connected. When the user enters the character defined in <

resume character

parameter, pass resumes the dialog.

538

To use

pass

, place it in the dialog where you want to yield control to the user and follow it

with a character you want the user to enter to resume the dialog. When the user enters this

character, pass sends it to the device and then resumes the dialog, preventing further user

input.

For instance, suppose you have a dialog that logs you into an information service. For

security reasons, you want the dialog to pause at the password prompt, let you enter the

password, and then resume. Do this using the pass command followed by a

<cr>

pressing Enter after entering the password resumes the dialog.

If you use

pass

without a parameter, it passes everything the user enters until he or she tries

to close the connection with the

quit

command. Then the dialog resumes, executes the

remaining commands in the dialog, and closes the connection.

pause

Suspends capturing from within the dialog. If you turned

capture

on earlier in the dialog,

you can pause capturing using the

pause

command.

To resume capturing later in the dialog, include a

capture

command (without a destination

queue) at that point in the dialog.

stop

Stops capturing from within a dialog.

If you have turned capture on earlier in the dialog, you can turn it off using the

stop

command.

timer

timer <# of seconds> <string to display>

Counts number of seconds specified in <

# of seconds>

when it is activated by the next

wait

command in the dialog.

When a specified string in the

wait

command is received, timer stops counting and

wait

resumes the dialog. If

wait

does not receive the expected string within the time specified in

the

timer

command,

timer

displays the text specified in string and closes the connect

session.

Dialog Commands

539

To use

timer

, follow it with the number of seconds you want it to count and the string you

want it to display if that period of time elapses. For instance, you may want to use the

timer

command so it terminates the session if the dialog is unable to log in within 60 seconds.

When a

pass

command is active, an active

timer

command suspends counting. When

pass

command finishes,

timer

command resumes counting.

Also, the same

timer

command applies to any subsequent

wait

commands if no other

timer

commands appear before them. If you do not want to use the same

timer

value for

another

wait

command later in the dialog, insert

timer 0

after the first

wait

command.

This cancels the first

timer

command and causes subsequent

wait

commands to wait for

their string forever if no other timer commands follow

timer 0

type

type <string to send>

Sends a string to the device to which the service has connected.

For instance, if you were creating a dialog that types the user’s name in response to a login

prompt, you may use:

type joel smith

Most devices to which you connect expect a carriage return (represented by a

<cr>

) after

each string you send. When this is the case, you must include a

<cr>

at the end of the string.

wait

wait <string to wait for>

Pauses the dialog until a specified string is received from a device to which the service has

connected, or until a certain amount of time (specified by a

timer

command) has elapsed

with no response.

To use this command, follow it with the string for which the dialog should wait. If you use

wait

without a parameter, the dialog waits until any character is received.

Unless a

timer

command has been executed first, the

wait

command waits forever until the

specified string is received, so type exactly the string you want it to wait for, and keep in

mind that

wait

is case-sensitive. If the dialog never receives the string

wait

is looking for,

the dialog hangs, and you need to use the

quit

connect command to exit the dialog and

return to your iNEWS Workstation.

540

BSystem Files

This appendix contains samples of system files you are most likely to reference or change:

•/etc/hosts

•/site/config

•/site/system

•console.cfg

•SYSTEM.CLIENT.WINDOWS

•SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.301-ACTION

•SYSTEM.MAP

•SYSTEM.RESOURCE

•SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION

•SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS

•SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS-AP

•SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS-AP2

B System Files

542

/etc/hosts

# Do not remove the following line, or various programs

# that require network functionality will fail.

127.0.0.1 localhost.localdomain localhost

# iNEWS Servers

123.123.123.95 nrcs-a1 a1 nrcs-a1.local

123.123.123.96 nrcs-b1 b1 nrcs-b1.local

10.1.1.1 nrcs-a a nrcs-a.local

10.1.1.2 nrcs-b b nrcs-b.local

# FTS

123.123.123.54 ftsserver

/site/config

543

/site/config

; Avid iNEWS Configuration

host ab a

servers 201 ;mail

servers 211 ;keyword

servers 231 233 235 237 239 ;seek

servers 241 ;ftsindex

servers 251 253 255 257 259 261 263 265 267 269 ;action

servers 271 273 275 277 279 281 283 285 287 289 ;monitor

servers 291 293 295 297 299 301 303 305 307 309 ;monitor

servers 311 313 315 317 319 ;monitor

servers 321 323 325 327 329 ;txnet

servers 331 333 335 337 339 341 343 345 347 349 ;rxnet

servers 351 353 355 357 359 361 363 365 367 369 ;rxnet

servers 371 373 375 377 379 381 383 385 387 389 ;rxnet

reslist 391 393 395 397 399 ;console

reslist 401 ;webaccess

reslist 501 503 505 507 509 511 513 515 517 519 ;inws

reslist 521 523 525 527 529 531 533 535 537 539 ;inws

reslist 601 602 ;wireservers

reslist 701 703 705 707 709 ;WebClient

reslist 711 713 715 717 719 ;Instinct

reslist 801 803 805 807 809 ;Community

reslist 901 903 905 ;API

;

host ab b

B System Files

544

servers 212 ;keyword

servers 232 234 236 238 240 ;seek

servers 242 ;ftsindex

servers 252 254 256 258 260 262 264 266 268 270 ;action

servers 272 274 276 278 280 282 284 286 288 290 ;monitor

servers 292 294 296 298 300 302 304 306 308 310 ;monitor

servers 312 314 316 318 320 ;monitor

servers 322 324 326 328 330 ;txnet

servers 332 334 336 338 340 342 344 346 348 350 ;rxnet

servers 352 354 356 358 360 362 364 366 368 370 ;rxnet

servers 372 374 376 378 380 382 384 386 388 390 ;rxnet

reslist 392 394 396 398 400 ;console

reslist 402 ;webaccess

reslist 502 504 506 508 510 512 514 516 518 520 ;inws

reslist 522 524 526 528 530 532 534 536 538 540 ;inws

reslist 702 704 706 708 710 ;WebClient

reslist 712 714 716 718 720 ;Instinct

reslist 802 804 806 808 810 ;Community

reslist 902 904 ;API

;

host a a

servers 201 ;mail

servers 211 212 ;keyword

servers 231:240 ;seek

;servers 241 242 ;fts

servers 251:270 ;action

/site/config

545

servers 271:320 ;monitor

servers 321:330 ;txnet

servers 331:390 ;rxnet

reslist 391:400 ;console

reslist 401 402 ;webaccess

reslist 501:540 ;inws

reslist 601 602 ;wireservers

reslist 701:710 ;WebClient

reslist 711:720 ;Instinct

reslist 801:810 ;Community

reslist 901:905 ;API

;

host b b

servers 201 ;mail

servers 211 212 ;keyword

servers 231:240 ;seek

servers 241 242 ;fts

servers 251:270 ;action

servers 271:320 ;monitor

servers 321:330 ;txnet

servers 331:390 ;rxnet

reslist 391:400 ;console

reslist 401 402 ;webaccess

reslist 501:540 ;inws

reslist 601 602 ;wireservers

reslist 701:710 ;WebClient

B System Files

546

reslist 711:720 ;Instinct

reslist 801:810 ;Community

reslist 901:905 ;API

;

; SERVERS

;

;GENERAL

;

server 201 mailserver 201 - ;

;

; KEYWORD

;

server 211 keyword 211 - ;

server 212 keyword 212 - ;

;

; SEEK

;

server 231 seek 231 - ;

server 232 seek 231 - ;

server 233 seek 231 - ;

server 234 seek 231 - ;

server 235 seek 231 - ;

server 236 seek 231 - ;

server 237 seek 231 - ;

/site/config

547

server 238 seek 231 - ;

server 239 seek 231 - ;

server 240 seek 231 - ;

;

; FTS

;

;server 241 ftsindex 241 - ;FTSINDEX

;server 242 ftsseek 242 - ;FTSSEEK

;

; ACTION

;

server 251 action 251 - ;Phones

server 252 action 252 - ;Shredder

server 253 action 253 - ;Assignment Archive

server 254 action 254 - ;Auto archive

server 255 action 255 - ;

server 256 action 256 - ;

server 257 action 257 - ;

server 258 action 258 - ;

server 259 action 259 - ;

server 260 action 260 - ;

server 261 action 261 - ;

server 262 action 262 - ;

server 263 action 263 - ;

server 264 action 264 - ;

server 265 action 265 - ;

B System Files

548

server 266 action 266 - ;

server 267 action 267 - ;

server 268 action 268 - ;

server 269 action 269 - ;

server 270 action 270 - ;

;

; MONITOR

;

server 271 monitor 271 - ;show.mos.rundown

server 272 monitor 272 -

;show.training.rundown

server 273 monitor 273 - ;

server 274 monitor 274 - ;

server 275 monitor 275 - ;

server 276 monitor 276 - ;

server 277 monitor 277 - ;

server 278 monitor 278 - ;

server 279 monitor 279 - ;

server 280 monitor 280 - ;

server 281 monitor 281 - ;

server 282 monitor 282 - ;

server 283 monitor 283 - ;

server 284 monitor 284 - ;

server 285 monitor 285 - ;

server 286 monitor 286 - ;

server 287 monitor 287 - ;

/site/config

549

server 288 monitor 288 - ;

server 289 monitor 289 - ;

server 290 monitor 290 - ;

server 291 monitor 291 - ;

server 292 monitor 292 - ;

server 293 monitor 293 - ;

server 294 monitor 294 - ;

server 295 monitor 295 - ;

server 296 monitor 296 - ;

server 297 monitor 297 - ;

server 298 monitor 298 - ;

server 299 monitor 299 - ;

server 300 monitor 300 - ;

server 301 monitor 301 - ;

server 302 monitor 302 - ;

server 303 monitor 303 - ;

server 304 monitor 304 - ;

server 305 monitor 305 - ;

server 306 monitor 306 - ;

server 307 monitor 307 - ;

server 308 monitor 308 - ;

server 309 monitor 309 - ;

server 310 monitor 310 - ;

server 311 monitor 311 - ;

server 312 monitor 312 - ;

server 313 monitor 313 - ;

B System Files

550

server 314 monitor 314 - ;

server 315 monitor 315 - ;

server 316 monitor 316 - ;

server 317 monitor 317 - ;

server 318 monitor 318 - ;

server 319 monitor 319 - ;

server 320 monitor 320 - ;

;

; RESOURCES

; TXNET

;

server 321 txnet 321 - ;

server 322 txnet 322 - ;

server 323 txnet 323 - ;

server 324 txnet 324 - ;

server 325 txnet 325 - ;

server 326 txnet 326 - ;

server 327 txnet 327 - ;

server 328 txnet 328 - ;

server 329 txnet 329 - ;

server 330 txnet 330 - ;

;

; RXNET

;

server 331 rxnet - - ;

server 332 rxnet - - ;

/site/config

551

server 333 rxnet - - ;

server 334 rxnet - - ;

server 335 rxnet - - ;

server 336 rxnet - - ;

server 337 rxnet - - ;

server 338 rxnet - - ;

server 339 rxnet - - ;

server 340 rxnet - - ;

server 341 rxnet - - ;

server 342 rxnet - - ;

server 343 rxnet - - ;

server 344 rxnet - - ;

server 345 rxnet - - ;

server 346 rxnet - - ;

server 347 rxnet - - ;

server 348 rxnet - - ;

server 349 rxnet - - ;

server 350 rxnet - - ;

server 351 rxnet - - ;

server 352 rxnet - - ;

server 353 rxnet - - ;

server 354 rxnet - - ;

server 355 rxnet - - ;

server 356 rxnet - - ;

server 357 rxnet - - ;

server 358 rxnet - - ;

B System Files

552

server 359 rxnet - - ;

server 360 rxnet - - ;

server 361 rxnet - - ;

server 362 rxnet - - ;

server 363 rxnet - - ;

server 364 rxnet - - ;

server 365 rxnet - - ;

server 366 rxnet - - ;

server 367 rxnet - - ;

server 368 rxnet - - ;

server 369 rxnet - - ;

server 370 rxnet - - ;

server 371 rxnet - - ;

server 372 rxnet - - ;

server 373 rxnet - - ;

server 374 rxnet - - ;

server 375 rxnet - - ;

server 376 rxnet - - ;

server 377 rxnet - - ;

server 378 rxnet - - ;

server 379 rxnet - - ;

server 380 rxnet - - ;

server 381 rxnet - - ;

server 382 rxnet - - ;

server 383 rxnet - - ;

server 384 rxnet - - ;

/site/config

553

server 385 rxnet - - ;

server 386 rxnet - - ;

server 387 rxnet - - ;

server 388 rxnet - - ;

server 389 rxnet - - ;

server 390 rxnet - - ;

;

; NETWORK CONSOLE CONNECTS

;

resource 391 console - ;

resource 392 console - ;

resource 393 console - ;

resource 394 console - ;

resource 395 console - ;

resource 396 console - ;

resource 397 console - ;

resource 398 console - ;

resource 399 console - ;

resource 400 console - ;

;

; WEB ACCESS

;

websession 401 ;

websession 402 ;

;

; INWS RESOURCES

B System Files

554

;

inws 501:540 - gnews - ;

;

;DATA RECEIVER

wireserver 601 news AP - ;Associated Press

wireserver 602 news EM - ;E-Mail

;

;WEB CLIENT RESOURCES

;

webclient 701:710 - gnews - ;

;

;iNEWS INSTINCT RESOURCES

;

aiws 711:720 - gnews - ;

;

;INWS (COM and RSEARCH) SESSIONS

cinws 801:810 - gnews - ; Community

api 901:905 - gnews - ;API

/site/system

555

/site/system

id=NRCS net=AB

lowwater=5000 highwater=6250 purgelimit=5

load=5 pausetimeout=0:05

;

; defaults - if parameter not present these values are assumed

; unless overridden on the command line.

;

; auto_upgrade=yes lowwater=1250 remotetimeout=0:00

; clockmax=12 maxhits=500 security=or

; excluded_video=none min_passwd_length=5 timechar=:

; highwater=2500 msgserver=silent timer=verbose

; lastlogin=yes pausetimeout=0:30 wordlength=0

; load=0 purgelimit=0

; localtimeout=0:00 readrate=180

B System Files

556

console.cfg

log b:log 32764

computer ; A server

name a

label NRCS

irq 3

hostess 2c0

speed 9600

;

computer ; B server

name b

label NRCS

irq 3

hostess 2c8

speed 9600

;

computer ; C server

name c

label NRCS

irq 3

hostess 2d0

speed 9600

;

modem ; remote console

password issecret

timeout 6:00

console.cfg

557

irq 3

hostess 2d8

speed 2400

B System Files

558

SYSTEM.CLIENT.WINDOWS

nEither IP address or network card information is acceptable; IP address is preferable.

125.1.100.1 ;02608cdbe7a2 ns001 big table

125.1.100.2 ;02608cd95e7e ns002 brock 07

125.1.100.3 ;02608c7e178e ns003 nydam 16

125.1.100.4 ;02608c7e67aa ns004 lockett 38

02608c7e519f ;ns005 michel 87

02608c7e1790 ;ns006 thibault 22

02608c7e51a8 ;ns007 ries 04

02608c7e6c01 ;ns008 lucas 57

125.1.100.9 ;02608c7e52c6 ns009 christensen 48

125.1.100.10 ;02608c7e5260 ns010 betty 69

125.1.100.11 ;0020aff431ff ns011 aveson 28

125.1.100.12 ;02608c7e6bfc ns012 robinson 49

125.1.100.13 ;02608c7e5274 ns013 tinsley 63

125.1.100.14 ;02608c7e6b58 ns014 reed 44

125.1.100.15 ;02608c7e532e ns015 landis 61

125.1.100.16 ;0020aff42efc ns016 dorr 51

125.1.100.17 ;0020aff42dad ns017 donnallen 60

125.1.100.18 ;0020aff42dcb ns018 douda 54

125.1.100.19 ;0020aff432ca ns019 kennedy 52

125.1.100.20 ;0020aff42d42 ns020 control room

125.1.100.21 ;0020aff431bf ns021 becker 30

125.1.100.22 ;0020aff43277 ns022 glass 29

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.301-ACTION

559

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE.301-ACTION

scan system.shredder

remove

scan system.cables.master

dup system.cables.groups

dup system.cables.cable#

dup system.cables.device_type

scan phones.airports

dup phones.*all

scan phones.business

dup phones.*all

scan phones.fire

dup phones.*all

scan phones.government.federal

dup phones.*all

scan phones.government.local

dup phones.*all

scan phones.government.state

dup phones.*all

scan phones.hospitals

dup phones.*all

scan phones.misc

dup phones.*all

B System Files

560

SYSTEM.MAP

;

;<rundown queue> <event dir> <composite> <grp> <mon off time>

;<server type> <server name> <backup server> <CAWS form>

; video <device name> <alias name> <channel assignment agent>

; ss <device name> <alias name> <drive>:<directory> <stack name|#>

; cg <device name> <alias name> <msg drive>:<msg dir> <tmpl

drive>:<tmpl dir><start address> <end address> <address offset>

; mos <device name> -

;

;======================================================================

; Show: Training (using monitor number 272) - COMMAND EXAMPLE

show.training.rundown show.training - monitor 1815

wnasvr magneto msn-cmd command-master

video EF - E ;

; cg cg - 1 news ;

;

; Show: Training (using monitor number 320) - CONTROL AIR EXAMPLE

;show.training.rundown show.training - monitor 1815

;casvr gambit - bcs-cg

; video video - 3

; cg cg - C:NEWS - 2200 2239 -

; ss ss - shared: 900

;

SYSTEM.MAP

561

; Show: Training (use monitor # 320) - CONTROL AIR EXAMPLE (TWO SERVERS)

;show.mornings.rundown show.mornings - monitor 0710

;casvr ca-video - bcs-video

; video video - 3

;casvr ca-cg - bcs-cg

; cg cg - C:NEWS - 2200 2239 20

;

B System Files

562

SYSTEM.RESOURCE

;Dev Style Template Effect # lines Comment

cg bnews 62 - 0 ;breaking news

cg th 76 - 1 ;today in history

cg mm 75 - 1 ;money matters

cg pball 9996 - 6 ;powerball

cg lottopb 9993 - 12 ;lotto/powerball

cg cashpb 9994 - 9 ;cash3/powerball

cg world 50 - 1 ;the world

cg nation 50 - 1 ;the nation

cg fancash 9995 - 8 ;fantasy 5 cash 3

cg south 50 - 1 ;the south

cg recap 52 - 1 ;recap

cg nitetz 53 - 1 ;11 tonight

cg tvex 67 - 0 ;tv exclusive

cg uv 68 - 0 ;unedited video

cg tji 69 - 0 ;this just in

cg intv1 1 - 1 ;1 line interview

cg intv 2 - 2 ;2 line interview

cg intvdate 2 - 2 ;1 line interview with date

cg loc 4 - 1 ;1 line locator

cg locdate 5 - 2 ;locator with date

cg date 6 - 1 ;date super

cg file 7 - 0 ;file tape

cg newsfile 7 - 0 ;newsfile

cg ctsy 8 - 1 ;courtesy

SYSTEM.RESOURCE

563

cg sktch 10 - 1 ;sketches by

cg spkng1 11 - 1 ;speaking one line

cg spkng 12 - 2 ;speaking two line

cg scenes 13 - 1 ;scenes from

cg locskylv 24 - 1 ;live skycam locator

cg locsky 16 - 1 ;locator skycam

cg intvskylv 17 - 2 ;interview skycam live

cg repsky 18 - 1 ;reporter skycam

cg loclv 19 - 1 ;live locator

cg intvlv 20 - 2 ;live interview

cg intv1lv 28 - 1 ;live interview 1 line

cg live 21 - 0 ;live

cg replv 22 - 1 ;live generic reporter

cg lvsky 23 - 0 ;live skycam

cg rep 27 - 1 ;reporter not live

cg sky 141 - 0 ;skycam live

cg frsky 254 - 0 ;from skycam

;

;special for NoonDay

;

cg locn 1002 - 1 ;1-line locator/noonday

cg scenesn 1022 - 1 ;scenes from/noonday

cg innd 1001 - 2 ;2 line interview noon

cg lond 1008 - 1 ;live locator noon

cg inlvnd 1007 - 2 ;live 2 line interview noon

;

B System Files

564

; SPORTS

cg nl 950 - 10 ;national league

cg al 951 - 10 ;american league

cg nfl 952 - 10 ;nfl

cg cf 953 - 10 ;college football

cg nba 954 - 10 ;nba

cg cbb 955 - 10 ;college basketball

cg nhl 956 - 10 ;nhl

cg prep 957 - 16 ;high school

cg scr 960 - 4 ;score lower third

;; Anchors/Reporters

cg sa 104 - 0 ; steve aveson

cg salv 105 - 0 ; steve aveson live

cg sasky 107 - 0 ; steve aveson skycam

SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION

565

SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION

AP#medc2## wires.medsource

AP#env#### wires.environmental

AP######a# wires.national

AP######c# wires.features

AP######d# wires.summaries

AP######e# wires.features

AP######f# wires.business

AP######g# wires.state/regional

AP######h# wires.summaries

AP######i# wires.international

AP######j# wires.state/regional

AP######m# wires.farm

AP######n# wires.state/regional

AP######o# wires.weather

AP######p# wires.politics

AP######q# wires.sports.all

AP######q# wires.sports.scores

AP######r# wires.advisory.other

AP######s# wires.sports.all

AP######s# wires.sports.stories

AP#nbc##t# wires.newschannel

AP######t# wires.advisory.other

AP######u# wires.state/regional

AP######v# wires.advisory.other

AP######v# wires.daybook

B System Files

566

AP######w# wires.national

AP######## wires.unknown

AP######## wires.ap ALWAYS

AP######## wires.all ALWAYS URGENT

NC######u# wires.advisory.priority

NC######## wires.all

NC######## wires.newschannel

NC######## wires.all ALWAYS URGENT

AP######q# sports.wires

AP######s# sports.wires

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS

* AP

system.wires.keywords-ap wires.keywords

system.wires.keywords-ap2 wires.

* UP

system.wires.keywords-others wires.keywords

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS-AP

567

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS-AP

destination atlanta

atlanta

destination rape

rape

destination braves

braves

destination carter

carter

destination tuscaloosa

tuscaloosa and football

destination xgr

xgr

destination medsource

medc2 or medstar

destination gingrich

gingrich

destination space

(space AND shuttle) OR (shuttle AND columbia) or (shuttle AND atlantis)

shuttle AND discovery

destination drugs

crack AND cocaine

destination air-safety

crash and plane OR ntsc or n.t.s.c. or faa or f.a.a.

destination delta

(delta and airlines) OR (hartsfield and airport)

B System Files

568

destination guns

guns or weapons or nra

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS-AP2

destination 9am-specials

900a and specials

CStandard Dictionaries

This appendix defines and explains contents of standard dictionaries as they are installed on

your iNEWS newsroom computer system. Reference this information when modifying

dictionary contents. Major sections are:

•Using Dictionaries to Define Messages and Commands

•Customizing Dictionaries

•Utility Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/messages)

•Queues Dictionary (/site/dict/queues)

•Words Dictionary (/site/dict/words)

•Keyboard Macros Dictionary (/site/dict/keymacros)

•Case-shifting Dictionary (/site/dict/shift)

•MCS Dictionary (/site/dict/mcs)

•Job List Command Dictionary (/site/dict/joblist)

•D Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/dmessages)

•S Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/smessages)

C Standard Dictionaries

570

Using Dictionaries to Define Messages and

Commands

Most commands, messages, and many queues your iNEWS newsroom computer system

uses are defined in dictionaries. Your system has a number of these dictionaries, each

defining a particular group of commands, messages, or words, such as: the names of all

commands are defined in the

ccucmds

dictionary. Many messages your system uses are

defined in the

ccumsgs

dictionary.

Dictionaries let you customize your system’s messages, workstation and commands, as well

as the names of many of the queues your system uses (such as SYSTEM.SEEK). You can

change the names of any of your system’s required queues by editing their definitions in the

queues dictionary and then having your system read the modified dictionary.

nIf you customize your dictionary entries, keep a log of the changes you make so your

changes can be re-entered after future software upgrades.

The following table lists names and locations of dictionary files.

Each line in a dictionary begins with a standard name followed by the translation for the

command, message, or word represented by that standard name, as shown in the following

Dictionary Standard Names and Translation table.

File Name & Location Dictionary File Name

/site/dict/messages

Utility Messages

/site/dict/queues

Required Queues

/site/dict/words

Status and Option Words

/site/dict/smessages

Connect Commands and Messages

/site/dict/keymacros

Key Names for Macros

/site/dict/shift

Case-Shifting Parameters

/site/dict/mcs

MCS Alarms and Words

Standard Name Translation

W_ERROR

/ERROR

W_DEST

/destination

Using Dictionaries to Define Messages and Commands

571

Each translation is preceded by a slash (/). In commands, the translation represents the

minimum a user must enter to execute the command.

The translations may be more than one word long, but the dictionaries have limited space, so

keep each translation as short as possible. As a rule, make translations just long enough to be

unique from any other translation.

If the purpose of a standard name or its translation is not clear, clarify them by inserting a

comment on the line following the translation. Begin the comment line with a semicolon (;)

to prevent the system from treating it as part of the translation.

niNEWS newsroom computer system uses standard names in each dictionary to match each

translation to the correct command, message, or word. Do not change any of the standard

names in your dictionaries.

W_START

/ON

Standard Name Translation

C Standard Dictionaries

572

Customizing Dictionaries

Your system’s dictionaries are text files stored in the /site/dict directory. Because they are

text files, you can change any dictionary translation using ed, the line editor, at the console.

Changing Default Dictionary Values

As an example of how to modify a dictionary translation, change the enter directory and

enter queue commands to make directory and make queue. To do this, change the

translations for enter directory and enter queue from

e d

and

e q

ma d

and

ma q

respectively.

The new translations, like the ones they are replacing, are as short as they can be and still

remain unique. Keep each translation short, because there is a space limit.

If necessary, hide commands from users by changing the command name. For instance, to

restrict access to the order command, change it to something like arrange and inform only

users that you want to have access to the command.

To edit the dictionary file, do the following:

1. Select all servers at the console, so changes you make are made to each server’s copy of

the file.

The

enter directory

and

enter queue

commands have their translations stored in

/site/dict/queues.

nThis procedure uses the ed line editor.

2. Open /site/dict/queues for editing by typing:

ed /site/dict/queues

A message similar to the following appears:

editing /site/dict/queues

1824

3. Move to the beginning of the file by typing:

4. Move to the line containing Q_UNKNOWN by typing

<ENTER>

5. Change wires.unknown to wires.mystery by typing:

s/unknown/mystery

Customizing Dictionaries

573

6. Type

(lowercase w) to save your changes to disk and type

to quit edit.

1826

To change a default dictionary value, do the following:

1. Edit the dictionary file.

See the previous procedure.

2. Type a message like the following:

NRCS-A: broadcast System going down at 1:55 pm. Please log out.

3. Type

offline

to bring the system offline. This will prevent users from logging in.

4. At the designated time, type

list s

to see whether anyone is still logged in.

If there is someone logged in, a message similar to the following appears:

G500 terryl A

5. If anyone is logged in, type

logout all

to log them out.

6. Type

stop all

to stop all servers.

7. Enter superuser mode at the console.

8. Type

makemontab -i

After modifying a dictionary, run makemontab and maketab to have your system read

the modified dictionaries and incorporate changes into its programs.

9. Type

maketab -i

The maketab command translates each dictionary and then displays unused space in

these dictionaries.

If you changed the name of a command in a command dictionary, you must also change

the function key definition that references that command.

10. Restart all devices.

11. At the prompt, exit from superuser using Ctrl+D.

12. Back up your site files with the sitedump command.

If you do not have one of your site files, a message similar to the following appears

when you run the makemontab or maketab console command:

Translating </site/dict/queues>

Cannot access translation file </site/dict/queues>.

Do you wish to use the standard English translations and continue?

(n/y)

C Standard Dictionaries

574

If a set of dictionaries exceeds the amount of space allotted, a message similar to the

following appears:

Table space exceeded by 14 characters

No modifications done!

Restoring Dictionary Defaults

You can restore original dictionary default translations without editing the dictionary again.

Original dictionary files are stored in the /site/dict directory and have a pound symbol (#)

prefix, such as #mcs. So, even after you have made changes to a dictionary, you can restore

the standard default translations by copying the appropriate dictionary file from /site/dict

and running the makemontab and maketab commands again.

To restore standard translations for Q_UNKNOWN, do the following:

1. List files in /site/dict by running the following ls command:

ls /site/dict

A display similar to the following appears:

dmessages joblist keymacros mcs messages queues shift

shift.CP1250 shift.CP1252 shift.CP1254 shift.CP1256 smessages

words

#dmessages #joblist #keymacros #mcs #messages #queues #shift

shift.CP1251 shift.CP1253 shift.CP1255 shift.CP1257 #smessages

#words

2. Type

followed by the pathname of the file you want to copy, and the pathname of the

file you want to contain the copy. For instance,

cp /site/dict/#queues /site/dict/queues

After you copy the file to /site/dict, complete the procedure for changing a translation.

Utility Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/messages)

575

Utility Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/messages)

The /site/dict/messages dictionary holds a number of utility messages displayed in utility

programs used by the iNEWS newsroom computer system including messages usually

displayed when a user is building a form or creating a keyboard story. A few console

messages are also included in this dictionary.

These messages do not contribute to the total size of translations, because they are sent to

workstations only under special circumstances, and—with some exceptions—the system

looks up translations only as they are needed rather than building them into a program. Some

exceptions include the following messages, which are built into programs via the maketab

program:

• M_COMPUTER

•M_KEYBAD

• M_LASTLOG

• M_ONDEVICE

•M_WIREFAIL

• M_WIREIDLE

• M_WIRERESUME

nSome messages defined in dictionary entries on the server that would typically be displayed

in the iNEWS client status bar can now have a display method designator to determine if the

message should be displayed in the status bar or as a pop-up message. This display method

designator is based on the first character of the message definition. A display designator of 1

denotes that the message will appear on the status bar. A display designator of 2 denotes

the message displays as a pop-up dialog in addition to being displayed in the status bar and

alerts history. The default display method will be a ‘1’ if no display designator is specified.

This section describes these utility messages in the following tables:

•DBServer Program Messages

•Disconnect Program Messages

•Category and Keyword Check Program Messages

•Keyboard Check Program Messages

•Keyboard Check Program Messages for Macros

•Grpcheck Messages

•Wire Program Messages

•Mail Server Messages

C Standard Dictionaries

576

•Validation (Action) Server

•Seek Server Messages

•Last Login Messages

•Print Server Messages

•dbtraits Messages

•Save Error (Workstation) Messages

DBServer Program Messages

Disconnect Program Messages

Category and Keyword Check Program Messages

Standard Name Translation

M_NOSPACE /2NO SPACE IN SYSTEM

M_LOWSPACE /1SYSTEM LOW ON SPACE

Standard Name Translation

M_DISCONNECT /2COMPUTER DISCONNECTED

Standard Name Translation

M_NODEST /No destination found

M_DUPEDEST /Duplicate destination

M_LINE /Line

M_KWFMAX /Too many keyword distribution files

M_BADQUEUE /Could not enter the queue

M_NOTQUEUE /Not a queue

Utility Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/messages)

577

Keyboard Check Program Messages

M_PURGEZERO /Queue is never purged

M_SYSERROR /System error

M_CATLONG /Category code word too long

M_CATBAD /Category code word invalid

M_CATMAX /Too many category codes

M_CATFORM /Illegal category format

M_CATHIDE /Hidden category

M_KWDLONG /Keyword too long

M_KWDMAX /Too many keywords

M_EXPMAX /Too many expressions

M_WNOTLAST /Default keyword list must be last

M_SYNERROR /Syntax error

M_MISSING /Missing

M_UNEXPCTD /Unexpected

M_FILENUM /Maximum file number bad

M_UPDATEQ /UPDATE queue

M_INVALIDQ /Invalid destination queue

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Standard Name Translation

M_KEYDUP /Duplicate key description

M_KEYRANGE /Invalid key number

M_KEYSEP /Missing key number separator (~)

M_KEYSTART /First key description does not begin with @

M_KEYMIN /Not enough key descriptions

C Standard Dictionaries

578

Keyboard Check Program Messages for Macros

M_KEYLONG /Keyboard description contains too many

characters

M_KEYREP /Warning: a key definition contains a repeating

function

M_KEYFUNKY /Warning: badly placed @ exists in key definition

line

M_KEYOK /Keyboard ok

M_KEYBAD /Keyboard NOT usable

M_COMPUTER /Computer

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Standard Name Translation

M_MACRO /%s macro #%d:

M_NOLOCATE /could not locate "%c%d"

M_BADMEMORY /memory allocation error

M_REFERENCE /circular reference to macro #%d:

M_BADSTACK /unable to stack keywords

M_MISMATCH /mismatched "%c%c"

M_TWOTILDES /Multiple "%c"s found

M_RESWORD /no "%c%c" found for reserved word %s

M_TWOTAGS /multiple macro keys: %s %s

M_NOTILDE /no "%c" found

M_NOTAG /no macro key tag

M_UNKNOWN /unknown macro key identifier: %s

M_IGNORING /ignoring: %s

M_UNEXPECTED /unexpected: %s

Utility Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/messages)

579

Grpcheck Messages

M_TWODEFS /duplicate macro definition:

M_LONESTATE /isolated keyboard state:

M_DISTRIBUTE /%s does not distribute

M_EMPTY /empty macro

M_NUMKEYNOSHIFT /Shifted numeric keypad 0 - 9 keys cannot be

assigned macros

M_STDHELP /Warning: "Help" key redefined:

M_STDCELLEDIT /Warning: "Edit Cell" key redefined:

M_STDFINDNEXT /Warning: "Find Next" key redefined:

M_STDEXIT /Warning: "Exit" key redefined:

M_STDCLOSE /Warning: "Window Close" key redefined:

M_STDREFRESH /Warning: "Refresh" key redefined:

M_STDTOGGLETEXTFORM /Warning: "Toggle Story Form" key redefined:

M_STDSCRIPT /Warning: "Script Swap" key redefined:

M_STDPRIORITYQUEUE /Warning: "GoTo Priority Queue" key redefined:

M_STDALERTSHISTORY /Warning: "GoTo Alerts History" key redefined:

M_STDMESSAGEBAR /Warning: "Communicate Message Bar" key

redefined:

M_STDMESSAGEHISTORY /Warning: "Communicate Message Show

History" key redefined:

M_STDMAIL /Warning: "Communicate Open/Close Mail" key

redefined:

M_BADPAUSE /Invalid pause interval

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Standard Name Translation

M_GRPBADALIAS /Invalid name follows word "alias"

C Standard Dictionaries

580

M_GRPBADGRP /Invalid name follows word "group"

M_GRPBADDEV /Not a workstation device

M_GRPERRSKIP /Group or alias word missing. Skipping text

M_GRPEXINPUT /Ignoring words following group name

M_GRPAEXINPUT /Ignoring words following alias name

M_GRPINT /Internal groupchecker error

M_GRPDBERR /Failed to access first story

M_GRPDEVSYN /Bad workstation device specification

M_GRPNAMUSR /User name used as group or alias name

M_GRPNAMDUP /Duplicate group or alias name

M_GRPNONAME /Missing group name

M_GRPALNONAME /Missing alias name

M_GRPGRPREC /Recursive group membership

M_GRPINALIAS /Name already used as group name

M_GRPAINGRP /Name already used as alias name

M_GRPMEMBAD /Not a user or workstation

M_GRPNIX /No groups or aliases found

M_GRPRESERV /Improper use of reserved word

M_GRPNOSTORY /Failed to open story

M_GRPNOQ /Failed to open queue

M_GRPFLODEF /Cannot open default aliases file

M_GRPFLONEW /Cannot open new aliases file

M_GRPFLSOLD /Cannot save old aliases file

M_GRPFLLONG /more than 50,000 alias names created

M_GRPOK /GROUPS story OK

M_GRPBAD /GROUPS story NOT OK

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Utility Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/messages)

581

Wire Program Messages

Mail Server Messages

Validation (Action) Server

M_GRPSOSO /GROUPS story accepted, with errors

M_GRPNOSOUSER /Lookup of "so" user in passwd file failed.

M_GRPCHOWNFAILED /Could not change ownership of mail alias file.

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Standard Name Translation

M_WIREFAIL /1HOST-CCU COMMUNICATION ERROR

M_WIREIDLE /1wire has been idle for

M_WIRERESUME /1wire received story, was idle for

Standard Name Translation

M_MAILSYNTAX /Can't send mail, no address

M_MAILNOREC /Unable to receive mail from

M_MAILQUEUE /Can't return mail, bad mail queue

Standard Name Translation

M_VALID /Story valid

M_INVALID /Story invalid

M_VMOVEDTO /Story invalid - Moved to

C Standard Dictionaries

582

Seek Server Messages

nSeek Server Messages are also used by ftsseek.

Standard Name Translation

M_BGSNSCHP /No search path

M_BGSNRESP /No results path

M_BGSSCHTP /Invalid Search Type

M_BGSIKWEX /Invalid keyword expression

M_BGSSPDNE /Search Path does not exist

M_BGSRQDNE /Results Queue does not exist

M_BGSRQNAQ /Results Queue not a queue

M_BGSRQNPM /No write permission for results queue

M_BGSINVLD /Invalid Search

M_BGSEOP /end of path

M_BGSMAXH /max hits

M_BGSSPI /Invalid search path

M_BGSRQI /Invalid results queue

M_BGSRQOE /Open error on results queue

M_BGSDONE /Done

M_BGSSTOPPED /Stopped

M_BGSCANCELLED /Cancelled

M_BGSSYNTAXERROR /Syntax Error

M_BGSCOMMERROR /Communication Error

M_BGSMPAT /Missing search pattern

Queues Dictionary (/site/dict/queues)

583

Last Login Messages

Print Server Messages

dbtraits Messages

Save Error (Workstation) Messages

Queues Dictionary (/site/dict/queues)

The Queues dictionary contains names for system queues such as SYSTEM.KEYBOARDS

and the Dead queue.

Standard Name Translation

M_LASTLOG /Last Login

M_ONDEVICE /on device

Standard Name Translation

M_PRINT_BUSY /Printer is OFFLINE

Standard Name Translation

M_CHANGE_GROUP /1Group, form, order, or sortfield changed.

Standard Name Translation

M_SAVE_ERROR /Error: Story saved in

M_NO_SAVE /Error: Story could not be saved.

C Standard Dictionaries

584

Queues in this dictionary are used by functions within Media Browse. For instance, the

seek

command uses whatever queue translation is given to Q_SEEK, which is SYSTEM.SEEK

by default. Like other dictionaries, the standard name is in uppercase and must not be

changed. The translation can be in lowercase, but appears in uppercase on the screen. Queue

names and their standard translations are shown in the following Queues Dictionary table.

The 8-bit codes can be defined using 7-bit sequences.

Standard Name Translation

Q_ACCT /system.account

Q_CATWORDS /system.wires.distribution

Q_CLIENT_API /system.client.api

Q_CLIENT_API_VERSIONS /system.client.api-versions

Q_CLIENT_COM /system.client.com

Q_CLIENT_COMMUNITY_VERSIONS /system.client.community-versions

Q_CLIENT_INSTINCT /system.client.instinct

Q_CLIENT_INTERPLAY_INSTINCT /system.client.interplay-instinct

Q_CLIENT_VERSIONS /system.client.versions

Q_CLIENT_WEB /system.client.web

Q_CLIENT_WEB_VERSIONS /system.client.web-versions

Q_CLIENT_WINDOWS /system.client.windows

Q_CLIENT_WIRE_SERVER /system.client.wire-server

Q_COLORS /system.colors

Q_CONFIGURE /system.configure

Q_DEAD /dead

Q_DESTINATION /notes

Q_FLASH /wires.advisory.priority

Q_FORMS /system.forms

Q_FTS /system.fts

Q_GROUPS /system.groups

Q_HELP /system.help.terminal

Queues Dictionary (/site/dict/queues)

585

Q_HOME /notes

Q_INDEX /system.index

Q_INTERPLAY /system.interplay

Q_KEYBOARDS /system.keyboards

Q_KEYWORDS /system.wires.keywords

Q_LISTS /system.lists

Q_MAIL /mail

Q_MAILERROR /system.mail.error

Q_MAILOUT /system.mail.out

Q_MESSAGE /system.message

Q_MMAP /system.map

Q_MOS_MAP /system.mos-map

Q_MRESOURCE /system.resource

Q_NODEST /system.unknown

Q_POST_TO_WEB /system.post-to-web

Q_SCRIPT /system.dialogs

Q_SCRIPT_TEMPLATES /system.script-templates

Q_SEARCHTAPE /system.searchtape

Q_SEEK /system.seek

Q_SERVICE /system.service

Q_SPELL /system.spell

Q_STYLES /system.styles

Q_TITLE _ENTRY /system.title-entry

Q_UNKNOWN /wires.unknown

Q_USERROOT /people

Q_WEBACC_FORMS /system.webforms

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

C Standard Dictionaries

586

Words Dictionary (/site/dict/words)

The Words dictionary contains translations for a variety of miscellaneous words used by the

system. For instance, words regarding priority (such as flash and silent) or print options

(such as story and script) are included.

Standard names are in uppercase and must not be changed. Because many messages in this

dictionary are displayed in the upper right corner of active stories and rundowns, keep them

short to avoid overwriting portions of the story or rundown. Translations can be uppercase,

lowercase, or mixed case.

Q_WEBPUB_FORMS /system.webforms

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Standard Name Translation

Wire Priorities and Options

W_FLASH /FLASH

W_BULLETIN /BULLETIN

W_URGENT /URGENT

W_SILENT /SILENT

W_ALWAYS /A

W_TRANSMIT /TRANSMIT

W_WIRE_FORM /wires

Status Types

W_MAIL /mail

W_HOLD /HOLD

W_LOCKED /LOCKED

W_READY /READY

W_NOTREADY /?

W_NEW /NEW

W_WIRE /WIRE

Words Dictionary (/site/dict/words)

587

Special Words for Find

W_AND /and

W_NOT /not

W_ANDNOT /andnot

W_OR /or

W_ALL /all

Print Command Options

W_STORY /story

W_SCRIPT /script

W_RUNDOWN /rundown

W_DIRECTORY /directory

W_ON /on

W_PRINT /print

W_DAYS /SunMonTueWedThuFriSat

You can change these translations only once. If you make a

mistake, or want to change them again, you must extract the

news program from the release CD first. Call iNews Customer

Support for assistance in extracting the program.

W_PAGE /page

Words Relating to the Seek Server

W_FAST /fast

W_INDEXED /INDEXED

W_ACTIVE /ACTIVE

W_DONE /DONE

W_ERROR

W_ABORT /ABORTED

W_DELIMITERS ,.’

W_PENDING /PENDING

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

C Standard Dictionaries

588

W_SLOW /slow

Words relating to FTS Server

W_INDEXBASE /C:/FTS

W_BINDFTSI /ftsserver:6100

W_BINDFTSS ftsserver:6101

Miscellaneous Options

W_DEFAULT_FORM /default_form

W_WEBACC_FORM /access_form

W_WEBPUB_FORM /publish_form

W_LOGTYPES /C

W_DEST /destination

W_RESULTS_FORM /search-results

W_START /ON

W_OFF /OFF

W_YES /yes

W_NO /no

W_GROUP /group

W_ALIAS /alias

W_ANYSTR /-

W_BLANKSTR /+

W_RESTRICTED /restricted

(only used by gtraits program and identifies the name used for

the restricted user group)

W_NEAR /near

W_RUNS /runs

W_STARTMEDIA /Primary

W_CUE_REF /¤

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Keyboard Macros Dictionary (/site/dict/keymacros)

589

Keyboard Macros Dictionary (/site/dict/keymacros)

The keyboard macros dictionary contains names of keyboard keys for use in keyboard macro

definitions for the iNEWS newsroom computer system.

Like other dictionaries, the standard name is in uppercase and must not be changed.

Translations can be in lowercase, uppercase, or mixed case.

Standard Name Translation

K_NULL /null

K_F1 /f1

K_F2 /f2

K_F3 /f3

K_F4 /f4

K_F5 /f5

K_F6 /f6

K_F7 /f7

K_F8 /f8

K_F9 /f9

K_F10 /f10

K_F11 /f11

K_F12 /f12

K_KP0 /kp0

K_KP1 /kp1

K_KP2 /kp2

K_KP3 /kp3

K_KP4 /kp4

K_KP5 /kp5

K_KP6 /kp6

K_KP7 /kp7

C Standard Dictionaries

590

K_KP8 /kp8

K_KP9 /kp9

K_INSERT /insert

K_HOME /home

K_PAGEUP /pageup

K_PAGEDOWN /pagedown

K_DELETE /delete

K_END /end

K_UP /up

K_DOWN /down

K_LEFT /left

K_RIGHT /right

K_SHIFT /shift

K_CTRL /ctrl

K_ALT /alt

K_TAB /tab

K_ESC /esc

K_BACKSPACE /backspace

K_ENTER /enter

K_PAUSE /pause

K_REPEAT /repeat

K_SPACE /space

K_WINDOW /window

nThe K_WINDOW token replaces the former syntax [<dialog name>] used in macros to define

a dialog wait. If a macro should wait for the Local Printing dialog box before continuing, the

syntax is:

{window Local Printing}

. The text following the word window must match

exactly the title of the dialog box as it appears in the title bar. If the text does not match, the

user must press the Escape key to exit the macro.

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Case-shifting Dictionary (/site/dict/shift)

591

Case-shifting Dictionary (/site/dict/shift)

The Case-shifting dictionary maps lowercase characters to their uppercase counterparts and

vice versa. Media Browse shifts the case of a character according to its decimal value in a

standard character conversion table.

The dictionary has two parts:

• The first part, labeled with the keyword tolower, maps decimal values of uppercase

characters to the decimal values of their lowercase counterparts.

• The second part, labeled with the keyword toupper, maps decimal values of lowercase

characters to decimal values of their uppercase counterparts.

C Standard Dictionaries

592

In the default dictionary shipped with iNEWS newsroom computer system, a character at a

decimal position in the range on the left of the arrow (->) shifts to the character at the

corresponding decimal position in the range on the right. For instance, the character at

decimal position 65 (A) is mapped to the character at decimal position 97 (a); the character

at decimal position 66 (B) shifts to the character at decimal position 98 (b); and so on:

; 1252 Windows Latin 1 (ANSI)

;

tolower

65 - 90 -> 97 - 122 ; A - Z -> a - z

138 -> 154

140 -> 156

159 -> 255

192 - 214 -> 224 - 246

216 - 222 -> 248 - 254

end

toupper

97 - 122 -> 65 - 90 ; a - z -> A - Z

154 -> 138

156 -> 140

224 - 246 -> 192 - 214

248 - 254 -> 216 - 222

255 -> 159

end

The character-conversion table the system uses depends on the interface you are using.

• If you are using the DOS, the character-conversion table is based on the DEC

Multinational Character Set (MCS).

• If you are using the Media Browse Graphic User Interface (GUI), the conversion table is

based on the ISO standard for multinational characters.

MCS Dictionary (/site/dict/mcs)

593

If character mappings specified in these standard character-conversion tables are not

appropriate for the language you are using, edit the /site/dict/shift file to remap character

conversions. You can map ranges of values (as shown in the default dictionary file) or you

can map values one by one, if necessary.

When editing the dictionary file, follow these guidelines:

• Ensure all keywords (tolower, toupper, end) in the dictionary file remain in lowercase.

• Specify all character-conversions in terms of the characters’ decimal values in the

conversion table.

• Do not specify a value higher than 255.

• Any characters not mapped in the dictionary file remain the same when shifted.

• The system ignores blank lines in the dictionary file and any characters following a

semicolon (;).

After you edit the dictionary file, run the makeshift console command in maintenance mode

during installation to prepare the Case-shifting dictionary for use by the iNEWS newsroom

computer system. For more information, call Avid.

If you map a character to more than one value, the system displays a warning when you type

the makeshift command, but uses the last character mapping in the file.

MCS Dictionary (/site/dict/mcs)

The MCS dictionary contains the following:

•Device Types Used by Monitor Servers and Drivers

•Special Strings Recognized by the Monitor Server

•Error Messages for the Monitor Server

•Status Reported in Device Status Field

The standard name is in uppercase and must not be changed. The translation can be in

lowercase, uppercase, or mixed case.

Device Types Used by Monitor Servers and Drivers

Standard Name Translation

A_VIDEO /VIDEO

A_CASVR /CASVR

C Standard Dictionaries

594

Special Strings Recognized by the Monitor Server

Error Messages for the Monitor Server

A_CG /CG

A_MOS /MOS

A_MOSSVR /MOSSVR

A_SS /SS

A_USRDEF /USRDEF

A_WNASVR /WNASVR

Standard Name Translation

A_CHANNELOPEN /[

A_CHANNELCLOSE /]

A_CMDDEL /*

A_COMDEL /;

A_FLDDEL /

A_LOCALHYPHEN /-

A_PLAYLISTREF /EMBED:

A_VIDEOIDREQ /ASSIGNID

Standard Name Translation

A_MBINVL /Invalid mailbox

A_NOTINMAP /Queue not in map

A_XMAXSTORY /Exceeded max # stories, monitor exiting

A_MAPOPENERR /Map story open error

A_RESOPENERR /Resource story open error

A_NOSERVER /Server cannot execute

Standard Name Translation

MCS Dictionary (/site/dict/mcs)

595

A_NOSTYLELIST /Unable to obtain CD stylelist

A_BADMAPCG /Bad Map line: CG device requires range

A_BADMAPSFORM /Bad Map line:Invalid ControlAir form

A_BADMAPARG /Bad Map line: Invalid arg count

A_BADMAPSTYPE /Bad Map line:Invalid server type

A_BADMAPQTME /Bad Map line: Invalid time value

A_BADMAPDUPE /Bad Map line: Duplicate device

A_BADMAPDRV /Bad Map line: Invalid drive specification

A_BADMAPVCHAN /Bad Map line: Invalid video channel assignment policy

A_BADMAPBADMOS /Bad Map line: Unrecognized MOS parameter

A_BADMAPNOMOS /Bad Map line: MOS device not assigned to MOS Server

A_BADMAPBADSVR /Bad Map line: device-server type mismatch

A_BADMOSITEM /Invalid MOS item

A_BADDUPENTRY /Bad Resource line: Duplicate style entry

A_BADCGLINES /Bad Resource line: Invalid # CG fields

A_BADRESARG /Bad Resource line: Invalid arg count

A_BADCGTMPL /Bad Resource line: Invalid CG template

A_BADSSADDR /Bad Resource line:Invalid SS address

A_RESERRORS /Following errors found in resource story

A_INVLDEV /Invalid device specification

A_INVLSTYLE /Invalid style

A_INVLADD /Invalid address

A_INVLARG /Missing argument

A_XMAXADD /Exceeded address range

A_NOFORM /Cannot access form

A_SRTERR /Error sorting queue

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

C Standard Dictionaries

596

Status Reported in Device Status Field

A_DELERR /Cannot delete from

A_DIRERR /Directory open error

A_QUEERR /Queue open error

A_QUEAPPERR /Queue append error

A_STRYERR /Story open error

A_STRYCRT /Story create error

A_STRYWRT /Story write error

A_SRVNOTINMAP /Server not in Map

A_SVRNOCOMM /Network connection failed

A_DEVBUSY /Refused connection request

A_NOSSADDR /No SS address specified

A_MULSSADDR /Multiple SS addresses specified

A_MONEXIT /Monitor exiting

A_QUITTIME /Quite Time reached

A_MUSTUNLOAD /Must first unload

A_CMDSVRLOADED /Already loaded

A_READY /OK

A_NOMEM /Out of memory:

A_VERSMISMATCH /CA Server version mismatch: story limits

A_DUPSTAMP /Persistent duplicate queue stamp

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Standard Name Translation

A_EVERR /5ERROR

A_EVSTOP /DONE

Job List Command Dictionary (/site/dict/joblist)

597

Job List Command Dictionary (/site/dict/joblist)

Job list commands are used for txnet/action job list processing. The first string on each line

is a key; do not change it.

A_EVSTDBY /2STANDBY

A_EVCUING /2CUEING

A_EVCUED /2CUED

A_EVNOTRDY /4OFFLINE

A_EVREADY /ONLINE

A_ EVPLAY /3PLAY

A_EVPAUSE /3PAUSED

A_EVREW /REWIND

A_EVINCMPLT /TRANSFER

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Standard Name Translation

all /all

at /at

bpoll /bpoll

bscan /bscan

charset /charset

duplicate /du

eof /eof

every /every

everyentry /everyentry

extension /extension

fast /fast

ignore /ignore

C Standard Dictionaries

598

D Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/dmessages)

The D message strings apply to the snews and nxserver programs associated with Connect to

Service.

ignore-del /ignore-del

mailto /mailto

move /mov

number /number

on /on

open /open

order /or

poll /poll

priority /priority

publish /publish

put /put

quiet /quiet

remove /rem

replace /rep

scan /scan

sendform /sendform

sendpassword /sendpassword

send-del /send-del

validate /validate

verify /verify

Standard Name Translation

D_AUTHORIZED /Not allowed

S Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/smessages)

599

S Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/smessages)

The S message strings apply to the snews and nxserver programs associated with Connect to

Service.

D_BADARG /Bad argument

D_BADDEST /Bad destination

D_ERROR /System error

D_NOARG /Needs argument

D_OFFLINE /Offline

D_UNKNOWN /Unknown command

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

Standard Name Translation

S_CCAPTURE /capture

S_CQUIT /quit

S_CPAUSE /pause

S_CSTOP /stop

S_CHELP /help

S_CESCAPE /escape

S_CECHO /echo

S_CHEOL /heol

S_CTYPE /type

S_CWAIT /wait

S_CMESS /message

S_CEXPECT /expect

S_CDELAY /delay

S_CTIMER /timer

S_CPASS /pass

C Standard Dictionaries

600

S_CDIAG /diag

S_SNPROMPT /cmd>

S_SNCAPON /Capturing session to

S_SNCAPOFF /Session saved to

S_SNPAUSE /Pause capture

S_SNESCAPE /New escape character

S_SNQUIT /Quitting

S_SNCAPERR /Capture error!

S_SNNOQUEUE /Could not append to queue.

S_SNCRERR /Error creating capture story.

S_SNCLOSED /Connection closed.

S_NOSVC /Unknown service

S_NOCAPTURE /Session not save to

S_SNNOTCAP /Not capturing.

S_SNEXPECT /Failed to get EXPECTED string

S_NSCRIPT /Could not open script story

S_CONNECT /CONNECT

S_ACCEPT /ACCEPT

S_REJECT /REJECT

S_FINISH /FINISH

S_RXNET /RXNET

S_CAPHLP /<queue> Capture to queue, or continue after a pause

S_QUITHLP /End this connect session

S_PAUSEHLP /Pause capture, but do not close capture story

S_STOPHLP /Stop[ capturing and close capture story

S_HELPHLP /Show this list of commands

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

S Messages Dictionary (/site/dict/smessages)

601

S_ESCHLP /<c> Change the escape character to specified character

S_ECHOHLP /Toggle local character echo

S_HEOLHLP /Toggle Hard-End-Of-Line on captured data

S_NXNONAME /Computer not named

S_NXNOCONF /System not configured

S_NXNOPTY /No ptys available

S_NXNODEV /No device available

Standard Name (Continued) Translation

C Standard Dictionaries

602

DEnvironment Variables

Some features in the Avid iNEWS newsroom computer system require the system

administrator to set up environment variables in the Registry of the workstations. The person

responsible for setting up these variables should have a good understanding of

Windows-based operating systems, and the Registry Editor program.

This appendix includes the following sections:

•Registry Editor

•Environment Variables (Registry Values)

•Environmental Variables for Servers

D Environment Variables

604

Registry Editor

The Registry Editor is used to create and define environment variables (Registry values) at

each workstation.Environment Variables

To access the Registry Editor:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows Taskbar.

2. Select the Run option.

3. Type regedit in the dialog box that appears.

The Registry Editor window appears.

All iNEWS newsroom computer system environment variables are set up and stored in

the same location on each workstation. After opening the Registry Editor window,

navigate to the following folder (also called a key).

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\

SYSTEM\

CurrentControlSet\

Control\

Session Manager\

Environment

Environment Variables (Registry Values)

605

nOn workstations running the Windows NT-based operating system, there are two keys with

similar names:SessionManager and Session Manager. The one called Session Manager

(with a space between the two words) must be used

Environment Variables (Registry Values)

Environment variables or registry values are sometimes required to set up certain iNEWS

features at various iNEWS Workstations. Environment variables are located and defined in

the Registry of iNEWS Workstations—that is, Windows-based PCs running the Client

software. The following variables are covered in this section:

•CCColor

•DestinationOrder

•MailLookup

•MsgMailAlert

•PIColor

•ShowTimingBar

•SyncToServer

•VT Compatibility

The following sections explain how to can set up environment variables by editing the

Registry using the Registry Editor.

nSelf-importing files, called reg files, can be executed to automatically import envionment

variable information into the Registry. These files with their exported registry keys, can be

used on PCs running Windows NT -based operating systems. For more information on how

to obtain and use these reg files, contact Avid Customer Support.

CCColor

An individual workstation can have its closed captioning text color changed via an

environment variable called CCColor. If no environment variable exists, then the default

color of green is used.

To change the closed captioning text color:

1. Open Registry Editor. See “Registry Editor” on page 604 for more information.

2. Navigate to the Environment key and open it.

3. Right-click on the right side of the Registry Editor window. A pop-up menu appears.

D Environment Variables

606

4. Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new Registry value of type

DWORD in the Registry Editor.

5. Type the name of the new value: CCColor.

6. Press Enter.

7. To set the Value data option:

a. Right-click on the CCColor value.

b. Select Modify.

The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears.

c. Set the Value data using the following hexadecimal format:

0x00RRGGBB

, where

RR, GG, BB are two bytes for each color.

Environment Variables (Registry Values)

607

nThe leftmost two bytes (00) are not used. Also, If the CCColor has its value set to zero (0),

the closed captioning text will be black because zero corresponds to the color Black.

d. Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.

8. Close the Registry Editor window.

See “RGB Hexadecimal Color Chart” on page 611 for more information on possible

colors used in this environment variable

DestinationOrder

Enabling the destination order feature ensures the user’s Home location is always the top

item in the Destination queue list. For instance, when you duplicate a story to another queue,

the user’s Home location will always be the top item in the list. It also ensures the user’s

Destination location is the second item in the list.

To enable the destination order feature, do the following:

1. Open Registry Editor. See “Registry Editor” on page 604 for more information.

2. Navigate to the Environment key, and open it.

3. Right-click on the right side of the Registry Editor window. A pop-up menu appears.

4. Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type

DWORD in the Registry Editor.

5. Type the name of the new value: DestinationOrder.

6. Press Enter.

7. To set the Value data option:

a. Right-click on the DestinationOrder value.

b. Select Modify.

The Edit DWORD Value dialog appears.

D Environment Variables

608

c. Set the Value data. Type 0 (zero) to disable the destination order feature, or 1 to

enable it.

nAny number other than 1 turns DestinationOrder off and back to its default behavior, which

is to always display the last visited queue/folder as the top item in the destination list.

d. Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.

8. Close the Registry Editor window.

MailLookup

The iNEWS newsroom computer system provides users with an e-mail addressee name

lookup feature. When used, all groups, aliases, and users that partially match characters in

the To: or CC: fields are displayed in a Check Name dialog box for user selection. This is the

default behavior. However, system administrators can set an environment variable that

defines which matches are displayed for selection in the Check Name dialog box.

Consequently, this allows system administrators to hide any groups that exist in the system

for reasons other than e-mail purposes.

nThis environment variable must be created and defined in the Registry Editor at each

workstation. Default behavior is used at workstations where the environment variable is not

defined.

To set the environment variable and hide groups from e-mail lists:

1. Open Registry Editor. See “Registry Editor” on page 604 for more information.

2. Navigate to the Environment key, and open it.

3. Right-click on the right side of the Registry Editor window. A pop-up menu appears.

4. Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type

DWORD in the Registry Editor.

5. Type the name of the new value: MailLookup.

6. Press Enter.

7. To set the Value data option:

a. Right-click on the MailLookup value.

b. Select Modify.

The Edit DWORD Value dialog appears.

Environment Variables (Registry Values)

609

c. Set the Value data, by typing one of the following options:

t0 - (zero) show no matches

t1 - show only user matches

t2 - show only group/alias matches

t3 - show groups/aliases and user matches

The default behavior—without the Registry value MailLookup defined at a

workstation—is 3.

d. Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.

8. Close the Registry Editor window.

MsgMailAlert

Enabling the Message Mail Alert feature allows you to change the alert behavior so that the

iNEWS Workstation will flash message and/or mail alerts on the status bar for only 15

seconds, rather than persistently. By adding the MsgMailAlert variable, you can specify

additional settings.

To set the environment variable thereby enabling message mail alerts:

1. Open Registry Editor. See “Registry Editor” on page 604 for more information.

2. Navigate to the Environment key, and open it.

3. Right-click on the right side of the Registry Editor window. A pop-up menu appears.

4. Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type

DWORD in the Registry Editor.

5. Type the name of the new value: MsgMailAlert.

6. Press Enter.

D Environment Variables

610

7. To set the Value data option:

a. Right-click on the MesgMailAlert value.

b. Select Modify.

The Edit DWORD Value dialog appears.

c. Set the Value data, by typing one of the following options:

t0 - (zero) disable - no alerts whatsoever on status bar

t1 - (one) neither persistent - alerts flash for 15 seconds

t2 - only message alerts persistent

t3 - only mail alerts persistent

t4 - both alerts persistent - alerts will not go away until user has read all

correspondence.

The default behavior—without the Registry value MsgMailAlert defined at a

workstation—is 1 (one).

d. Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.

8. Close the Registry Editor window.

PIColor

An individual iNEWS Workstation can have its presenter instructions text color changed via

an environment variable called PIColor. If no environment variable exists, then the default

color of red is used.

To change presenter instructions text color:

1. Open Registry Editor. See “Registry Editor” on page 604 for more information.

2. Navigate to the Environment key, and open it.

3. Right-click on the right side of the Registry Editor window. A pop-up menu appears.

Environment Variables (Registry Values)

611

4. Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type

DWORD in the Registry Editor.

5. Type the name of the new value: PIColor.

6. Press Enter.

7. To set the Value data option:

a. Right-click on the PIColor value.

b. Select Modify.

The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears.

c. Set the Value data using the following hexadecimal format:

0x00RRGGBB

where RR,

GG, BB are two bytes for each color.

nThe leftmost two bytes (00) are not used. Also, If the PIColor has its value set to zero (0), the

closed captioning text is black because zero corresponds to the color Black.

d. Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.

8. Close the Registry Editor window.

RGB Hexadecimal Color Chart

Avid’s PIColor and CCColor environment variables require RGB Hexadecimal Color codes.

Complete RGB Hexadecimal Color Charts, with various color shades, can be found on the

Internet, but the following table contains some basic colors, along with their corresponding

hexidecimal code values:

Color Hex Default

Black 000000

Blue 0000FF

D Environment Variables

612

ShowTimingBar

A system administrator can define which key on the keyboard is used to advance the timing

bar during show timing. The default key is the space bar.

To change the setting to a different key:

1. Open Registry Editor. See “Registry Editor” on page 604 for more information.

2. Navigate to the Environment key, and open it.

3. Right-click on the right side of the Registry Editor window. A pop-up menu appears.

4. Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type

DWORD in the Registry Editor.

5. Type the name of the new value: ShowTimingBar.

6. Press Enter.

7. To set the Value data option:

a. Right-click on the ShowTimingBar value.

b. Select Modify.

The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears.

Brown 330000

Green 008800 (Default color for CCColor)

Orange FF6600

Pink CC0099

Purple 660099

Red FF0000 (Default color for PIColor)

White FFFFFF

Yellow FFFF00

Color Hex Default (Continued)

Environment Variables (Registry Values)

613

The ShowTimingBar Value data is determined by the Scan Code of the selected key

on the keyboard. For instance, if the system administrator wants to use the F12 key

to advance the timing bar, the Value data for the ShowTimingBar registry would be

either the Hexadecimal code of 58 or Decimal code of 88. See the following Scan

Codes table for more information.

Key Decimal Hexadecimal

‘ ~ (accent/tilde) 41 29

1 ! (exclamation point) 2 02

2 @ (at symbol) 3 03

3 # (pound sign) 4 04

4 $ (dollar sign) 5 05

5 % (percent) 6 06

6 ^ (carrot) 7 07

7 & (ampersand) 8 08

8 * (asterisk) 9 09

9 ( (open parenthesis) 10 0A

0 ) (close perenthesis) 11 0B

- _ (dash/underscore) 12 0C

= + (equal/plus) 13 0D

Backspace 14 0E

Tab 15 0F

Q1610

D Environment Variables

614

W1711

E1812

R1913

T2014

Y2115

U2216

I2317

O2418

P2519

[ { (open bracket/brace) 26 1A

] } (close bracket/brace) 27 1B

Caps Lock 58 3A

A301E

S311F

D3220

F3321

G3422

H3523

J3624

K3725

L3826

; : (semicolon/colon) 39 27

‘ ” (accent/quote) 40 28

\| (backslash/pipe) 43 2B

Left Shift 42 2A

Z442C

Key Decimal Hexadecimal

Environment Variables (Registry Values)

615

X452D

C462E

V472F

B4830

N4931

M5032

, < (comma/less-than) 51 33

. > (period/greater-than) 52 34

/ ? (slash/question mark) 53 35

Right Shift 54 36

CTRL (Control keys) 29 1D

ALT (Alt keys) 56 38

Spacebar 57 39

ESC (Escape key) 1 01

F1 59 3B

F2 60 3C

F3 61 3D

F4 62 3E

F5 63 3F

F6 64 40

F7 65 41

F8 66 42

F9 67 43

F10 68 44

F11 87 57

F12 88 58

Key Decimal Hexadecimal

D Environment Variables

616

c. Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.

8. Close the Registry Editor window.

SyncToServer

The timing feature of iNEWS syncronizes the clock on the local workstation with the time

set on the server when a user activates show timing. A user can use the Set Clock option

from the Tools drop-down menu to manually override the clock synchronization. This

feature is turned off by default, but a system administrator can turn it on at any workstation

by creating a new registry value in the workstation.

nThe syncronized timing feature should be enabled only at those workstations used to time a

show. If the SyncToServer registry value is not created and defined at a workstation, then the

synchronized timing feature is disabled at that workstation.

INS (Insert key) 82 52

DEL (Delete key) 83 53

Home 71 47

End 79 4F

Page Up 73 49

Page Down 80 51

Up Arrow 72 48

Down Arrow 80 50

Right Arrow 77 4D

Left Arrow 75 4B

NUM (Number Lock key) 69 45

/ (divide on Numeric Keypad) 53 35

- (minus on Numeric Keypad) 74 4A

+ (plus on Numeric Keypad) 78 4E

Print Screen 55 37

Key Decimal Hexadecimal

Environment Variables (Registry Values)

617

To enable the syncronized timing feature:

1. Open Registry Editor. See “Registry Editor” on page 604 for more information.

2. Navigate to the Environment key, and open it.

3. Right-click on the right side of the Registry Editor window. A pop-up menu appears.

4. Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type

DWORD in the Registry Editor.

5. Type the name of the new value: SyncToServer.

6. Press Enter.

7. To set the Value data option:

a. Right-click on the SyncToServer value.

b. Select Modify.

The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears.

c. Set the Value data by typing one of the following options:

t0 - (zero) disable the synchronized timing feature

t1 - (one) enable the synchronized timing feature

d. Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.

8. Close the Registry Editor window.

VT Compatibility

System administrators can set a limit for text in story form fields. For this feature to work, a

Registry value defined as VT Compatibility must be added in the Environment key of the

Registry at each workstation. If a registry value is not found in the Environment key of the

Registry, then the default behavior—no text limit—is observed at the workstation.

D Environment Variables

618

To create and define this value:

1. Open Registry Editor. See “Registry Editor” on page 604 for more information.

2. Navigate to the Environment key, and open it.

3. Right-click on the right side of the Registry Editor window. A pop-up menu appears.

4. Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type

DWORD in the Registry Editor.

5. Type the name of the new value: VT Compatibility.

6. Press Enter.

7. To set the Value data option:

a. Right-click on the VT Compatibility value.

b. Select Modify.

The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears.

c. Type 1 (one) in the Value data field.

d. Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.

8. Close the Registry Editor window.

After the field property is changed, it is recommended the user sign off and back on so

the new text limit can take effect.

nChanging the field width from the queue’s right-click pop-up menu has no effect on the limit

of the text entered. That limit is still based on the field property set for the form assigned to

the queue. Consequently, when editing text in the Queue panel, the field’s properties for the

form assigned to the queue are in effect. When editing text in the story form, the field

properties of the story form are in effect. These properties—for the story and queue

forms—may be different from one another.

Environment Variables (Registry Values)

619

DisableCommandLine

The environment variable called DisableCommandLine lets you disable the Command Line

option in the Customize Toolbar Button dialog box, thereby restricting users from running

executable programs within iNEWS on the PC. DisableCommandLine also disables any

existing toolbar buttons that utilize the Command Line option.

Environment variables are workstation specific, not user specific; therefore an Environment

key must be added to the Registry on any PC on which you want to prevent users from

creating custom toolbar buttons that execute programs via the Command Line option. If a

registry value is not found in the Environment key of the Registry, then the default

behavior—no restriction—is observed at the workstation.

To create and define this value thus disabling the command line option:

1. Open Registry Editor. See “Registry Editor” on page 604 for more information.

2. Navigate to the Environment key, and open it.

3. Right-click on the right side of the Registry Editor window. A pop-up menu appears.

4. Select the DWORD Value option to create and define a new registry value of type

DWORD in the Registry Editor.

5. Type the name of the new value: DisableCommandLine.

6. Press Enter.

7. To set the Value data option:

a. Right-click on the DisableCommandLine value.

b. Select Modify.

The Edit DWORD Value dialog box appears.

c. Type 1 (one) in the Value data field to disable the Command Line option.

If set to zero (0), the Command Line option will remain enabled, so it will not

appear grayed out in the Customize Toolbar Button at the iNEWS Workstation.

D Environment Variables

620

d. Click OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.

8. Close the Registry Editor window.

Environmental Variables for Servers

You can control some of the behavior of rxnet by putting some enviroment variable settings

in the /site/env/rxnet file.

nIf the /site/env/rxnet file or its parent directory /site/env do not exist you need to create the

directory using the mkdir /site/env command, before you can edit the file. Contact Avid if you

need assistance with this procedure.

The specific variables are:

RXDEBUG=<level>

An rxdebug level of 2 produces the command traffic to/from rxnet.

RXDEBUGFILE=<filename>

The RXDEBUGFILE file allows you to cause rxnet diagnostics to be put into

instead of the console.

RX_HOT_TO_GO=0

When RX_HOT_TO_GO=0 is set in /site/env/rxnet, then rxnet will not print Hot-To-Go

diagnostics.

RXSITELISTSZ=<size>

The list size controls the number of stories included in a queue list when rxnet responds to

an FTP list command. The default value for this is 300.

RXSITEFORMAT=<format>

The format controls which transfer protocol is initially used. This can be set to NSML or

SEP. The default is NSML. This is how you get a foreign application, such as CNN which

operates in SEP but did not use the FTP SITE command to change the format to SEP.

RXSEPFIELDLIST=<filename>

RXSEPFIELDLIST defines a file name. That file is processed as a list of field substitutions.

For instance,

RXSEPFIELDLIST=/site/env/substitutes

in the /site/env/rxnet file, rxnet

inherits this variable when invoked.

Environmental Variables for Servers

621

The format of each line of the field substitution file is:

<field identifier> = <field

name>

where

is a single character SEP field and

is a

valid NSML field name. An example would be

1 = video-id

. This causes the contents of

the APP1 field, identified by 1, to be put into the NSML field video-id instead of the usual

APP1-1.

RXSITEIDLE=<seconds>

The idle time value may be set from the client via

SITE IDLE=<seconds>

where

is a count of seconds. For instance:

SITE IDLE=900 sets the idle timeout to 15 minutes

SITE IDLE=0 disables the timeout

The client can query the rxnet server to find out what the current idle timeout is with SITE

IDLE. You can also define an idle timeout value to override the localtimeout setting by

inserting

RXSITEIDLE=<seconds>

in the file /site/env/rxnet.

nYou can also define an idle timeout value to override the "localtimeout" setting by inserting

RXSITEIDLE=<seconds> in the file /site/env/nxserver.

RXOLDNLST=1

FTP clients that use the MGETcommand make an NLST request to get the list of story/file

names for retrieval. The LIST and NLST commands produce the identical output, a

directory listing. The NLST command produces a name list, that is a list of subdirectories in

the directory and a list of stories id's in a queue.The iNEWS FTP Server produces a list of

names without story attributes. If you want the iNEWS Server to include story attributes, put

RXOLDNLST=1

in the rxnet environment. If you do not want story attributes included, use

RXOLDNLST=0

nThe bold entires are exactly what to place in the file. Do not use an export statement after

the line.

D Environment Variables

622

EManaging Traits at the Console

Chapter 4 in the iNEWS Newsroom Computer System Setup and Configuration Manual

explains how the system administrator can access and change the various user traits

associated with each user’s account from an iNEWS Workstation. In that same book,

Chapter 5 explains how to manage database traits from a workstation, and Chapter 6

explains how to create groups and apply the system’s group-related features to customize the

system’s security and usage from a workstation.

This Appendix shows how some of the information also can be viewed and modified from

the console.

This appendix contains the following main sections:

•Viewing User Traits from the Console

•Modifying User Traits from the Console

•User Traits Console Command Summary

•Changing Database Traits from the Console

•Database Traits Console Command Summary

•Managing Group Traits at the Console

E Managing Traits at the Console

624

Viewing User Traits from the Console

From the console, use the list u-v command to get user trait information. The console will

display a verbose list of user accounts.

To get information about a single user, follow the command with the User ID of the specific

user. For instance, if you wanted to access the user account, danielmi, the command would

look like this:

NRCS-A$ list u-v danielmi

The verbose result of the command will look something like this:

user rr kb su m l SOEKCVH sc queues

danielmi 180 0 n i -OEKCVH sc dest: PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI.NOTES

home: PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI

mail: PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI.MAIL

NRCS-A$

The first line of the display lists the traits; the other lines list specific values for the traits.

The following is the interpretation of the sample command results previuosly displayed:

• User danielmi has a read rate (rr) of 180.

• The keyboard preference (kb) is 0.

• The user is a superuser (su). The n means “news superuser.” A minus (-) would appear if

the user is not a superuser.

• The edit mode (m) is insert.

• The local only mode (l) is non-local only.

• The traits indicated by SOEKCVH and sc are explained in the “User Traits Console

Command Summary” on page 632. See also “list u” on page 509.

• The users destination queue is PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI.NOTES.

• The users home directory is PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI.

• The users mail queue is PEOPLE.D.DANIELMI.MAIL.

“User Traits Console Command Summary” on page 632 shows user traits, their console

abbreviations, and detailed information about them.

Modifying User Traits from the Console

625

Modifying User Traits from the Console

You must be a superuser or user manager (umanager) to change user traits.

Use the utraits command (which requires superuser privileges) to modify a user’s traits from

the console. The syntax of the utraits command is:

utraits <name> [<option> <value>]..[+flag]..[-flag]..

For instance, to set the read rate for a user named Daniel Mitchell, whose User ID is

danielmi, the command would look something like this:

NRCS-A# utraits danielmi readrate 195

1 user records modified

NRCS-A#

To give him superuser privileges:

NRCS-A# utraits danielmi su n

1 user records modified

NRCS-A#

To take superuser privileges away from him:

NRCS-A# utraits danielmi su -

1 user records modified

NRCS-A#

The blacklist trait is a flag; it is either on or off. You grant flag traits with a plus sign, and

you take them away with a minus sign. For instance, to blacklist the user, danielmi, type

what appears in bold:

NRCS-A# utraits danielmi +b

1 user records modified

NRCS-A#

E Managing Traits at the Console

626

To remove him from blacklist status:

NRCS-A# utraits danielmi -b

1 user records modified

NRCS-A#

You can change more than one trait at a time. For instance, to give this user keyboard 3 and

make SHOW.RUNDOWN his destination queue, type what appears in bold:

NRCS-A# utraits danielmi key 3 dest show.rundown +localonly

1 user record modified

NRCS-A#

Changing a User’s Password

To change Smith’s password to changeme:

1. Enter superuser mode at the console.

2. Type the utraits command using the following format:

utraits <username> password <newpassword>

For instance,

NRCS-A# utraits smith password changeme

1 user records modified

NRCS-A#

cSince everything you type at the console is recorded in console history, consider using

the force command to require the user to change their password the next time they log

in. This will help prevent someone from using passwords obtained from the console

history.

For users who do not change their passwords, as instructed, use the force console command

to require them to change passwords at their next login. The following is the force console

command format:

force <user or group names>

The most common way to use this command is to require a particular user or users to change

their password the next time they log in.

Modifying User Traits from the Console

627

For instance, suppose that you have been unable to convince Mitchell and Schofield to

change their passwords. As a last resort, to require that they do so the next time they log in,

log on as a superuser and type what appears in bold:

NRCS-A# force mitchell schofield

A message similar to the following appears:

Users who will be forced to make password changes on next login:

----------------------------------------------------------------

mitchell schofield

2 users qualified out of a domain of 2 users, and were updated.

The force command tells you who is going to be required to change their passwords. The

example above reports that it will make both Mitchell and Schofield change their passwords.

If you find that a user does not have a password, use the force command to require the user

to select a password the next time he or she logs in.

The following example uses the force console command to make Weisman select a new

password at the next login. To do this, type what appears in bold:

NRCS-A# force weisman

A screen similar to the following appears:

Users who will be forced to make password changes on next login:

----------------------------------------------------------------

weisman

1 users qualified out of a domain of 1 users, and were updated.

You can use the force console command to require that anyone who has not changed

passwords since a certain date or within a certain date range do so. You can also use this

command to force a particular group of users or all your users to change their passwords.

To do this, use the force console command with the following format:

force [-q] [passchg<date or date range>] <user or group names>

Normally, the force command tells you which users must change their passwords the next

time they log in. If you would rather not see this display, suppress it with the

-q

option.

E Managing Traits at the Console

628

You may want to use the force command to require all users who last changed their

passwords prior to a certain date to change their passwords the next time they log in. You can

do this by specifying a date in the command, as shown in the previous format description.

The force command recognizes dates in the same way the

list u

console command does;

you can specify relative dates, absolute dates, and date ranges. This command applies only

to people who last changed their passwords within the date parameter you set.

If you specify a value for the date parameter, the force command works only on those users

who are among those you specify, and whose last password change falls within the criteria

set by the date parameter.

For instance, the following command affects only those members of the producers group

who last changed their password before July 5, 2009:

NRCS-A# force passchg\<05JUL2009 producers

To force all users to change their passwords, put a hyphen (

) in place of any user or group

names. This is especially useful in combination with a date parameter. For instance, to force

all users who last changed their passwords more than 90 days ago, become a superuser and

type the following:

NRCS-A# force passchg\<90. -

A message similar to the following appears:

Users who will be forced to make password changes on next login:

----------------------------------------------------------------

erickson mccormack arlin

3 users qualified out of a domain of 62 users, and were updated.

Listing Users Who Do Not Have Passwords

To check for users who do not have a password from the console, type:

list password= u

nEnsure that you include a space between the = and the u.

Modifying User Traits from the Console

629

The following command lists every user who does not have a password.

NRCS-A: list password= u

user rr kb su mode destination

weisman 0 0 - o

In the previous example, there is one user, weisman, who does not have a password.

To find out who has not changed their password within a specified period of time, use this

form of

list u

list passchg<date> u [<domain>]

For instance, to list users who have not changed their password in the last 90 days, enter

list passchg

followed by less than character (

) and the number of days you want to

specify—90 in this case—and a period (.). Ending the number with a period indicates the

value is in days; no period indicates hours. There must be no spaces between passchg, the

less than character, and the number of days.

For information on users who have not changed their password within the last 90 days, type:

list passchg\<90. u

A screen similar to the following appears:

User DEV Date Created Last Login Last Password

------- ---- ------------- --------------- -------------

levy 427 02JAN2009 10:50am 24JUL2009 9:03am 06JAN2009 9:50am

As you can see in the previous example, this produces a listing with:

• Name of user

• Device where the user logged in last

• When user became a user

• Date of the last login

• Date when password was last changed

In the previous example, only user Levy has not changed passwords within the last 90 days.

So, use the send console command to send a message reminding Levy to change passwords:

NRCS-A: send levy Please change your password.

E Managing Traits at the Console

630

A message similar to the following appears:

message sent to levy

Use the less than (<) and greater than (>) operators to specify whether you want to list

people who last changed their password before (<) or after (>) a certain date.

nWhen metacharacters— | & ; ( ) < > space or tab— or control operators—|| & && ; ;; ( ) |

<newline> are used in a command string threy must be escaped with a backslash character.

The following are some examples:

list passchg\<05JUL2009 u

— This produces a list of all users who last changed their

password before July 5, 2009.

list passchg\>10. u

— This produces a list of users who have changed their password

after 10 days ago (that is, within the last 10 days).

You can also use

list u

to list people who last changed their passwords sometime between

two dates, such as between June 15, 2009 and July 1, 2009. You can even use this command

to check a single user or a group of users.

To the aforementioned, use this format of the list command:

list passchg\>date1\<date2 u [<user or group names>]

nThe date1 and date2 parameters are not surrounded with greater than and less than

characters here as is customary for parameters. These characters are also used in the

command alone, and this could cause confusion.

You must follow passchg with a date. This date may be a relative date, an absolute date, or a

date range. Also, there must be no spaces between passchg and the date or date range, or the

list u

command does not work correctly.

A relative date is one that you specify as some time prior to the present date, as in

list passchg\<90. u

. In the previous example, we used a relative date to find out which

users had last changed their password prior to 90 days ago. Remember, ending the number

with a period (

) indicates that the value is in days; no period indicates hours.

An absolute date specifies an actual calendar date. In the following example, we use an

absolute date to find out which users last changed their passwords before August 5, 2009, by

typing the following:

list passchg\<05AUG2009 u

Modifying User Traits from the Console

631

Information similar to the following appears:

User DEV Date Created Last Login Last Password

------- ---- ------------- --------------- -------------

mitchell 495 02JAN2009 10:55am 24JUL2009 9:00am 07JAN2009 9:50am

You must specify absolute dates in DDMMMYYYY format. You must enter the days in

double-digit format, meaning you must add a leading zero to single digit days, such as

Also, you must enter months as they are defined in the Words dictionary.

You can also specify a date range. This way, you can list users who changed their passwords

sometime between two specific dates (date1 and date 2). For instance, to see if anyone

changed their password after August 1, 2009, and before August 15, 2009, type the

following:

list passchg\>01AUG2009\<15AUG2009 u

Information similar to the following appears:

User DEV Date Created Last Login Last Password

------- ---- ------------- --------------- -------------

loyd 433 02JAN2009 11:50am 25AUG2009 9:01am 05AUG2009 9:05am

You can also use

list u

to check on particular users or groups. To do this, follow the

the command with user names or groups you want to check.

For instance, suppose that of all your users, only Mitchell and Schofield regularly forget to

change their passwords. You can see if they have not changed their passwords in the last 90

days by typing:

list passchg\<90. u mitchell schofield

Information similar to the following appears:

User DEV Date Created Last Login Last Password

------- ---- ------------- --------------- -------------

mitchell 495 02JAN2009 10:55am 24JUL2009 9:00am 07JAN2009 9:50am

This causes

list u

to report only on Mitchell and Schofield, and only if they have not

changed their passwords within the specified period of time. In the example above, Mitchell

has not changed his password in the last 90 days, but Schofield has.

If you specify a group, such as producers,

list u

checks members of that group and then

reports those that have not changed their passwords in the specified period of time.

E Managing Traits at the Console

632

After you have set a policy on how often people must change their passwords, use

list u

regularly to ensure that no one forgets to do this within the prescribed period of time. If one

or more users do not change their passwords often enough, use the force command to force

them to do so.

User Traits Console Command Summary

The following User Traits Summary table is a summary of iNEWS user traits. The first

column shows the trait name as it appears in the Modify User Account dialog box. The

second column lists actual commands for assigning or removing each trait from the console.

The third column contains an explanation of the trait and an example of utraits console

command lines.

Name in Modify

User Account

dialog box

Utrait Console

Command Definition / Example

Superuser

Blacklisted

Simplified

su n | su -

+b |-b

+s |-s

The user has superuser privileges.

The user cannot log in to the iNEWS system.

The user has limitations, as defined by the Simplified

User Settings.

Examples:

utraits palmer su n

utraits palmer su -

utraits palmer +b

utraits palmer +s

Local Only

localonly

The user can only log in locally.

Example:

utraits jones +localonly

Overwrite

editmode o

Everything the user enters in a story overwrites the

character under the cursor. This is the default.

Example:

utraits hansen editmode o

User Traits Console Command Summary

633

Insert

editmode i

Everything the user enters in a story is inserted at the

cursor location.

Example:

utraits hansen editmode i

Home

home

Sets the user’s home directory, which usually

contains the user’s Mail and Notes queues.

Example:

utraits loyd home people.l.loyd

Destination

destination

Specifies the user’s destination, which is usually a

queue he or she uses frequently, such as the Notes

queue.

Example:

utraits loyd dest people.l.loyd.notes

Mail

mail

Specifies the user’s Mail queue, where any mail

addressed to that user is placed.

Example:

utraits loyd mail people.loyd.mail

Read Rate

readrate

The user’s spoken reading rate in words per minute.

The system uses the readrate of the designated

presenter to determine the audio (air) time of a story.

Example:

utraits vandenberg readrate 180

User Name

realname

The user’s real name (as contrasted with their

account’s User ID name). For instance, John

Chapman may have a User ID of jchapman; his real

name is John Chapman.

Media Browse

+vb | -vb

Specifies user can search the video server.

Example:

utraits palmer +vb

Name in Modify

User Account

dialog box

Utrait Console

Command Definition / Example (Continued)

E Managing Traits at the Console

634

Connect Services

+c | -c

Allows user to connect to any service defined in the

system.

Example:

utraits smith +c

Manage Projects

+mp | -mp

Enables user to manage projects and facets in the

system.

Example:

utraits jdoe +mp

Toolbars

+cs | -cs

Allows users to create custom toolbars.

Example:

utraits carver +cs

Color Highlights

+cc | -cc

Allows users to configure custom status colors.

Example:

utraits bagley +cc

Highlight Read

Stories

+hr | -hr

Specifies that unread stories in the queue are

highlighted on the user’s screen.

Example:

utraits davis +hr

Reorder Stories

+o | -o

Specifies that user can create and remove stories

from a folder or queue.

Example:

utraits lumpkin +o

Create/Kill

Folders/Queues

+er | -er

Specifies that user can create and remove entire

folders and queues.

Example:

utraits delany +er

Kill All Stories

+ka | -ka

Specifies that user can select an entire queue and

move stories in it to the Dead queue.

Example:

utraits richards +ka

Name in Modify

User Account

dialog box

Utrait Console

Command Definition / Example (Continued)

Managing Database Traits from the Console

635

Managing Database Traits from the Console

This section provides information on how to view basic or detailed database trait

information from the console when needed.

Getting Basic Information

To obtain information about a particular queue or directory from the console, type

list d

followed by the name of the directory or queue.

For instance, to obtain information about the WIRES.ALL queue, type:

list d wires.all

Information similar to the following appears:

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory

-R-----I---Q-X---- TITLE P4.0 D1 - WIRES.ALL

A trait listing begins with a header line containing the letters SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT; each

letter in the header line represents a particular database trait. In the previous example, the

second letter in the header line (an

) stands for the database trait Read-only.

Password button

password

Provides capability to change the user’s password.

Example:

utraits jordan pass changeme

Force Change check

box

force

Specifies that user will be forced to change his/her

password the next time he or she logs in. This

command line does not require utraits typed in front

of it, as shown below.

Example:

force jordan

User Preferences

button; Sessions tab;

Keyboard field

key ###

Assigns a default keyboard (set of macros) to the user

account.

Example:

utraits vandenberg key 048

Name in Modify

User Account

dialog box

Utrait Console

Command Definition / Example (Continued)

E Managing Traits at the Console

636

When one of these traits is on, the letter representing that trait appears in the second line. For

instance, the R in the second line of the example indicates the Read-only trait is on:

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory

-R-----I---Q-X---- TITLE P4.0 D1 - WIRES.ALL

A hyphen in the second line indicates that trait identified above it is off. For instance, the

first trait in the header, an S, represents a sequentially ordered directory or queue. Because

the second line has a hyphen below the Sequential trait indicator (the S) means that

WIRES.ALL is alphabetically, rather than sequentially, ordered.

Another trait indicated as on for WIRES.ALL is the one represented by the letter I. This trait

is Inverted, which means this queue displays the most recent stories at the top.

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory

-R-----I---Q-X--- TITLE P4.0 D1 - WIRES.ALL

Getting Detailed Information

To obtain a more detailed information about a directory or queue, add the verbose command,

such as list d-v followed by the queue or directory name.

For instance, to list information about the queue called RUNDOWNS.5PM, type:

list d-v rundowns.5pm

A screen similar to the following appears:

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox

RUNDOWNS.5PM:

QS-P---I---QA---iT TITLE P0 R1 -

rg=castread wg=castwrite eg=casteditorial ng=-

queue form=RUNDOWN story form=STORYFORM

The first letter (Q) in the line under the queue name indicates that RUNDOWNS.5PM is a

queue.

Changing Database Traits from the Console

637

Changing Database Traits from the Console

To change a database trait from the console, you must use the dbtraits command. The

general format is:

dbtraits pathname [only][option value][+mode][...][-mode][...]

Database traits come in two types, options and modes.

• Options accept a range of values, such as setting 18 hours for a queue’s purge interval.

dbtraits rundowns.5pm purge 18

• Modes are traits that are either assigned or not—that is, they are either turned on or off.

A trait preceded by a plus (+) turns a mode on. A trait preceded by a minus (-) turns it

off. The following is an example:

dbtraits rundowns.5pm +p

You can change several traits at the same time. For instance, the following command

changes the queue to read-only status and also assigns the wires story form and the wires

queue panel form to it:

dbtraits wires +r sform wires qform wires

Changing a Parent Directory Only

When you change a directory’s traits at the console, dbtraits also applies your changes to any

subdirectories or queues in that folder. You can restrict your changes to the parent directory

by following the directory name with the word only.

nThis is opposite of the way traits are assigned using the iNEWS Workstation.

For instance, to turn on the Scripts directory’s Sequential trait (+s) without also turning it on

for any of the Scripts subdirectories or queues, type:

dbtraits scripts only +s

Database Traits Console Command Summary

The following Database Traits Summary table is a summary of iNEWS database traits,

(SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT) as seen and used in connection with the dbtraits command at the

console. These traits might also appear in a GUI format at the iNEWS Workstation.

E Managing Traits at the Console

638

Name

Location in Display

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

Mode / Option

Keyword Definition / Example

Sequential

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

S-----------------

+s|-s

Lists directories or queues in the order in which

they were created. (The default is alphabetical.)

To order the RUNDOWN.5PM sequentially,

type:

dbtraits rundown.5pm +s

Read

Access

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

-R----------------

+r|-r

Indicates whether or not stories in the queue are

in read-only mode.

To set the SHOW.5PM.SCRIPTS queue to

read-only mode, type:

dbtraits show.5pm.scripts +r

When this mode is turned off, users opening

stories have them in edit-lock mode. This is the

logical setting for any queue in which people

will be changing stories.

Turn Read Access on for queues in which

people are likely to read but not change the

stories.

Printable

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

--P---------------

+p|-p

Indicates whether you can use the print

command on all stories in the queue with a

single command when systen printing.

To enable users to print all stories in the

SHOW.5PM.SCRIPTS queue with a single

command:

dbtraits show.5pm.scripts +p

This trait does not interfere with your use of the

print story

print script

commands on

individual stories in the queue.

Database Traits Console Command Summary

639

Queue

Being

Ordered

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

---lo-------------

-o

This is an indicator, rather than database traits.

It indicates the queue’s order status.

The l indicates that the queue is currently order

locked to prevent more than one user from

reordering stories in a queue at the same time.

To find out who is ordering a queue, read the

Busy error message you get when you try to

order the queue. If no one is actually ordering

the queue, then it has an invalid order lock on it.

The o indicates the queue was once sorted, but

has since been ordered. When a sorted queue is

ordered, the system stops sorting stories as they

enter the queue. To indicate that a sorted queue

has been ordered, the system replaces sorted on

the screen with order.

The

dbtrait -o

command can be used to

remove the ordered attribute (indicator) and

make the queue resume sorting from the

console. There is no +o to apply the ordered

attribute.

To find out who last ordered the

SHOW.5PM.SCRIPTS queue, type:

list d-o show.5pm.scripts

Locked

Queue

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

------L-----------

Not a database trait; indicates a user has locked

the queue. Only a superuser or someone who

knows the correct key for the lock can remove

it.

To find out who last locked the

SHOW.5PM.SCRIPTS queue:

list d-u show.5pm.scripts

Inverted

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

-------I----------

+i|-i

Indicates whether or not stories in a directory or

queue will be displayed with the most recent

one at the top.

To display stories in the WIRES.ALL queue,

with the most recent one at the top:

dbtraits wires.all +i

Name

Location in Display

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

Mode / Option

Keyword Definition / Example

E Managing Traits at the Console

640

Sorted

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

--------s---------

+so|-so

Indicates whether or not the stories in a queue

will be sorted by a form field you choose

(usually the title field).

To turn on the sorted trait for the

SHOW.5PM.SCRIPTS queue:

dbtraits show.5pm.scripts +so

Update

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

---------U--------

+u|-u

Indicates whether or not stories in a queue will

be replaced as new versions are moved or

copied to it.

To indicate that stories in

SHOW.5PM.SCRIPTS should be replaced as

new versions are moved or copied to it:

dbtraits show.5pm.scripts +u

The update trait does not affect stories that are

restored from tape. If you restore a story to a

queue that already contains a version of that

story, you will have two versions of the same

story, even if the queue’s update trait is on.

General

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

----------G-------

+g|-g

Indicates whether or not stories in a queue

should retain their security restrictions when

they are moved to another queue.

For instance, access to stories in the Dead queue

would normally be unrestricted. To prevent

people from opening restricted stories once they

are moved to the Dead queue, type:

dbtraits dead +g

Queue

Operations

Allowed

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

-----------Q------

+q|-q

Indicates whether or not the kill, move, or

duplicate operations can be performed against

an entire queue.

Setting the trait “off” for a particular queue does

not affect the ability of people to kill, move, or

duplicate individual stories in the queue, as long

as they have appropriate permissions.

To allow users to kill, move, or duplicate the

entire SHOW.5PM.SCRIPTS queue, type:

dbtraits show.5pm.scripts +q

Name

Location in Display

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

Mode / Option

Keyword Definition / Example

Database Traits Console Command Summary

641

Save

Ver si on

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

------------N-----

------------O-----

------------A-----

save -|n|o|a

Determines how many old story versions are

retained in each queue. Display values are: N

for none, O for original, and A for all.

To save only the last version of the People

directory (this is the default) use:

dbtraits people save -

To save no version, type:

dbtraits people save n

To save only the original version, type:

dbtraits people save o

To save all versions, type:

dbtraits people save a

Skip

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

-------------X----

+x|-x

Indicates whether or not a directory or queue is

left out of database backups.

To leave the Dead queue out of the database

backup procedure:

dbtraits dead +x

Watch

Append

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

--------------W---

+w|-w

Assigned to queues that receive data from wire

services. It allows the queue to monitor for new

stories sent by the wire service, appends them to

the wire queue, and immediately displays them

to users who have that wire queue open. While

this trait can be applied to any queue in the

iNEWS newsroom computer system, it is

crucial that it be assigned to queues receiving

data from wire services. For instance, to assign

Watch Append to the WIRES.ALL queue:

dbtraits wires.all +w

Name

Location in Display

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

Mode / Option

Keyword Definition / Example

E Managing Traits at the Console

642

Forms

Allowed

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

---------------F--

+f|-f

Must be assigned to all queues in the forms

directory. The forms will not work without this

database trait applied. Additionally, this trait

can be assigned to any queue in the database,

but is usually only assigned to other queues that

receive stories from other systems via rx/tx and

then build forms for those stories, as needed.

For instance, to assign the forms allowed trait to

the SYSTEM.FORMS.R queue:

dbtraits system.forms.r +f

Index

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

----------------i-

+index|-index

Assigned to queues and directories that you

want to be indexed by the Fast Text Search

(FTS) server. Allows for quicker searching of

the queue or directory.

For instance, to assign this trait to the

WIRES.ALL queue:

dbtraits wires.all +index

Text

Timing

Clocks

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

-----------------T

+t|-t

Turns on the Text Timing Clocks, which appear

in the Story Text panel. They are:

TTC - Time to cursor

BLK - Time of blocked (highlighted) text

EST - Estimated read time of entire story

To turn on these clocks in the

RUNDOWN.5PM, type:

dbtraits rundown.5pm +t

Sortfield

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield

Q----------------- Title

sortfield

Indicates which form field a sorted queue is

sorted by. See “Sortfield” on page 27 for more

information.

When the sortfield is on, all the stories in the

queue are sorted. When used on a large queue,

the command prompt and control will not be

returned until the entire queue is sorted. This

may take a long time dependin on the size of the

queue.

Name

Location in Display

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

Mode / Option

Keyword Definition / Example

Database Traits Console Command Summary

643

Purge Interval

purge

Indicates the “age” stories in a queue can reach

before they are purged. See “Purge Interval” on

page 29 for more information.

Display Lines/Refresh

dis /+|-refresh

Indicates how many lines of each story in the

queue are displayed. See “The dis Column” on

page 33 for more information.

Queue Form

qform

The form used to display information in the

Queue panel. Fields selected should be a sub-set

of fields used in the story form. A field included

in the queue form that does not actually exist in

the story form cannot be written to in the Queue

panel.

In this example the rundown form is assigned as

the queue form to the

SHOWS.6PM.RUNDOWN queue:

dbtraits show.6pm.rundown qform

rundown

Story Form

sform

Indicates the form assigned to be used in the

Story Form panel (of the Story panel) to display

form fields.

In this example the futures form is assigned as

the story form to the ASSIGNMENTS.TODAY

queue:

dbtraits assignments.today sform

future

Change Form

cform

Changes the story form assignment for

previously existing stories within a queue, and

restamps them with a new form name. The

following example would change the way

stories in the 6 o'clock show would appear,

reassigning them to be displayed using a newly

designed rundown form.

Example:

dbtraits show.6pm.rundown sform

rundown-new cform

For this to take effect, you need to log out and

log back in again.

Name

Location in Display

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

Mode / Option

Keyword Definition / Example

E Managing Traits at the Console

644

Strip Form

stripform

Removes embedded form display information

from stories. Forms allowed queues stamp the

look of the story form into the story. Assigning

a different story form to one of these queues and

running changeform on the queue would not

affect the look of stories with embedded forms.

You would need to strip the embedded "look"

out of the story so it would then appear using

the form assigned to that queue.

Mailbox

mbox mail

Indicates mailbox assigned to the queue. See

“Mailbox” on page 32 for more information.

Groups

wg= rg= ng= wg|rg|ng

Assigns a write, read, or notify group to queue

or directory. Here are a few examples:

dbtraits show.5pm rg=castread

dbtraits show.5pm wg=producers

See “Managing Group Traits at the Console” on

page 35 for more information.

See “Groups” on page 35 for more information.

Interplay interplay # Assigns an Interplay server to an individual

directory. All directories default to zero (0).

Here are a couple examples:

dbtraits show.sports interplay 1

dbtraits show.weather interplay 2

Use the

list d-i <directory>

console

command to see which Interplay server is

associated with a specified directory.

Name

Location in Display

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

Mode / Option

Keyword Definition / Example

Database Traits Console Command Summary

645

Sortfield

The format of the sortfield information is:

SRPlo-LIsUG-QSXWFiT sortfield

Q---------------- TITLE

This trait shows by which form field a sorted queue is sorted. A letter representing the form

field appears in this position in the trait listing. A hyphen (-) here means that no sort field has

been set. The system automatically uses the title field as the sort field.

This trait also determines which form field the computer searches during fast finds. In

addition, the cursor is placed on this form field when a user displays stories in a queue.

nDo not confuse this trait with the sorted queue trait, which determines whether the queue is

sorted at all.

Changing a Queue’s Sort Field

Perform this procedure at a time of low system usage, because the dbsort command can

impair system performance while it is running.

To change a queue’s sort field from the console:

1. Esure no users are in the queue.

Changing a queue’s sort field does not affect what is seen by users already in the queue.

If they try to use a displayed out-of-date sort field, it could cause confusion.

FTS Index ftsindex # Assigns the index base used by the specified

directory. All directories default to zero (0).

Supported values are from 0 to 49.

Here are a few examples:

dbtraits wires ftsindex 1

dbtraits archive.2008 ftsindex 2

dbtraits archive.2009 ftsindex 3

Use the

list d-i <directory>

console

command to see which FTS index base is

associated with a specified directory.

Name

Location in Display

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT

Mode / Option

Keyword Definition / Example

E Managing Traits at the Console

646

2. Use dbtraits to set the queue’s sort field.

dbtraits <queue name> sortfield <field name>

If the queue is not already sorted, include the sorted option (+so) at the end of the

command to turn on its sorted trait. For instance, type:

dbtraits rundowns.5pm sortfield page-number +so

Turn on the sorted option (+so) before allowing users to re-enter the queue.

Starting the Queue Sort Function from the Console

You can use the console to restore a ordered queue to its original sorted state and restart

sorting in one of two ways:

• Use the dbsort command

• Use the dbtraits -o command

To restart sorting at a queue using the dbsort command:

1. Type the dbsort command and the queue name you want to sort. For instance:

dbsort rundowns.5pm

2. Press Enter. Something similar to the following appears:

Sorting: <RUNDOWNS.5PM>

nIf the queue has a write group assigned to it, you must be a console superuser to use dbsort.

Otherwise, you will see something like this:RUNDOWNS.5PM Write group producers NOT

sorted.

To restart sorting at a queue using the dbtraits -o command:

1. Type the dbtraits command, the queue name you want to sort, and -o. For instance:

dbtraits rundowns.5pm -o

2. Press Enter.

Using either the dbsort or the dbtraits command turns off the ordered attribute, allowing

the queue to resume sorting, as indicated by the sort trait.

Purge Interval

The format of the purge information is:

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory

Q-RP----I---QSXW--- TITLE P3.0 D1 - WIRES.ALL

Database Traits Console Command Summary

647

The purge column in the list d output displays the directory or queue’s purge interval,

preceded by P. The purge interval determines how old stories in a queue can get before they

are purged. Every hour, your system removes any stories older than their queue’s purge

interval and places these stories in the Dead queue. This process frees up space in your

database for new stories.

You can set a purge interval as days or hours, or a combination of both. You distinguish

between hours and days by using a decimal point.

To enter hours, type the number of hours, such as

To enter the purge interval in days and hours, type the number of days, a period, and the

number of hours, such as

2.12

To set the purge interval in days, type the number of days followed by a period (for instance,

90.). A purge interval of zero means the queue is never purged.

To set a queue’s purge interval, use:

dbtraits <queue name> purge <purge interval value>

For instance, to give all queues in the Wires directory a purge interval of two days, type:

dbtraits wires purge 2.

To list all queues in the database with a purge interval, use:

list purge=<purge interval> d

To list all queues in a directory with a purge interval, use:

list purge=<purge interval> d [<directory name>]

Mailbox Attribute

If a mailbox is assigned to a queue, the number representing that mailbox appears in the

mbox column of the list d display.

The format of the mailbox information is:

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory

Q-RP----I---QSXW--- TITLE P3.0 D1 - WIRES.ALL

To list all queues in the database with a particular mailbox, use:

list mail=<mailbox number> d

E Managing Traits at the Console

648

To assign a mailbox to a queue, use:

dbtraits <queue name> mail <mailbox number> | <reserved mailbox name>

For instance, to assign mailbox 103 to the queue WIRES.KEYWORDS.HOCKEY, type:

dbtraits wires.keywords.hockey mail 103

The dis Column

The dis column of the list d output represents two traits in one column: the preview lines trait

(formerly known as display lines) and the refresh trait.

The format of the preview lines information at the console is:

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFiT sortfield purge dis mbox directory

Q-RP----I---QSXW--- TITLE P3.0 D1 - WIRES.ALL

The preview lines trait applies to lines previewed in the Queue panel of the iNEWS

Workstation. The value of a queue’s preview lines trait controls how many lines of each

story in the queue are displayed. The number in the dis column indicates the preview lines

setting. You can have a queue display as few as one line of each story or as many as 23 lines.

The second trait, refresh, is also listed under the dis column. Refresh controls whether the

system automatically updates your screen if you view a queue someone else is changing. If

the number begins with a D, the queue is not refreshed automatically; if it begins with an R,

it is refreshed automatically.

Preview Lines

To change the value of a queue’s preview lines trait, use:

dbtraits <queue name> dis <number of lines>

Because screens can display a maximum of 22 lines of a story at a time, that is the maximum

value used with this trait. The minimum value is 0, which would show no preview lines.

For instance, to give SHOW.RUNDOWNS a one-line display, type:

dbtraits show.rundown dis 1

SHOW.RUNDOWNS now has a one-line-per-story display.

In a one-line display, the first line on the screen is the top line of the form assigned to that

queue. The next 22 lines in the queue display the second line of each story’s form. Queues

that display more than one line per story begin with the top line of each story’s form.

Database Traits Console Command Summary

649

Choosing a value for a queue’s display lines trait depends on which is more important:

displaying as many stories as possible at one time, or showing a large portion of each story.

For instance, in a rundown queue it is important to display as many stories on the screen at a

time as possible, so the display lines trait is usually set to one line per story.

In queues where people often browse (such as those in the Wires directory), display a small

part of each story.

Stories in a queue display are usually separated by a blank line. The only exception is any

queue that displays one line per story, such as a rundown queue. Stories in these queues are

not separated from each other.

Type the display command to temporarily change the number of lines displayed per story for

a queue you are viewing. This change applies only to a single user’s workstation and lasts

only while the queue is being viewed.

Refresh

To set the queue refresh trait at the console, use:

dbtraits <queue name> [+refresh | -refresh]

To turn on this trait for a queue, use +refresh; to turn it off, use -refresh. For instance, to turn

on the refresh trait in RUNDOWNS.5PM, type:

dbtraits rundowns.5pm +refresh

Queues with refresh turned on display R in the preview lines column of list d output.

Use this trait only on important queues, like rundowns, that more than one person may

modify simultaneously. This allows everyone working on that rundown to immediately see

changes made by others.

nTo automatically refresh a queue, your system must spend a long time monitoring

workstations where users are viewing that queue. Using the refresh option on too many

queues simultaneously greatly increases the amount of work your system has to do and may

severely degrade its overall performance.

FTSindex Attribute

The iNEWS system supports up to 50 separate index bases for fast text searching. This

separation allows indexing of more documents while avoiding the index base file size limit

of 2GB. The index base is assigned using the dbtraits command and the ftsindex attribute.

E Managing Traits at the Console

650

An ftsindex attribute can be any value from 0-49. All directories default to index 0. The

ftsindex attribute is independent of the indexed attribute and determines which FTS index

base is used for the data in the queue with that ftsindex value.

For example, to separate index bases, use these commands:

dbtraits wires ftsindex 1

dbtraits archive.2008 ftsindex 2

dbtraits archive.2009 ftsindex 3

nThe command

list d-i

displays the index base used by a directory. When the index base is

changed, the directory is automatically removed from its current base and added to the new

one.

While FTS handles the separation of the index bases, there is only one ftsindex device on the

iNEWS Server, and there is only one ftsidx.exe program on the FTS server.

Interplay Attribute

Interplay servers can be assigned to individual directories using the dbtraits command or the

Directory/Queue Properties dialog box. All directories default to Interplay 0.

For example, to assign individual directories, use these commands:

dbtraits show.sports interplay 1

dbtraits show.weather interplay 2

nThe command

list d-i <directory>

displays the Interplay server associated with the

directory.

Managing Group Traits at the Console

There are four primary group traits used to apply groups to queues and directories in the

database: Read, Write, Editorial, and Notify.

The list d-v console command lists each queue’s assigned groups. These groups restrict who

can read, write, or delete stories in the queue and indicate who is notified when stories

change in the queue. Each group is explained individually in the following sections.

To list group information for a queue at the console, use:

list d-g <queue name>

Managing Group Traits at the Console

651

To list all queues in the database with a particular group assigned as their read, write, or

notification group at the console, use:

list rwng=<group name> d

Read Group

To set a queue’s read group, use:

dbtraits <queue name> rg <group name>

For instance, to assign a read group of producers to the queue SHOW.5PM, type:

dbtraits show.5pm rg producers

To list all queues in the database with a particular group assigned as their read group, use:

list rg=<group name> d

Write Group

To set a queue’s write group, use:

dbtraits <queue name> wg <group name>

For instance, to assign a write group of producers to the queue SHOW.5PM, type:

dbtraits show.5pm wg producers

To list all queues in the database with a particular group assigned as their write group, use:

list wg=<group name> d

To list all queues in the database with a particular group assigned as their read or write

group, use:

list rwg=<group name> d

Editorial Group

Members of the editorial group can delete, move, and float stories, and add breaks to

rundowns.

To set a queue’s editorial group, use:

dbtraits <queue name> eg <group name>

E Managing Traits at the Console

652

For instance, to assign an editorial group of producers to the queue SHOW.5PM, type:

dbtraits show.5pm eg producers

nIf no editorial group is assigned, the relevant permissions apply to the write group to stay

consistent with previous functionality.

To list all queues in the database with a particular group assigned as their editorial group,

use:

list eg=<group name> d

Notify Group

To set a queue’s notification group, use:

dbtraits <queue name> ng <group name>

For instance, to assign a notification group of producers to the queue WIRES.WAR, type:

dbtraits wires.war ng producers

To list all queues in the database that have a particular group assigned as their notification

group, use:

list ng=<group name> d

Restricting Access Using Read and Write Limitations

In addition to restricting access to various queues, you can use group access and usage

restrictions to hide queues or directories by placing a strict read restriction on them.

For instance, the System directory is usually restricted so that only superusers can write

stories there. You can hide this directory so it does not appear in the main directory for

normal users. Set its read group to a group with no users, such as sysop. (Because system

administrators can read everything in the database, they can see the directory.)

To set the System directory’s read group to sysop at the console:

1. Enter superuser mode so that the prompt appears like this:

NRCS-A#

2. Type:

NRCS-A# dbtraits system rg sysop

3. To apply changes you made to stories already in the directory, type:

NRCS-A# gtraits changegroup system

Managing Group Traits at the Console

653

A message similar to the following appears:

SYSTEM.CABLES 5 out of 5 changed

...

SYSTEM.WIRES 4 out of 4 changed

Now, only system administrators, logged in with an superuser account, can see the System

directory on their screens.

You might also have a queue to which you want people to move or duplicate stories, but that

you do not want anyone to read or go to. An example of this would be a confidential

suggestions queue to which people would move stories containing suggestions. Once placed

in this queue, suggestions would be visible only to those authorized or to superusers.

For instance, to set the read group of the Suggestions queue to mngmt, as a console

superuser, type:

NRCS-A# dbtraits suggestions rg mngmt

nAll users you want to allow the capability to send suggestions need to have write access to

the queue.

To make changes take effect on stories already in the Suggestions queue, remain a console

superuser and type:

NRCS-A# gtraits changegroup suggestions

Unless you are a member of the mngmt group, you can not see this queue in the Directory

panel or open this queue. You may copy or move stories containing suggestions to this

queue.

Removing Directory or Queue Restrictions

To remove a directory or queue’s read or write restrictions at the console, you first must log

on as a console superuser—that is, the prompt should appear with a number sign (#) not a

colon (:). To remove a restriction, type dbtraits followed by the name of the directory or

queue you want to change, then rg, wg, ng, and a dash (-).

For instance, to remove both the read and write restrictions from the Phonelists queue:

At a console, in superuser mode, type:

NRCS-A# dbtraits phonelists rg - wg -

E Managing Traits at the Console

654

To apply these read and write group changes to stories already in the Phonelists queue, type:

NRCS-A # gtraits changegroup phonelists

Now, anyone can read and write stories in the Phonelists queue.

FThe Line Editor, ed

This appendix provides basic information about the line editor, called ed, including

procedures for using it to make changes to important system files. These include the system

configuration, system profile, and printer or wire profile files.

nAdditional information may be obtained by typing

info ed

at the console.

This appendix contains:

•Starting ed

•Editing Commands

•Saving Changes

•Quitting ed

F The Line Editor, ed

656

Starting ed

When you modify a file, make the same changes to each server’s copy of the file, or your

system will not run properly. Select all servers before starting ed and opening a file for

editing to ensure changes you make are applied to each server’s copy of the file.

To start ed from the console:

tType ed followed by the file path and name to be edited. For instance, to edit a copy of

the configuration file in the Site directory, you would type:

NRCS-A

$ ed /site/config.test

3624

The line editor, ed, returns a number indicating the file size expressed as the number of

characters, including spaces and returns. Also, the console prompt, NRCS-A$, changes

to no prompt when you launch the editor.

If the file name specified does not exist or is a non-text file unsuitable for editing with

ed, ed returns a question mark (?) followed by the file name. This is one way to create a

new text file. For instance, a new text file called newfile is created when the following is

typed:

NRCS-A

$ ed newfile

?newfile

cDo not attempt to edit a non-text file such as a binary file. Doing so could cause

undesirable results.

Specifying Lines to Edit

The line you are on presently is called the current line.

Because ed is a line editor, you navigate through the file by line numbers. For instance, when

you open a file for editing, ed considers the last line in the file the current line. If you want to

view or edit a different line, you must go to that line.

For instance, you can move to the first line of the file by typing

and pressing Enter. To

move ahead five lines, you could type

. To move back three lines, you could type

-3

nThe line editor, ed, will respond with a question mark (?) if you try to move beyond the last

line of the file. Additionally, you cannot type a minus (-) value greater than or equal to the

current line number, because you cannot move to a line preceding the first line in the file.

Starting ed

657

Within ed, pressing Enter with no line number reference or command will cause ed to make

the next line in the file the current line, displaying that line as it goes. For instance, in the

following example, the user selects line 19 in the file, then presses the Enter key three times.

The line editor, ed, responds each time by displaying lines 20, 21, and 22, respectively.

server 522 action - - ; timed-action

Enter

server 523 action - - ; timed-action

Enter

reslist 701 ;Data Receiver instance

Enter

wireserver 801 news AX -

When editing, it is necessary to specify the line number(s) to be acted upon. This can be

done in several ways:

• Type the line number.

• Type starting and ending line numbers separated by a comma.

• Type period (.) to specify current line number.

• Type a dollar sign ($) to specify last line in the file.

The editing command to act upon the specified line(s) is typed immediately following the

specified line(s). There should be no spaces. Here are some examples using the Print

command, p.

To make line 18 the current line, type:

To print (to screen) line 10 of the file, type:

10p

To print (to screen) lines 10-20, type:

10,20p

To print all lines from the current line to line 20, type:

.,20p

To print all lines in the file from line 80 to the end, type:

80,$p

To display the current line number, type:

To display the line number of the last line, type:

To make the fifth line from the bottom current, type:

$-5

F The Line Editor, ed

658

Searching the File

When you do not know the line number, but you want to locate a line containing a specific

word, phrase, or number, you can use the search option. The line editor, ed, will search the

file, starting at the current line, and display the line with the next occurrence of the specified

text.

To search for text:

1. Type a forward slash (/). Do not press the spacebar.

2. Type the text you want to locate, followed by another forward slash.

3. Press Enter.

For instance, if you want to find websession in the configuration file, type:

/websession/

;websession 900

In the previous example, ed found the word, websession, on line 900. If you want to

repeat the search to locate further occurrences of that word, type a forward slash and

press Enter again. For instance:

/websession/

;websession 900

;websession 901

;websession 903

In the previous example, the user repeated the original search command two more times.

Each time, ed responded with the word searched and the line number where the next

occurrence of the word appears. In each case, the current line becomes the line number

displayed by ed.

Starting ed

659

Searching Tips

Here are a few more tips for searching with ed.

• Remember to use spaces before and/or after text to further define your search string. For

instance, type

/ 25 /

instead of

/25/

to avoid finding other numbers that contain the

number 25, such as in the line:

server 251 action 251 - ;timed action

• Remember that searches are case sensitive. For instance, searching for /MONITOR/

does not find monitor.

• Remember that searches distinguish between spaces and tabs. In other words, if you use

spaces and the file contains the information separated by a tab, you will not find it. For

instance, the search example below will not work:

You type:

/monitor 271/

(monitor and 271 are separated by a space)

The line is:

server 271 monitor 271 - ;Morning Show

(monitor and 271 are

separated by a tab)

Editing Commands

There are several basic editing commands you can use in ed to view, change, add, move, and

delete text in a system file.

nSome commands, such as Add, Delete, and Insert, change the current line, while others do

not. For instance, the Print command sets the current line to the number of the last line

printed.

Here is a list of editing commands, along with examples of their use:

Command Description & Examples

The Append command inserts one or more lines after the selected line. For

instance:

/websession/

;websession 900

inws 511 - gnews - ;

inws

In the above example, the user searches for websession, and ed responds by

displaying the first line found containing that word. The user types a, presses

Enter to start the append operation, and types information to be inserted in the

file after the displayed line. The user then types a period (.) on a line by itself,

which is very important because it terminates the append operation. Without it,

successive lines typed by the user would be added to the file.

F The Line Editor, ed

660

The Change command replaces the entire contents of the line addressed. For

instance:

terminal 13 9600-8n 1 news - ;

; not used

In the above example, the user selects line 21, and ed responds by displaying line

21. The user types c on one line to start the change operation. On the second line,

the user types replacement text and presses Enter, followed by a period on a line

by itself. The period (.) is very important because it terminates the change

operation. Without it, successive lines typed by the user would be added to the

file.

The Delete command is used to delete the line(s) specified. For instance:

27d

- Deletes line 27.

30,35d

- Deletes lines 30 through 35.

40,$d

- Deletes every line from 40 to the end of the file.

nAfter each Delete command, as well as after the Append, Change, and

Insert commands, the file’s lines are renumbered. For instance, if you

delete line 27, then delete line 30, you actually delete the lines originally

numbered 27 and 31 prior to the first Delete command.

The Global command allows the user to apply an editing command to all lines in

the file that contain a specific word, phrase, or number. For instance:

g/asws/s/asws/inws

- Finds all occurrences of asws and uses the Substitute

command to replace the first occurrence of asws on each line found with inws.

To replace all occurences on a line, add /g to the end of the command, such as:

g/asws/s/asws/inws/g

g/websession/d

- Finds all occurrences of websession and deletes the lines

containing it.

Each line affected is displayed after the editing command is applied.

Command Description & Examples (Continued)

Starting ed

661

The Insert command inserts one or more lines before the selected line. For

instance:

/websession/

;websession 900

inws 511 - gnews - ;

inws

In the above example, the user searches for websession, and ed responds by

displaying the first line found containing that word. The user types i and presses

Enter to start the insert operation. The user then types two lines of information to

be inserted in the file before the displayed line. On the last line, the user types a

period (.) on a line by itself, which is very important because it terminates the

insert operation. Without it, successive lines typed by the user would be added to

the file.

The Move command removes the line(s) specified from their original location

and inserts the line(s) after the target location. For instance:

18m20

- Line 18 becomes line 20. Lines 19 and 20 become 18 and 19.

1,5m$

- Moves lines 1 through 5 to the end of the file.

Contrary to the name, the Print command does not send information to a printer.

Instead, it prints text to the console screen. It is handy for viewing specific lines

within a file. Typed alone with no line number references, the Print command

displays the current line.

For instance, to print (to screen) lines 10-20, type:

10,20p

More examples of the Print command can be found in “Specifying Lines to Edit”

on page 656.

s/<old text>/

The Substitute command substitutes a specific portion of a line with new text.

For instance:

;AvidNews Starter config 09JAN10

s/AvidNews/iNEWS

;iNEWS Starter config 09JAN10

In the above example, the user selects line 3, and ed responds by displaying line

3. The user substitutes the word AvidNews for iNEWS but does not alter

anything else on the line. The line editor, ed, confirms the substitution by

redisplaying line 3, incorporating the change.

Command Description & Examples (Continued)

F The Line Editor, ed

662

Saving Changes

The changes you make to a file are not saved immediately. This means you could quit (or

exit) ed without saving changes if necessary. You must use the Write command to save

modifications.

To save changes, type

and press Enter. The line editor, ed, will respond by displaying the

file size, such as:

3624

nThe Write command is case-sensitive. If uppercase W is used, ed will append the modified

version of the file to the end of the original file version. This can quickly increase the file size

and result in redundancy. Always use the lowercase w.

Quitting ed

To exit the line editor, type

and press Enter. For instance:

3624

NRCS-A$

The Copy command copies the line specified, and inserts a copy after the target

location. For instance:

5t10

- Inserts a copy of line 5 below line 10. The copy becomes line 11. The

original line 11, if any, becomes line 12, and so forth.

20,30t50

- Inserts copies of lines 20 through 30 after line 50.

The Undo command is used to cancel the effects of the last editing command

entered. For instance:

1,5m$

In the above example, the user issues a command to move lines 1 through 5 to the

end of the file, then types u to undo that command.

Command Description & Examples (Continued)

Starting ed

663

In the previous example, the user saved changes first by using the Write command (

), then

typed

to quit ed and return to a normal console prompt.

However, if you wanted to quit ed without saving your changes, you can do so. In this case,

you would have to type the Quit command twice: the first time to notify ed you want to quit,

and the second time to confirm that you want to quit without saving changes.

For instance:

NRCS-A$

In the previous example, ed responds to the first Quit command with a question mark (?) to

remind the user changes were made to the file and not saved. This is a precautionary warning

to help prevent a user from exiting ed and inadvertently losing changes that were not saved.

When the user replies by typing the Quit command a second time, ed exits, abandoning any

changes made.

F The Line Editor, ed

664

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index

665

Symbols

/etc/hosts 254, 542

/site/config 249, 543

editing 252

testing system changes 253

websession resource 447

wires 293

/site/dict/dmessages 598

/site/dict/joblist 597

/site/dict/keymacros 589

/site/dict/mcs 593

/site/dict/messages 575

/site/dict/queues 583

/site/dict/smessages 599

/site/dict/words 303, 586

/site/system 254, 555

changing 255

parameters 256, 257

/site/web/configuration 461

/site/wires 293

adding wire profile 294

Absolute date, defined 630

Access restrictions 652

Account queue form 220

Accounts, viewing users 66

Action servers

adding 333

configure rundown mirroring 340

examples of 332

field validation 335

ordered queues and command 325

polling commands 340

validation job list commands 338

Action servers, validation messages 581

ALL queue 466

AMCPID 424

Apache Web server 446

at command 527

Avid

online support 24

training services 26

Avid Data Receiver 292

Backup files 245

Banner format options 286

Batch indexing 377

bottom console control command 478

bpoll command 527

broadcast command 482

Broadcast message 482

bscan command 527

CAP events 424

Capture command 534

Category program messages 576

cccolor 605

CG styles 400

creating 402

CG templates 226

access editor 241

backgrounds 227

creating new 233

editing 229

font presets 239

CG Title Entry 223

configuration 226

overview 224

security 241

Character mapping 536

Command line, defined 43

Index

Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

666

Command prompt, defined 43

Command sets for servers 323

Commands

Avid personnel only 476

defining 570

Community 419

configuring 420

removing a system 424

restrictions 423

troubleshooting 425

viewing sessions 423

Components, licensing and limits 247

Composite list queues 387

assign forms to 390

computer commands 478

Configuration file 249

adding wire service 293

editing 252

testing system changes 253

Configuration file, example 543

configure command 482

connect command 483

Console commands

control commands 43

server commands 42

types of 41

Console commands, summary of utraits 632

Console configuration file, sample of 52

Console configuration keywords 52

Console control commands 478

using 43

Console history logs 49

Console multiplexor 33

assigning mailboxes to a queue 647

configuration file 556

configuration file, sample of 52

console history 46

display 36

editing console.cfg file 55

enter superuser mode 37

exiting 40

function key assignment 44

keyboard 35

logging out of remote console 51

managing group traits 650

managing traits 623

printing history 479

remote commands 51

selecting servers 45

setup overview 34

starting the program 35

troubleshooting 40

unbusy stories and queues 147

using remote console 50

viewing configuration file 55

viewing user traits 624

zooming in on server 46

Console server commands 482

Console superuser 37

console.cfg file 55, 556

ControlAir fields and forms 218

ctraits 422

ctraits command 483

D messages dictionary 598

Data Receiver 292

adding wire profile 294

configuration and licensing 292

reconfiguring system 296

wire distribution 297

wire distribution story 295, 297

wire profile options 296

Database components 354

Databases 99–149

assigning queue forms 208

assigning story forms 208

changing traits 136

changing traits at console 637

creating a new directory 102

creating a new queue 104

creating a new story 111

deleting directories or queues 115

display lines trait 648

free up space 646

FTSindex attribute 649

getting info. on traits at console 635

group access 169

group traits, types of 170

Interplay attribute 650

locked queues and stories 141

mailbox attribute 647

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index

667

managing traits from console 623

overview 100

parent directory 637

purge interval trait 646

purge intervals and limits 139

refresh trait for queues 649

renaming a directory or queue 113

restricting access 652

restrictions 101

set up for projects 467

sortfield trait 645

summary of traits 122, 637

unbusy stories and queues 147

usage restrictions 169

viewing story information 118

viewing traits 116

date1 and date2 630

dbclean command 484

dbclose command 484

dbdev command 485

dbdump command 485

dbfree command 486

dblines command 487

dbmanager 97

dboriginal command 488

dbpurge command 488

dbrestore command 489

dbserver command 491

DBServer program messages 576

dbsort command 491

Dbtraits

messages 583

summary of console commands 637

dbtraits command 492

dbvisit command 493

Dead letter queue 106

Dead queue, recovering stories from 115

delay command 534

Destination queue 299, 345, 409

destinationorder 607

Devices

adding 265

supported 262

viewing information 263

diag command 534

Dialog boxes

Change User’s Password 74

Directory Properties 122–136

Local Printing 274

Manage User Accounts 66

Modify User Account 69, 75

Modify User Account, explained 632

Preferences 76

Queue Properties 122–136

Simplified User Settings 83

Dialog commands 533

Dictionaries 569

case-shifting 591

ccucmds 570

ccumsgs 570

customizing 572

d messages 598

job list command 597

keyboard macros 589

mcs 593

MCS files 397

restoring defaults 574

s messages 599

update system 397

utility messages 575

words 586

dictionary command 495

Directories 99

changing the parent 637

creating a new 102

deleting 115

hiding 175

hiding SYSTEM directory 652

removing restrictions 653

renaming 113

restrictions 101

viewing database traits 116

Web access templates 450

DIrectory templates 122

Dis column 648

disablecommandline 619

Disconnect program messages 576

diskclear command 495

diskcopy command 496

Distribution codes, action servers and tx links 346

distribution command 527

Distribution servers 344

adding 350

codes 345

Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

668

destination queues 345

dup and move commands 346

wildcards 345

Distribution story 295, 297

doc command 496

down keyword console control command 478

down number console control command 478

dup command 346, 528

Easy lock 145

echo command 535

ed command 496, 655

editing commands 659

quitting the line editor 662

saving changes 662

searching a file 658

specifying lines to edit 656

starting the line editor 656

Edit lock 144

Editing commands 659

Editorial group 170, 173, 651

enter command 497

Environment variables 603

cccolor 605

destinationorder 607

disablecommandline 619

for servers 620

maillookup 608

msgmailalert 609

nxserver 620

picolor 610

registry values 605

RX_HOT_TO_GO 620

RXDEBUG= 620

RXDEBUGFILE 620

RXSITELISTSZ= 620

showtimingbar 612

synctoserver 616

VT compatibility 617

Errors

group checker 157

keyboard checker 189

Escape character 535

escape command 535

Event list queues 387

assign forms to 390, 390

every command 528

expect command 535

extension command 528

Facets 465, 471

list p command 506

overview 466

fast command 528

Fast text search

archival and backup 379

batch indexing 377

components, installing 372

dynamic indexing 379

indexing stories 369

reindexing 379

servers 369

set up FTS components 374

Field validation 335

using with servers 336

Fields

custom colors 207

customizing in forms 201

label borders 206

predefined lists 207

types of 208

Find All form 221

Flags 509

Folders, creating a new 102

Fonts, preset 239

force command 497

force console command 626

Forms 197

assign to queue or story 208

creating 198

custom colors 207

customizing 201

field types 208

for ALL or QUERY queues in projects 468

for facets 471

guidelines 198

predefined lists 207

standard system forms 220

FTS

FTSindex attribute 649

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index

669

index bases 649

Ftsindex 374

FTSindex attribute 649

Ftsseek 374

Ftsseek messages 582

function key console control command 479

Function keys 44

predefined system keys 186

Group checker 156

Group traits 170

Groups 151

access and restrictions 169

add users as members 162

adding groups as members 163

adding workstations 166

avoiding recursion 163

changing multiple 161

choosing a name 154

create at console 154

create group memberships 155

creating 154

creating multiple 161

deleting 161

group checker messages 579

mail aliases 176

managing traits from console 650

membership possibilities 162

overview 152

permissions 167

renaming 160

restricted 174

timeouts 167

transferring assignments 174

view info. at console 152

view info. at workstation 153

grpcheck command 497

Grpcheck messages 579

gtraits command 152, 498

help command 498

heol command 536

history command

bottom 478

list 479

print 480

top 480

up 480

hogs command 499

Hosts file 254

HTML export template 432

sample story 441

idiff command 499

ignore command 528

ignore-del command 529

Index field, compatibility errors 126

iNEWS

adding devices 265

backup files 245

changing database traits 136

command references 475

community 419

configuration file 249

console history logs 49

creating a new directory 102

creating a new queue 104

creating a new story 111

database overview 100

databases 99

defining commands 570

defining messages 570

deleting directories or queues 115

dictionaries 569

hardware overview 34

incorporating new configuration 253

licensing components 247

local print style story 288

network systems 407

projects and facets 465

recovering killed stories 115

remote console 50

renaming a directory or queue 113

set automatic update 407

shutting down the system 60

single-server mode 62

standard forms 220

starting the console program 35

Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

670

starting the system 58

supported devices 262

system configuration overview 244

system messages 425

system parameters 256

system profile files 254

system profile parameters 257

update system dictionaries 397

viewing database traits 116

viewing device info. 263

viewing story information 118

Web publishing 429, 446

wire distribution 297

wire distribution story 295, 297

wire profile options 296

wires 291

words dictionary 303

iNEWS.log 425

Internationalization 303

Interplay attribute 650

Intersystem messaging 267

receiving 268

Job list command dictionary 597

Job list commands 527

field validation 338

poll and bpoll 340

Job list story 320

adding a scan line 321

Job lists

dup or move commands 347

overlapping 342

validate commands 347

Key lock 145

Keyboard checker 189

Keyboard checker, program messages 577

Keyboard macros 183

Keyboards 179

creating 181

defaults for users 193

defined 180

keyboard checker 189

testing macros 192

Keyword checker

defined 306

messages 311

Keyword checker, program messages 576

Keyword limitations 306

Keyword servers 360

adding 361

database components 360

defined 303

Killed stories

recovering from Dead queue 115

view who did it 119

Label borders 206

Last login messages 583

Line editor, ed 496, 655

starting 656

Linux commands 477

list B command 502

list C command 503

list c command 504

list c message columns, defined 264

list command 500

list console control command 479, 479

list d command 504

list g command 505

list p command 506

list q command 508

syntax 508

list s command 508

list sq command 509

list u command 509

list u-v command 624

local command 529

Local printing 273

banner format options 286

creating print styles 280

defined 274

dialog box 274

sample style story 288

style options 280

Locks

removing 146

types of 144

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index

671

logclose console control command 479

logopen console control command 479

logout command 479, 511

Macros

creating 183

default user keyboards 193

defined 179

dictionaries 589

keyboard check program messages 578

keyboard checker 189

keys quick reference 185

notes of caution 189

plain text 187

predefined function keys 186

repeating 188

state keys 187

testing keyboards 192

types of 180

Mail

aliases for Internet 176

creating an alias 176

dead letter queue 106

disabling all users 380

enabling new users 91

network 380

outgoing mail queue 105

reserved for wires 303

servers 380

Mail form 221

Mail, server messages 581

Mailbox tasks 325

defined 320

Mailboxes

assigning to a queue 328

types of 326

Mailboxes, listing all queues (at console) 647

maillookup 608

mailto command 529

makemontab command 511

makeshift command 511

maketab command 512

Manager accounts

creating Database Manager 97

creating User Manager 96

Map command 536

Map story 391

mapin command 537

mapout command 537

MCS dictionary 593

files 397

status reports 596

Memberships 162

message command 537

Messages

broadcast 482

defining 570

Messaging 267

Mirroring rundowns 339

modem console control command 479

Monitor server

configuration checklist 383

creating 384

defined 381

using 405

Monitor server, mcs dictionary 593

MOS events 424

MOSID 424

move command 346, 529

msgclean command 513

msgmailalert 609

Notification group 172

Notification priority 299

all wires 300

Notify group 170, 652

view assignment 153

NSML 435

NSML format 407

number command 529

nxserver 620

offline command 517

on command 530

online command 517

Online support 24

open command 530

order command 325, 530

Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

672

Order lock 144

Ordered queues 325

Ordered trait 138

otod command 517

Parallel wire servers 353

adding 354

pass command 537

Passwords

change user passwords at console 626

changing a user’s 74

checking 632

listing change by date 630–631

listing last change 629

system administration 38

pause command 538

Permissions, restricting 174

picolor 610

poll command 531

Polling commands 340

Polling issues 343

Preferences, users 75

Preset fonts 239

Print banner format options 286

print command 480

Print server messages 583

Print styles 280

options 280

PRINTER display, console 479

Printers 273

Priority queue 322

Procedures

access registry editor 604

add a scan line 322

add a seek server 367

add an action server 333

add entry in map story 392

add groups to group 163

add new user account 90

add rx/tx links to iNEWS 410

add server utility program 317

add users to group 162

add wire profile 294

add wire service to config. file 293

add workstation to group 166

adding a new workstation 266

adding a parallel wire server 355

adding keyword servers 362

assign command to function key 44

assign default user keyboards 194

assign editorial group 173

assign nofication group 172

assign read group 171

assign write group 172

assigning queue or story forms 208

assigning to a queue 328

avoid hidden category errors 302

change /site/system 255

change a queue’s sort field 645

change command assigned to function key 44

change database traits 136

change default dictionary value 573

change group name 160

change order of transmit queue 410

change presenter instructions text color 610

change superuser password 39

change system operator password 39

change user preferences 76

change user’s password 75

changing user passwords 626

check for recursion 165

choose existing font presets 240

choose group name 154

configure rundown mirroring 341

configuring iNEWS for Community 420, 467

connecting as remote console 50

create a mail alias 176

create a new directory 102

create a new form 198

create a new queue 104

create a new story 111

create and configure monitor 384

create CG style 402

create composite queue 387

create Database Manager account 97

create event list queue 387

create facets 471

create group at console 154

create group memberships 155

create keyboards/macro sets 181

create macro with state keys 187

create new CG templates 234

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index

673

create new directory 87

create new group 154

create new queue 88

create new users 86

create or change multiple groups 161

create print styles 280

create projects 468

create repeating macro 188

create user manager account 96

customize a form 201

define banner in print style 287

define key used to advance timing bar 612

define user account template 89

define value for VT compatibility 618

delete directories or queues 115

delete function key assignment 44

delete group 161

deleting font presets 240

designate every entry queues 322

designate priority queue 322

disable command line option 619

edit /site/config 252

edit console.cfg file 55

edit dictionary file 398, 572

enable destination order 607

enable message mail alerts 609

enable new user to get mail 91

enable synchronized timing 617

enter console control commands 43

enter gtraits interactive mode 162

exit console program 478

exit superuser mode 38

exit the console 40

find who locked an unlocked queue 142

find who locked queue 141

find who locked story 142

find who order locked queue 142

hide groups from e-mail lists 608

incorporate configuration changes 253

install FTS components 372

list all groups 152

list all groups for a user 152

list all members of group 152

list story info. without Index field 120

list who duplicated a story 120

list who killed a story 120

list who moved a story 120

log out all users 97

log out remote user from console 52

logging out of remote console 51

make backups of system files 245

modify user traits 68

modify wire distribution story 295

pause scroll of console history 47

prevent access to CG Title Entry 242

publish stories to Web 446

reconfigure system 296

recovering stories from Dead queue 115

reindex an index base 380

remove editorial group 173

remove nofication group 173

remove ordered trait 139

remove queue’s production lock 147

remove read group 171

remove story’s edit lock 146

remove system from community 424

remove user account 95

remove write group 172

rename group 160

renaming directory or queue 113

reset server I/O ports 41

restart scroll at console 40

restart send and receive from server ports 41

restore standard translations 574

resume queue sorting function 139

resume scroll of console history 47

run site configuration test 253

saving preset fonts for CGs 239

search for user info. 92

selecting all servers 45

selecting one server 45

selecting two servers 45

send server commands to multiple servers 42

set automatic update 408

set up ftsseek and ftsindex 375

set up iNEWS database for projects 467

set up keyword server for wires 304

set up seek feature 368

set up simplified users 83

setting up Txnet 430

shutting down the system 61

start CG Template Editor 229

Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

674

start ftsseek and ftsindex 376

start in single-server mode 63

start or restart queue sorting 646

start the console 35

starting ed, the line editor 656

starting the system 58

stop a server command 42

stop FTS from console 377

stop ftsseek and ftsindex 377

stop runaway program at console 41

take superuser privileges 38

test macros in keyboards 193

transfer group assignments 175

transmit stories with same form 407

unbusy stories and queues 147

unlock queue without key 147

unlock story without key 146

update iNEWS dictionaries 398

use field validation 336

using monitor server 405

view /site/config at console 253

view community session 423

view configuration file 245

view database info. from console 117

view database info. from workstation 117

view function key assignment 45

view group assignment 153

view group errors 157

view group memberships 153

view high/low watermarks 257

view licensing limits 248

view purge limit 257

view recent console history 48

view remote system in community 423

view story information 119

view system parameters in use 256

view system profile 246

view user accounts 66

viewing console.cfg 55

viewing device information 263

zoom in on one server 46

Production lock 144

Projects 465

creating 468

list p command 506

overview 466

setting up iNEWS database 467

publish command 531

Purge intervals 303

database limits 139

format information 646

put command 531

Q_UNKNOWN 574

QUERY queue 466

Queue templates 122

Queues 99

/site/dict/queues 583

assign forms to 390

assigning forms 208

change order of transmit queue 410

changing the sort field 645

configure rundown mirroring 340

create composite list 387

create event list 387

creating a new 104

dead letter queue 106

deleting 115

destination queue 299

dictionary 583

display preview lines in rundown 648

every entry queues 322

hiding 175

job lists 320

locking 141

mailbox attribute 647

mirroring rundowns 339

ordered via action servers 325

outgoing mail 105

priority and scan queues 322

refresh trait 649

removing locks 146

removing restrictions 653

renaming 113

restrictions 101

set up forms 390

turn off ordered trait in sorted queue 138

unbusy 147

update trait 409

viewing database traits 116

Web access templates 450

quiet command 531

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index

675

Read group 170, 171, 651

for projects 468

view assignment 153

Read limitations 652

reconnect command 518

Recursion 163

Registry editor 604

Relative date, defined 630

remote command 531

Remote console 50

commands 51

logging out 51

Remote systems 423

remove command 519, 532

rename command 519

reorder command 520

replace command 532

Reserved mailboxes 326

reset console control command 480

restart command 520

Restricted group 174

RGB hexadecimal color chart 611

rr kb su m SOEKCVH sc 509

Rule sets 307

removing 310

Rundown mirroring 339

configuration 340

polling issues 343

Rx links 407

adding 410

update trait 409

RXDEBUG= 620

RXDEBUGFILE 620

RXSITELISTSZ= 620

S messages dictionary 599

Save error messages 583

scan command 532

Scan queue 322

Script templates 112

Searches

job lists 306

keyword story and rules 307

wire keywords 303

searchtape command 520

Security

CG Title Entry 241

group access 169

hiding queues and directories 175

permissions 167

protecting SYSTEM directory 652

timeouts 167

Seek server messages 582

send command 521

send-del command 532

sendform command 533

Server commands, using 42

Servers 315

action servers 332

adding a distribution server 350

adding a seek server 367

adding a server program 316

adding action servers 333

adding keyword servers 361

adding parallel wire server 354

command sets 323

creating a monitor server 384

distribution codes 345

distribution servers 344

dup and move commands 346

environment variables 620

fast text search 369

field validation 335

job lists 320

Keyword servers 360

mail 380

mailbox tasks 325

monitor 381

monitor configuration checklist 383

ordered queues and command 325

parallel wire servers 353

print messages 583

processing deleted stories 324

seek servers 367

selecting one or more 45

system servers 367

types of 316

types of tasks 320

using monitor server 405

zooming in on one at console 46

Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

676

showtimingbar 612

shutdown command 521

Simplified user settings 83

Single-server mode 62

/site/dict/shift 591

sitedump command 521

siterestore command 522

Sorted queues, turn off ordered trait 138

Sortfield database trait 645

source command 533

Source queue 409

SRPlo-LIsUGQSXWFi, explained 637

Standard mailboxes 326

startup command 523

State keys 187

status command 523

stop command 523, 538

Stories 99

adding rx/tx links 410

creating a new 111

job lists 320

locking 141

recovering 115

removing locks 146

sending story forms 407

server processing deleted 324

set automatic update 407

transferring via Ethernet 407

unbusy 147

view who moved, duplicated or killed 119

viewing information about 118

Web publishing 446

Story forms

assigning 208

compatibility errors 126

customizing 201

defined 126

Styles

options for printing 280

sample style story 288

using 280

su command 524

Superuser

password 38

prompt 37

Superuser mode 37

synctoserver 616

System administration passwords 38

System commands 475

System configuration 243

backup files 245

overview 244

SYSTEM directory

restricting access 652

System files 541

/etc/hosts 542

/site/config 543

/site/system 555

backing up 245

console.cfg 556

hosts file 254

system profile 254

SYSTEM.CLIENT.WINDOWS 558

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE 559

SYSTEM.MAP 560

SYSTEM.RESOURCE 562

SYSTEM.WIRES 565

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS 566

AP sample 567

AP sample 2 568

viewing 245

System function keys 186

System operator

logging in 37

password 38

prompt 37

System parameters 256

System profile files 254

changing 255

System profile parameters 256, 257

System servers, types of 367

SYSTEM.CLIENT.WINDOWS 558

SYSTEM.COLORS 207

SYSTEM.CONFIGURE 320, 559

SYSTEM.FORMS 198

SYSTEM.FTS 374

SYSTEM.GROUP 497

change group name 160

SYSTEM.GROUPS 156

SYSTEM.INDEX 374

SYSTEM.KEYBOARDS 181, 583

SYSTEM.LISTS 207

SYSTEM.MAIL.ERROR 106

SYSTEM.MAIL.OUT 105

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index

677

SYSTEM.MAP 560

create an entry 391

SYSTEM.MOS-MAP 424

SYSTEM.PROPERTIES 123

SYSTEM.RESOURCE 400, 562

SYSTEM.SEEK 570

SYSTEM.STYLES 280

sample style story 288

SYSTEM.WEBFORMS 432, 447

SYSTEM.WIRES 295, 297

SYSTEM.WIRES.DISTRIBUTION 565

SYSTEM.WIRES.KEYWORDS 566

AP sample 567

AP sample 2 568

Tasks, types of 320

Templates

for queues and directories 122

for scripts 112

Timed-interval tasks 329

defined 320

examples of 330

Timeout parameters 167

timer command 538

Tokens for FTS 374

Toolbar macros 184

Toolbars, disabling command line option 619

top console control command 480

Training services 26

Traits

changing database traits 136

database summary 122

turning off ordered trait 138

viewing database traits 116

viewing user 66

Transmit queue 409

change order 410

Troubleshooting 24

Tx links 407

adding 410

field validation 335

ordered queues and command 325

polling commands 340

polling issues 343

update trait 409

validation job list commands 338

Txnet, setting up 430

type command 539

umanager 96

unbusy command 524

up console control command 480

Update trait 409

Usage restrictions 169

User lock 144

User manager, creating account 96

User traits 69

Users 65

accounts, viewing 66

adding new user account 88

changing passwords 626

create new 86

creating Database Manager account 97

default keyboards 193

enabling mail 91

log out all 97

managing traits from console 623

modifying traits 68

modifying traits from console 625

password, changing 74

preferences 75

remove accounts 95

searching for info. 91

simplified settings 83

summary of traits 632

types of 70

viewing traits at console 624

Utility messages 575

Utility programs 315

adding 316

fast text search servers 369

field validation 335

job lists 320

mail servers 380

monitor server 381

monitor server configuration 383

seek servers 367

system servers 367

using monitor server 405

utraits command 524

Index A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

678

validate command 338, 347, 533

Validation server messages 581

Validation, uses of 335

verbose command 636

version command 525

view console control command 481

VT compatibility 617

wait command 539

Web access 446

configuration 461

default directory template 456

default queue template 458

default story template 449

directory and queue templates 450

logging in 447

story templates 447

Web publishing 429

configuring 430

HTML export template 432

NSML conversion 435

optional format strings 439

sample HTML export template 441

Web server 446

Web sessions 447

wholockedit command 526

Wildcards 345

Wire distribution

story instructions 347

Wire distribution, sample system file 565

Wire profile files

defined 291

options 296

Wire story form 222

Wires 291

add wire service to config. file 293

adding 292

adding wire profile 294

avoiding hidden categories 302

backup distribution components 354

configuration and licensing 292

destination queue 299

distribution 297

expanded keyword servers 360

internationalization 303

keyword checker messages 311

keyword searches 303

keyword story 307

multi-queue distribution 310

notification priority 299

parallel wire servers 353

profile options 296

program messages 581

purge intervals 303

reconfiguring system 296

reserved mailboxes 303

search job lists 306

wire distribution story 295, 297

WIRES.ALL 300

WIRES.KEYWORDS 307

WIRES.UNKNOWN 301

Workstation, save error messages 583

Write group 170, 172, 651

view assignment 153

Write limitations 652

x console control command 481

zoom console control command 481

Avid

75 Network Drive

Burlington, MA 01803-2756 USA

Technical Support (USA)

Visit the Online Support Center at

www.avid.com/support

Product Information

For company and product information,

visit us on the web at www.avid.com

Avid INEWS V3.3 Setup And Configuration Guide I News 3.3 Manual SCG

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation